Civil Work Power Block Area

DOC.
NO:- BE-LAL-ECV-120-S-0001
LALITPUR SUPER THERMAL POWER PROJECT 3X660 MW

LALITPUR, UTTARPRADESH
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS-1
(POWER BLOCK AREA)
BAJAJ INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT

COMPANY LTD.
3X660 MW LALITPUR SUPER THERMAL POWER PROJECT

UTTAR PRADESH
TE CHNICAL S P E CIFICATION
FOR
GE NE RAL CIV IL W ORKS
(P OW E R BLOCK ARE A)
BAJAJ INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT CO.LTD
MAY 2011
CARBERY INFRATSTRUCTURE PTE LTD

3x660 MW Lalitpur Super Thermal Power Project
Uttar Pradesh
SECTION:
CONTENTS
SHEET 1 OF 2
CONTENTS
SL.
NO.
SECTION
SUBSECTION
TITLE
NO. OF
SHEETS
1
2
A
A
A1
A2
SCOPE OF ENQUIRY
DEFINITION OF TERMS
3
5
PROJECT INFORMATION
4
5
C
C
C1
C2
C3
D1
D2
D3
SPECIFIC
REQUIREMENTS
EARTHWORK IN
AND FILLING
TIMBER SHORING
10
D4
DE-WATERING
11
12
13
14
15
D
D
D
D
D
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
16
17
D
D
D10
D11
18
D12
19
D13
20
D14
RAIN WATER DRAINAGE

CONCRETE AND ALLIED WORKS
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE
WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY
WORKS
FALSE OR CAVITY FLOOR
SUPPLY AND FABRICATION OF
STRUCTURAL STEEL
ERECTION
OF
STRUCTURAL
STEEL
PAINTING
OF
STRUCTURAL
STEEL
ANTITERMITE TREATMENT
21
GENERAL
CONTRACT
22
F1
23
F2
SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS FROM

GENERAL CONDITIONS
GENERAL NOTES
GENERAL
CIVIL
WORKS
SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES
RATES
LIST OF BID DRAWINGS
&
2
58
TECHNICAL
22
EXCAVATION
10
CONDITIONS
OF
1
1
28
71
8
46
1
6
15
20
6
38
1
1
CARBERY INFRATSTRUCTURE PTE LTD

Uttar Pradesh
SECTION:
CONTENTS
SHEET 2 OF 2
CONTENTS
SL.
NO.
24
SECTION
25
26
F
F
27
28
SUBTITLE
NO. OF
SECTION
SHEETS
F3
SCHEDULE
OF
PRICE
1
IMPLICATIONS ON ACCOUNT OF
DEVIATIONS
F4
SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENTS
1
F5
SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S
1
TECHNICAL
STAFF
TO
BE
DEPLOYED
F6
SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR
1
LABOUR
F7
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
9
CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

Lalitpur Super Thermal Power Project - 3x660 MW
Lalitpur, Uttar Pradesh
SECTION:
PQR
SHEET 1 OF 9
GENERAL CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS
1.0
PRE-QUALIFYING REQUIREMENTS
1.1
Bidder shall be a Civil Engineering Construction Agency who has executed

Civil, Structural and Piling Works for at least one Coal/ Lignite based Thermal
Power Project of 200 MW capacity or more, and which is in satisfactory
operation for a period of two years or more as on date of EOI document
opening.
1.2
The value of the work executed shall be at least Rs. 150 crores for one project.
During the execution of above work, the bidder should have exceeded the
quantum of major item of works as listed below:
ITEMS
Earth work
Concrete
Reinforced steel
Structural steel
Piling
1.3
QUANTITY
1,50,000 m3
35,000 m3
3,500 Mton
10,000 Mton
5000 piles of 150~200
Mton capacity
(a)
In case the bidder has not carried out structural work as per prequalification requirement, then the bidder shall associate himself with
another Civil Engineering Contractor who has executed structural works
for at least one Coal/ Lignite based Thermal Power Project of 200 MW
capacity or more, and which is in satisfactory operation for a period of two
years or more as on date of EOI opening. Relevant items of clause 1.2
shall also be applicable.
(b)
In case the bidder has not carried out piling work as per pre-qualification
requirement, then the bidder shall associate himself with another Civil
Engineering Contractor who has executed piling works for at least one
Coal/ Lignite based Thermal Power Project of 200 MW capacity or more,
and which is in satisfactory operation for a period of two years or more as
on date of EOI opening. Relevant items of clause 1.2 shall also be
applicable.
1.4
The bidder qualifying under clause 1.1 to 1.3 shall, along with EOI document,
furnish letter of consent (LOC) as per the indicative sample Format (Annexure I), jointly signed by the bidder and his associate expressing their willingness to
associate with the project.
1.5
The successful Bidder qualifying under clause 1.1 to 1.3 shall furnish a joint
Deed of Undertaking as per the indicative sample format (Annexure - II) with
his associate, within two weeks from the date of letter of Award (LOA) work.

SECTION:
PQR
SHEET 2 OF 9
1.6
The Bidder shall be financially sound and shall have adequate financial
resources to execute the contract concurrently with his other commitments and
shall meet the following conditions:
(a)
The Bidder shall have an average annual turn over of not less than
100.00 (ONE HUNDRED) crores during the last three years as on date of
EOI document opening.
(b)
The bidder shall have positive net worth as per the latest audited financial
statements.
(c)
The bidder shall furnish his audited profit and loss account and balance
sheet for the last three years.
1.7
Documentary evidence to satisfy the qualifying requirements mentioned in

Clause 1.1 to 1.6 shall be furnished as per the indicative sample format
(Annexure III).
2.0
OTHER REQUIREMENTS
2.1
At the time of EOI, the bidder may submit more than one Letter of Consent for
the Civil Engineering ASSOCIATE (Structural and/or Piling). However, during
the submission of techno-commercial bid, the Bidder will be allowed to choose
only one Civil Engineering ASSOCIATE (Structural and/or Piling) among the
Civil Engineering ASSOCIATE (Structural and/or Piling) who is qualified as per
the PQR conditions of EOI. No new Civil Engineering ASSOCIATE (Structural
and/or piling) will be permitted at the time of techno-commercial bid
submission.
2.2
The Bidder shall furnish the following details:

(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Contracts in hand/ pending jobs and their status along with their values.
Details of litigation if any and their statutory liabilities.
Recent contract executed for Civil, Structural and Piling works in Power
Plants during the last five years and their value.
List of machinery tools and plant the Bidder possess.
Organization chart with experience of key personal.
2.3
In case certificate(s) submitted by the Bidder is found to be forged or/ bogus

one, the Bidder will not only be disqualified for the tender but also would be
blacklisted/ debarred by the Purchaser and the matter would be informed to
other PSUs/ Statutory bodies.
3.0
PARTICIPATION FEE
The Participation fee (non-refundable) for an amount of Indian Rupees 50000/-

SECTION:
PQR
SHEET 3 OF 9
(Fifty thousand only) in the form of Demand Draft drawn in favour of M/s Bajaj
Infrastructure Development Co. Ltd, payable at Noida / Delhi shall be submitted
along with the EOI documents. EOI documents received without the
Participation fee will be rejected.
4.0
EOI DOCUMENT SUBMISSION AND OPENING
4.1
The EOI documents shall be submitted in one original and six identical copies
indicating clearly as original and copy.
4.2
The EOI documents and all correspondence as well documents relating to the
EOI shall be in the English language.
4.3
The EOI must contain the name and place of business of the person or
persons making the EOI and each page of the EOI must be signed and sealed
by the Bidder with his usual signature. The name of all persons signing should
be typed or printed below the signature.
4.4
Satisfactory evidences of authority of the person signing on behalf of the Bidder

shall be furnished with the Bid.
4.5
The Bidders name stated on the proposal shall be the exact legal name of the
firm.
4.6
The EOI documents (one original and six identical copies) bearing the tender
reference no. shall be submitted in SEALED COVER(S)/ ENVELOPE(S) to:
Director
Bajaj Infrastructure Development Co. Ltd
Bajaj Bhavan, B-10, Sector - 3,
Jamnalal Bajaj Marg
Noida - 201301
NCR, Delhi, India
4.7
The outside of the envelopes should indicate clearly the name of the bidder
and his address. In addition, the envelope or container should indicate the
"Tender No. and Name of the work for which the EOI is submitted, EOI opening
date and time". EOI with no indication given on the outside of the envelope to
indicate that it is an EOI which therefore gets opened before the due date shall
be liable to be disqualified. All the pages of the EOI shall be serially numbered.
The Bidders are instructed to properly paste the covers before applying wax
seal and it is warned that failure to do so would result in rejection of such EOI.
4.8
Submission of EOI documents through Fax, Telex, Email will not be accepted.
4.9
EOI submitted without the proper documentary evidence to substantiate

SECTION:
PQR
SHEET 4 OF 9
fulfillment of the Pre-qualifying Requirements as specified are liable for

rejection without assigning any reason.
4.10
BIDCO takes no responsibility for delay loss or non-receipt of documents or

any letter sent by post either way.
4.11
Time and date for receipt of EOI documents - EOI Documents must reach
this office on or before 14.30 Hours (IST) on ... Any EOI offer received
after the expiry of the time specified for receiving the EOI documents is liable
for rejection.
4.12
EOI documents opening - The EOI documents received from the bidders as
above
will
be
opened
at
Corporate
Office,
BIDCO
on.15.00 hours (IST).
4.13
The envelope containing participation fees as well as other documents shall be

opened on the date set for opening of the EOI in the presence of such Bidders
who may be present. The bidders are at liberty to be present or authorize their
representatives not more than two to be present at the time of opening of EOI.
4.14
BIDCO reserves the right to reject any or all EOIs or cancel/ withdraw the
Invitation for EOI without assigning any reason whatsoever and in such case
no bidder/ intending bidder shall have any claim arising out of such action.
4.15
Notwithstanding anything stated above, BIDCO reserves the right to verify all
statements/ information submitted to confirm the Bidders claim on experience
and to assess the Bidders capability and capacity to perform the contract
should the circumstances warrant such an assessment in the overall interest of
the project.
4.16
Clarification request, if any should reach

Director
Bajaj Bhavan, B-10, Sector - 3,
Jamnalal Bajaj Marg
Noida - 201301
NCR, Delhi, India
On or before ................... Requests for clarification received after ..................
will not be considered.

SECTION:
PQR
SHEET 5 OF 9
Sample format
ANNEXURE - I
LETTER OF CONSENT (LOC)
(Civil Engineering ASSOCIATE Structural and/or Piling)
We hereby declare that the under signed firms
1)
2)
Name and Complete address (The Bidder)

Name and Complete address (The Civil Engineering ASSOCIATE Structural
and/or Piling)
Have agreed to associate for Construction of civil, structural, piling work, etc., for 3x660
MW Coal based Super Thermal Power Project at Lalitpur, Uttar Pradesh, India as per
the specification.
(a)
(b)
(c)
We the Bidder and the Associate do hereby declare and guarantee that, we shall
be jointly and severally bound unto the Bajaj Infrastructure Development Co. Ltd,
for Civil, Structural and/or works.
We also jointly agree that the Associates scope of work shall be as per
specification.
If we become successful we shall furnish a joint deed of undertaking to fulfill the
conditions in the sample JDU format enclosed.
1. WITNESS
For ASSOCIATE Structural and/or Piling
Signature:
Name
Designation:
(Authorized Signatory)
Name:
Designation:
Office Address
Seal of the Company
2. WITNESS
For Contractor - Civil
Signature:
Name
Designation:
Name:
Designation:
Office Address
Seal of the Company

SECTION:
PQR
SHEET 6 OF 9
Sample format
ANNEXURE - II
JOINT DEED OF UNDERTAKING
(GENERAL CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL AND/OR PILING WORKS)
(INDICATIVE CONDITIONS)
This Joint Deed of Undertaking executed this .....th day of 2011
by...................... (Name of the Contractor - Civil ...................., a Company incorporated
under the Law of the .................. (Country).................... and having its Registered Office
at .................... (Complete address) ...................... (hereinafter called ..................... or
Contractor - Civil which expression shall include its successors, executors and
permitted assigns) and .................... (Name of the ASSOCIATE Contractor - Structural
and/or Piling), a Company incorporated under the law of the ....... country,
having its registered office at ........................ (Complete address) ......................
(hereinafter called ................... or ASSOCIATE Structural and/or Piling which
expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted assigns) in favour Bajaj
Infrastructure , a Company incorporated under the companies Act 1956 having its
corporate office at Bajaj Bhavan, B-10, Sector - 3, Jamnalal Bajaj Marg, Noida - 201301,
NCR, Delhi, India, (hereinafter called the Purchaser, which expression shall include its
successors, executors and assigns).
WHEREAS the Purchaser is desirous of getting the work of general Civil and Structural
construction/ works for 3x660 MW Coal based Super Thermal Power Project at Lalitpur,
Uttar Pradesh, India, done as per their Tender Specification No. wherein
it is a condition that the Contractor and their Associate would be jointly and severally
bound and shall be responsible to the Owner for the successful completion of all the
related works, meeting the Owners specification in terms of contract.
AND
WHEREAS ........................ (Contractor - Civil) is desirous of securing the assistance
of (ASSOCIATE Structural and/or Piling) for the complete General
Civil and Structural Construction works.
AND
WHEREAS (ASSOCIATE Structural and/or Piling), is willing to grant such
assistance to (Contractor - Civil) under the terms of this deed; Now,
THEREFORE THIS UNDERTAKING Witnesseth as under:
That in consideration of the award of contract by the Purchaser to
(ASSOCIATE - Civil), we . (Contractor - Civil) and .. (Associate
Structural and/or Piling) shall jointly guarantee the general Civil and Structural and/or
Piling Construction works as per Purchasers Tender specification and ..
(Contractor - Civil) shall guarantee the construction of all works as per specification.

SECTION:
PQR
SHEET 7 OF 9
WE, the Contractor - Civil and the ASSOCIATE - Structural and/or Piling agree that this
undertaking is irrevocable and further agree that this undertaking shall continue to be
enforceable till the end of warranty period under the contract.
That this Joint Deed of Undertaking will form an integral part of the contract, on award of
work to .. (Contractor - Civil) by the Purchaser and shall be operating from
the effective date of the contract up to the completion of the proposed contract.
This joint deed of undertaking shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the
laws of India and courts of .. shall have exclusive Jurisdiction.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the ASSOCIATE - Structural and/or Piling and the Contractor
- Civil have, through their duly authorized representatives executed this undertaking and
affixed common seals of their respective Companies on the day month and year first
mentioned above.
1. WITNESS
For ASSOCIATE Structural and/or piling
Signature:
Name
Designation:
Name:
Designation:
Office Address
Seal of the Company
2. WITNESS
For Contractor - Civil
Signature:
Name
Designation:
Name:
Designation:
Office Address
Seal of the Company

SECTION:
PQR
SHEET 8 OF 9
Sample format
ANNEXURE - IIIA
Documents to be submitted by the Contractor - Civil as per PQR Clause 1.0
The documentary evidence to be submitted by the bidder in the form of performance
certificate from the user, the relevant portion of the Contract copy etc., must contain the
following details:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
It should be on the letter head of the issuing firm/ user Plant.

It should be dated.
Name and designation of the signing person should be clearly discernable.
Name of the plant with location where Contractor - Civil has executed the works.
Location/ Name of owner.

SECTION:
PQR
SHEET 9 OF 9
Sample format
ANNEXURE - IIIB
Documents to be submitted by the ASSOCIATE - Structural and/or Piling as per PQR
Clause 1.0
Structural and/or Piling works as Associate(s)
The documentary evidence to be submitted by the bidder in the form of performance
certificate from the user, the relevant portion of the Contract copy etc., must contain the
following details:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
It should be on the letter head of the issuing firm/ user Plant.

It should be dated.
Name and designation of the signing person should be clearly discernable.
Name of the plant with location where Contractor - Structural and/or Piling has
executed the works.
Location/ Name of owner.

SECTION: A1
SHEET 1 OF 3
SCOPE OF ENQUIRY
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The Lalitpur Power Generation Company Limited (LPGCL) (OWNER) proposes
to install a Super Thermal Power Plant of capacity 3x660 MW at Lalitpur, Uttar
Pradesh. M/s Carbery Infrastructure PTE Ltd (CIPL) (BOP Contractor) has been
awarded complete Balance of Plant package for the same. M/s Bajaj
Infrastructure Development Co. Ltd (BIDCO) (PURCHASER) has been assigned
Civil and Structural work related to BOP package.
2.0
SCOPE
The scope of work covered by this specification comprises the construction of
civil and structural works for the Power block area of the proposed 3 x 660 MW
Thermal Power Project.
2.1
Scope of work in general, comprises of:

PART - A
Civil and structural works including excavation, concrete and structural steel
works, masonry works, internal/ external finishes, foundations, trenches, water
supply and sanitary work for
a)
Station Building including TG/ BFP Foundations
b)
Mill & Bunker area (Civil & Architectural works only)
c)
Boiler Area Structures/ Equipments foundations
d)
ESP foundations.
e)
PA fan foundations
f)
FD fan foundations
g)
ID fan foundations
h)
Other fan foundations
i)
ESP Control Building
PART - B
Supply, detailing, fabrication, transportation to site and erection in position of all
types of structural steel items for structures in Power block area, like:
a)
Station Building
The scope also covers the associated General civil works for the above.
PART - C

SECTION: A1
SHEET 2 OF 3
SCOPE OF ENQUIRY
Site Improvement works such as:

a)
b)
c)
d)
Site Clearance
Trenches for fire protection system
Garland drains around the buildings connecting main drain
Boiler area paving and drain system
The scope also includes supply of all materials and labour along with necessary
tools and tackles etc except cement & reinforcement steel.
2.3
The various items of work shall be as per the schedule of items given in Section
C2.
2.4
Briefly, the nature of work involves the following:

a)
Excavation, back filling with compaction, de-watering and related works.
b)
R.C.C. works of all nature, including but not limited to grade slabs,
suspended slabs, column foundations, equipment foundations, TG
foundation, sumps, trenches, trench covers, walls, ducts etc., at various
levels.
c)
Brick/ AC Sheet/ Metal Cladding.
d)
Encasement of base of columns, columns and beams.
e)
Doors, windows, ventilators, and partitions of all types rolling shutters,

sliding shutters etc.
f)
Cavity floors and false flooring.
g)
Floor and roof drainage system including drains leading to plant drainage.
h)
Water supply and sanitary works, including disposal of sewage by means of

septic tanks and dispersion trenches or any other method.
i)
Floor finishes and finishes to Brick/ concrete surfaces like tiling plastering
etc.
j)
Miscellaneous steel works such as provision of inserts of all types, edge

protection angles, pipe sleeves, bolts, monorails, hand railings etc.
k)
Grouting of columns and equipment bases.
l)
Embedding in concrete works at correct lines and levels of anchor bolts/

inserts/ pipe sleeves etc.

SECTION: A1
SHEET 3 OF 3
SCOPE OF ENQUIRY
m)
Detailing, fabrication and erection of structural steel columns, beams,

girders, trusses, bracings, tanks etc., at various levels including connecting
the members with bolts/ welding and galvanizing wherever required.
2.5
It is not the intent to specify completely herein, all details of design and
construction of the structures/ works covered under this enquiry. All works shall
conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and
workmanship shall fulfil the anticipated performance in a manner acceptable to
the PURCHASER. PURCHASER shall have the power to reject any works or
materials, which in his judgement are not in full accordance with the specification
requirements. In case of any conflict regarding the interpretation of the intent or
meaning of the specifications or drawings, PURCHASER shall interpret such
intent or meaning, which will be final and binding on the CONTRACTOR.
3.0
TIME OF COMPLETION
3.1
Work covered under this tender shall be completed within 36 calendar months
from the date of Letter of Intent (LOI).
3.2
Bidder shall submit a construction bar chart including all activities keeping in
mind the total period of completion as indicated in clause 3.1 above and
completion of major individual items indicated below:
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.3
Description
Construction of Station Building foundations including

Boiler feed pump
Construction of TG pedestals
Fabrication and erection of Station building and Bunker
Bay structural steel (including preparation of fabrication
drawings by contractor and approval of same by Owner/
Engineer)
Construction of Station building and Bunker Bay civil
works including miscellaneous equipment foundations,
walls, floors etc
Other miscellaneous works
Completion
schedule
from date of
LOI (months)
12
21
24
27
36
The above schedule is given for the contractor to plan his activities and coordinate with works of all other agencies including equipment erection. The
actual completion schedule for different activities will be furnished later to the
contractor. However no claim for extension will be acceptable by owner for any
changes in the above.

SECTION: A2
SHEET 1 OF 5
DEFINITONS OF TERMS
1.0
DEFINITION OF TERMS
1.1
OWNER' shall mean LALITPUR POWER GENERATION COMPANY

LIMITED on whose behalf the enquiry is issued and shall include his
successors and assign as well as his authorised officers/ representatives.
1.2
CIPL shall mean M/s Carbery Infrastructure PTE Ltd or their duly authorised
representatives, who have been awarded complete Balance of Plant Package
for 3X660 MW Lalitpur Super Thermal Power Project.
1.3
PURCHASER mean M/s Bajaj Infrastructure Development Co. Ltd or their

duly authorised representatives, who have been assigned Procurement and
Supply of Equipment, Civil construction and Structural work and Erection,
Installation and commissioning activities for BOP package.
1.4
ENGINEER shall mean any authorised representative like General Manager/

Vice President / Deputy General Managers nominated by the PURCHASER.
1.5
CONSULTANT / PROJECT CONSULTANT / CONSULTING ENGINEER shall

mean TATA Consulting Engineers Limited' or their duly authorised
representatives, who are the CONSULTANTS appointed by the OWNER for
the 'project'
1.6
BIDDER' shall mean the firm/ party who quotes against an enquiry.
1.7
VENDOR/ CONTRACTOR/ FABRICATOR' shall mean the successful BIDDER

whose Bid has been accepted by the PURCHASER and on whom the
'Contract' or Purchase Order' is placed by the PURCHASER and shall include
his heirs, legal representatives, successors and permitted assigns.
1.8
SUB-VENDOR/ SUB-CONTRACTOR/ SUB-FABRICATOR' shall mean the

person named in the Contract' undertaking a part of the Work or any person to
whom a part of the Contract' has been sublet with the consent in writing of the
PURCHASER and shall include his heirs, legal representatives, successors
and permitted assigns.
1.9
MANUFACTURER', refers to a person or firm who is the producer and

furnisher of material or designer and fabricator of equipment, to either the
PURCHASER or the VENDOR/ CONTRACTOR or both under the Contract'.
1.10
OTHERS' shall mean other successful BIDDERs whose Bids have been
accepted by the PURCHASER and to whom the orders have been placed by
the PURCHASER and shall include their heirs, legal representatives,
successors and permitted assigns.
1.11
INSPECTOR' shall mean the authorised representative appointed by the

OWNER / CIPL / PURCHASER or the PROJECT CONSULTANT for purposes
of inspection of materials/ Equipments/ Works.

SECTION: A2
SHEET 2 OF 5
DEFINITONS OF TERMS
1.12
PROJECT' shall mean the project specified in the Project Information SectionB of the `Specification'.
1.13
'SITE' shall mean the actual place of the proposed 'Project' as detailed in the
'Specification' or other place where Work has to be executed under the
Contract.
1.14
'MONTH' shall mean calendar month.
1.15
'SPECIFICATION' shall mean collectively all the terms and stipulations

contained in those portions of the 'Contract' known as General Conditions, the
Specifications and such Amendments, Revisions, Deletions or Additions, as
may be made in the Contract agreement and all written Agreements made or to
be made pertaining to the method and manner of performing the Work or to the
quantities and qualities of the materials to be furnished under this 'Contract'.
1.16
'BID' shall mean the proposal/ document that the BIDDER submits in the
requested and specified form in the 'Specification'.
1.17
'PLANT' or 'EQUIPMENT' and 'WORK' or 'WORKS' shall mean respectively the

goods to be supplied and services to be provided by the VENDOR/
CONTRACTOR/ FABRICATOR under the 'Purchase Order' or 'Contract'.
1.18
'CONTRACT' or 'PURCHASE ORDER' shall mean the order and associated

specifications executed by the PURCHASER and the VENDOR including other
documents agreed between the parties or implied to form a part of the
'CONTRACT'.
1.19
The word 'CONTRACT PRICE' shall mean either the lump sum named in the
Contract or the approximate total of all payments as estimated from unit prices
and estimated quantities set forth in the contract which are to be paid to the
CONTRACTOR for the work to be done under this Contract.
1.20
'DATE OF CONTRACT' shall mean the calendar date on which the

PURCHASER and VENDOR/ CONTRACTOR/ FABRICATOR have signed the
'Contract'. 'Effective Date of Contract' shall mean the calendar date on which
the PURCHASER have issued to the VENDOR the 'Letter of Intent'.
1.21
'CONTRACT PERIOD' shall mean the period during which the 'Contract' shall
be executed as agreed between VENDOR/ CONTRACTOR/ FABRICATOR
and PURCHASER in the 'Contract' and it starts with the date of Letter of Intent.
1.22
'GUARANTEE PERIOD' shall mean the period during which the 'PLANT' or
'Equipment' shall give the same performance as guaranteed by the VENDOR in
the Schedule of Guarantee as in the 'SPECIFICATION'.

SECTION: A2
SHEET 3 OF 5
DEFINITONS OF TERMS
1.23
'APPROVED' and 'APPROVAL', where used in the 'SPECIFICATION' shall

mean, respectively, approved by and approval of the OWNER/ CIPL /
PURCHASER or the ENGINEER/ CONSULTANT.
When the words 'Approved', 'Approval', 'Subject to Approval', 'Satisfactory',
'Equal to', 'Proper', 'Requested', 'As directed', 'Where Directed', 'When
Directed', 'Determined by', 'Accepted', 'Permitted', or words and phrases of like
import are used, the approval, judgement, direction etc., is understood to be a
function of the OWNER/ CIPL / PURCHASER or the PROJECT
CONSULTANT.
1.24
"PROJECT CONSULTANT's instructions" shall mean any drawings and/ or

instructions oral and/ or in writing, details, direction and explanations issued by
the PROJECT CONSULTANT or the OWNER/ CIPL / PURCHASER from time
to time during the 'Contract Period'.
1.25
'WRITING' shall include any manuscript, typewritten or printed statement,

under or over signature and/ or seal as the case may be.
1.26
'NOTICE IN WRITING' or 'WRITTEN NOTICE' shall mean a notice in written,

typed or printed characters sent (unless delivered personally or otherwise
proved to have been received) by registered post to the last known private or
business address or registered office of the addressee and shall be deemed to
have been received when in the ordinary course of post it would have been
delivered.
1.27
"CONTRACTOR's Works" or "MANUFACTURER's Works" shall mean and

include the land and other places which are used by the VENDOR/
CONTRACTOR/ FABRICATOR or SUB-VENDOR/ SUB-CONTRACTOR/ SUBFABRICATOR for the manufacture of 'Equipment' or performing the 'Works'.
1.28
'VIRTUAL COMPLETION' shall mean that all work is completed as directed

and the 'Site' is cleared to the satisfaction of the PURCHASER.
1.29
'COMMERCIAL USE' shall mean that use of the 'Equipment' or 'Work' which
the 'Contract' contemplates or that for which 'Equipment' or 'Work' is
commercially capable.
1.30
Minor Modification shall mean the modification work which need a maximum of
8 man-hours per item of work.
1.31
Major Modification shall mean the modification work needing more than 8 manhours per item of work.
1.32
Words importing persons shall include Firms, Companies, Corporations and

other Bodies whether incorporated or not.

SECTION: A2
SHEET 4 OF 5
DEFINITONS OF TERMS
1.33
Words importing the singular only shall also include the plural and vice versa
where the context requires.
1.34
Drawings shall mean all:

a)
Drawings furnished by the OWNER / CIPL / PURCHASER or Consultant as

a basis for proposals.
b)
Supplementary drawings furnished by the OWNER / CIPL / PURCHASER

or Consultant to clarify and to define in greater detail the intent of the
Contract.
c)
Drawings submitted by the Vendor with his proposal provided such

drawings are acceptable to the OWNER / CIPL / PURCHASER or
Consultant.
d)
Drawings furnished by the OWNER / CIPL / PURCHASER or Consultant to

the Vendor during the progress of the work.
e)
Engineering data and drawings submitted by the Vendor during the

progress of the work provided such drawings are acceptable to the
OWNER / CIPL / PURCHASER or Consultant.
2.0
SPECIFICATION DOCUMENT
2.1
The specification document consists of six sections as listed below and all of
these are to be considered together for correct understanding and interpretation
of the specification.
2.2
SECTION - A
Section - A covers the scope of enquiry, definition of terms and specification
documents, schedule, and instructions to bidders.
2.3
SECTION - B
Section - B furnishes relevant Project information for the reference and use of
the Bidder.
2.4
SECTION - C
Section - C contains General notes, Schedule of Quantities & Rates and List of
bid drawings.
2.5
SECTION - D
Section - D comprises technical specifications for works. It also includes Data
Sheet- A which gives specific technical requirements, if any.

SECTION: A2
SHEET 5 OF 5
DEFINITONS OF TERMS
2.6
SECTION - E
Section - E covers General Conditions of contract and Special Conditions of
Contract.
2.7
SECTION - F
Section - F covers Schedule of technical and general deviations if any, Schedule
of equipment and schedule of rates for labour.
2.8
The Bidder shall be deemed to have carefully examined the Specification in its
complete form and to have fully informed and satisfied himself as to the details,
nature, character and quantities of the work to be carried out, site conditions and
other pertinent matters and details.
2.9
In case of any conflict relating to the definition of the terms and conditions of
contract, specifications, designs, drawings and instructions mentioned herein
after and as to the quality of workmanship or materials used on the works, the
decision of the Owner/ Consultant shall be final, conclusive and binding on all
parties to the Contract.
2.10
In case of conflict between clauses of different sections of this specification, the

following section(s) shall govern in the order indicated below.
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
Section C
Section A
Section D
Other sections.
2.11
It is the intent of the Purchaser to incorporate these specification documents in

the final Contract or Purchase order for the services. Bidders are required to
review these documents and clearly state in their proposals their acceptance of
the same. Exceptions, if any shall be clearly stipulated in the appropriate bidding
schedule. The final Contract between the Purchaser and the Contractor shall be
subjected to such changes if any, mutually agreed upon between the Purchaser
and the Contractor and included in the main text of the Contract or Purchase
Order.
2.12
The Bidder shall specify all the deviations with respect to this specification in the
appropriate schedule (Given in Section - F).
2.13
The Bidder shall furnish the data called for in the Schedules in the standard Pro
forma to facilitate correct evaluation of his Bid in a most expeditious manner. The
Bidder shall submit the 'Bid' in the above manner, failing which it is likely that his
'Bid' may not be considered.

SECTION: B
SHEET 1 OF 2
PROJECT INFORMATION
PROJECT INFORMATION
1.
Owner
: Lalitpur Power Generation Company Limited
2.
Consultant
: TATA Consulting Engineers Limited
3.
Project Title
: Lalitpur Super Thermal Power Project - 3x660

MW Lalitpur, Uttar Pradesh
4.
BOP Contractor
: Carbery Infrastructure PTE Ltd
5.
Location
: At Mirchwara and Buraugaon near Utari river,

Lalitpur District, U.P., India
6.
Nearest Railway station
: Lalitpur railway station (At a distance of 37 km

from site) in the connecting railway line
between Jhansi & Bhopal
7.
Site elevation
: 325 M above MSL
8.
Access Road
: Approach to site from national highway which is

about 23 km from Bansi on NH-26 which
connects Jhansi and Sagar
9.
Nearest Airport
: Gwalior Airport (At a distance of 186 km from

site)
10.
Nearest Sea port
: Kolkata
11.
Latitude of site
: 2447'0.65'' N
12.
Longitude of site
: 7838'0.74'' E
13.
Meteorological data
a)
Temperature
i)
Annual mean of daily max.
32.4 C
ii)
Annual mean of daily min.
17.5 C
iii)
Annual mean of monthly max.
45.1 C
iv)
Annual mean of monthly min.
1.9 C
v)
Maximum extreme temp recorded
46.2 C

SECTION: B
SHEET 2 OF 2
PROJECT INFORMATION
PROJECT INFORMATION
vi)
Minimum extreme temp recorded
0 C
vii)
Temperature to be considered for

design of electrical equipment/ devices
50 C
viii)
Ambient DBT for performance

guarantee of Boiler, ID fan, PA fan, FD
fan & ESP
b)
Relative humidity
i)
Maximum
87%
ii)
Minimum
22%
iii)
Annual mean of maximum
65%
iv)
Annual mean of minimum
49%
v)
Ambient RH for performance guarantee

of Boiler, ID fan, PA fan, FD fan & ESP
c)
Rainfall
i)
Annual variation
3.0 mm to 387.3 mm
ii)
Average annual RF
91.42 mm
d)
Wind Data
i)
Basic wind speed
47 m/s
14.
Languages Spoken in the Region
Hindi
15.
Official language for the Contractor to deal with
English
16.
Seismic data as per IS:1893-2002
27 C
60%
a)
Zone
Zone-III
b)
Zone factor (Z)
0.16
c)
Importance factor (I)
As per latest IS: 1893

SECTION: C1
SHEET 1 OF 2
GENERAL NOTES
1.0
The schedule of Quantities and Rates shall be read in conjunction with the
specifications, tender drawings and tender documents. Contractor shall not rely
merely on the description given in the Schedule of Quantities and Rates. All the
work shall conform to specifications and the quoted rates shall be deemed to
include all works necessary to achieve this whether actually indicated under the
item description or not.
2.0
Quantities of work indicated in the Schedule of Quantities are only approximate

and are given to provide a common basis for tendering. No claim shall be
entertained from Contractor if the actual quantities or items of work differ to any
extent from those indicated herein.
3.0
The quotation submitted by Bidder should be based on the probable quantities of

the several items of work which are furnished for Bidders convenience in the
Schedule of Quantities, it must be clearly understood that the Contract is not a
lump-sum contract and that neither the approximate probable quantities nor the
values of the individual items nor the aggregate value of the entire tender will
form a part of the Contract and the purchas does not in anyway assure or
guarantee Bidder that the work would correspond there to.
4.0
The quantities of work actually carried out (as evaluated from construction
drawings) against each item will be measured and paid at the rates quoted in the
Schedule of Quantities, where applicable or otherwise at such rates and prices
as may be fixed within the terms of the Contract.
5.0
Unit or lump-sum prices shall be quoted for all items and they shall be firm. If unit
prices are not quoted against any of the items, it shall be deemed to have been
covered in the prices quoted elsewhere. These rates shall include cost of all
plant, labour, materials, wastage, supervision, insurance, taxes, overheads,
profits, etc., and every incidental and contingent cost and charges whatsoever
required for completing the items of work in all respects and as per
specifications.
6.0
Bidder shall be deemed to have allowed in his rates and prices for the provision,
maintenance and final removal of all temporary works of whatsoever nature
required for the proper execution of works, except for those temporary works for
which specific items have been provided in Schedule of Quantities. The prices
inserted against these specific items of particular temporary works shall be for
the provision, maintenance and their final removal. The rates shall also be
deemed to include cost of any survey works that may be required to be carried
out for laying out of all the works involved.
7.0
Rates and prices shall be written in ink and shall be entered both in figures and in
words in the format given for schedule of quantities and rates.
ISSUE
P1

SECTION: C1
SHEET 2 OF 2
GENERAL NOTES
8.0
The rates quoted shall hold good for works above ground level irrespective of
elevations including lifts or below ground/ grade level inclusive of de-watering
where necessary. No extra amount is payable for de-watering under any
circumstances. This shall also include the cost of materials utilised for testing.
The access roads required for construction will not be paid separately.
9.0
The rates quoted shall hold good even if the shapes and sizes of members
shown on bid drawings are modified while issuing the final drawings stamped
Released for Construction. No extra claims shall be entertained in this regard.
10.0
Rates quoted by the bidder shall be firm for the entire period of construction and
shall be valid even if the contract is split.
11.0
Contractor shall note that if loose rock is encountered and the earth boulders/
debris can be scooped straight away without much difficulty using proclaimed
type equipment then it will be classified under soils only but not as soft rock.
12.0
Bidder shall quote his rates for all items in Section - C2. The Purchaser reserves
the right to operate/ increase or decrease quantities in each item or omit any item
included in Section - C2 at his discretion. Contractor shall have no claim,
whatsoever, on grounds of loss of anticipated profit etc., on account of the same.
13.0
For each item in the Schedule of Quantities, the Bidder's rate shall include for the
activities covered in the description of the item as well as for all necessary
operations, all as per specifications and approved fabrication drawings.
14.0
Rates quoted by the Bidder shall include the cost of (a) preparation of all
fabrication drawings including all subsequent revisions, (b) submission of
specified number of prints and reproducible and (c) Incorporation of comments
given by Purchaser.
15.0
All shim stock including screed bars required for levelling the column base to the
required elevation shall be MS plates and MS square bars respectively and shall
be supplied by the Contractor and is deemed to have been included in his rate
for grouting.
16.0
Weight of connectors such as bolts and welds will not be considered in the
measurement for payment.
17.0
Abbreviations used for the unit of various items are as stated below:
T
kg
rm
m3
=
=
=
=
Tonne = 1000 kgs;

Kilogram;
Running metre;
Cubic metre;
m2 =
No. =
km =
LS =
Square metre
Number
kilometre
Lump-sum.
ISSUE
P1

SECTION: C2
SHEET 1 OF 58
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS - SCHEDULE OF

QUANTITIES AND RATES
IMPORTANT NOTE ON SCHEDULE OF ITEMS

Some items of BOQ have been grouped into 4 groups as indicated below for
convenience of execution for which the variation in quantities as a group will be
as per Clause 2.0 of Section - C1 of this document. For the Purpose of evaluation
minimum rates quoted by the Bidder For all items constituting a group (Eg: I(a) or
I(b), II(a), II(b) or II(c) etc) will be considered.
GROUP
NO.
SL.NO.
ITEM
REFERENCE
I(a)
1.0
B4(i)
I(b)
2.0
F5
3.0
B5
4.0
B5
5.0
F5
CONCRETE FOR FLOOR SLABS OVER

METAL DECK SHEETS
CONCRETE OVER METAL DECK SHEETS
FOR ROOF
METAL DECK SHEETS FOR ROOF
II(b)
6.0
F3
METALLIC SHEETING FOR ROOF
II(c)
7.0
F1
III(a)
8.0
F2
III(b)
9.0
F4
IV(a)
10.0
C1, C2
INSULATED
SANDWITCHED
PANEL
ROOFING SYSTEM FOR ROOF
INSULATED SANDWITCHED PANEL WALL
CLADING SYSTEM
SINGLE METALLIC SHEETS FOR WALL
CLADDING
BRICK MASONARY WORK
IV(b)
11.0
C7, C8
SOLID CONCRETE BLOCK
II(a)
ITEM
NO.
BRIEF ITEM DESCRIPTION

(The detailed item description given in
respective item number of this schedule of
items shall prevail.)
CONCRETE FOR SUSPENDED FLOOR
SLABS ON STEEL BEAMS WITH SPECIAL
FORMWORK/ SCAFFOLDING
METAL DECK SHEETS FOR FLOOR SLABS
A.
EARTH WORK & ALLIED WORKS
A1.
Excavation below existing ground/ grade

level at depths as indicated, in all types of
ordinary and hard soils/ weathered rocks
including clearing away vegetation, shoring/
strutting as required, de-watering wherever
necessary, loading, transporting, unloading,
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 2 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
stacking, levelling of the excavated material

not suitable for back filling within a lead of
1000 metres, etc as per specifications,
construction drawings and as directed by the
ENGINEER.
123900
m3
(b) 3 m 4.5 m
48000
m3
(c) 4.5 m 6 m (In all types of soil including

soft/ weathered rock)
15000
m3
5000
m3
10000
m3
(a) 0 m 3 m
(d) 4.5 m 6 m (In hard rock)

(e) Greater than 6 m (In hard rock)
A2.
Extra over item A1 above for disposal of

surplus soils beyond the initial total lead of
1000 metres, but not exceeding 3 km.
7000
m3
A3.

surplus soils beyond the initial total lead of 3
km meters, but not exceeding 5 km.
7000
m3
A4.

surplus soils beyond the initial total lead of 5
km.
1000
m3
A5.
a) Back Filling excavated soil around or

within foundations/ base slab etc at all
depths and to any section as shown on
construction
drawings
including
compaction by flooding in layers of 150
mm and as directed by Engineer.
100000
m3
b) Providing and filling approved quality sand

around, below or within foundations/ base
slab, sump etc at all depths and to any
section as shown on construction drawings
including compaction by flooding in layers
of 150 mm and as directed by Engineer.
100
m3
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 3 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
A6.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
3
m
c) Providing and laying below grade slab

using approved quality of borrowed sand/
gravel (borrowed material to be arranged
by the bidder at no extra cost to the
PURCHASER) on prepared surface
obtained by compacting with mechanical
means including setting out, sorting,
breaking clods, handling transportation,
spreading, dewatering if necessary,
watering, compaction in layers not
exceeding 200 mm compacted thickness
compacting to a minimum 95% of
maximum dry density (modified Proctor
test) obtained as per IS: 2720, Part VIII,
levelling, dressing, finishing to required
slopes and grades including all lifts and
leads,
etc
all
complete
including
conducting all field/ laboratory tests as per
specification, drawing and as directed by
the Engineer.
3000
d) Providing and filling approved quality CNS

Material below foundations, grade slab etc
to 500 mm thickness as shown on
construction
drawings
including
compaction in layers of 150 mm by
compacting machinery etc all as per
specifications, construction drawings and
as directed by the ENGINEER.
7500
m3
e) Providing and laying asphalt (8% to 10%

by volume) and fine sand carpet of
average 75 mm thick for tank foundations
including finishing to correct slopes, light
rolling, etc.
500
m3
Providing and laying 230 mm thick approved

dry stone rubble soling below grade slabs,
set in regular lines, interstices thoroughly
filled with small chips and compacted by hand
rollers after spreading 12 mm layer of grit on
top, etc., complete, as indicated in drawings
and as directed by the ENGINEER.
1000
m3
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 4 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
A7.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
25000
m2
i) PCC (1:4:8)
4500
m3
ii) PCC (1:3:6)
1500
m3
325
m3
Providing pre-constructional anti-termite

treatment, and creating a chemical barrier,
under and on sides of trenches, wall footings,
top surface of plinth filling, including junction
of wall and floor along the perimeter of
building, expansion joints, surrounding pipes/
conduits
with
approved
emulsifiable
insecticides at the rates and concentrations
as per IS.6313 (Part-II) and as directed by
ENGINEER. Including all connected work
such as dewatering as required.
(Treated plinth area of the building at ground
floor only shall be measured for payment)
B.
B1.
Providing and laying in position plain cement

nominal mix concrete with 40 mm down
graded coarse aggregates including providing
side shuttering as required,
placing
compacting curing etc complete including
expenses towards dewatering etc complete
all as per specification/ drawing and as
directed by ENGINEER.
B2.
Providing and laying cement concrete

screed of grade M20 using 10 mm down
graded coarse aggregate, of varying
thickness over R.C.C roofs, floors, trenches,
drains, etc all as per specification,
construction drawing and as directed by
ENGINEER.
B3.
Providing and placing in position reinforced

cement concrete with 20 mm down graded
aggregate limiting W.C ratio to 0.45 for works
below grade levels including vibrating, curing,
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 5 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
de-watering wherever necessary, providing

construction joints, leaving cut outs/ pockets,
placing of inserts/ embedments, etc.,
complete, including cost of providing form
work for all shapes (including scaffolding,
centering, etc), but excluding the cost of
providing
reinforcement
all
as
per
specifications, construction drawings and as
directed by the ENGINEER.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Foundations for columns and other

structures including pedestals and
grouting for base plates and pockets
wherever applicable; and grade beams
(Finish type F1)
a) M25 grade
500
m3
b) M30 grade
65800
m3
c) M35 grade
200
m3
a) M25 grade
100
m3
b) M30 grade
2000
m3
c) M35 grade
100
m3
a) M25 grade
100
m3
b) M30 grade
4200
m3
c) M35 grade
100
m3
Base raft of water retaining structure with

approved water proofing compound
(Finish type F1)
Side walls, and cover slab of water

retaining structure with approved water
proofing compound (Finish type F2)
Minor equipment foundations (Finish
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 6 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
type F2)
v)
vi)
a) M25 grade
100
m3
b) M30 grade
2500
m3
c) M35 grade
100
m3
a) M25 grade
100
m3
b) M30 grade
2000
m3
c) M35 grade
100
m3
a) M25 grade
1000
m3
b) M30 grade
100
m3
c) M35 grade
100
m3
a) M25 grade
5000
m3
b) M30 grade
100
m3
c) M35 grade
100
m3
Trenches,
manholes,
inspection
chambers,
sumps,
drains,
cross
drainage works, etc (Finish type F2)
Pipe encasement, duct banks, anchor

blocks etc (Finish type F2)
vii) Slabs on grade, ramps, pavings (Finish

F1)
B4.
Providing and placing in position reinforced

cement concrete with 20 mm down graded
aggregate limiting W.C. ratio to 0.45, at all
levels above ground level including vibrating,
curing, cost of providing form work of all
shapes including scaffolding; centering
providing construction joints, leaving cut outs/
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 7 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
pockets, etc, placing inserts and embedments

of all types etc complete, all as per the
specification, construction drawings and as
directed by ENGINEER finish type shall be F2
unless, noted.
i)
Suspended slabs, canopies and roofs

(The collapsable or any other type of
formwork/ scaffolding for slabs over steel
beams in floor slabs will be required to
complete the work as per schedule time.
Bidder to quote rates of above items
accordingly).
M30 grade
1. 0 m to 10 m above ground level
3000
m3
4800
m3
3400
m3
50
m3
50
m3
50
m3
3000
m3
500
m3
500
m3
50
m3
M35 grade
ii)
Minor equpiment foundation

M30 grade
M35 grade
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 8 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
iii)
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
50
m3
50
m3
1875
m3
800
m3
450
m3
100
m3
50
m3
50
m3
50
m3
50
m3
10
m3
50
m3
150
m3
100
m3
Column, beam, pedestal ducts, stair

including transomes and mullions for
walls.
M30 grade
M35 grade
iv)
Fins, parapet etc

M30 grade
v)
Sills, copings, bed block
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 9 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
M30 grade
50
m3
50
m3
50
m3
50
m3
B5.
Same as item B4 above but for providing

R.C.C for suspended slab and roof to be
placed over permanent colour coated metal
decking (metal decking to be paid for
separately) as per specification, construction
drawing and as directed by Engineer.
11200
m3
B6.
Providing and placing reinforced cement

concrete of grade M35 with 20 mm down
graded coarse aggregates for base raft of
Turbo-generator foundations including
vibrating, curing, dewatering wherever
necessary leaving cut-outs, pockets etc
complete, including cost of providing form
work to give fair and smooth exposed
concrete finish using steel or plywood of
approved quality all as per specifications,
construction drawings and as directed by
ENGINEER. The concreting for each base
raft has to be completed in one continuous
pour. Rate quoted shall include erection and
removal of staging structure.
3500
m3
2000
m3
Controlling concrete temperature as placed to

not more than 23 C for TG foundation (for
base raft, columns and deck slab etc) by precooling aggregates, use of ice, etc.
B7.

graded coarse aggregates for Turbogenerator foundation columns as directed
by ENGINEER including vibrating, curing,
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 10 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
leaving cut-outs, pockets etc, complete

including cost of providing formwork to ensure
fair and smooth exposed concrete finishing
(F3) all as per specifications, construction
drawings and as directed by ENGINEER.
Concreting for each column shall be
completed in two pours. CONTRACTOR is
permitted to use approved plasticizer to
restrict water cement ratio to 0.45. Rate
quoted shall include erection and removal of
staging structure.
B8.

graded coarse aggregates for Turbogenerator deck slab and beams with
concreting done in one continuous pour
including vibrating, curing, leaving cut-outs,
pockets etc, including cost of providing
formwork to ensure fair and smooth exposed
concrete finishing
(F3)
all
as
per
specifications, construction drawings and as
directed by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR is
permitted to use plasticizer to restrict water
cement ratio to 0.45.
Rate quoted shall include Placing, aligning,
fixing in position to correct lines and levels all
types of steel embedments such as plate
inserts, pipe sleeves, anchor bolt/ anchor bolt
assemblies, edge protection angles, etc., in
reinforced concrete works all as per
specifications and as shown in construction
drawings and as directed by the ENGINEER
using steel templates, etc, as required
(templates used for fixing inserts will not be
measured and paid for) erection and removal
of staging structure.
2700
m3
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 11 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
The cost shall also include the Ultrasonic

Pulse Velocity test by direct transmission
method specified in IS: 13311 (Part-I),
complete and as per specification and as
directed by the Engineer.
The casting of Turbo-generator deck slab and
beams
requires
scaffolding,
platform,
formwork to be designed by an expert
agency, which is included in the scope of
Bidder and the same will be approved by
PURCHASER for execution.
B9.
Chipping back concrete at the top surface of

Turbo-Generator pedestal deck slab at
locations marked in construction drawings by
25 to 50 mm and to the correct finished level
by grinding the surface to the required
smoothness wherever so specified on the
construction drawings to obtain dense base
for further erection work (chipping should be
done carefully without causing any damage to
the structure between 72 and 120 hours after
pouring of concrete and as directed by
ENGINEER).
B10.
Placing, aligning, fixing in position to correct

lines and levels all types of steel
embedments such as plate inserts, pipe
sleeves, anchor bolt/ anchor bolt assemblies,
edge protection angles, etc., in reinforced
concrete works all as per specifications and
as shown in construction drawings and as
directed by the ENGINEER using steel
templates, etc, as required (templates used
for fixing inserts will not be measured and
paid for).
50
m3
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 12 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
i) Steel embedments supplied by others
600
ii) Supplying Steel embedments including

fabrication and erection
100
B11.
Same as B4 above but for providing R.C.C

of grade M30 for water tank above ground
level including providing approved water
proofing compound, testing of tank etc.
50
m3
B12.
Providing and placing in position to correct

profile R.C.C. wearing course 50 mm thick of
concrete using 20 mm down graded
aggregates and limiting water cement ratio to
0.45 for rigid paving for approach roads to
service bay, roads etc including provision of
side shuttering vibrating, curing, including
providing contraction and construction joints.
(To be paid separately) etc complete.
a) M25 Grade
125
m3
b) M30 Grade
50
m3
a) M25 grade
400
m3
b) M30 grade
50
m3
1000
m3
B13.
B14.
Providing and erecting in position pre-cast

concrete trench cover units of specified
sizes and thickness using reinforced cement
graded coarse aggregates, casting, vibrating
using surface vibrators, curing, storing,
providing
lifting
arrangement,
loading/
unloading, transporting, load testing etc.,
complete as per specification and as directed
by the Engineer (Finish type F2).
Providing encasement to structural steel

column bases with R.C.C grade M 25 using
20 mm down graded aggregate including,
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 13 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
placing vibrating curing, provision form work

(finish F1) etc complete including chipping top
of the pedestal so as to roughen the top
surface of the foundation pedestal, out side
the base plate outline, and providing a coat of
bonding agent like NITOBOND or its
approved equivalent for bonding of the new
concrete.
B15.
B16.
Supplying, cleaning, cutting, bending, as per

drawings and placing in position TMT bars
conforming to IS: 1786-2008 (Grade Fe415/
Fe500 with elongation more than 14.5% as
per IS: 13920 Clause 5.3) at all locations and
levels including binding with soft annealed
16G black wire, etc., complete as shown on
drawings and as directed by the Engineer (No
payment will be made for binding wires)
a) Below ground level
8000
b) 0 m to 10 m above Ground level
3000
c) 10 m to 20 m above Ground level
1750
d) 20 m to 30 m above Ground level
800
e) 30 m to 40 m above Ground level
450
f)
100
a) Below ground level
15
b) 0 m to 10 m above Ground level
15
Above 40 m from Ground level
Supplying and place in position mild steel

wire fabric of square mesh 25 mm and wire
diameter of 2 mm conforming to serial no . 4
as per IS: 4948 for encasement work around
structural steel work including cutting,
bending, lapping, fixing etc complete (supply
of mesh by CONTRACTOR)
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 14 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
B17.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
T
c) 10 m to 20 m above Ground level
15
d) 20 m to 30 m above Ground level
15
e) 30 m to 40 m above Ground level
15
a) Total tensile load carrying capacity for all

medium duty anchors, each anchor
having pull out/ tensile load carrying
capacity up to and including 1.0 MT.
500
No.
b) Total tensile load carrying capacity for all

heavy duty anchors, each anchor having
pull out/ tensile load carrying capacity
more than 1.0 MT and up to and including
5.0 MT.
500
No.
500
m3
2. 0 m to 10 m above Ground level
4800
m3
3500
m3
3000
m3
1000
m3
100
m3
C.
MASONARY AND ALLIED WORK
C1.
Providing and laying brick masonry of 230

mm thick and above in cement mortar 1:5
using approved quality bricks of class 5
conforming to IS: 1077 table moulded brick,
including scaffolding, curing, raking joints,
etc., complete as per specifications and
drawings at all levels and locations.
(a) 230 mm thick
1. Below ground level
(b) 345 mm thick

AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 15 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
C2.
C4.
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
3
m
400
100
m3
50
m3
10
m3
25
m3
150
m3
300
m3
100
m3
25
m3
a) Providing flush pointing to rubble or brick

masonry work in cement mortar 1:2 as
directed by the ENGINEER including
raking of joints, curing, etc., complete
5000
m2
b) Same as item (a) above but for 12 mm x 12

mm raised pointing
500
m2
Providing 12 mm thick plain-faced cement

plaster at all levels in cement mortar 1:4 (5
kg of cement per square meter of plastered
surface) on the internal faces of masonry and
RCC surfaces at all levels including
scaffolding as required, curing, including
33000
m2
Providing and laying 115 mm thick brick

masonry walls in cement mortar 1:4 including
providing RCC mullions and transoms as
shown on the drawings or as specified using
approved quality bricks of class 5 conforming
to IS: 1077 table moulded bricks, including
scaffolding, curing, raking joints, etc.,
complete (reinforcement and concrete of
transoms and mullions will be measured and
paid for separately.)
C3.
QTY
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 16 OF 58

ITEM
NO.

providing plaster of Paris punning
complete as per specifications.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
etc,
C5.
Same as in item C4 above but for 18 mm

thick external plastering in 2 layers (first
layer of 12 mm and second layer of 6 mm
thickness).
25500
m2
C6.
a) Providing 6 mm thick plain faced ceiling

plaster in cement mortar 1:3 including
scaffolding, curing, etc., complete.
45000
m2
b) Same as in item (a) above but plaster in

cement mortar 1:2 for manholes, etc.
200
m2
C7.
Providing and laying 400 mm thick solid

concrete block masonry wall in CM 1:4 to
correct line and level, using approved
quality blocks of grade D of average
compressive strength of 7.5 N/ mm2,
conforming to IS: 2185 Part-I, below grade
level including curing, raking out of joints
etc., complete.
500
m3
C8.
Providing and laying solid concrete block

masonry wall in CM 1:5 to correct line and
level using approved quality blocks of grade
D of average compressive strength of 7.5
N/mm2 conforming to IS: 2185 Part-I levels
above ground level including providing
scaffolding, curing raking out of joints etc,
complete.
150
m3
300
m3
100
m3
25
m3
a) 100 mm thick construction at levels as

indicated below:
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 17 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
b) 200 mm thick construction at levels as

indicated below:
4800
m3
3500
m3
3000
m3
1000
m3
400
m3
100
m3
50
m3
10
m3
c) 300 mm thick construction at levels as

indicated below:
C9.
Supplying and fixing 24G metal lath (wire

mesh) at junctions of brick work and concrete
work before plastering at locations as shown
in drawings and as directed by ENGINEER.
Wire mesh shall have a minimum lap of 75
mm over brick work on each side and shall
extend across the concrete surfaces.
100
m2
C10.
Providing and placing in position 50 mm thick

lath plaster in cement mortar 1:4 for fins,
drops, etc., including providing and fixing 24G
metal lath (wire mesh) complete.
1000
m2
C11.
Providing and laying, un-coursed random

rubble masonry in cement (85 kg/m3) mortar
1:6 with approved local stones of good quality
for wall footings, etc., and as fill under
foundations, including curing, de-watering
wherever necessary, etc., complete for work
below ground/ grade level at all depths and
200
m3
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 18 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
grade level up to plinth.

400
m3
i) 100 mm dia
500
rm
ii) 200 mm dia
500
rm
iii) 300 mm dia
50
rm
iv) 450 mm dia
50
rm
v) 600 mm dia
50
rm
a) 100 mm dia
100
rm
b) 150 mm dia
100
rm
C12.
Providing Damp proof course, 75 mm thick

with Cement Concrete grade M20 using 20
mm downgraded aggregate with approved
water proofing compound to proportion
recommended by manufacturer including
providing form work/ side shuttering as
required vibrating, curing etc complete.
D.
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
D1.
Supplying and laying at below ground level

precast concrete (Hume) pipes conforming
to class NP3 of IS.458 with collars, including
bedding, jointing the collars with cement
mortar (1:1), testing of joints, encasing with
PCC if required, etc complete as directed by
ENGINEER for the following:
(Excavation and encasing with RCC shall be
paid for separately at the respective rates
quoted elsewhere)
D2.
Supplying and fixing heavy duty CI pipes

Class A conforming to IS:1536 for equipment
and floor drains including all fittings such as
bends, tees, branches, clamps etc., complete
with lead caulked fully water tight joints:
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 19 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
D3
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
a) Supplying, placing, aligning and fixing in

position high density polyethylene pipes
of approved manufacture conforming to
Class PE-63 pressure rating PN 6 of
IS:4984 of the following diameters at
locations as indicated on drawings:
i) OD 110 mm
100
rm
ii) OD 160 mm
500
rm
iii) OD 200 mm
100
rm
a) 40 mm NB
100
rm
b) 25 mm NB
50
rm
c) 20 mm NB
500
rm
d) 12 mm NB
500
rm
a) 50 mm NB
100
rm
b) 100 mm NB
100
rm
c) 150 mm NB
100
rm
b) Providing and fixing medium grade GI

water pipes conforming to IS.1239 with
all accessories such as tees, bends,
elbows, couplings, flanges, plugs, bends,
etc., including testing, etc., complete.
D4.
Supplying, placing, aligning, fixing in position

to correct lines and levels MS pipe sleeves,
heavy quality conforming to IS: 1239 including
50x10 puddle flange with ends prepared for
butt welding, etc., of the following sizes as
embedment in masonry/ concrete works at all
locations, as per drawings. Length of the
sleeve may be taken as 1000 for quoting.
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 20 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
rm
d) 200 mm NB, 219 mm OD x 7.9 mm thick

as per IS: 1978
100
e) 250 mm NB 273 mm OD x 9.3 mm thick as

per IS: 1978
100
rm
a) 25 mm
100
rm
b) 32 mm
100
rm
c) 50 mm
100
rm
d) 65 mm
100
rm
e) 80 mm
100
rm
a) 160 mm OD
3000
rm
b) 200 mm OD
500
rm
D7.
Providing and fixing GI water spouts of 40

NB medium variety pipes, 250 mm long
100
No.
D8.
Providing and fixing LDPE pipes conforming

to IS: 3076 in cable duct banks, openings in
RCC work at all elevations of following sizes
including cutting, fixing and levelling in
position as per drawings, specifications all
complete
D5.
D6.
Providing, supplying and laying in position GI

conduits medium grade conforming to IS:
1161 in concrete slab, beams, foundations all
as per drawings and specification or as
Providing, fixing and jointing UPVC rain

water down take pipes conforming to
IS:4985 Class 3 of the following diameters
with standard fixing clamps including special
fittings such as bends, shoes, junctions, swan
necks, etc., complete
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 21 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
D9.
D10.
D11.
D12.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
rm
i) 100 mm dia
500
ii) 150 mm dia
200
rm
iii) 200 mm dia
200
rm
a) 160 mm dia
50
No.
b) 200 mm dia
50
No.
a) 150 mm dia
50
No.
b) 100 mm dia
50
No.
a) 12 mm thick
100
m2
b) 25 mm thick
100
m2
Providing and fixing GI wire balloons with

necessary fixtures to rain water down take
pipes of the following diameters as directed
by the ENGINEER
Supplying and installing heavy duty CI gullies

with CI 25 mm thick grating and connecting CI
pipes in floor slabs for floor drains.
Providing and placing in position approved

quality pre-moulded joint filler as per
specification conforming to IS: 1838 all as
shown on drawings and as directed by the
ENGINEER at isolation/ expansion joints in
the floor.
Providing and laying between expansion

joints at all elevations poly-sulphide sealant
compound (Tuff seal BP or equivalent)
including cleaning of surfaces approved
primer coat (Tuff prime or equivalent), backup strip, etc., complete; all as per approved
standard manufacturers instructions and as
directed by ENGINEER at isolation/
expansion joint.
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 22 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
a) 12.5 mm wide 12 mm deep
100
rm
d) 25 mm wide x 12 mm deep
100
rm
D13.
Supplying and painting 85/25 industrial grade

hot bitumen conforming to IS: 702 at the rate
of 1.2 kg/sqm over concrete surfaces at
expansion/ isolation joints as directed by the
ENGINEER and as shown on drawings.
100
m2
D14.
Supplying and installing in position at all

levels at expansion joint, PVC caps minimum
6 mm thick 'Fixocaps or their equivalent and
all connected works, complete.
a) In walls
150
rm
b) In floors
150
rm
10
1100
rm
D15.
Supplying, fabricating and fixing in position

hot dip galvanised mild steel rungs bent to
shape/ size as indicated on drawings and as
(Minimum weight of zinc coating shall be 800
g/sqm).
D16.
Supplying, Providing and installing PVC

coated steel chain link fencing (mesh size
50 mm nominal dia of wire 3.15) of 2400 high
including all connected works such as but not
limited to supply of all connectors for fixing
the fencing on to angle iron posts (ISA
75x75x6) spaced at 2.5 m intervals and
reinforced with 2 struts (ISA 65x65x6) at
every fifth post and at all change in directions
including a horizontal member of ISA 50x50x6
at top and bottom of the fencing connected
between the vertical posts etc., complete
including two coats of red oxide zinc
chromate primer and two finish coats of
synthetic enamel all of DFT 25 microns each
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 23 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
on the angle irons. GI barbed wire anti

climbing arrangement confirming to IS: 298 at
top of chain link fencing shall be provided with
4 strands of height of 600 mm including all
accessories as per specification all complete.
Rate quoted shall be for running metre of
fence excluding concrete items.
D17.
Supplying, fabricating and transporting to site

and erecting in position MS gates as per
drawings using steel confirming to IS: 2062/
IS: 1161 including supply of all materials such
as hinges, locking arrangement, plunger
bolts, CI wheels and fixtures, MS rails for
wheels with anchors etc., complete. Rate
shall include for all inserts and embedments
essential for smooth operation of the gate.
The rate shall also include two coats of red
oxide zinc chromate primer.
D18.
Supplying and providing 40 mm stone

aggregates for soak pits in transformer yard
area as shown in drawings and as directed by
the ENGINEER.
1200
m3
D19.
Supplying, laying and jointing in position PVC

water stops ribbed with central bulb and end
grips, with minimum 6 mm thickness of
approved quality and manufacture for all
construction and expansion joints in R.C.C
water retaining structures including cleaning,
cost of all materials and labour, all leads and
lifts, including making joints by hot fusion as
per manufacturers instructions, complete as
per specifications and as shown on
construction drawings.
a) 225 mm wide
1500
rm
b) 150 mm wide
500
rm
1000
rm
D20.
Supplying, laying and jointing in position

Kicker type PVC water stops 225 mm wide
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 24 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
with minimum 6 mm thickness of approved

quality and manufacture for all construction
and expansion joints in R.C.C water retaining
structures including cleaning, cost of all
materials and labour, all leads and lifts,
including making joints by hot fusion as per
manufacturers instructions, complete as per
specifications and as shown on construction
drawings.
D21.
Providing water proofing treatment to the

underground structures as stated below
a) Providing, supplying and laying one layer
of 75 mm thick PCC 1:4:8 shall be laid
below the base slab. Over PCC layer, 25
mm thick CM 1:3 mixed with approved
water proofing compound at the rate
specified by the manufacturer shall be
applied. Over these two coats of acrylic
polymer modified cement based flexible
water proofing membrane of approved
make
laid
as
per
manufactures
specification and instruction. Over water
proofing membrane, 25 mm thk CM 1:3
mixed with approved water proofing
compound at the rate specified by the
manufacturer shall be provided over which
protective layer of 15 mm thick Kota/
Cuddapa or equivalent stone with joints
sealed with CM 1:3 shall be laid. Over this
stone layer, 25 mm thick CM 1:3 mixed
with approved water proofing compound at
the rate specified by the manufacturer
shall be applied, including all materials,
labour etc., complete as directed by the
Engineer.
2500
m2
b) For side walls, two coats of acrylic polymer

modified cement based flexible water
proofing membrane of approved make laid
as per manufactures specification and
instruction shall be applied to the sides of
1000
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 25 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
RCC walls. 25 mm thick CM 1:3 mixed

shall be applied over it. Protective layer of
15 mm thick Kota/ Cuddapa or equivalent
stone with joints sealed with CM 1:3 shall
be laid. Finally 25 mm thick CM 1:3 mixed
shall be applied, including all materials,
labour etc., complete as directed by the
Engineer.
D22
Providing holes in the R.C.C. slabs by

drilling and finishing the holes accurately with
Cm 1:4 and disposal of debris to spoil
grounds as directed by ENGINEER within a
lead of 1000 m
i) Dia 100 mm
50
No.
ii) Dia 200 mm
50
No.
iii) Dia 300 mm
100
No.
25
m3
a) 100 to 300 dia in 200 thick wall
200
No.
b) 300 to 750 dia in 300 thick wall
100
No.
50
m3
D23.
Dismantling R.C.C. at all levels by chipping

using compressed air etc including cutting of
reinforcement etc and remove the debris to
spoil ground within a lead of 1000 m or as
D24.
Making holes/ openings in Brick wall and

finishing the same with CM 1:4 and disposal
of debris to spoil ground as directed by
ENGINEER within al lead of 1000 m.
D25.
Providing and laying bitumen sand mix

using bitumen of grade 30/40 asphalt (8% to
10% by volume) and fine gravel/ sand carpet
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 26 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
of 75 mm average thickness for tank

foundations including finishing to correct
slopes, properly rolled with light roller,
providing cut outs etc., complete all as shown
in drawings and as directed by Engineer.
D26.
Providing and laying damp proof treatment

(heavy treatment) as per IS:1609 with
preparatory work as per IS: 3067 for external
surfaces of retaining walls/ cable trenches/
cable tunnels below ground level on external
surfaces of walls including protective course
of 115 mm thick brick lining in CM:1:5.
500
m2
D27.
Breaking of existing brick work wall/ solid

concrete block wall/ stone masonry wall and
removal of the debris to soil ground within a
lead of 1000 m all as directed by ENGINEER.
10
m3
E.
FINISHES, PAINTING TO CONCRETE,

PAINTING TO PLASTERED SURFACES
ETC
E1.
Two or more coats of water bound

distemper as per IS: 427, of approved brand
and manufacture to give an even shade
including a priming coat on R.C.C ceilings as
per specifications.
45000
m2
E2.
Providing and applying two or more coats to

give an even shade of oil bound distemper
as per IS: 428 of approved brand, shade and
manufacture to give smooth, hard, durable &
glossy finish over a coat of primer over
prepared
plaster
surface
as
per
manufacturer's guideline.
25500
m2
E3.
Providing and applying two or more coats to

give an even shade of acrylic emulsion
paint as per IS: 5411, of approved brand and
shade to give smooth, hard, durable and
glossy finish over a coat of primer over
prepared plaster surface as per manufacture
3000
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 27 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
instruction to complete.
E4.
Providing and applying two coats of synthetic

enamel paint conforming to IS: 2932 each
coat of 25 mm DFT over steel surface over
two coats of red oxide zinc chromate primer
conforming to IS: 2074 each coat having a
DFT of minimum 25 mm, over surface
prepared as per IS: 1477 Part I.
60000
m2
E5.
Providing and applying 2 or more coats of

acid/ alkali resistant chlorinated rubber paint
of approved brand and colour to walls and
ceiling of battery room. Including preparation
of surface to receive paint, providing and
applying bitumen primer confirming to IS: 158
complete
all
as
per
manufacturer's
recommendations and as approved by
ENGINEER, complete as per specifications.
1500
m2
E6.
Providing two or more coats of flat oil paint

as per IS: 137 or fire resistant transparent
paint as per IS: 162 over French polish as per
IS: 348 on all woodwork as per specifications.
700
m2
E7.
Providing two or more coats of oil resistant

paints epoxy based and amine cured, 150
micron thick over primer of approved grade
and manufacture to give an even shade for oil
canals and oil handling room.
1100
m2
E8.
Providing and applying 2 or more coats of

water proof cement paint conforming to IS:
5410 of approved make and colour on
exterior surface at all heights including
material, labour, scaffolding, curing etc
complete as per specification.
18550
m2
F.
CLADDING & METAL DECKING
F1.
Design, detail, supply and fixing of

permanently colour coated sandwiched
insulated galvalum metal roofing system, pre
23500
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 28 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
fabricated type External sheeting will be

troughed galvalum coated mild steel sheet
having a minimum base metal thickness of
0.8 mm (0.6 mm for MS high tensile sheet
having minimum yield strength of 550 MPa),
galvanisation rate of 275 g/sqm, with exposed
face provided with 20 micron thick PVF2
finish and inner face provided with pre-coating
of 7 microns. Fixing of external sheet to inner
liner should be of clip-lock pressed type, with
no holes, openings in the external sheet.
Inner liner of plain galvalum coated mild steel
sheet with base metal thickness of 0.6 mm
(0.5 mm for MS high tensile sheet having
minimum yield strength of 550 MPa),
galvanisation rate of 275 g/sqm for the
exposed face, which is again provided with a
coating of silicon modified polyester, 20
microns thick. Inner face of the inner sheet
shall be provided with suitable pre coating of
7 microns. Insulation shall be bonded mineral
wool with minimum thickness of 50 mm
conforming to IS: 8183. Considering the flat
slope provided, the end laps for sheeting shall
be a minimum of 300 mm. Cladding shall be
fixed to supports by concealed fixed system
with corrosion resistant self tapping/ self
drilling type fasteners provided with suitable
cap. Sealers and closure plates shall be
provided at all end laps. Sealers shall be
provided at the side laps also. The sheets
shall meet the general requirements of IS:
14246 and shall conform to class 3 for
durability.
F2.
Same as F1 above, for sandwich cladding

on the side walls, but using galvalum coated
mild steel having a base metal thickness of
0.6 mm on the external side, including supply
of all flashings of adequate thickness and
texture around all opening, specials around all
penetrations, corners etc complete.
76500
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 29 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
Same as item F1 above but for single sheet
F3.
roofing with galvalum coated mild steel with
base metal thickness of 0.8 mm, with external
finish same as F1, above, but the inner face
shall be provided with galvanising rate of 275
gm/m of the exposed area, which is again
covered with coating of silicon modified
polyester, 20 microns thickness, laps shall be
at least 300 mm.
QTY
23500
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
2
m
F4.
Same as item F3 above but for side

cladding, the base metal thickness shall be
of 0.6 mm, including flashings around all
openings specials around all penetration,
corners etc complete
76500
m2
F5.
Designing, detailing, supply and fixing

permanently colour coated galvanised MS
troughed metal sheet decking plate over
steel beams as per relevant IS: code and
specification. Base metal thickness of deck
plate shall be 0.8 mm with minimum trough
depth of 38 mm and shall serve as permanent
shuttering to the cast-in-situ slabs at all levels
of 200 mm thick measured over crest of metal
decking & shall have adequate strength to
support weight of green concrete and
imposed loads during construction spanning
between purlins/ beams, all as per
manufacturer's
recommendations/
calculations/ test certificates, including fixing
of plates to purlins/ beams , side lapping, end
lapping etc., complete as per ENGINEERS
approval and specification. M.S. Trough
decking plate shall be connected to the top
surface of the purlins/ beams, with self
tapping self drilling white zinc plated heat
treated high carbon steel screws of min 5.6
mm diameter at spacing of 390 mm c/c in the
trough and sealing it with epoxy sealant
including all material, labour, tools, etc
complete. (Note:-Leak proofing of the metal
decking system shall be demonstrated by the
78000
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 30 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
CONTRACTOR). Providing openings in

deck sheet by cutting openings carefully after
concreting around the opening is finished, to
match with requirement of pipes/ cable
openings and finishing the edges neat by
grinding etc complete.
F6.
Providing and welding to the top of steel

beam supporting, deck sheet as item F5
above shear connector studs of 16 mm dia
and 75 mm long at a spacing to match with
the spacing of troughs to ensure composite
action of steel and concrete.
25
F7.
Design, detail, supply and erect fire retardant

and U.V. resistant poly carbonate sheet of 2
mm thickness of matching profile and of
approved shade for side cladding at all levels
all as per the construction drawings and as
directed by ENGINEEERS.
300
m2
G.
FLOORING,
FALSE
CEILING,
UNDERDECK INSULATION & WEATHER
PROOFING
G1.
Providing 50 mm thick Granolithic Finish

(Cement Concrete flooring) in cement
concrete 1:2:4 confirming to IS: 5491
including preparation surfaces of the base
concrete, casting the finish in panels,
levelling, finishing the surface smooth with
cement slurry, curing etc., complete.
40650
m2
G2.
Same as item G1 above but the top 12 mm of

the flooring shall be in cement mortar 1:2
mixed with non-metallic floor hardener of
approved brand and shade to proportion
recommended by the manufacturer.
2050
m2
G3.
a) Providing, supplying and laying approved

quality and shade Carborundum heavy
duty tile flooring (of Stilan or equivalent)
of size 250 mm x 250 mm x 20 mm laid
10500
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 31 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
over 1:2:4 concrete screed of 30 mm

average thickness and pointed with
cement mortar 1:3 including cutting chase
in walls where required, curing, etc.,
complete as per specifications.
b) Same as item (a) above but Carborundum
heavy duty tile/ chequered heavy duty
skirting (of Stilan or equivalent) of 125
mm high, 12 mm thick, backing of cement
1:2 including hand polishing.
1000
rm
G4.
Same as item G1 above but including

providing and applying High build epoxy
resin floor coating Nito floor FC 150
manufactured by Fosroc or its approved
equivalent, 300 microns thick and all
connected works as per manufacturer
recommendations.
1825
m2
G5.
Same as item G1 above but the top 5 mm

thickness shall be Heavy duty chemical and
abrasion resistant epoxy resin floor screed
Nito floor TF 30 topped with Nito floor FC 150,
manufactured by M/s Fosroc or its approved
equivalent including all connected works as
per manufacturer recommendations.
550
m2
G6.
Providing and laying heavy duty vitrified

floor tiles 300x300 x7 mm conforming to IS:
13755 of matt finish in floors over 18 mm thick
CM 1:3 over 25 mm thick under bed of
concrete 1:2:4 over R.C.C. Slabs including
pointing of the joint with neat white cement
pigmented to suit, cleaning washing etc,
complete.
5500
m2
G7.
Same as item G6 above but in dado and

skirting with 18 mm backing mortar 1:3 and
all connected work.
150
m2
G8.
Providing and laying skid resistant heavy

duty ceramic tiles 200x300x7 mm in toilet
700
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 32 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
floors generally as per IS: 13753, over 18 mm

thick bedding in CM 1:3, including pointing the
joint with neat white cement pigmented to
suit, cleaning, washing etc, complete.
G9.
Providing and laying approved colour glazed

ceramic tiles of size 150x150x5 mm
conforming to IS: 13753 with 12 mm thick CM
1:3 in dado in toilet, pantry etc including
necessary angle, corner piece, approved
colour border on top etc, complete.
100
m2
G10.
Providing 300x200x7 mm designed ceramic

tiles generally as per IS: 13753 on walls of
control room etc with 18 mm thick backing in
CM 1:3 including pointing the joints with
pigmented white cement, cleaning work etc,
complete.
500
m2
G11.
Providing and laying ceramic unglazed

vitreous acid/ alkali resistant tiles in
flooring of battery room using 150 x 150 x 20
mm thick tiles conforming to IS: 4457 using
epoxy or polyester based resin type chemical
resistant mortar conforming to IS: 4832 (Part
II). 6 mm thick for bedding and joints including
raking of joint filling, flush pointing etc,
complete. The rate shall also include
providing under bed of about 24 mm in
cement concrete 1:2:4 with 6 mm down
graded aggregate to result in an overall
thickness of 50 mm thickness for floor finish.
500
m2
G12.
Same as G11 above but providing

150x150x12 mm tile in dado in battery room
with 6 mm thick chemical resistant mortar.
50
m2
G13.
Providing and laying acid and alkali

resistant tiles 38 mm thick as per IS: 4860 in
flooring in dosing areas., set in 6 mm
thickness
potassium
silicate
mortar
conforming to IS: 4862 Part II, after laying
bitumen primer as IS: 158 and 12 mm thick
1200
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 33 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
bitumen layer as per IS: 9510 and IS: 412 all

as per specification.
G14.
Same as G13 above but providing

150x150x12 mm tile in dado in dosing area
with 6 mm thick potassium silicate mortar.
200
m2
G15.
Providing and laying polished granite tiles of

approved colour and texture, 20 mm thick, in
flooring. The stone slabs/ tiles shall be laid on
under bed of cement mortar 1:3, 10 mm thick
with 20 mm thick under bed of concrete 1:2:4
with 6 mm down graded aggregate to result in
overall thickness of 50 mm for the floor finish.
The tiles/ slabs shall be laid over under bed
pressed and tapped down with wooden mallet
to the proper level, lifted and pressed again in
the thick white cement slurry with matching
pigment spread over the surface with fine
joints finished true, including curing, grinding
polishing etc, complete.
250
m2
G16.
Providing and laying roughened granite tiles

of approved colour and texture, 20 mm thick,
in flooring. The stone slabs/ tiles shall be laid
on under bed of cement mortar 1:3, 10 mm
thick with 20 mm thick under bed of concrete
1:2:4 with 6 mm down graded aggregate to
result in overall thickness of 50 mm for the
floor finish. The tiles/ slabs shall be laid over
under bed pressed and tapped down with
wooden mallet to the proper level, lifted and
pressed again in the thick white cement slurry
with matching pigment spread over the
surface with fine joints finished true, including
curing, grinding polishing etc, complete.
250
m2
G17.
Same as G14 above but in dado for lift

entrance and riser for steps.
500
m2
G18.
Extra for granite stone treads with nosing for

staircases over item G14.
500
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 34 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
G19. Providing and laying flooring skirting of 2 mm
thickness with anti static flexible PVC tiles
as per IS: 3462 and IS: 5398 of approved
brand and shade over under bed of 48 mm
thickness in cement concrete 1:2:4 all
connected work.
QTY
1725
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
2
m
G20.
Providing all materials, designing and

installing cavity flooring 1200 mm high at
locations indicated in drawings, consisting of
pedestals with level adjusting device, located
at 610 mm centres in both directions, with die
cast head to receive stringers, stringer
connection to the pedestals being of
removable type, but without screwing or
bolting, floor boards with metal stoppers at
bottom to fix the same on the stringers of
panel size 610 mm x 610 mm made of 35 mm
thick phenol bonded particle board, Novateak
super or equivalent, faced with 3 mm thick
PVC tiles as per IS: 3462,on top and edges
including providing cable outlet openings,
steps, ramps, etc. The floor shall be capable
of withstanding a uniform distributed load of
1000kg/ sqm and/ or a point load of 500 kg at
the centre of any panel. Work shall be carried
out as per the specifications and as directed
by the PURCHASER. CONTRACTOR to
prepare and submit design calculations and
construction drawings for ENGINEERs
approval before taking up execution at site.
3000
m2
G21.
Providing and laying cinder filling in the

toilets complete as directed by ENGINEER.
50
m3
G22.
Providing and fixing dividing strips in joints

of cast in situ floorings at various elevations,
finishing, all labour, material etc, complete as
per drawing, specification and instructions of
ENGINEER in charge.
1000
rm
a) Glass strips 40 mm wide and minimum 6

mm thick
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 35 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
b) Aluminium strips 40 mm wide and min 3

mm thick
1000
rm
c) Brass strips 20 mm wide and minimum 4

mm thick.
250
rm
G23.
Supply and installation of 50 mm thick under

deck insulation material conforming to IS:
8183 (such as Rock lloyd/ Laprock/ Spintex
slabs or approved equivalent) having a
3
minimum density of 32 kg/m and faced with
0.05 mm minimum thickness aluminium foil
and 24Gx25 mm wire mesh netting (facing
done either at factory or at site) installed
under concrete roof including all connected
works such as but not limited to providing
slotted angle pieces, with rawl plugs and
coach screws for fixing the insulation to roof.
14G GI tie wires in criss-cross arrangement in
angle cleats and 24 SWG x 25 mm square,
wire mesh netting shall be provided at the
bottom to ensure intimate contact with the
underside of roof. These joints shall be sealed
with aluminium adhesive tape suitably as
required.
3000
m2
G24.
Providing and fixing Pre-Painted Coil coated

Steel false ceiling system, at all level, for all
kind of works, consisting of 0.5 mm thick
galvanised to grade 180 as per IS: 277, along
with galvanised supporting steel members
exposed faces of galvanised member to be
pre-painted with regular modified polyester
coating/ super polyester coating minimum 20
DFT, to form panels of specified size for tile
type panels and roll formed stove enamelled
0.6 mm thick steel carrier, for fixing of lineal
type panels by clip on arrangement,
suspended from RCC slab/ structural steel or
cat-walkway steel channel grid above with 4
mm (minimum) galvanised wires (rods), with
special height adjustment clips, providing
3350
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 36 OF 58

ITEM
NO.

angle section of minimum 25 mm leg width
along the perimeter of ceiling, including all
labour, material, supporting grid system
(members minimum 0.8 mm thick and
galvanised @ 180 g/sqm as per IS: 277)
equipment,
handling,
transportation,
workmanship, anchor fasteners for making
suspension
arrangement
from
RCC,
preparation of working drawings, providing
openings for AC ducts, return air grills,
insulation light fixtures, etc., all complete, as
per specifications, drawings and instructions
of the Engineer. (Cat-walkway grid and
insulation, if provided, to be paid separately
under relevant item).
G25.
Providing and fixing Glass Reinforced

Gypsum (GRG) false ceiling system having
fine texture finish at all levels, for all kind of
work, which includes providing & fixing G.I.
channels of size 0.55 mm thickness having
one flange of 20 mm and another flange of 30
mm, and a web of 27 mm along with
perimeter of ceiling, screw fixed to brick wall/
partition with the help of nylon sleeves &
screws at 610 mm centers. Then suspending
G.I intermediate channels of size 45 mm, 0.9
mm thick with two flanges of size 15 mm each
from the soffit at 1200 mm centers with ceiling
angle of width 25 mm x 25 mm x 0.55 mm
thick fixed to soffit with G.I. cleat and steel
expansion fasteners. Ceiling section of 0.55
mm thickness having knurled web of 51.5 mm
and two flanges of 26 mm each with lips of
10.5 mm are then fixed to the intermediate
channel with the help of connecting clips and
in direction perpendicular to the intermediate
channel at 457 mm centers. 12 mm thick
GRG board is then screw fixed to ceiling
sections with 25 mm dry wall screws at 230
mm centers. The item to include all labour,
material, supporting grid system equipment,
handling
transportation,
workmanship
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 37 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
expansion
fasteners
for
suspension
arraignment from RCC, preparation of
working drawings, providing openings for AC
ducts, return air grills, light fixtures, cat walk
way etc, all complete as per specifications
drawings and instructions of the ENGINEER.
G26.
a) 12 mm thick GRG plaster board, finished

flat (Seamless)
1675
m2
b) 12 mm thick GRG plaster board in

profiled and curve shape (dome etc)
finished smooth (seamless) along with the
supporting system laid in profile to suit the
profile of dome.
1675
m2
Providing and fixing 12 mm thick Mineral

Fibre Board false ceiling system, in tile
form of size 600mm x 600mm along with
galvanized light gauge rolled form supporting
system in double web construction prepainted with steel capping of approved shade
and colour, having fine texture finish, at all
level, for all kind of work, consisting of light
weight galvanized steel member (minimum
0.8 mm thick and galvanized @ 180 g/sqm as
per IS: 277) having maximum grid size of
1200 mm x 600 mm for supporting panels of
specified size, suspended from RCC
structural steel or cat-walkway grid above,
with 4 mm (minimum) galvanised wires
(rods), with special height adjustment clips,
providing angle section of minimum 25 mm
width along the perimeter of ceiling, including
all labour, material, supporting grid system
(minimum 0.8 mm thick and galvanized @
180
g/sqm),
equipment,
handling,
transportation,
workmanship,
expansion
fasteners for suspension arrangement from
RCC, preparation of working drawings,
providing openings for AC ducts, return air
grills, light fixtures, etc., all complete, as per
specifications, drawings and instructions of
3350
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 38 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
the Engineer. (Cat-walkway grid, if provided,

shall be paid separately under relevant item).
G27.
Providing laying and fixing in position water

proofing treatment for roof using High Solid
content liquid applied urethane based
elastomeric membrane to give uniform joint
less dry film thickness of minimum 1.5 mm
(as per ASTM C 836 and C 898) laid over
reinforcing layer of polyscrim cloth or non
woven geo-textile, including all labour,
material,
equipment,
workmanship,
preparation of working drawings, preparatory
work, applying primer coat of polymerised
mastic to achieve smooth surface, laying
reinforcing layer of polyscrim cloth or non
woven geo-textile, finishing with elastomeric
membrane, including sealing of joint at
junction of horizontal surfaces with vertical
surfaces and at panel junctions of wearing
course by non-bitumastic sealant/ elastomeric
compound etc at all levels and for all type of
work, in vertical and horizontal surfaces,
handling, transporting, testing etc, all
complete as per specifications drawings, and
instructions of the ENGINEER.
20650
m2
G28.
Providing wearing course on the water

proofing membrane laid under item G25
above, of plain cement concrete of grade
M20, 40 mm thick using 10 mm down graded
coarse aggregate, cast in panels of 1200 x
1200 mm and reinforced with 0.56 mm dia
galvanised chicken wire mesh and sealing the
joint with joint sealing compound etc.,
complete all as directed by ENGINEER.
20650
m2
G29.
Providing and laying extra heavy water

proofing treatment of nine courses as per
IS: 1346 using 3 layers of approved quality
self finished glass fibre based bitumen (type-2
grade 1 conforming to IS: 7193) over RCC
roof duly sloped using concrete screed
1000
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 39 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
(Concrete screed will be paid for against

appropriate items).
G30.
Providing and laying Terrazzo tiles in flooring

using 250 mm x 250 mm x 20 mm thick tiles
of approved make of and colour, with
machine polishing including 20 mm thick 1:3
cement mortar bedding, cutting chase in walls
where required, floating with cement, curing,
etc., complete as per specifications.
100
m2
G31.
Cement plaster 12 mm thick with cement (10

kg/m2) sand mortar 1:3 mixed with approved
water proofing compound at the rate specified
by the manufacturer including curing etc.,
complete as per manufacturer instruction and
as directed by the ENGINEER over already
provided levelling course of PCC or RCC
slab. Providing, supplying, mixing, laying final
coat of plaster of 25 mm thick with cement (10
kg/m2) sand mortar 1:3 mixed with approved
water proofing compound at the rate specified
by the manufacturer including curing etc.,
complete as per manufacturer instruction and
as directed by the ENGINEER over the
coated surface. Providing 20 mm thick
cement concrete tiles over the plastered
surface. Note: CONTRACTOR to give 10
years guarantee for the water proofing work.
5600
m2
G32.
For cable vaults floor finish integral to the

concrete base shall be provided as per IS:
2571.
Admixtures
used
as
integral
waterproofer shall be free of chlorides and
sulphates and shall conform to IS: 2645. The
application and doses shall be as per
manufacturer's specification.
4200
m2
H.
DOORS & WINDOWS
H1.
a) Providing and fixing non galvanised flush

type steel doors conforming to IS: 1038
using 18 gauge MS sheets and MS
75
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 40 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
channel structural frame sections including

brass chromium plated fittings, fastenings,
locking arrangements, etc., including one
coat of zinc rich primer, etc., complete as
per specification and drawings.
75
m2
i) Open-able Steel windows/ ventilators as

per IS: 1361 of approved make with 6 mm
thick wired glass.
750
m2
ii) Fixed Steel windows/ ventilators as per

IS: 1361 & IS: 1038 of approved make with
6 mm thick wired glass including 2 coats of
approved synthetic enamel paint over one
coat of zinc rich primer, etc., complete as
per specification and drawings.
1500
m2
iii) Providing and fixing of mild steel louvers

1.2 mm thick with channel frame and sag
rods as per approved design at all levels
including shop coat of primer, etc., all
complete as per specifications, drawings
and instructions of the ENGINEER.
200
m2
iv) Open-able Steel windows/ ventilators as
100
m2
b) Providing and fixing non galvanised

industrial type steel doors with brass
chromium plated fixtures and fittings
glazed with 5.5 mm thick glass type as per
drawings and one coat of zinc rich primer,
etc., complete
H2.
Supplying, providing, erecting, assembling,

fitting & fixing steel windows at various
elevations including frames and shutters,
transoms, mullions and 30 mm x 30 mm
mesh size welded wire fabric (1.6 mm IRC)
fittings and fixtures, grouting of frames,
painting, handles, hold-fasts, hinges etc with
all labour, material, handling, equipment,
complete as per specifications, drawings and
instructions of the ENGINEER.
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 41 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
per IS: 1361 & IS: 1038 of approved make

with 5.5 mm thick wired glass including 2
coats of approved synthetic enamel paint
over one coat of zinc rich primer, etc.,
complete as per specification and
drawings.
v) Fixed Steel windows/ ventilators as per
IS: 1361 & IS: 1038 of approved make with
5.5 mm thick wired glass including 2 coats
of approved synthetic enamel paint over
one coat of zinc rich primer, etc., complete
as per specification and drawings.
100
m2
H3.
Providing and fixing steel single or double

leaf door shutters including frames, shutters
shall be 45 mm thick, flush design comprising
of two outer sheets of 18 gauge steel sheets,
rigidly connected and reinforced inside with
continuous 20 gauge steel stiffeners spot
welded in position at not more than 150 mm
centres. Side, top and bottom edges of
shutter shall be of pressed steel channels of
1.2 mm thickness. Voids shall be filled with
mineral wool (48 kg/cum density) confirming
IS: 8183, including all fittings such as tower
bolts, handles stoppers, aldrops etc and
painting.
500
m2
H4.
Providing and fixing steel single or double

leaf glazed doors including frames generally
as per IS: 1038 including all fillings such as
tower bolts, handles, stoppers, aldrops etc
and painting, etc complete as per
specification and drawings.
700
m2
H5
Designing for 50 m/s wind supplying and

fixing in position approved make steel rolling
shutters including frames conforming to IS:
6248 using 18G MS interlocking laths
including hood and all accessories required
and providing painting as described in Section
J-2 etc., complete
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 42 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
H7.
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
a) Gear operating mechanism
25
m2
b) Hand operated
25
m2
200
m2
a) Single leaf doors
700
m2
b) Double leaf doors
300
m2
Providing and fixing 35 mm thick single/

double shutter commercial plywood faced
phenol bonded solid core block board flush
doors including frames conforming to IS:
2202 with teak wood lipping to depth of not
less than 15 mm on all sides with 100 mm x
60 mm first class teak wood frame rebated on
the sides including brass chromium plated
fittings and fixtures and painted as per
specifications. 35 mm x 10 mm teak wood
100
m2
c) Electrically operated
H6.
QTY
Supplying, providing and fixing in position

steel based fire proof doors with 2 hrs fire
rating conforming to IS: 3614 (Part 2) 1992,
BS: 476 and ISO: 834 with all necessary
fittings & fixtures including self closing hinges
& locking arrangement. Frames to be made of
1.6 mm thick galvanised steel sheet &
shutters of overall thickness 43 mm - 46 mm
thick framed out of two outer skin panels of
1.25 mm galvanised steel sheets having lock
seam joints. Reinforcements shall also be
provided at the top & bottom locking areas.
The infill material shall be mineral wool
blanket conforming to IS: 8183 to give
required rigidity and effective acoustic and
thermal insulation. The sheet metal used for
both the frames & shutters are to be
galvanised and to conform to IS: 277-1992.
The contractor shall obtain and furnish
necessary approval from TAC for the supplied
material.
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 43 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
beading shall be provided all around frames.

Shutters shall be provided with 200 mm
square 6.0 mm thick glass viewing panel.
H8.
Providing and fixing 35 mm thick single/

double shutter commercial plywood faced
phenol bonded solid core block board flush
doors including frames conforming to IS:
2202 with teak wood lipping to depth of not
less than 25 mm on all sides with 100 mm x
60 mm first class teak wood frame rebated on
the sides including brass chromium plated
fittings and fixtures and as per specifications.
35 mm x 10 mm teak wood beading shall be
provided all around frames. Shutters shall be
provided with 200 mm square 6.0 mm thick
glass viewing panel and with teak veneering
on both faces of shutters including rubbing
and polishing the shutters all as directed by
ENGINEER.
500
m2
H9.
Providing and fixing 22G aluminium sheets as

kick-plate for doors.
10
m2
H10.
Providing and fixing 2 mm thick/ approved

quality rubber sealing strip, around doors
and windows for making them airtight as per
specifications and drawings.
500
rm
H11.
Providing and fixing approved quality

hydraulic door closer conforming to IS:
3564 as per drawings and as directed by the
Engineer.
25
No.
H12.
Providing and fixing powder coated (50

microns thick) aluminium entrance door
including frames swing type (floor hinge) with
fixed glazing in aluminium frame work of 100
mm x 45 mm x 3 mm thick aluminium section
at sides and top of door as indicated in
drawings and conforming to relevant Indian
Standards including glazing with 6.0 mm thick
sheet glass, standard hardware such as
25
m2
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 44 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
hinges, push/ pull bars/ handles, floor springs,

locking arrangement, suitable rubber/ vinyl
beading for fixing glass, etc., complete.
H13.
Providing, and fixing powder coated (50

micron thick) aluminium framed doors with
a frame work of 100 mm x 45 mm x 3 mm
thick aluminium sections and as per
specification and drawings with frames,
shutters, double acting heavy duty floor
springs, fittings and fixtures, mortice lock,
aluminium beading etc., complete but
excluding glazing for
a) Fully glazed doors with 6 mm thick sheet
glass.
500
m2
b) Partly glazed doors (Balance portion shall

be provided with 5 mm thick pre-coated
aluminium sheet).
200
m2
H14
Supplying and installing in position teak

veneer faced particle board partition
'Novateak' or equivalent 19 mm thick in first
class seasoned teak wood frame work, 75
mm x 75 mm (minimum) including providing
two coats of French polish over a coat of
wood primer, etc.
1000
m2
H15
Providing and fixing PVC doors with frames

of syntax or equivalent make including all
fitting & fixtures as per specification, drawing
and instructions of engineer in charge.
100
m2
H16.
Supplying, designing & erecting including

assembling fitting and fixing 50 microns thick
powder coated aluminium windows with
aluminium section of 65 mm x 40 mm x 2 mm
thick at various elevations including frames,
shutters, transoms, mullions, fittings &
fixtures, aluminium beading but excluding
glazing etc., as per specification & drawings
and providing and fixing 2 mm thick approved
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 45 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
quality rubber sealing strip around doors and

windows for making them air tight as per
specification & drawing.
a) Open-able
200
m2
b) Sliding
200
m2
c) Fixed
500
m2
1000
m2
2000
m2
ii) 5.5 mm transparent sheet glass as per IS:

2835
500
m2
iii) 5.5 mm clear float glass as per IS: 2835
500
m2
iv) 6 mm thick wired glass as per IS: 5437
5000
m2
H17.
Providing and fixing in position 3 m (approx.)

high partly glazed powder coated aluminium
partition frame work with posts of size 100
mm x 45 x 3 mm min thickness and rails of
size 65 mm x 40 mm x 3 mm min thickness
with vertical posts at a maximum spacing of
1000 mm centres and horizontal rails as
shown in drawings. The bottom 900 mm
portion shall be provided with 5 mm thick precoated aluminium sheets fixed to internal 40
mm x 40 mm grid between posts/ rails. The
portion above the aluminium sheeting shall be
provided with 6.0 mm thick tinted glass
including fixing to posts/ rails with preformed
rubber-lining, powder coated aluminium
beading, etc., including fixing frame work
rigidly to structural floors, beams columns,
etc., complete as directed by Engineer.
H18
Providing and fixing glazing of approved

quality, at various elevations where required
including cleaning after fixing, with all labour,
and material all as directed by ENGINEER
and as per specifications.
i)
4 mm frosted glass
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 46 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
v) 5.5 mm tinted glass
500
m2
vi) 8 mm thick toughened float glass
500
m2
I.
WATER SUPPLY AND SANITARY WORKS
I1.
Providing and fixing, including preparation of

working drawings, medium grade galvanised
(galvanising shall be as per IS: 4736) mild
steel pipes conforming to IS: 1239, for water
supply, at all levels including supply
installation of gate valves of suitable size,
laying, installation and jointing of pipes and
fittings, with all labour materials, equipment,
tees, bends, elbows, couplings, flanges,
reducers, plugs, clamps etc., including
forming chases and making good the walls
testing etc complete, all as per specification,
approved working drawings and as instructed
by ENGINEER for the following nominal bore
(NB).
a)
15 NB
300
rm
b)
20 NB
300
rm
c)
25 NB
300
rm
d)
40 NB
300
rm
I2.
Providing and fixing in position at all levels

heavy duty type Chromium plated brass long
neck bib cocks of approved brand including
socket, union, etc complete 15 mm nominal
bore.
50
No
I3.
Providing and fixing in position heavy duty

brass stop cock of approved brand and
quality including all specials etc complete, 15
mm Nominal bore.
25
No
I4.
Providing and fixing in position heavy duty
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 47 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
brass full way valve with wheel, of approved

brand and quality all as directed by
ENGINEER.
a)
20 mm NB
15
No
b)
25 mm NB
15
No
c)
40 mm NB
No
I5.
Providing and fixing 600 mm x 20 mm

stainless steel pipe wall mounted towel rail,
with stainless steel brackets, stainless screws
etc complete all as directed by ENGINEER.
20
No.
I6.
Providing and fixing 600 mm x 900 mm x 6

mm bevelled edge mirror from approved
manufactures; edge mounted with teak wood
beading and minimum 12 mm thick ply wood
backing etc complete in front of wash basin.
20
No.
I7.
Providing and fixing stainless steel liquid

soap dispenser of approved brand.
Dispenser shall be round and easily revolving,
with removable threaded nozzles and
mounted on stainless steel brackets etc
complete.
30
No.
I8.
Providing and fixing glazed vitreous wall

mounted paper holder with suitable cover
cum cutter, with CP. screws etc complete.
15
No.
I9.
Providing and fixing stainless steel toilet

paper holders of approved brand and quality
including all fixtures etc complete.
10
No.
I10.
Providing and fixing stainless shower rose

of adjustable multi spread spray with 15 mm
inlet etc complete of approved brand and
quality.
20
No
I11.
Providing and fixing in position in roof P.V.C

water tank generally conforming to IS:
No
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 48 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
12701, of Syntax or other approved make, of

2000 litres capacity. The work to include,
providing necessary inlet, outlet and over flow
pipes, all other fixture such as ball locks,
valves, level indicator etc all as per
specification and instructed by ENGINEER.
I12.
Providing and installing sanitary, water

supply and plumbing fixtures within the
toilet as listed below including preparation of
detailed plumbing drawing, provision of in
built floor drain, GI concealed water pipe, 15
mm dia, cast iron sanitary pipe 75 mm dia
with lead joints, floor trap with stainless steel
gratings, inlet and outlet connection for supply
and drainage with all bends, tees, junctions,
sockets etc as are necessary for the
commissioning and efficient functioning of the
toilet fixtures, including embedding of service
pipe, providing flexible brass pipe, bib cocks,
stop cocks, brackets etc laying and jointing of
sanitary pipes and fittings with all labour,
material equipments etc all per approved
plumbing drawing and as directed by
ENGINEER.
i
Wall mounted glazed vitreous China

European Water Closet of approved
brand and shade, with siphon, open front
solid plastic seat and cover, low level 12.5
litres, glazed stone ware water flushing
tank with valve less fittings and all
connected work.
20
No
ii Glazed vitreous China Orissa pan, Indian

type water closet of approved colour
brand and design, with low level 12.5
litres, glazed stone ware water flushing
cistern, with valve less fitting and all
connected works.
20
No
iii Coloured glazed vitreares china flat back

lipped urinal of 390x400x630 mm of
35
No
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 49 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
approved brand and shade with photo

voltaic control system for flushing and all
connected work.
iv White glazed ceramic oval shaped wash
basin 400x550 mm, mounted over 20
mm thick polished granite bevelled edge
counter of approved colour and texture,
fitted with photo voltaic control system for
water control etc complete.
35
No
I13.
Supplying and fixing white glazed vitreous

china partition of approved make of size 840
x 300 mm for urinals and all connected works
40
No.
I14.
Providing and installing in position stainless

steel pantry sink, mounted over 20 mm thick
granite bevelled edge counter, as per IS:
13983 of size 610x510 mm, bowl depth 200
mm, with drain board at least 450 mm in
length, with trap, host and cold water mixer,
including embedded service pipe, flexible
brass pipe, bib cock, stop cock, bracket etc
complete.
10
No.
I15.
Supply and fixing in battery rooms, vitreous

china acid/ alkali resistant laboratory sink of
size 600x430x200 mm of approved brand and
quality, with C.I brackets, C.P brass chain
with rubber plug, 40 mm dia, C.P Brass waste
and 40 mm C.P brass bottle trap necessary
union including painting the fittings, cutting
and making good wall where required etc
complete.
No.
I16.
Supplying, placing, aligning and fixing in

position
UPVC
pipes
of
approved
manufacture conforming to IS: 4985 of the
following diameters at locations as indicated
on drawings and as directed by the
ENGINEER, including all associated works
like clamping, jointing, bedding, special
fittings such as bends, shoes, junctions, swan
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 50 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
necks, etc., complete.
I17.
I18.
a)
110 OD pipe
100
rm
b)
160 OD pipe
100
rm
a) 100 NB pipe
100
rm
b) 150 NB pipe
100
rm
Preparation of working drawing, laying and

installing cast iron pressure soil pipe class
LA conforming to IS: 1536, with all fixtures
and fillings, junction, bends, selves,
inspection vent etc (fitting shall conform to IS:
1538), for under ground pipe work, including
laying installation and jointing the pipes and
fittings to result in perfect water/ air liquid
joints with all labour, material and equipment,
providing coal tar coating of the pie etc
complete, all as per approved working
drawing and as directed by ENGINEER.
Construction R.C.C manhole of concrete

grade M25, using 20 mm down grade coarse
aggregates, with inside concrete surfaces
neatly finished with a floating coat of neat
cement slurry, providing benching inside
manholes in cement concrete 1:2:4 neatly
finished with floating coat of cement slurry
including making connection of drain/ sewer
line G.I rungs, heavy duty C.I covers 560 mm
ID as per IS: 1726 with frames, sealing of
manhole covers with thick grease, including
all labour, material, handling transportation,
earth work etc complete.
i)
Rectangle manholes 900 x 800 mm up to

depth of 900 mm
10
No.
ii)
1200 mm ID at bottom and 560 ID at top

for depth varying from 900 mm to 2500
mm
10
No.
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 51 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
I19.
Supplying, Providing and laying in

position precast concrete septic tanks, for
50 persons, manufactured by IHP or
approved equivalent with all connections,
manholes, vent pipes, earth work in
excavation and backfilling, etc., complete,
as per manufacturer's instructions and as
I20.
Supplying, Providing and fixing CI

gratings over sumps in grade slabs,
designed to withstand erection load of
1000 kg/m2
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
4
No.
a) Clear dimension of sumps 600 x 600

mm
30
No.
b) Clear dimension of sumps 300 x 300

mm
20
No.
J.
STRUCTURAL
WORKS
STEEL
AND
ALLIED
J1.
Supplying, detailing, fabricating, transporting

to site of erection, erecting in position at all
levels, alignment and final site welding/
bolting of all structural components fabricated
out of steel conforming IS: 2062 including all
connected operations such as but not limited
to straightening of plates, preparation of
cutting plans, cutting, bending, grinding,
drilling of holes, assembly, bolting providing
erection bolts and nut (weight not considered
for payment) welding (weight not considered
for payment) including, edge preparation for
welding, pre heating of plates before welding,
post heating, sequencing of welding, testing
of welders, inspection and testing of welds,
rectification/ correction of defective welds, etc
complete including providing erection mark,
erection scheme, protection against damage
in transit, ensuring stability of structure by
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 52 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
installing temporary structure (weight not

payable) during erection, including supply of
all skilled labour, material, consumables,
handling equipment, during fabrication and
erection and all other activities, required for
complete work as per specification,
construction drawings and instruction of
ENGINEER (cost of preparation of surface
and painting will be paid for extra against
relevant items).
a) Structural steel members fabricated
exclusively of plates confirming to Grade E
250 (Fe 410W) quality B (Killed), of IS:
2062 for components like, framing columns
and beams, box shaped internal columns,
gable end columns, cross beams, box
shaped wall beams etc and all structures
fabricated exclusively using plate.
4000
2. 11m to 20 m above ground level
4000
3.
21m to 30 m above ground level
4000
3000
800
b) Crane girders including testing of all

splicing by radiography, 100% inspection
of all welds connecting flange to web,
grinding of bearing stiffener to ensure 90%
bearing of the stiffeners on the column cap
plate etc complete, fabricated out of
structural steel conforming to Grade E 250
(Fe 410W) quality B (Killed) of IS: 2062.
c) Structural steel member fabricated out of
rolled steel sections only and rolled steel
section with cover plates conforming to
Grade E 250 (Fe 410W) quality A of
IS2062, such as columns, beams, trusses,
vertical and horizontal bracings, tie beams,
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 53 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
struts, purlins, side girts, sag rods,

hangers, mono rail beam, stub column,
walkways, platforms, stair stringers,
ladders.
J2.
3800
3800
3.
3750
4.
2900
d) Same as sub item (c) above but the

structural member shall be of removable
type with permanent bolted connection,
such as framing for removable cladding, oil
canal roof, removable floors etc.
500
Supplying,
Detailing,
fabricating
&
transporting to site and erecting in position,
provision of erection bolts, etc., complete
including preparation of surfaces and
providing a shop coat of red oxide zinc
chrome primer, touching up and then a
second coat of red oxide zinc chrome primer
after erection and two coats of synthetic
enamel paint of approved make and colour
and shade, as per specifications and
approved fabrication drawings for the
following:
10
a) Mild steel chequered plates of any size,

shape and thickness, for platforms, stair
treads, hatch openings, etc., providing cut
outs in the plates including tapping holes/
slots in supporting members, bolting or
welding.
160
b) Welded mild steel gratings (waffle or

honey comb type) of approved design
using bearing/ spacer bars, for platforms,
hatch openings, walkways, passages,
225
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 54 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
drain and trench covers, etc., providing cut

outs in the grating including tapping holes/
slots in supporting members, bolting or
welding.
c) Electro forged gratings for platforms,
hatch openings, etc., providing cut outs in
the grating including tapping holes/ slots in
supporting members, bolting or welding.
25
a) For hatch and other openings, including

tapping holes/ slots for fixing clamps, clips
etc., in supporting members, bolting or
welding, etc.
25
b) For stair treads with provision of 40 mm x

20 mm cast iron abrasive nosing, MS plate
and angle, tapping holes/ slots in
supporting
members,
bolting,
etc.,
complete.
15
J4.
Providing and applying two coats of synthetic

enamel paint conforming to IS: 2932 each
coat of 25 mm DFT over steel surface over
two coats of red oxide zinc chromate primer
conforming to IS: 2074 each coat having a
DFT of minimum 25 mm, over surface
prepared as per IS: 1477 Part 1.
250
J5.
Providing and applying high performance

epoxy based Poly Amide cured painting
system of approved colour and shade
consisting of Zinc phosphate primer,
intermediate (under) coat, finish coat and final
finish coat including shot blast cleaning of
J3.
Supplying, Detailing, fabricating, transporting

to site and erecting in position welded mild
steel gratings (waffle or honey comb type)
of approved design using bearing/ spacer
bars, hot dip galvanised, all as per
specifications and approved fabrication
drawings for the followings.
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 55 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
steel surfaces to near white metal surface (Sa

2 1/2), to steel surface of all types shapes and
sizes, at all levels, to achieve an even shade,
including all labour, material, consumables
equipment,
handling,
transportation,
protection and cleaning, scaffolding, and
staging, testing, etc., all complete, as per
specifications, drawings and instructions of
the Engineer.
a)
Extra over item J1 above for Blast

cleaning by shot blasting of steel
surfaces to near white metal surface (Sa
2 1/2) and applying inorganic Zinc
Silicate primer of minimum 75 micron
(DFT), shall be of inorganic (Ethy) self
curing high built (solid by volume
minimum 60%) formulation as per BS :
5493 ( Inorganic Zinc rich systems),
including touch up painting for the
damaged surfaces of primer
29650
b)
Applying intermediate (under) coat over

inorganic Zinc Silicate primer, after
erection of structure, consisting of
minimum 75 micron DFT epoxy based
Titanium dioxide/ Micaceous iron oxide
pigmented high performance (solid by
volume 60%) epoxy coating as per BS:
5493 (two pack chemical resistant
finishes) including touch up painting for
the damaged surfaces of intermediate
paint.
29650
c)
Applying finish coat over intermediate

(under) coat, consisting of minimum 75
micron DFT Epoxy based colour
pigmented finish Poly Amide cured paint
and Final finish coat with minimum 25
micron
DFT
Polyurethane
colour
pigmented finish paint (solid by volume
60%) as per BS: 5493 (two pack
chemical resistant finishes), including
29650
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 56 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
final touch up painting for the damaged

surfaces of Finish and Final Finish Paint.
J6.
Supplying,
detailing,
fabrication
and
transportation to site of erection of Anchor
bolts with diameter of the bolt varying from
25 mm to 80 mm, fabricated out of MS rounds
conforming to Grade E 250 (Fe 410W) quality
A of IS: 2062, including anchorage assembly
consisting of plates conforming, to Grade E
250 (Fe 410W) quality B (Killed), of IS: 2062,
including threading of bolts providing heavy
washers, double nuts, etc including all
operation other than erection as specified in
item (J1 above). The bolt thread shall be
protected against rusting and damage during
storage till the bolts are incorporated into
works.
225
J7.
Supplying,
detailing,
fabrication
and
transportation to site of erection of structural
steel embedment fabricated out of steel
conforming to Grade E 250 (Fe 410W) quality
B (Killed), of IS: 2062, such as but not limited
to plate insert, edge protection angles/
channels, pipe sleeves, pipe hoods, rungs,
shear connectors toe protection plate for hand
rail. Grills, lugs of fixing embedments etc
including all operation other than erection as
mentioned in item (1) above, but including the
cost of preparation of the surface and
providing two shop coats of painting with red
oxide zinc chromate primer conforming to IS:
2074, each coat having DFT of 25 microns, all
as per specification and as instructed by
Engineer.
150
J8.
Supplying, detailing fabricating, transporting

to site and erecting in position at all levels
pipe hand rails fabricated out of MS pipe
medium class as per IS: 1161, of flush
welded construction, with two horizontal rails,
one at 500 mm and another at 1000 mm
150
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 57 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
above base level with vertical pipes spaced at

a maximum of 1500 mm, including provision
of all accessories such as base plates,
including all operation such as straightening,
bending, cutting, profile cutting, welding etc
complete including providing two primer coats
of red oxide zinc chromate primer after
necessary surface preparation as per IS:
2074 each coat having DFT of 25 microns,
before erection and a touch up coat of the
same after erection and two coat of synthetic
enamel painting each coat having DFT of 25
microns, of approved brand and shade and all
connected work all as directed by ENGINEER
and as per specification and construction
drawing.
J9.
Same as (5) above, but the handrail shall of

removable type; the base plate shall be fixed
to the floor framing by means of bolts.
15
J10.
Same as (5) above, but the handrail shall be

using G.I pipes with screwed ends with
necessary bends, tees, junctions, sockets etc
including a touch coat of aluminium paint after
erection on damaged area.
20
K.
CIVIL
ITEMS
REQUIREMENTS
K1.
Supplying, fabricating including bending,

straightening, lapping, welding and fixing of
32 mm diameter Steel, 1020 Rod in
underground earth grid formation in Main
Plant Area. Construction drawings shall be
released by Purchaser during execution.
75
km
K2.
Supplying, fabricating including bending,

straightening, lapping, welding and fixing of
65x10 mm MS Flat as earthing conductors in
concrete floors, foundations, pedestals, etc in
Main Plant Building. Construction drawings
shall be released by Purchaser during
12
km
FOR
ELECTRICAL
AMOUNT
(Rs)

SECTION: C2
SHEET 58 OF 58

ITEM
NO.
QTY
UNIT RATE
(Rs)
execution.
K3.
Supplying, fabricating, welding and fixing of

100x100x10 mm MS Earth Plate Insert as
earthing material in TG Pedestal foundation in
Main Plant Building. Construction drawings
shall be released by Purchaser during
execution.
40
No.
K4.
Supplying and fixing of Wooden Blocks for TG

Pedestal earthing in Main Plant Building.
Construction drawings shall be released by
Purchaser during execution.
40
No.
K5.
Supplying and fixing of Flexible Connectors

for TG Pedestal earthing in Main Plant
Building. Construction drawings shall be
released by Purchaser during execution.
10
No.
Total Cost (C2) = Rs.__________ (In Words _____________________________)
AMOUNT
(Rs)

Uttar Pradesh
SECTION: C3
SHEET 1 OF 1
LIST OF BID DRAWINGS
SL.
NO.
1
TITLE
DWG. NO.
TG BUILDING GROUND FLOOR

PLAN AT EL 0.000 M (3 SHEETS)
CIPL-LPGCL-TG-001
REV.
NO.
0
TG BUILDING MEZZANINE FLOOR

PLAN AT EL 8.500 M (3 SHEETS)
CIPL-LPGCL-TG-002
TG
BUILDING
OPERATING
FLOOR PLAN AT EL 17.000 M (3
SHEETS)
CIPL-LPGCL-TG-003
TG BUILDING MISCELLANEOUS
FLOOR PLAN AT EL 25.000 M (3
SHEETS)
CIPL-LPGCL-TG-004
TG BUILDING CROSS-SECTION
CIPL-LPGCL-TG-005
POWER HOUSE
COLUMNS AND
GRIDS 1 TO 13
- A ROW
BRACING -
CIPL-LPGCL-PH-ST-001
POWER HOUSE - GABLE END

COLUMNS AND BRACING AT
GRID 1
CIPL-LPGCL-PH-ST-002

SECTION: D1
SHEET 1 OF 22
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0
SOIL DATA
1.1
A detailed geo-technical investigation work is being carried out for this project.
The final report will be handed over to bidder.
1.2
It shall be clearly understood that the above data will be given to the Bidder in
good faith. As such, Purchaser will not entertain any claim for extra payment if
the actual soil conditions met with during excavation for foundation/ structures
are at variance with the bore logs/ data included herewith.
1.3
The choice of the method of de-watering system (if required) shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Cost of de-watering is deemed to be included in
the relevant items of work in the schedule of quantities.
2.0
TG FOUNDATION
2.1
Scope
This specification covers specific requirements in regard to formwork, staging
and placing of concrete for the construction of turbo-generator foundation and
pedestal. The requirements specified below shall be in addition to the general
requirements for "Concrete and allied works" as specified in specification else
where.
2.2
Formwork
2.2.1
Design of Formwork
2.2.1.1
Within one month from date of issue of Purchasers drawings showing masonry
outline of TG foundation/ pedestal, Contractor shall submit to Purchaser, the
drawings and design calculations for the design of the form work for approval
before proceeding with work, at no extra cost to Purchaser. Purchaser's
approval shall not, however, relieve Contractor of the full responsibility for the
design and construction of a functional and safe formwork.
2.2.1.2
The design shall take into account all vertical and lateral loads that the forms will
carry or be subjected to, during the construction process. Besides weight and
pressure of reinforced concrete and weight of the forms themselves, the design
shall consider loading due to unsymmetrical placement of concrete, impact from
dumping of concrete, concentrated loads produced by storing materials on the
freshly placed concrete; movement of men and construction equipment; wind
action and any other imposed load during construction. Contractor shall assess
the magnitude of vertical live load to be taken for design of formwork duly
considering his method, sequence and rate of pour of concrete. However,
minimum design vertical live load to be considered shall be 750 kg/m excluding
weight of concrete.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 2 OF 22
2.2.1.3
Staging for the deck slab shall be supported directly from the TG mat,
independent of the TG pedestal columns already cast.
2.2.1.4
Side shuttering shall be designed to cater for concrete pressures, duly

considering rate of pour, temperature of concrete, slump and rate of vibration.
The column shuttering shall be designed for a rate of vertical pour not less than
4 meters per hour. For shuttering of deck slab of pedestal, the design rate shall
not be less than 1.5 meters per hour. Concrete temperature for design purpose
shall be taken to be 21C (or 70F) or anticipated placing temperature,
whichever is less. Lateral pressures for design of forms shall be based on ACI
Committee 622 pressure formula or CERA Research Report No.1 Pressure
Design Chart. Following Table, based on ACI Committee 622 Pressure Formula,
is given as guidance for assessing maximum lateral pressure for design of
forms. Pressure in excess of 2400 kg/m3 x height of fresh concrete in metres
shall not be considered.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Rate of concrete
Maximum lateral pressure in kg/m for
placement in
temperature indicated
metre per hour
----------------------------------------------------------------70F
60F
50F
40F
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------0.6
1990
2200
2490
2930
0.9
2620
2930
3370
4030
1.2
3245
3660
4250
5125
1.5
3870
4395
5125
6225
1.8
4500
5125
6005
7325
2.1
5130
5860
6885
8420
2.4
5750
6590
7765
9520
3.0
7010
8055
9520
11720
3.6
8265
9520
11280
13195
4.2
9520
10985
13035
14645
4.8
10775
12450
14645
14645
5.4
12030
13915
14645
14645
6.0
13285
14645
14645
14645
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2.2
Materials for Form work

Scaffolding, props, struts and bracing for the shuttering of TG pedestal shall be
of rolled structural steel sections conforming to IS: 2062. Steel faced shuttering
shall be used for achieving smooth exposed concrete finish for all surfaces
except haunches which can be plywood sheets backed by steel runners.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 3 OF 22
2.2.3
Wall ties/ Through bolts
2.2.3.1
Through bolts, when used as wall ties shall be in one single piece for the full
length. For deck slab no through bolts to act as ties shall be provided passing
through concrete section. A tie member of rolled structural steel section may be
provided just above the concrete clearing inserts. This member shall be
designed for a minimum additional load of 500 kg acting as point load at centre
of span.
2.2.3.2
Through bolt diameter and spacing should be designed to cater for entire lateral
concrete pressure on the shuttering. In addition, side stays shall be provided to
take at least 50% of the specified design pressure.
2.2.3.3
Where use of through bolts is not feasible, the entire pressure shall be taken by
side stays/ props.
2.2.3.4
Welding of through bolts to reinforcement shall not be permitted.
2.2.3.5
Particular attention shall be given to consider unbalanced horizontal pressure at

corners of deck slab.
2.2.4
Platforms/ Windows
2.2.4.1
Suitable and adequate working platforms shall be provided at TG deck slab

level, all round the TG pedestal for easy access for construction and inspection.
The cost of providing such platforms shall be deemed to be included in the
Contractor's quoted rates for formwork.
2.2.4.2
Adequate windows at maximum 2 m vertical spacing shall be provided in

column shuttering for concreting, inspection and introducing vibrators.
Arrangements should be made for closing tightly the windows to prevent loss of
water and fine material from concrete, as the pour level overtakes the window
level.
2.3
Inserts/ Embedments
2.3.1
Inserts/ Embedments shall not be supported on or tied to reinforcement, but

independently on shuttering. Suitable arrangements shall be made to locate and
fix them to shuttering. Stools shall be provided where required.
2.3.2
Main equipment foundation bolts; pipe sleeves and block-outs for pockets shall
be placed and maintained in position at the top by means of an adequately
braced steel template. While planning the template, care should be taken to
ensure that it does not block the top of beam and that adequate free space is
left to pour concrete from the top. Cost of templates etc., shall be borne by the
Contractor.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 4 OF 22
2.4
Placing of Concrete
2.4.1
Contractor shall furnish to Purchaser for approval together with form work
design, his proposed scheme for concreting the TG base raft, pedestal and TG
Deck. The scheme shall indicate types of equipment, mobilisation of men and
materials, standby arrangements and method, sequence and rate of pouring
concrete. Work shall proceed only after such arrangements and Purchasers
approval thereto.
2.4.2
Concrete for TG mat and TG deck slab shall be cooled to a temperature of 23C
and adequate arrangements shall be made to ensure this. Concrete for columns
shall be cooled if the least dimension of column is more than 1.4m.
2.4.3
The base raft shall be cast in one uninterrupted continuous pour unless
otherwise directed by Purchaser or shown on the drawing. Full raft thickness
shall be achieved by this continuous pour.
2.4.4
TG pedestal columns from top of base raft to bottom of TG deck slab shall be
cast in a single continuous pour, unless otherwise directed by Purchaser/
drawings released for construction.
2.4.5
TG deck slab shall be cast in a single pour without construction joints/ cold
joints. Successive layers shall be placed before initial set of previous layer or
within one hour, whichever is earlier. For proper placement and vibration, the
layers shall not be less than 500 mm thick.
2.4.6
Ice shall be used for bringing down the temperature of concrete within specified
limits. Only ice flakes shall be used in water storage tanks. Chilled water only
shall be sprinkled over the aggregates in order to bring the temperature of the
aggregates down. In no case Ice cubes/ flakes shall be spread over the
aggregates. In no case Ice shall be allowed to be mixed with the water near the
on site mixer from which water is fed directly to the concrete.
2.4.7
To facilitate inspection during placement, observation windows and cut-outs

shall be planned and provided in critical areas of the TG Deck pour.
2.4.8
Chutes/ Tromie pipes of 225 mm diameter shall be used to place concrete if the
beams are more than 2 m deep and for this purpose, some top bars will have to
be displaced temporarily to allow inserting of the same.
2.4.9
In areas where second stage grouting is to be done after the TG set is erected
and aligned, the concrete shall be laid 50 mm higher than the actual level
required and chipped back to exact required level. The concrete surface under
equipment sole plates shall be ground to ensure a minimum contact area of
85%.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 5 OF 22
2.4.10
Thermo couples at various locations and depths in critical areas shall be

planned and provided for measurements of temperature development inside the
concrete due to heat of hydration.
2.5
Tolerances in TG foundation
Concreting of TG foundation (mat and pedestal) shall be to following tolerances
in horizontal and vertical directions:
a) Foundation dimensions
: 10 mm
b) Location of embedded
anchor bolts
: 5 mm
c) Location of sleeves for

piping and through holes
for anchor bolts
: 10 mm
d) Others
: As specified in Specification
"Concrete and Allied Works"
3.0
GROUTING UNDER STANCHION/ OTHER BASES
3.1
Grout shall be used as specified on the drawings under stanchion/ other bases
to ensure complete filling of the space between base plate and concrete
supporting the stanchion/ other bases.
3.2
Surfaces to be grouted shall be thoroughly roughened and cleaned of all foreign

matter and laitance. The concrete surfaces to be grouted shall be saturated with
water. No free water shall be left on the surfaces.
3.3
Anchor bolts, anchor bolt holes and the bottom of column/ other base plates
shall be cleaned of all oil, grease, dirt and loose material or any materials, which
will react with Portland cement. The use of hot, strong caustic solution for this
purpose will be permitted. Water in anchor bolt holes shall be removed before
grouting is started.
3.4
When the base is to be flow grouted, forms shall be built and securely anchored
outside the base plate so as to completely confine and withstand the pressure of
liquid grout under working and ridding condition without leaking and high enough
to ensure the grout is in contact with the underside of the base plate, and
provide a head of minimum 100 mm above the underside of the base plate.
Provisions of grout holes in base plates, ridding arrangements shall be checked
prior to commencement of grouting.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 6 OF 22
3.5
Grouting once started shall be done quickly and continuously to prevent

segregation, bleeding and break down of initial set. Grout shall be worked from
one end to the other to prevent entrapment of air. To distribute the grout and to
ensure complete contact between base plate and foundation and to help release
entrapped air, link chains or doubled-over flexible steel strapping can be used to
work the grout in place.
3.6
The pressure to be used for grouting shall be as directed by the Purchaser.
3.7
Forms and shims shall not be removed and the anchor bolts shall not be
tightened for at least twenty-four hours after placing the grout. After the removal
of forms and shims, area occupied by shims shall be filled and the area between
the base and the edge of the foundation shall be finished smooth to allow
drainage away from the base. Interconnecting piping and machinery shall not be
attached to the machinery before anchor bolts are tightened. It is desirable to
make these connections at least three days after grouting. During the period,
grout shall be cured with wet rags.
3.8
Only fresh Portland cement conforming to IS: 269 should be used.
3.9
Sand used shall be such as to produce a grout with good workability and without
any tendency to segregate.
3.10
Sand for general grouting (grout thickness 25 mm and over but less than 50
mm) shall be graded within the following limits:
Passing IS 2.36 mm sieve
Passing IS 1.18 mm sieve
Passing IS 300 micron sieve
Passing IS 150 micron sieve
:
:
:
:
95 to 100%
65 to 95%
10 to 30%
3 to 10%
3.11
Sand for fluid grouts (grout thickness below 25 mm) shall have the fine materials
passing the 300 and 150 micron sieves at the upper limits specified in Clause
3.10 above.
3.12
Sand for stiff grouts (grout thickness 50 mm and above) shall meet the usual
grading specifications for concrete.
3.13
After all ingredients are added, the batch shall be mixed for 3 minutes. Batches
of grout shall be small enough so that the batch may be fully used up in less
than 45 minutes.
3.14
The proportions of grout shall be such as to produce a flow-able mixture

consistent with minimum water content and shrinkage. The grout proportions
shall be limited as follows:

SECTION: D1
SHEET 7 OF 22
Use
Grout thickness
Mix proportions (Max)
W/C Ratio
Fluid mix Under 25 mm
One part Port land cement

one part sand
0.44
General
mix
25 mm and over but

less than 50mm
One part Portland cement

two part sand
0.53
Stiff mix
50 mm and over
One part Portland cement

three part sand
0.53
3.15
Pre-mixed non-shrinking grout shall be used as per manufacturer's instructions

and without any additional materials/ admixtures such as cement etc.
3.16
All materials, workmanship and finished construction shall be subject to the

continuous inspection and approval of Purchaser.
3.17
All materials supplied by Contractor and all work or construction performed by

Contractor rejected as not in conformity with the specifications and drawings,
shall be immediately replaced at no additional expense to the Purchaser.
3.18
Preliminary approvals of any materials or phase of work shall in no way relieve

the Contractor from the responsibility of supplying grout and or producing
finished grout in accordance with the specifications and drawings.
3.19
All grouting shall be protected against damage until final acceptance by

Purchaser or his representative.
3.20
Upon the completion of grouting work, all forms, equipments, construction tools,
protective coverings and any debris shall be removed from the area as directed
by the Purchaser.
3.21
Measurement
Mode of measurement for grout work shall be in cubic metres as per dimensions
shown in drawings corrected to three decimal places i.e. the cubic content
between the top of the pedestal and bottom of base plate. No deductions shall
be made for anchor bolts, shim plates, etc and no extra payment made for
grouting of pockets/ sleeves.
4.0
INSERTS AND CUT-OUTS IN CONCRETE WORK
4.1
Numerous inserts are required to be fixed/ embedded in concrete as indicated in

construction drawings/ as directed by the Purchaser. These inserts comprise
plates, angles, pipe sleeves, anchor bolt assemblies etc. All inserts are required

SECTION: D1
SHEET 8 OF 22
to be supplied and fabricated by the Contractor. These would be indicated

clearly on the construction drawings.
4.2
The rate quoted by the Bidder for concrete works shall hold good for accurately
fixing the inserts at the correct levels/ alignment and shall include the cost of any
temporary supports/ anchors such as bars including cutting, bending, welding,
etc as required.
4.3
Steel templates shall be used by the Contractor to locate and very accurately
position bolts, groups of bolts, inserts, embedded parts, etc at his cost. Such
templates shall be got previously approved by the Purchaser. Templates shall
invariably be supported such that the same is not disturbed due to vibration,
movement of labourers, materials, shuttering work, reinforcement, etc while
concreting. The Contractor will have to suitably bend, cut or otherwise adjust the
reinforcement in concrete at the location of inserts, as directed by the
Purchaser. If the Purchaser so directs, the inserts will have to be welded to
reinforcement to keep these in place. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
accuracy of dimensions, levels, alignments and centre lines of the inserts in
accordance with the drawings and for maintenance of the same until the
erection of equipment/ structure or final acceptance by the Purchaser.
4.4
The Contractor shall ensure proper protection of all bolts, inserts, etc from
weather by greasing or other approved means such as applying white lead putty
and wrapping them with gunny bags or canvas or by other means as directed by
the Purchaser to avoid damage due to movement of his labourers, materials,
equipment, etc. No extra claim from the Contractor on this account shall be
entertained. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all damage caused to
bolts, inserts, etc due to his negligence and in case damage does occur, they
shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Purchaser at the Contractor's cost.
4.5
Cut-outs, chamfers, pockets, etc shall be left as indicated in the drawings and
no extra cost shall be payable for providing these at their correct locations. The
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the cut-outs from
accidentally getting filled up or the edges getting broken.
5.0
INDIAN PATENT STONE FLOORING
5.1
Cement concrete for Indian Patent Stone Floor finish shall be 40 mm thick and
the mix shall be in the proportion of 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 sand : 4 stone
aggregates).
5.2
The sand shall consist of clean, hard, durable particles and shall be free from
impurities. It shall all pass through 4.75 mm mesh IS sieve and not more than
10% shall pass through a 300 micron IS sieve and not more than 5% shall pass
through a 150 micron sieve but shall be well graded within these limits.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 9 OF 22
5.3
The coarse aggregate shall consist of quality stones passing through a 10 mm

IS sieve with not more than 10% passing through a 4.75 mm IS sieve. The
aggregates shall be hard, durable, clean and free from any deleterious matter.
5.4
The concrete shall be of the driest consistency with which it is possible to work.
5.5
When the finish is to be laid monolithic with the base concrete, it shall be placed
within 1.1/2 hours of laying the base concrete, which at the time of placing the
topping shall be still plastic but sufficiently firm to withstand the weight of a man.
If there is any excess of water or laitance on the surface, it shall be removed.
5.6
When the finish is to be laid after the base concrete has hardened, the surface
must be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt and loose particles and then soaked with
water overnight.
5.7
Before placing the patent stone floor finish, a 1:1 cement sand grout shall be
thoroughly scrubbed into the prepared surface of the base concrete just ahead
of the finish.
5.8
The topping shall then be laid, very thoroughly tamped, struck off level and the
surface floated with a wooden float. The topping shall be as indicated on the
drawings. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to detect any
unevenness in the surface and immediately made good.
5.9
When the topping is laid over hardened concrete, it shall be laid in alternate
bays not exceeding 3.4 sqm in area, the intermediate bays being laid after two
days. The forms used, which come in contact with concrete, shall be suitably
smeared with soap solution or non-staining oil before concreting. The topping
shall have butt joints between bays and shall butt against the masonry walls,
which shall not be plastered.
5.10
After the topping has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregate particles from
being displaced and excess of fine materials from working to the surface,
finishing with steel trowel shall be commenced. This operation shall be
performed with heavy pressure to produce a dense, smooth, watertight surface
free from blemishes.
5.11
On no account shall wet cement or dry cement and sand mixture be sprinkled
over the surface with the object of absorbing the excess moisture, for hastening
the time of trowelling or for obtaining a smooth surface.
5.12
Immediately after the floor surface is finished, it shall be protected from rapid
drying and as soon as the surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage
to it, it shall be kept continuously moist for at least ten days.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 10 OF 22
5.13
The measurement shall be done in square metre correct to two places of

decimal of the area of floor finish.
6.0
PRE-CAST RCC ROOFING UNITS AND OTHER STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
6.1
General
These specifications cover the furnishing of all labour, materials and
equipments, manufacture, curing, storage, handling and erection of pre-cast
concrete roofing units and other structural members.
6.2
Codes of practice
The work shall be done in accordance with IS: 456 / IS: 10297. However, the
provisions of this specification shall take precedence over the provisions of the
Codes of Practice.
6.3
Job Planning
6.3.1
The Contractor shall carefully plan his work in minute detail covering all stages
of construction. Before the erection work starts, the casting yard should have
been completed and should be in a smooth working order. It should be well laid
out and so planned that work on any unit shall not affect the work on adjacent
units. Adequate weather protection should also be provided.
6.3.2
Working details of erection method, devices, attachments, etc shall be worked

out well in advance and got approved by the Purchaser. It shall be clearly
understood that the Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the planning and
safety, timely and successful completion of the work. His responsibility in this
regard shall not be absolved by the approval by the Purchaser to any of the
Contractor's planning methods, suggestions, details, etc.
6.3.3
The Contractor shall submit to the Purchaser a detailed drawing including a

write-up clearly specifying his layout plan and details of casting yard, curing
pond, method of casting, storing and handling the pre-cast units. He shall further
submit from time to time such additional details as may be called for by the
Purchaser.
6.3.4
The pre-cast units shall be cast near the work site within the plant area by the
Contractor. Costs of transporting, loading, unloading, damage in handling, etc
shall be included in the tendered unit rates and will not be paid for separately by
the Purchaser.
6.4
Moulds

SECTION: D1
SHEET 11 OF 22
6.4.1
The moulds should be carefully manufactured to tolerances acceptable to

Purchaser. They must be sturdy in construction to withstand the required
number of re-uses. They should be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of grout of
mortar during placing and compacting of concrete. Higher pressures and greater
strains in the side formwork during vibration shall also be considered in the
design of the moulds.
6.4.2
The Contractor shall have enough number of moulds for each type of unit
proposed. This shall be carefully worked out to the satisfaction of the Purchaser
duly considering deshuttering period, number of units to be cast, time schedule,
etc. If at any stage the Purchaser considers that additional moulds are required,
the same shall be immediately provided by the Contractor at no extra cost.
6.4.3
The number of re-uses to be permitted for any type of mould shall be decided by
the Purchaser and shall be binding on the Contractor. For steel moulds, more
than 45 uses will not be permitted.
6.4.4
Bond preventive, which does not discolour the surfaces and which is approved
by Purchaser may be used on the mould surface. Easy removal of the flat units
may not still be possible due to the "suction" created by the differential
atmospheric pressure. Air or water forced between the casting and the mould
equalises the pressures and destroys the "suction", and for this purpose, air
chambers may be provided by the Contractor at the centre of the mould,
connected by means of suitable pipes to a compressed air source.
6.4.5
The mould shall have provisions to hold firmly and maintain all projecting
reinforcement or other inter-connecting devices together with bolts, fixing blocks,
etc so that they are within the specified tolerances on completion. All inserts, etc
shall be checked as per drawing before erecting the pre-cast units.
6.4.6
The method of fixing and holding the inserts (required for lifting, joint
connections, etc) in their correct location during concreting, shall be carefully
planned. Through ties will not be permitted.
6.5
Dimensional Tolerances
6.5.1
The moulds shall be so constructed that each finished unit has the exact
dimensions shown on approved drawings within the tolerances as to the length,
cross sections, straightness or bow, squareness, length of shorter sides, twist,
flatness and the position of reinforcement and inserts, mentioned herein below:
6.5.2
Length
Up to 3m
3 m to 4.5 m
4.5 m to 6 m
: 6 mm
: 9 mm
: 12 mm

SECTION: D1
SHEET 12 OF 22
Additional for every

subsequent 6 m
: 6 mm
6.5.3
Cross Section (Each direction)

Up to 50 cm
: 6 mm
50 cm to 75 cm
: 9 mm
subsequent 25 cm : 3 mm
6.5.4
Straightness or bow (Deviation from intended line)

Up to 3m
3 m to 6 m
6 m to 12 m
subsequent 6 m
6.5.5
: 6 mm
: 9 mm
: 12 mm
: 6 mm
Squareness
When considering the squareness of a corner, the longer of the two adjacent
sides being checked should be taken as the base line. The shorter side should
not vary in its distance from a perpendicular by more than the following length of
shorter sides:
Upto and including 1.2 m
: 6 mm
Over 1.2 m but less than 2 m

2 m and over
: 9 mm
: 12 mm
For the purpose of this requirement, any error due to lack of straightness should
be ignored; squareness should be measured with respect to the straight lines,
which are most nearly parallel with the features being checked.
6.5.6
Twist
Any corner should not be out by more than the tolerance stated from the plane
containing the other three corners
Up to 60 cm wide and
Up to 6 m in length
: 6 mm
Over 60 cm wide and

for any length
: 12 mm

SECTION: D1
SHEET 13 OF 22
6.5.7
Flatness
The maximum deviation from a 1.5m straight edge placed in any position on
nominally plane surface should not exceed 6 mm.
6.5.8
Position of Reinforcement
Tolerance for the position of reinforcement shall not exceed those specified in
the drawing, or those below, whichever are smaller:
(a) Cover - the actual concrete cover to all steel at any point should not be
smaller than the required nominal cover by more than 3 mm.
(b) The effective depth of fully or nearly fully stressed tensile reinforcement
should not be less than that given on the drawings by an amount exceeding
5% of the effective depth of the section being considered or 6 mm,
whichever is greater.
6.5.9
Position of connecting bolts and other devices

If and where proposed, the position of individual connecting bolts, bolt holes,
projecting steel or other devices in any associate group (e.g.: joint of two precast units) should be within 3 mm of its true position in the group in which they
are cast. The longitudinal location of any such group should be within 6 mm of
its true position in the unit in which it is cast, provided that such tolerance does
no adversely affect the proper assembly of the whole structure.
6.6
Placing the reinforcement
6.6.1
Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in position within the specified

tolerance. Where practicable, the reinforcement shall be pre-formed into rigid
cages, spot welding being permissible for this purpose. Where welded wire
fabric is proposed, the mesh shall be bent to shape before placing in the mould.
Care shall be taken in assembling the cage because the tolerances for placing
are quite small. Where tying wire or clips are used, care shall be taken to ensure
that the projecting ends do not encroach into the concrete cover.
6.6.2
Provisions shall be made to ensure that the reinforcements are maintained in

their correct position during concreting. Spacer blocks made of mortar
comparable in strength and durability with main concrete shall be used to have
uniform and required cover. Other kinds of spacers shall be subject to approval
by the Purchaser.
6.7
Concrete placement
6.7.1
The moulds must be thoroughly cleaned of all rubbish before concrete is placed.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 14 OF 22
6.7.2
Any means, which will mechanically distribute the concrete, is satisfactory. The
vibration shall be done by internal vibrations or a surface vibrator approved by
Purchaser.
6.7.3
The method of placing concrete shall conform to specification for "Concrete &
Allied Works".
6.8
Surface finish
A perfect and smooth finish shall be achieved by the use of high quality concrete
and by using properly designed moulds having a hard, smooth surface. The
concrete surfaces shall be smooth and even. Only very minor surface blemishes
may occur and there should be no staining or decolouration from the bond
preventive. Minor surface defects shall be made good, subject to the approval of
the Purchaser, provided the strength, durability and appearance are not
impaired by such defects.
6.9
Code Marking
Each unit shall be clearly marked. The code shall include a letter identifying the
type of casting, the mould number, the casting date and a directional mark for
orientation during erection.
6.10
Removing moulds
6.10.1
The side shuttering may be removed 24 hours after casting. The casting can be
lifted from the mould after the concrete has attained sufficient strength to take
lifting and handling stresses depending on the self weight and method of
handling. Generally, the bottom shutter may be removed 7 days after casting.
However, the Purchaser may permit earlier removal, if he is convinced that no
damage will be caused to the casting by taking special care during handling.
However, the Purchaser may also require the de-shuttering periods to be
extended if he is not satisfied with the product and considers such extension
desirable.
6.10.2
All moulds shall be removed without any shock, jolt or vibration that might
damage the concrete and cause cracking.
6.11
Curing
6.11.1
Curing of concrete shall start as soon as the concrete has sufficiently set, even if
the castings have not been removed from the moulds. The surfaces should not,
however be ponded during the first 24 hours.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 15 OF 22
6.11.2
There should be two storage/ curing areas, one under cover and one in the
open air. The covered area may be erected by tarpaulin supported on a light
frame-work and should be large enough to contain the output of the casting yard
for a period of six days.
6.11.3
The method of curing should be such that the pre-cast unit will remain
undistorted, be free from cracks, and will not cause, by its shrinkage undue
cracking in the structure into which it is to be built and that the concrete will have
satisfactory durability and strength.
6.11.4
The general method of curing in the covered shed will be to cover the entire
surface of the castings with damp hessian, canvas, gunny bags or similar
absorbent material kept constantly damp. Alternatively, a curing pond may be
used. If the products are stacked in tiers, it is necessary to ensure that as much
as possible surface of the concrete is thoroughly wetted. The castings may
preferably be covered, after dampening, by an impermeable sheet like
polythene, to retain the moisture escaping from the concrete.
6.11.5
Membrane curing compounds, if proposed, shall be subject to approval by the

Purchaser before being adopted.
6.11.6
After six days under cover the products shall be kept moist in the open for a
further period of 4 days.
6.11.7
The Purchaser may require the curing period extended if the concrete is to be
stored under abnormal conditions or is likely to suffer distortion or cracking from
differences in temperature, moisture content or restrain within the concrete.
6.11.8
Steam curing may be resorted to at the option of the Contractor.
6.11.9
If the concrete is cured at an elevated temperature, use of calcium chloride as

an admixture is prohibited.
6.12
Storage
6.12.1
The products shall be stored for at least three weeks before erection.
6.12.2
They may be stored in a vertical position supported by an `A' frame. If stored in

horizontal position, they should rest on proper packing both on the ground as
well as between castings. Particular attention is directed to the inherent dangers
of breakage and damage caused by supporting on other than two positions and
also by careless placing of packing (e.g.: not vertically one above the other).
Packing pieces should not discolour, disfigure or otherwise permanently mark
the units. Units should also be properly protected against damage being caused
by the local crushing and chafing effects of lifting and transport equipment.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 16 OF 22
6.12.3
Whatever the type of storing adopted, the castings should be placed on a level
and rigid bed, otherwise they are liable to distort or crack. The storage shall be
so arranged as to permit the removal of the oldest castings without disturbing
others. During handling, care shall be taken to avoid damage by shock loading,
at all stages and from whatever cause.
6.13
Protection
6.13.1
At all stages and until completion of the work, pre-cast units and any other
concrete associated therewith should be properly protected. This is particularly
important in the case of thin units. The protection can be provided by timber
strips, hessian, etc but must not be such as will damage, mark or otherwise
disfigure the concrete.
6.13.2
The Contractor shall perform quality control tests covering the entire process of
manufacture and keep records certified by the Purchaser.
6.14
Load Tests
6.14.1
In addition to the quality concrete tests prescribed in Concrete and allied works
specification, load tests shall be carried out on pre-cast elements as indicated
below.
6.14.2
At least 1% of the number of pre-cast units in each type shall be tested either to
destruction or for test loads to be specified later as the case may be.
6.14.3
Non-destructive test:
Pre-cast member shall be loaded for one hour at its full span with a load equal
to full dead load (weight of screed and finishes) plus 1.25 times the live load
considered in the design. Recovery, one hour after removal of test load, should
not be less than 75% of the maximum deflection recorded during the test or (if
this cannot be achieved) of the maximum deflection during a re-test.
6.14.4
Destructive test:
Pre-cast member shall be loaded at its full span with a total load of 95% of the
design ultimate load within 15 minutes of time when this test becomes operative.
A deflection exceeding 1/40th of the test span shall be regarded as failure.
6.14.5
Before starting of the test, the Contractor shall submit a detailed note on
procedure of testing, manner of application of the loads, position of instruments,
supporting stands, etc and obtain Purchaser's approval in writing. Provision
shall also be made for safety posts between the bearing supports in the event of
a sudden collapse of the member under test. The height of bearing supports

SECTION: D1
SHEET 17 OF 22
shall be at least 1.0 metre to ensure free access to the lower surface of the
member to be tested.
6.14.6
Load tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Purchaser or his
authorised representative. Purchaser shall have right to select any unit for
testing.
6.14.7
In the event of specimen not fulfilling the test conditions, Purchaser shall select
another sample from the batch and order for testing. If the second specimen
also does not fulfil the test conditions, Purchaser shall have right to reject the
entire batch of the pre-cast units and in such case the total cost of pre-cast units
in that batch including reinforcements and steel embedment shall be recovered
from the Contractor. However, cement and steel consumed shall be taken in
accounting as wastage.
6.14.8
Quoted rates in "Schedule of Quantities" for pre-cast members shall be deemed

to include the cost of testing, etc complete. No separate payment shall be made
for tests.
6.14.9
The Purchaser reserves the right to get any specimen tested independently
through an approved laboratory. The right of acceptance or otherwise of the precast element shall rest with the Purchaser.
6.14.10 The Contractor shall provide at his cost, all instruments, equipments, materials,
loading platforms, loads, etc that may be required to satisfactorily conduct the
load test. The instruments shall be recently calibrated and the calibration
certificate shall be submitted by the Contractor. The instruments shall be of
accuracy as shall be specified by the Purchaser.
6.14.11 If a unit is damaged, cracked, etc the same may be rejected by the Purchaser.
Such rejected units shall be forthwith removed from the site of works by the
Contractor. Satisfactorily withstanding a load test shall not be considered as
ground for accepting any unit rejected by the Purchaser.
6.15
Erection
6.15.1
Erection and jointing of individual units shall be done true to the alignment. The
method and sequence of erection shall be approved by Purchaser.
6.15.2
Every care shall be taken to see that no damage results during any stage of
erection. The Contractor shall submit a detailed erection scheme well in
advance of erection. His methods and equipment shall take into account all
forces that may occur during erection.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 18 OF 22
6.15.3
The erection procedure should ensure that the units are laterally stable and
would not buckle, twist, etc. All handling, erection, etc shall be by mechanical
means.
6.15.4
After erection of pre-cast units at site, the hooks provided for lifting purposes
shall be cut flush to the surface of the slab, if so directed by the Purchaser.
6.16
Measurement and Payment
6.16.1
The measurement of this item shall be on the basis of volume in cubic metres
nearest to second place of decimal. No separate payment shall be made for
welding, grouting, jointing of different units, etc unless otherwise specified in
Section - C.
6.16.2
The quoted rates by the Bidder shall be deemed to include all items of
manufacture, transport, curing, handling and erection of the pre-cast units
including all allied operation including testing, etc complete to satisfactorily
complete the work to the approval of the Purchaser.
7.0
FALSE CEILING
7.1
Fibre Board False Ceiling
7.1.1
The hard fibre board to be used in false ceiling shall be of an approved

manufacture as per IS: 1658 or as approved by the Purchaser.
7.1.2
The fibre boards shall be made from substances compound of vegetable fibres
such as wood pulp, wood chips or shavings bonded by a synthetic resin.
Veneered particle boards shall have a core of particle board sandwiched or
glued in between two or more veneers on outer surfaces.
7.1.3
The fibre boards shall be fire resistant, termite and insect resistant, weather
resistant, acoustically satisfactory, dimensionally stable, warp-free, easily
workable, treated with anti-fungus chemicals, heat insulated and of adequate
structural strength and should have good surface finish as approved by the
Purchaser.
7.1.4
The size of fibre board ceiling tile shall generally be 600 x 600 x 12 mm thick. All
types of boards and ceiling tiles shall be stored flat under cover at a clean dry
place on firm ground. The Contractor should ensure that boards are not stacked
on termite infected, wet or loose ground. The boards should be always carried
on edges.
7.2
Pre-Painted Coil coated Steel false ceiling

SECTION: D1
SHEET 19 OF 22
7.2.1
The false ceiling frame work shall be designed to withstand the self weight, and
weight of AC grills, lighting fixtures, etc.
7.2.2
Based on the outline duly furnished by Purchaser locating AC grills, lighting

fixtures, etc. the Contractor shall prepare detailed working drawings including
framing around openings access doors etc. Only on obtaining approval on the
drawings shall the fabrication commence.
7.3
Gypsum Plaster Board False Ceiling
7.3.1
Gypsum Plaster Board to be used in false ceiling shall be of an approved

manufacturer and approved by Purchaser.
7.3.2
The boards shall be of maximum size 1220 mm x 1800 mm and 12.5 mm thick
with tapered edges. They should be dimensionally stable, warp free, easily
workable and should have a good surface finish.
7.3.3
The boards should

recommendations.
8.0
THERMAL INSULATION FOR CEILING
8.1.1
Thermal Insulation material consisting of boards, slabs and rolls shall be of

approved manufacture and shall be of approved thermal conductivity for
creating the required design conditions as shown in the drawings and as
approved by the Purchaser. The insulation shall be provided wherever shown on
the drawings and as directed by the Purchaser.
8.1.2
The quoted rate shall include supply, delivery, cutting and fixing of all materials
for covering the roof with thermal insulation material, including wood pegs,
slotted angles, G.I rawl plugs, wood/ coach screws, lacing wire, G.I washers,
wire mesh, any covering as stipulated in schedule of prices and quantities,
finishing at all levels and elevation, etc complete.
9.0
TILED ROOF WATER-PROOFING WITH BRICK BAT COBA
9.1
In case of works where tiled roof water proofing with brick bat coba are
specified, brick bat coba of average thickness specified in the drawings shall be
laid out to slopes indicated therein. Preparation of brick bat shall be 2 parts of
brick bat to one part of lime. The brick bats shall be hard, well burnt and of size
varying from 12 mm to 25 mm. Lime shall be of best quality hydraulic lime
double ground. While preparing brick bat concrete, jaggery in proportion
indicated by Engineer shall be added. The brick bat coba shall then be laid to
slopes and beaten at least 48 hours after laying.
be
carried
and
stacked
as
per
manufacturer's

SECTION: D1
SHEET 20 OF 22
9.2
Over this shall be laid a 12 mm thick layer of 1:3 mix cement mortar with 5%
crude oil by weight of cement mixed in mortar.
9.3
Machine pressed clay tile 20 mm thick shall be laid over this and joints pointed
with cement mixed with crude oil.
9.4
Contractor shall give a guarantee for water-proofing for a minimum period of 7

years against bad and faulty material and construction and shall rectify the work
at his own cost during the guaranteed period.
9.5
Payment for work executed would be made for projected area only between the
inside of plaster walls. No payment would be made for rounding off at the
corners.
10.0
MISCELLANEOUS WALL FINISHINGS
10.1
Sandtex Matt, Gandtex Matt, etc
10.1.1
Composition
Sandtex Matt, Gandtex Matt, etc shall comprise of hard fine aggregates derived
from granite and other ingredients, which together give it resistance to the
elements and are bound together with a suitable resin adhesive, which imparts a
high degree of flexibility. All the afore-mentioned constituents shall produce a full
bodied paint film, opacity being provided by addition of titanium dioxide in
suitable proportions. The resulting mixture should result in a rich, thick coating of
reinforced toughness, weather resistance and durability.
10.1.2
Application
Sandtex Matt, Gandtex Matt, etc have considerable body and should be well
stirred in the containers, without addition of thinners, before applying.
Application shall be by brush and then finished off by roller to give a fine texture.
However, 0.5 litres of clean water, free from impurities, may be added when the
surface to receive the finish is absorbent or during hot weather. Test panels, 1 m
x 1 m size, shall be prepared by the Contractor, and approval from Engineer
obtained before commencing actual application of the finish.
10.1.3
Method of Measurement
Method of measurement shall be as outlined for painting, etc.
10.2
Vineratex, Granotex, etc
10.2.1
Vineratex/ Granotex finish where indicated in schedule and drawings shall be

applied with materials as manufactured by approved agencies. Stone finish

SECTION: D1
SHEET 21 OF 22
unless otherwise specifically mentioned shall be used. Sample of materials shall

be furnished to the Engineer for approval and then the bulk purchase made. The
Contractor shall prepare test panels 1 m x 1 m size and obtain approval from the
Engineer before commencing actual application of each type of Vineratex finish.
The thickness of the finish shall not be less than 3 mm.
All surfaces to be finished shall be smooth and level and shall be thoroughly
cleaned to remove any grease, dirt or loose particles and shall be free from
surface water. Extremely porous surfaces shall be pre-sealed with a thin coat of
suitable primer. Previously painted surfaces shall be prepared by scrapping off
all loose paints, washing with a suitable detergent and rinsing thoroughly with
clean water. The finish shall be applied strictly as per manufacturer's
instructions. The work shall start at top and worked downward.
10.2.2
Method of measurement for Vineratex, Granotex, etc finish shall be as outlined
for plastering.
10.3
Vinyl Wall Paper
10.3.1
Vinyl wall paper shall be of approved pattern, thickness, colour and

manufacture. Samples of wall paper to be used shall be supplied to Purchaser
for approval. Wall paper shall be applied to the wall surface finished with lime
punning (Neeru) with approved adhesives and strictly as per manufacturer's
instructions, free from creases, folds, etc. Joints in wall paper shall be truly
aligned. Before laying wall paper, Contractor shall obtain approval of Engineer
regarding the scheme for laying the wall paper, location of joints, etc.
10.3.2
Method of measurement for Vinyl wall paper shall be as outlined for painting.
11.0
CARBORUNDUM TILE FLOORING
11.1
The finish shall consist of manufactured Carborundum tile and an under-bed.
11.2
Thickness
The total average thickness including under-bed shall be minimum 50 mm for
floors, and 30 mm for walls unless otherwise specified.
11.3
Tiles Carborundum
11.3.1
The tiles shall be machine made under quality control in a shop. The tiles shall
be pressed hydraulically to a minimum of 140 kg per sqcm.

SECTION: D1
SHEET 22 OF 22
11.3.2
Each tile shall bear on its back, permanent and legible trade mark of the
manufacturer. All angles of the tiles shall be right angle, all edges sharp and
true, colour and texture of the wearing face uniform throughout. Maximum
tolerance/ allowance for length and breadth shall be 1 mm and the thickness
+3 mm along the wearing surface of the tile and the wearing surface shall be
planed free from pin holes and other blemishes.
11.3.3
The tiles shall be composed of a backing and topping. The topping shall be of
uniform thickness not less than 6 mm. The total thickness including the topping
shall be as specified but not less than 20 mm in any case.
11.3.4
The backing shall be composed of 1 part ordinary gray cement, 2 parts sand
and 4 parts of stone chips by volume and mixed with water.
11.3.5
The topping shall be Carborundum grit (passing 1.18 mm mesh but retained on
0.6 mm mesh) and shall be sprinkled on the surface at the rate of 1.35 kg/sqm
and worked into the surface, to achieve a smooth and uniform surface.
11.3.6
The tile shall be cured at the shop for at least 14 days before delivery to the site.
Tiles shall be packed properly to prevent damage during transit and storage.
The tiles must be stored carefully to prevent staining by damp, rust, oil and
grease or other chemicals. Tiles made in each batch shall be kept and used
separately so that the colour of each area of the floor may remain uniform.
The manufacturer shall supply along with the tiles the grout mix containing
cement and pigment in exact proportions as used in topping of the tiles. The
containers of the grout mix shall be suitably marked to relate it to the particular
type and batch of tiles.

SECTION: D2
SHEET 1 OF 10
EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION AND FILLING
1.0
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements of earthwork in excavation
in different materials, site grading, filling in areas as shown in drawing, filling
back around foundations and in plinths, conveyance and disposal of surplus
soils or stacking them properly as shown on the drawings and as directed by
the Purchaser and all operations covered within the intent and purpose of this
specification.
2.0
APPLICABLE CODES
The following Indian Standard Codes, unless otherwise specified herein, shall
be applicable. In all cases, the latest revision of the codes shall be referred to.
1.
IS: 783
Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes
2.
IS: 1200
3.
IS: 3764
Excavation work - Code of safety
4.
IS: 2720
Methods of test for soils
Part - 1
Preparation of dry soil samples for various tests
Part - 2
Determination of water content
Part - 4
Grain size analysis
Part - 5
Determination of liquid and plastic limit
Part - 7
Determination of water content - dry density relation using

light compaction
Determination of dry density - moisture content relation by
constant weight of soil method
Determination of density index (relative density) of cohesion
less soils
Determination of dry density of soils in place, by the sand
replacement method
Determination of density in place by the ring and water
replacement method
Determination of density of soil in place by rubber balloon
method
Method of measurement of building and civil Purchasering.

works
Part - 1
Earthwork
Part - 27 Earthwork done by mechanical appliances
Part - 9
Part - 14
Part - 28
Part - 33
Part - 34
Part - 38
Compaction control test (Hilf Method)

SECTION: D2
SHEET 2 OF 10
3.0
DRAWINGS
The Purchaser will furnish drawings wherever, in his opinion, such drawings
are required to show areas to be excavated/ filled, grade level, sequence of
priorities, etc. The Contractor shall follow strictly such drawings.
4.0
GENERAL
4.1
The Contractor shall furnish all tools, plants, instruments, qualified supervisory
personnel, labour, materials any temporary works, consumables, any and
everything necessary, whether or not such items are specifically stated herein
for completion of the job in accordance with the specification requirements.
4.2
The Contractor shall carry out the survey of the site before excavation and set
properly all lines and establish levels for various works such as earthwork in
excavation, for grading, basement, foundations, plinth filling, roads, drains,
cable trenches, pipelines etc. Such survey shall be carried out by taking
accurate cross sections of the area perpendicular to established reference/ grid
lines at 8 m. intervals or nearer as determined by the Purchaser based on
ground profile. These shall be checked by the Purchaser and thereafter
properly recorded.
4.3
The excavation shall be done to correct lines and levels. This shall also
include, where required, proper shoring to maintain excavations and also the
furnishing, erecting and maintaining of substantial barricades around excavated
areas and warning lamps at night for ensuring safety.
4.4
The rates quoted shall also include for dumping of excavated materials in
regular heaps, bunds, riprap with regular slopes as directed by the Purchaser,
within the lead specified and levelling the same so as to provide natural
drainage. Rock/ soil excavated shall be stacked properly as directed by the
Purchaser. As a rule, all softer material shall be laid along the centre of heaps,
the harder and more weather resisting materials forming the casing on the
sides and the top. Rock shall be stacked separately.
5.0
CLEARING
5.1
The area to be excavated, filled shall be cleared of fences, trees, plants, logs,
stumps, bush, vegetation, rubbish, slush, etc and other objectionable matter. If
any roots or stumps of trees are met during excavation, they shall also be
removed. The material so removed shall be burnt or disposed off as directed by
the Purchaser. Where earth fill is intended, the area shall be stripped of all
loose/ soft patches, top soil containing objectionable matter/ materials before fill
commences.
6.
PRECIOUS OBJECTS, RELICS, OBJECTS OF ANTIQUITY, ETC

SECTION: D2
SHEET 3 OF 10
All gold, silver, oil, minerals, archaeological and other findings of importance,
trees cut or other materials of any description and all precious stones, coins,
treasures, relics, antiquities and other similar things which may be found in or
upon the site shall be the property of the Owner/Purchaser and the Contractor
shall duly preserve the same to the satisfaction of the Owner/Purchaser and
from time to time deliver the same to such person or persons as the
Owner/Purchaser may from time to time authorise or appoint to receive the
same.
7.0
CLASSIFICATION
7.1
All materials to be excavated shall be classified by the Purchaser, into one of

the following classes and shall be paid for at the rate tendered for that
particular class of material. No distinction shall be made whether the material is
dry, moist or wet. The decision of the Purchaser regarding the classification of
the material shall be final and binding on the Contractor and not be a subject
matter of any appeal or arbitration.
7.2
Any earthwork will be classified under any of the following categories:

(a) Ordinary and Hard Soils
These shall include all kinds of soils containing kankar, sand, silt, murrum
and/ or shingle, gravel, clay, loam, peat, ash, shale, etc which can generally
be excavated by spade, pick axes and shovel, and which is not classified
under "Soft and Decomposed Rock" and "Hard Rock" defined below. This
shall also include embedded rock boulders not longer than 1 metre in any
one direction and not more than 200 mm in any one of the other two
directions.
(b) Soft and Decomposed Rock
This shall include rock, boulders, slag, chalk, slate, hard mica schist, laterite
and all other materials which in the opinion of Purchaser is rock, but does
not need blasting and could be removed with picks, hammer, crow bars,
wedges and pneumatic breaking equipment. The mere fact that the
Contractor resorts to blasting for reasons of his own, shall not qualify for
classification under 'Hard Rock'.
This shall also include excavation in macadam and tarred roads and
pavements. This shall also include rock boulders not longer than 1 metre in
any direction and not more than 500 mm in any one of the other two
directions. Masonry to be dismantled will also be measured under this item.
(c) Hard Rock

SECTION: D2
SHEET 4 OF 10
This shall include all rock occurring in large continuous masses which
cannot be removed except by blasting for loosening it. Harder varieties of
rock with or without veins and secondary minerals which, in the opinion of
the Purchaser require blasting shall be considered as hard rock. Boulders
of rock occurring in such sizes and not classified under (a) and (b) above
shall also be classified as hard rock. Concrete work both reinforced and
unreinforced to be dismantled will be measured under this item, unless a
separate provision is made in the Schedule of Quantities.
8.0
EXCAVATION
8.1
All excavation work shall be carried out by mechanical equipment unless, in the
opinion of the Purchaser, the work involved and time schedule permit manual
work.
8.2
Excavation for permanent work shall be taken out to such widths, lengths,
depths and profiles as are shown on the drawings or such other lines and
grades as may be specified by the Purchaser. Rough excavation shall be
carried out to a depth 150 mm above the final level. The balance shall be
excavated with special care. Soft pockets shall be removed even below the
final level and extra excavation filled up as directed by the Purchaser. The final
excavation if so instructed by the Purchaser should be carried out just prior to
laying the mud mat.
8.3
The Contractor may, for facility of work or similar other reasons excavate, and
also backfill later, if so approved by the Purchaser, at his own cost outside the
lines shown on the drawings or directed by the Purchaser. Should any
excavation be taken below the specified elevations, the Contractor shall fill it
up, with concrete of the same class as in the foundation resting thereon, up to
the required elevation. No extra shall be claimed by the Contractor on this
account.
8.4
All excavation shall be done to the minimum dimensions as required for safety
and working facility. Prior approval of the Purchaser shall be obtained by the
Contractor in each individual case, for the method he proposes to adopt for the
excavation, including dimensions, side slopes, dewatering, disposal, etc. This
approval, however, shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for any consequent loss or damage. The excavation must be
carried out in the most expeditious and efficient manner. Side slopes shall be
as steep as will stand safely for the actual soil conditions encountered. Every
precaution shall be taken to prevent slips. If slips occur, the slipped material
shall be removed and the slope dressed to a modified stable slope. Removal of
the slipped earth will not be paid for if the slips are due to the negligence of the
Contractor.

SECTION: D2
SHEET 5 OF 10
8.5
Excavation shall be carried out with such tools, tackles and equipments as
described herein before. Blasting or other methods may be resorted to in the
case of hard rock; however not without the specific permission of the
Purchaser.
8.6
The Purchaser may also direct that in some extreme case, the rock may be
excavated by heating and sudden quenching for splitting the rock. Fire-wood
shall be used for burning and payment shall be made for such work as called
for in the schedule of quantities.
9.0
STRIPPING LOOSE ROCK
9.1
All loose boulders, semi-detached rocks (along with earthy stuff which might
move therewith) not directly in the excavation but so close to the area to be
excavated as to be liable, in the opinion of the Purchaser, to fall or otherwise
endanger the workmen, equipment, or the work, etc shall be stripped off and
removed away from the area of the excavation. The method used shall be such
as not to shatter or render unstable or unsafe the portion which was originally
sound and safe.
9.2
Any material not requiring removal as contemplated in the work, but which, in
the opinion of the Purchaser, is likely to become loose or unstable later, shall
also be promptly and satisfactorily removed as directed by the Purchaser. The
cost of such stripping will be paid for at the unit rates accepted for the class of
materials in question.
10.0
FILL, BACK FILLING AND SITE GRADING
10.1
General
All fill material will be subject to the Purchaser's approval. If any material is
rejected by the Purchaser, the Contractor shall remove the same forthwith from
the site at no extra cost to the Purchaser. Surplus fill material shall be
deposited/ disposed off as directed by the Purchaser after the fill work is
completed.
No earth-fill shall commence until surface water discharges and streams have
been properly intercepted or otherwise dealt with as directed by the Purchaser.
10.2
Material
To the extent available, selected surplus soils from excavated materials shall
be used as backfill. Fill material shall be free from clods, salts, sulphates,
organic or other foreign material. All clods of earth shall be broken or removed.
Where excavated material is mostly rock, the boulders shall be broken into

SECTION: D2
SHEET 6 OF 10
pieces not larger than 150 mm size, mixed with properly graded fine material
consisting of murrum or earth to fill up the voids and the mixture used for filling.
10.3
If any selected fill material is required to be borrowed, the Contractor shall

make arrangements for bringing such material from outside borrow pits. The
material and source shall be subject to prior approval of the Purchaser. The
approved borrow pit area shall be cleared of all bushes, roots of trees, plants,
rubbish, etc top soil containing salts/ sulphates and other foreign material shall
be removed. The materials so removed shall be burnt or disposed off as
directed by the Purchaser. The Contractor shall make necessary access roads
to borrow areas and maintain the same, if such access road does not exist, at
his cost.
10.4
Filling in pits and trenches around foundations of structures, walls etc

As soon as the work in foundations has been accepted and measured, the
spaces around the foundations, structures, pits, trenches etc shall be cleared of
all debris, and filled with earth in layers not exceeding 15 cm., each layer being
watered, rammed and properly consolidated, before the succeeding one is laid.
Each layer shall be consolidated to the satisfaction of the Purchaser. Earth
shall be rammed with approved mechanical compaction machines. Usually no
manual compaction shall be allowed unless the Purchaser is satisfied that in
some cases manual compaction by tampers cannot be avoided. The final
backfill surface shall be trimmed and levelled to proper profile as directed by
the Purchaser or indicated on the drawings.
10.5
Plinth filling
Plinth filling shall be carried out with approved material as described herein
before in layers not exceeding 15 cm, watered and compacted with mechanical
compaction machines. The Purchaser may however permit manual compaction
by hand tampers in case he is satisfied that mechanical compaction is not
possible. When filling reaches the finished level, the surface shall be flooded
with water, unless otherwise directed, for at least 24 hours allowed to dry and
then the surface again compacted as specified above to avoid settlements at a
later stage. The finished level of the filling shall be trimmed to the level/ slope
specified.
Where specified in the schedule of works, compaction of the plinth fill shall be
carried out by means of 12 tonne rollers smooth wheeled, sheep-foot or wobbly
wheeled rollers. In case of compaction of granular material such as sand and
gravel, vibratory rollers shall be used. A smaller weight roller may be used only
if permitted by the Purchaser. As rolling proceed water sprinkling shall be done
to assist consolidation. Water shall not be sprinkled in case of sandy fill.

SECTION: D2
SHEET 7 OF 10
The thickness of each unconsolidated fill layer can in this case be up to a

maximum of 300 mm. The Purchaser will determine the thickness of the layers
in which fill has to be consolidated depending on the fill material and equipment
used.
Rolling shall commence from the outer edge and progress towards the centre
and continue until compaction is to the satisfaction of the Purchaser, but in no
case less than 10 passes of the roller will be accepted for each layer.
The compacted surface shall be properly shaped, trimmed and consolidated to
an even and uniform gradient. All soft spots shall be excavated and filled and
consolidated.
At some locations/ areas it may not be possible to use rollers because of space
restrictions etc, the Contractor shall then be permitted to use pneumatic
tampers; rammers etc and he shall ensure proper compaction.
10.6
Sand filling in plinth and other places

At places backfilling shall be carried out with local sand if directed by the
Purchaser. The sand used shall be clean, medium grained and free from
impurities. The filled-in-sand shall be kept flooded with water for 24 hours to
ensure maximum consolidation. Any temporary work required to contain sand
under flooded condition shall be to the Contractor's account. The surface of the
consolidated sand shall be dressed to required level or slope. Construction of
floors or other structures on sand fill shall not be started until the Purchaser has
inspected and approved the fill.
10.7
Filling in trenches
Filling in trenches for pipes and drains shall be commenced as soon as the
joints of pipes and drains have been tested and passed. The backfilling
material shall be properly consolidated by watering and ramming, taking due
care that no damage is caused to the pipes.
Where the trenches are excavated in soil, the filling from the bottom of the
trench to the level of the centreline of the pipe shall be done by hand
compaction with selected approved earth in layers not exceeding 8 cm;
backfilling above the level of the centreline of the pipe shall be done with
selected earth by hand compaction or other approved means in layers not
exceeding 15 cm.
In case of excavation of trenches in rock, the filling up to a level 30 cm above
the top of the pipe shall be done with fine materials, such as earth, murrum etc.
The filling up of the level of the centreline of the pipe shall be done by hand
compaction in layers not exceeding 8 cm. whereas the filling above the

SECTION: D2
SHEET 8 OF 10
centreline of the pipe shall be done by hand compaction or approved means in

layers not exceeding 15 cm. The filling from a level 30 cm. above the top of the
pipe to the top of the trench shall be done by hand or other approved
mechanical methods with broken rock filling of size not exceeding 15 cm mixed
with fine material as available to fill up the voids.
Filling of the trenches shall be carried simultaneously on both sides of the pipe
to avoid unequal pressure on the pipe.
11.0
GENERAL SITE GRADING
11.1
Site grading shall be carried out as indicated in the drawings and as directed by
the Purchaser. Excavation shall be carried out as specified in the specification.
Filling and compaction shall be carried out as specified under Clause 10.0 and
elsewhere unless otherwise indicated below.
11.2
If no compaction is called for, the fill may be deposited to the full height in one
operation and levelled. If the fill has to be compacted, it shall be placed in
layers not exceeding 225 mm and levelled uniformly and compacted as
indicated in Clause 10.0 before the next layer is deposited.
11.3
To ensure that the fill has been compacted as specified, field and laboratory
tests shall be carried out by the Contractor at his cost.
11.4
Field compaction test shall be carried out at different stages of filling and also
after the fill to the entire height has been completed. This shall hold good for
embankments as well.
11.5
The Contractor shall protect the earth fill from being washed away by rain/
damaged in any other way. If any slip occurs, the Contractor shall remove the
affected material and make good the slip at his cost.
11.6
The fill shall be carried out to such dimensions and levels as indicated on the
drawings after the stipulated compaction. The fill will be considered as
incomplete if the desired compaction has not been obtained.
11.7
If specifically permitted by the Purchaser, compaction can be obtained by

allowing loaded trucks conveying fill or other material to ply over the fill area.
Even if such a method is permitted, it will be for the Contractor to demonstrate
that the desired/ specified compaction has been obtained. In order that the fill
may be reasonably uniform throughout, the material should be dumped in place
in approximately uniform layers. Traffic over the fill shall then be so routed to
compact the area uniformly throughout.
11.8
If so specified, the rock as obtained from excavation may be used for filling and
levelling for indicated grades without further breaking. In such an event, filling

SECTION: D2
SHEET 9 OF 10
shall be done in layers not exceeding 50 cm approximately. After rock filling to

the approximate level, indicated above has been carried out, the voids in the
rocks shall be filled with finer materials such as earth, broken stone, etc and
the area flooded so that the finer materials fill up the voids. Care shall be taken
to ensure that the finer fill material does not get washed out. Over the layer so
filled, a 100 mm thick mixed layer of broken material and earth shall be laid and
consolidation carried out by a 12 tonne roller. No less than twelve passes of the
roller shall be accepted before subsequent similar operations are taken up.
12.0
FIELD DENSITY
The compaction, only where so called for, in the schedule of quantities/ items
shall comply with the specified (Standard Proctor/ Modified Proctor) density at
moisture content differing not more than 4 percent from the optimum moisture
content. The Contractor shall demonstrate adequately at his cost, by field and
laboratory tests that the specified density has been obtained.
13.0
LEAD
Lead for deposition/ disposal of excavated material, shall be as specified in the
respective item of work. For the purpose of measurement of lead, the area to
be excavated or filled or area on which excavated material is to be deposited/
disposed off shall be divided into suitable blocks and for each of the blocks, the
distance between centrelines shall be taken as the lead which shall be
measured by the shortest straight line route on the plan and not the actual
route taken by the Contractor. No extra compensation is admissible on the
grounds that the lead including that for borrowed material had to be transported
over marshy or 'katcha' land/ route.
14.0
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
14.1
All excavation shall be measured net. Dimensions for purpose of payment shall
be reckoned on the horizontal area of the excavation at the base for
foundations of the walls, columns, footings, tanks, rafts or other foundations/
structures to be built, multiplied by the mean depth from the surface of the
ground in accordance with the drawings. Excavation in side slopes will not be
paid for. The Contractor may make such allowance in his rates to provide for
excavation in side slopes keeping in mind the nature of the soil and safety of
excavation. Reasonable working space, beyond concrete dimensions and
shuttering where considered necessary in the opinion of the Purchaser will be
allowed in excavation and considered for payment. However, if concreting is
proposed against the excavated sides, no such over-excavation will be
permitted. In such cases over-excavation shall be made good by the Contractor
with concrete of the same class as in the foundations at his cost.

SECTION: D2
SHEET 10 OF 10
14.2
Unless otherwise specified, the unit rates quoted for excavation in different
types of material shall also account for a basic lead of 100 metres for disposal
as specified or directed. Only leads beyond the basic lead of 100 metres will be
considered as extra lead and paid for at the rates quoted in the schedules.
14.3
Backfilling as per specification the sides of foundations of columns, footings,

structures, walls, tanks, rafts, trenches, etc with excavated material will not be
paid for separately. It shall be clearly understood that the rate quoted for
excavation including backfilling shall include stacking of excavated material as
directed, excavation/ packing of selected stacked material, conveying it to the
place of final backfill, compaction, etc as specified. As a rule material to be
backfilled shall be stacked temporarily within the basic lead of 100 metres
unless otherwise directed by the Purchaser. If the Purchaser directs/ permits a
lead of over 100 metres for such material, the conveyance of the material for
the extra distance over the basic lead of 100 metres for backfilling will be paid
for.
14.4
Payment for fill inside trenches, plinth or similar filling with selected excavated
material will be made for only compaction as specified/ directed. Cost of all
other operations shall be deemed to have been covered in the rate quoted for
excavation. Payment for this work will be made based on measurement of
plinth/ trench dimensions filled. The plinth ground levels shall be surveyed
before hand for this purpose. If no compaction is specified/ desired, such filling
will not be separately paid for. In such an event the fill shall be levelled/ finished
to the profile as directed at no extra cost.
14.5
Backfilling, plinth filling, etc with borrowed earth will be paid for at rates quoted.
The quoted rate shall include all operations such as clearing, excavation, lead
and transport, fill, compaction, etc as specified. Actual quantity of consolidated
filling or actual quantity or excavation in the borrow pits (less such top soil
which has been excavated and not used for filling) whichever is less shall be
measured and paid for in cubic metres. The lead, lift, etc shall be as indicated
in the schedule of quantities.
14.6
Actual quantity of consolidated sand filling shall be measured and paid in cubic
metres.

SECTION: D3
SHEET 1 OF 2
TIMBER SHORING
1.0
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements of timber shoring for
excavation of trenches, pits, open excavations, etc.
2.0
Close timbering shall be done by completely covering the sides of the trenches
and pits generally with short, upright members called 'polling boards'. These
shall be of minimum 25 cm x 4 cm sections or as directed by Engineer. The
boards shall generally be placed in position vertically side by side without any
gap on each side of the excavation and shall be secured by horizontal walling
of strong wood at maximum 1.2 metres spacing, strutted with ballies or as
directed by Engineer. The length of the ballie struts shall depend on the width
of the trench or pit. If the soil is very soft and loose, the boards shall be placed
horizontally against each side of the excavation and supported by vertical
waling, which in turn shall be suitably strutted. The lowest boards supporting
the sides shall be taken into the ground and no portion of the vertical side of
the trench or pit shall remain exposed, so as to render the earth liable to slip
out.
2.1
Timber shoring shall be 'close' or 'open' type, depending on the nature of soil
and the depth of pit or trench. The type of timbering shall be as approved by
Engineer. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to take all necessary steps
to prevent the sides of excavations, trenches, pits, etc from collapsing.
2.2
Timber shoring may be required to keep the sides of excavations vertical to

ensure safety of adjoining structures or to limit the slope of excavations or due
to space restrictions or for other reasons. Such shoring shall be carried out,
except in an emergency, only under instructions from Engineer.
2.3
The withdrawal of the timber shall be done very carefully to prevent the
collapse of the pit or trench. It shall be started at one end and proceeded with
systematically to the other end. Concrete or masonry shall not be damaged
during the removal of the timber. No claim shall be entertained for any timber
which cannot be withdrawn and is lost or buried.
2.4
In the case of open timbering, the entire surface of the side of trench or pit in
not required to be covered. The vertical boards of minimum 25 cm x 4 cm
sections shall be spaced sufficiently apart to leave unsupported strips of
maximum 50 cm average width. The detailed arrangement, sizes of the timber
and the spacing shall be subjected to the approval of Engineer. In all other
respects, specification for close timbering shall apply to open timbering.
2.5
In case of large pits and open excavations, where shoring is required for
securing safety of adjoining structures or for any other reasons and where the
planking for sides of excavations/ pits cannot be strutted against, suitable
inclined struts supported on the excavated bed shall be provided. Load from

SECTION: D3
SHEET 2 OF 2
TIMBER SHORING
such struts shall be suitably distributed on the bed to ensure no yielding of the
strut. If, however, Engineer directs any timbering to be left-in, keeping in mind
the type of construction or any other factor, Contractor shall be paid for at the
scheduled item-rate for such left-in timbering.
3.0
MEASUREMENT
The actual effective area of shored faces as approved by Engineer shall be
measured in sqm. The area of planking embedded in the bed/ sides of
excavation will not be considered, nor the areas supporting inclined struts in
case of large pits/ open excavation. All planks, boards, wallings, verticals,
struts, props and all other materials required for shoring and subsequent safe
dismantling and removal shall be included in the quoted unit rates. Unless
separately provided for in the Schedule of Prices, the cost of shoring/ strutting
shall be included in the item rate for excavation.

SECTION: D4
SHEET 1 OF 1
DEWATERING
1.0
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements of dewatering excavations in
general.
2.0
DEWATERING
2.1.
All excavations shall be kept free of water. Grading in the vicinity of excavation
shall be properly closed to prevent surface water running into excavated areas.
Contractor shall remove by pumping or other means approved by Engineer,
any water inclusive of rain water and subsoil water accumulated in excavation
and shall keep all excavations dewatered until the foundation work is
completed and backfilled. Sumps made for dewatering must be kept clear of
the excavations/ trenches required for further work. Method of pumping shall be
approved by Engineer; but in any case, the pumping arrangement shall be
such that there shall be no movement of subsoil or blowing in due to differential
head of water during pumping. Pumping arrangements shall be adequate to
ensure no delays in construction.
2.2.
When there is a continuous inflow of water and quantum of water to be handled

is considered in the opinion of Engineer, as large, well point system - Single
stage or Multi-stage, shall be adopted. Contractor shall submit to Engineer his
scheme of well point system including the stages, the spacing, number and
diameter of well points, headers, etc and the numbers, capacity and location of
pumps for approval. Unless separately provided for in the schedule of prices,
the cost of dewatering shall be included in the item rate for excavation.
3.0
MEASUREMENT
Unless separately provided for in the schedule of quantities, dewatering is
deemed to have been included in the unit rates quoted for excavation. If
separately provided for, the unit of measurement shall be as indicated in the
schedule of quantities.

SECTION: D5
SHEET 1 OF 1
RAIN WATER DRAINAGE
1.0
SCOPE
This section covers the drainage of rain water in excavated areas.
2.0
Grading in the vicinity of excavation shall be such as to exclude rain /surface

water draining into excavated areas. Excavation shall be kept clean of rain
and such water as the Contractor may be using for his work by suitably
pumping out the same at no extra cost to the owner. The scheme for pumping
and discharge of such water shall be approved by the Engineer.
3.0
Contractor shall ensure that the surface runoff outside the excavated pit/
working area shall be collected through a catch water drain excavated around
the working area and led away to a natural stream, at no extra cost to the
owner .Contractor shall maintain the catch water drains in proper condition
during the construction period at no extra cost to the Purchaser.
ISSUE
P1
TCE FORM NO. 329 R5
SECTION: D6
SHEET 1 OF 28

1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This Specification covers the general requirements for concrete using on-site
production facilities including requirements in regard to the quality, handling,
storage of ingredients, proportioning, batching, mixing, transporting, placing,
curing, protecting, repairing, finishing and testing of concrete; formwork,
requirements in regard to the quality, storage, bending and fixing of
reinforcement; grouting as well as mode of measurement and payment for
completed works.
1.2
It shall be very clearly understood that the specifications given herein are brief
and do not cover minute details. However, all works shall have to be carried out
in accordance with the relevant standards and codes of practices or in their
absence in accordance with the best accepted current engineering practices or
as directed by PURCHASER from time to time. The decision of PURCHASER
as regards the specification to be adopted and their interpretation and the
mode of execution of work shall be final and binding on CONTRACTOR and no
claim whatsoever will be entertained on this account.
2.0
APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
2.1
The following specifications, standards and codes, including all official

amendments/ revisions and other specifications & codes referred to therein,
should be considered a part of this specification. In all cases the latest issue/
edition/ revision shall apply. In case of discrepancy between this specification
and those referred to herein below or other specifications forming a part of this
bid document, this specification shall govern.
2.2
Materials
1)
IS: 269
Specification for 33 grade ordinary Portland

cement
2)
IS: 455
Specification for Portland slag cement
3)
IS: 1489
Specification for Portland

cement (Parts - 1 & 2)
4)
IS: 8112

cement
5)
IS: 12330
Specification for sulphate resisting Portland

cement
6)
IS: 383
Specification for coarse and fine aggregates

from natural sources for concrete
Pozzolana
SECTION: D6
SHEET 2 OF 28

2.3
7)
IS: 432
Specification for mild steel & medium tensile

steel bars and hard-drawn steel wires for
concrete reinforcement (Parts - 1 & 2)
8)
IS: 1786
Specification for high strength deformed

steel bars and wires for concrete
reinforcement
9)
IS: 1566
Specification for hard-drawn steel wire

fabric for concrete reinforcement (Part - II)
10)
IS: 9103
Specification for admixtures for concrete
11)
IS: 2645
Specification for integral cement waterproofing compounds
12)
IS: 4900
Specification for
shuttering work
13)
IS: 12269

cement
plywood
for
concrete
Material Testing
1)
IS: 4031
Methods of physical tests for hydraulic

cement (Parts - 1 to 15)
2)
IS: 4032
Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic

cement
3)
IS: 650
Specification for standard sand for testing of

cement
4)
IS: 2430
Methods for sampling of aggregates for

concrete
5)
IS: 2386
Methods of test for aggregates for concrete

(Parts - 1 to 8)
6)
IS: 3025
Methods of sampling and test (physical and

chemical) water used in industry
7)
IS: 6925
Methods of test for determination of water

soluble chlorides in concrete admixtures
SECTION: D6
SHEET 3 OF 28

2.4
Material Storage
1)
2.5
2.6
2.7
IS: 4082
Recommendations on stacking and storing

of construction materials at site
Concrete Mix Design

1)
IS: 10262
Recommended guidelines for concrete mix

design
2)
SP: 23
Handbook on Concrete Mixes
Concrete Testing
1)
IS: 1199
Method of
concrete
sampling
and
analysis
of
2)
IS: 516
Method of test for strength of concrete
3)
IS: 9013
Method of making, curing and determining

compressive strength of accelerated cured
concrete test specimens
4)
IS: 8142
Method of test for determining setting time

of concrete by penetration resistance
5)
IS: 9284
Method of test for abrasion resistance of

concrete
6)
IS: 2770
Methods of testing bond in reinforced

concrete
Equipment
1)
IS: 1791
Specification for batch type concrete mixers
2)
IS: 2438
Specification for roller pan mixer
3)
IS: 4925
Specification for concrete batching and

mixing plant
4)
IS: 5892
Specification for concrete transit mixer and

agitator
5)
IS: 7242
Specification for concrete spreaders

SECTION: D6
SHEET 4 OF 28
2.8
6)
IS: 2505
General
Requirements
vibrators: Immersion type
for
concrete
7)
IS: 2506
General Requirements for screed board

concrete vibrators
8)
IS: 2514
Specification for concrete vibrating tables
9)
IS: 3366
Specification for pan vibrators
10)
IS: 4656
Specification for form vibrators for concrete
11)
IS: 11993
Code of practice for use of screed board

concrete vibrators
12)
IS: 7251
Specification for concrete finishers
13)
IS: 2722
Specification for portable swing weigh batchers for concrete (single and double
bucket type)
14)
IS: 2750
Specifications for steel scaffoldings
Codes of Practice
1)
IS: 456
Code of practice for plain and reinforced

concrete
2)
IS: 457
Code of practice for general construction of

plain and reinforced concrete for dams and
other massive structures
3)
IS: 3370
Code of practice for concrete structures for

storage of liquids (Parts - 1 to 4)
4)
IS: 3935
Code of practice for composite construction
5)
IS: 2204
Code of practice for construction

reinforced concrete shell roof
6)
IS: 2210
Criteria for the design of reinforced concrete

shell structures and folded plates
7)
IS: 2502
Code of practice for bending and fixing of

bars for concrete reinforcement
of

SECTION: D6
SHEET 5 OF 28
2.9
2.10
8)
IS: 5525
Recommendation
for
detailing
of
reinforcement in reinforced concrete works
9)
IS: 2751
Code of practice for welding of mild steel

plain and deformed bars used for reinforced
concrete construction
10)
IS: 9417
Specification for welding cold worked bars

for reinforced concrete construction
11)
IS: 3558
Code of practice for use of immersion

vibrators for consolidating concrete
12)
IS: 3414
Code of practice for design and installation

of joints in buildings
13)
IS: 4326
Code of practice for earthquake resistant

design and construction of buildings
14)
IS: 4014
Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding

(Parts - 1 & 2)
15)
IS: 2571
Code of practice for laying in-situ cement

concrete flooring
16)
IS: 7861
Part - 1
Part - 2
Code of practice for extreme weather

concerning
Recommended practice for hot weather
concreting
Recommended practice for cold weather
concreting
Construction Safety
1)
IS: 3696
Safety code for scaffolds and ladders (Parts

- 1 & 2)
2)
IS: 7969
Safety code for handling and storage of

building materials
3)
IS: 8989
Safety code for erection of concrete framed

structures
Measurement

SECTION: D6
SHEET 6 OF 28
1)
IS: 1200
Method of measurement of building and

engineering works (Part - 1 to 12)
3.0
GENERAL
3.1
OWNER/CIPL/PURCHASER/CONSULTANT shall have the right at all times to

inspect all operations including the sources of materials, procurement, layout
and storage of materials, the concrete batching and mixing equipment, and the
quality control system. Such an inspection shall be arranged and
PURCHASERs approval obtained, prior to starting of concrete work. This shall,
however, not relieve CONTRACTOR of any of his responsibilities. All materials
which do not conform to this specification shall be rejected.
3.2
Materials should be selected so that they can satisfy the design requirements
of strength, serviceability, safety, durability and finish with due regards to the
functional requirements and the environmental conditions to which the structure
will be subjected. Materials complying with codes/ standards shall generally be
used. Other materials may be used after approval of the PURCHASER and
after establishing their performance suitability based on previous data,
experience or tests.
4.0
MATERIALS
4.1
Cement
4.1.1
Unless otherwise specified or called for by PURCHASER, cement shall be

ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS: 269, IS: 8112 or IS: 12269.
4.1.2
Where Portland Pozzolana or slag cements are used, it shall be ensured that
consistency of quality is maintained, there will be no adverse interactions
between the materials and the finish specified is not marred.
4.1.3
Only one type of cement shall be used in any one mix. The source of supply,
type or brand of cement within the same structure or portion thereof shall not
be changed without approval from PURCHASER.
4.1.4
Cement which is not used within 90 days from its date of manufacture shall be
tested at a laboratory approved by PURCHASER and until the results of such
tests are found satisfactory, it shall not be used in any work.
4.2
Aggregates (General)
4.2.1
Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring stones (crushed or uncrushed),

gravel and sand. They shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, clean, durable
against weathering, of limited porosity, free from dust/ silt/ organic impurities/
deleterious materials and conform to IS: 383. Aggregates such as slag,

SECTION: D6
SHEET 7 OF 28
crushed over burnt bricks, bloated clay ash, sintered fly ash and tiles shall not
be used.
4.2.2
Aggregates for special purposes shall be as specified elsewhere.
4.2.3
Aggregates shall be washed and screened before use where necessary or if

4.2.4
Aggregates containing reactive materials shall be used only after tests

conclusively prove that there will be no adverse affect on strength, durability
and finish including long term effects on the concrete.
4.2.5
The fineness modulus of sand shall neither be less than 2.2 nor more than 3.2.
4.2.6
The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as stated on the drawings, but
in no case greater than 1/4th of the minimum thickness of the member.
4.2.7
Plums 160 mm and above of a reasonable size may be used where directed.
Plums shall not constitute more than 20% by volume of the concrete.
4.3
Water
Water used for both mixing and curing shall conform to IS: 456. Potable waters
are generally satisfactory. Water containing any excess of acid, alkali, sugar or
salt shall not be used.
4.4
Reinforcement
4.4.1
Reinforcement bars shall conform to IS: 432 or IS: 786 and welded wire fabric
to IS: 1566 as shown or specified on the drawing.
4.4.2
All reinforcement shall be clean, free from pitting, oil, grease, paint, loose mill
scales, rust, dirt, dust or any other substance that will destroy or reduce bond.
4.4.3
If permitted by ENGINEER, welding of reinforcement shall be done in

accordance with IS: 2751 or IS: 9417 as applicable.
4.5
Admixtures
4.5.1
Accelerating, retarding, water-reducing and air entraining admixtures shall

conform to IS: 9103 and integral water proofing admixture to IS: 2645.
4.5.2
Admixtures may be used in concrete as per manufacturers instructions only

with the approval of ENGINEER based upon evidence that with the passage of
time neither the compressive strength nor its durability is reduced. An
admixtures suitability and effectiveness shall be verified by trial mixes with the

SECTION: D6
SHEET 8 OF 28
other materials used in the works. If two or more admixtures are to be used
simultaneously in the same concrete mix, their interaction shall be checked and
trial mixes done to ensure their compatibility. There should also be no increase
in risk of corrosion of the reinforcement or other embedments.
4.5.3
Calcium chloride shall not be used for accelerating set of the cement for any
concrete containing reinforcement or embedded steel parts. When calcium
chloride is permitted such as in mass concrete works, it shall be dissolved in
water and added to the mixing water by an amount not exceeding 1.5 percent
of the weight of the cement in each batch of concrete. The designed concrete
mix shall be corrected accordingly.
4.6
Wastage
Wastage allowance for cement and steel shall be as specified under Instruction
to Bidders.
5.0
SAMPLES AND TESTS
5.1
All materials used for the works shall be tested before use.
5.2
Manufacturers test certificate shall be furnished for each batch of cement/ steel
and when directed by PURCHASER, samples shall also be got tested by the
CONTRACTOR in a laboratory approved by PURCHASER; at no extra cost to
the PURCHASER. However, where material is supplied by PURCHASER, all
testing charges shall be borne by PURCHASER, but transportation of material
samples to the laboratory shall have to be done by CONTRACTOR at no extra
cost.
5.3
Sampling and testing shall be done as per IS: 2386 under the supervision of
ENGINEER. The cost of all tests, sampling, etc shall be borne by
CONTRACTOR.
5.4
Water to be used shall be tested to comply with requirements of IS: 456.
5.5
CONTRACTOR shall furnish manufacturers test certificates and technical

literature for the admixture proposed to be used. If directed, the admixture shall
be got tested at an approved laboratory at no extra cost.
6.0
STORING OF MATERIALS
6.1
All materials shall be stored in a manner so as to prevent its deterioration and

contamination which would preclude its use in the works. Requirements of IS:
4082 shall be complied with.

SECTION: D6
SHEET 9 OF 28
6.2
CONTRACTOR will have to make his own arrangements for the storage of
adequate quantity of cement even if cement is supplied by PURCHASER. If
such cement is not stored properly and has deteriorated, the material shall be
rejected. Cost of such rejected cement, where cement is supplied by
PURCHASER, shall be recovered at issue rate or open market rate which ever
is higher. Cement bags shall be stored in dry weatherproof shed with a raised
floor, well away from the outer walls and insulated from the floor to avoid
moisture from ground. Not more than 15 bags shall be stacked in any tier.
Storage arrangement shall be approved by ENGINEER. Storage under
tarpaulins shall not be permitted. Each consignment of cement shall be stored
separately and consumed in its order of receipt.
6.3
Each size of coarse and fine aggregates shall be stacked separately and shall
be protected from leaves and contamination with foreign material. The stacks
shall be on hard, clean, free draining bases, draining away from the concrete
mixing area.
6.4
CONTRACTOR shall make his own arrangements for storing water at site in
tanks to prevent contamination.
6.5
The reinforcement shall be stacked on top of timber sleepers to avoid contact

with ground/ water. Each type and size shall be stacked separately.
7.0
CONCRETE
7.1
General
Concrete grade shall be as designated on drawings. In concrete grade M15,
M20, etc the number represents the specified characteristic compressive
strength of 150 mm cube at 28 days, expressed in N/sqmm as per IS: 456 .
Concrete in the works shall be DESIGN MIX CONCRETE OR NOMINAL MIX
CONCRETE. All concrete works of grade M5, M7.5 and M10 shall be
NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE whereas all other grades, M15 and above, shall be
DESIGN MIX CONCRETE.
7.2
Design Mix Concrete
7.2.1
Mix Design & Testing
7.2.1.1
For Design Mix Concrete, the mix shall be designed according to IS: 10262 and
SP: 23 to provide the grade of concrete having the required workability and
characteristic strength not less than appropriate values given in IS: 456. The
design mix shall in addition be such that it is cohesive and does not segregate
and should result in a dense and durable concrete and also capable of giving
the finish as specified. For liquid retaining structures, the mix shall also result in
water tight concrete. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise great care while

SECTION: D6
SHEET 10 OF 28
designing the concrete mix and executing the works to achieve the desired
result.
7.2.1.2
Unless otherwise specifically mentioned in Data Sheet - A or respective

Section - D, the minimum cement content for Design Mix Concrete shall be as
per Table - 5 of IS: 456 or as given below, whichever is higher.
Grade of Concrete
Minimum Cement Content in

kg/cum of Concrete
-----------------------------------300
300
320
340
----------------------M20
M25
M30
M35
The minimum cement content stipulated above shall be adopted irrespective of

whether the CONTRACTOR achieves the desired strength with less quantity of
cement. The CONTRACTORs quoted rates for concrete shall provide for the
above eventuality and nothing extra shall become payable to the
CONTRACTOR in this account. Even in the case where the quantity of cement
required is higher than that specified above to achieve desired strength based
on an approved mix design, nothing extra shall become payable to the
CONTRACTOR.
7.2.1.3
It shall be CONTRACTORs sole responsibility to carry out the mix designs at

his own cost. He shall furnish to PURCHASER at least 30 days before
concreting operations, a statement of proportions proposed to be used for the
various concrete mixes and the strength results obtained. The strength
requirements of the concrete mixes ascertained on 150 mm cubes as per IS:
516 shall comply with the requirements of IS: 456.
Grade of
Concrete
----------M15
M20
M25
M30
M35
M40
7.2.1.4
Minimum Compressive
Strength
N/sqmm at 7 days
---------------------------10.0
13.5
17.0
20.0
23.5
27.0
Specified Characteristic
compressive strength
N/sqmm at 28 days
----------------------------15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
35.0
40.0
A range of slumps which shall generally be used for various types of

construction unless otherwise instructed by the ENGINEER is given below:

SECTION: D6
SHEET 11 OF 28
Structure/ Member
------------------------------------
Reinforced foundation walls

and footings
Slump in millimeters
-----------------------------Maximum
Minimum
-----------------------------75
25
Plain footings, caissons and

sub-structure walls
75
25
T.G. and massive compressor

foundations
50
25
Slabs, Beams and reinforced

walls
100
25
75
25
100
25
Pavements
50
25
Heavy mass construction
50
25
Pumps & miscellaneous

equipment Foundations
Building columns
7.2.2
Batching & Mixing of Concrete
7.2.2.1
Proportions of aggregates and cements, as decided by the concrete mix

design, shall be by weight. These proportions shall be maintained during
subsequent concrete batching by means of weigh batchers capable of
controlling the weights within one percent of the desired value.
7.2.2.2
Amount of water added shall be such as to produce dense concrete of required

consistency, specified strength and satisfactory workability and shall be so
adjusted to account for moisture content in the aggregates. Water-cement ratio
specified for use by ENGINEER shall be maintained. Each time the work stops,
the mixer shall be cleaned out, and while recommencing, the first batch shall
have 10% additional cement to allow for sticking in the drum.
7.2.2.3
Arrangement should be made by CONTRACTOR to have the cubes tested in

an approved laboratory or in field at his own expense, with prior consent of
PURCHASER. Sampling and testing of strength and workability of concrete
shall be as per IS: 1199, IS: 516 and IS: 456.
7.3
Nominal Mix Concrete

SECTION: D6
SHEET 12 OF 28
7.3.1
Mix Design & Testing
7.3.1.1
Mix Design and preliminary tests are not necessary for Nominal Mix Concrete.
However workability tests shall be carried out as per IS: 456. Proportions for
Nominal Mix Concrete and w/c ratio may be adopted as per Table - 3 of IS:
456. However, it will be CONTRACTORs sole responsibility to adopt
appropriate nominal mix proportions to yield the specified strength.
7.3.2
Batching & Mixing of Concrete

Based on the adopted nominal mixes, aggregates shall be measured by
volume. However cement shall be by weight only.
8.0
FORMWORK
8.1
Formwork shall be all inclusive and shall consist of but not limited to shores,
bracings, sides of footings, walls, beams and columns, bottom of slabs, etc
including ties, anchors, hangers, inserts, false work, wedges, etc.
8.2
The design and engineering of the formwork as well as its construction shall be
the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. However, if so desired by PURCHASER
the drawings and calculations for the design of the formwork shall be submitted
to PURCHASER approval.
8.3
Formwork shall be designed to fulfill the following requirements:

a) Sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout or mortar from the
concrete at all stages and appropriate to the methods of placing and
compacting.
b) Made of suitable materials.
c) Capable of providing concrete of the correct shape and surface finish within
the specified tolerance limits.
d) Capable of withstanding without deflection the worst combination of self
weight, reinforcement and concrete weight; all loads and dynamic effects
arising from construction and compacting activities, wind and weather
forces.
e) Capable of easily striking without shock, disturbance or damage to the
concrete.
f)
Soffit forms capable of imparting a camber if required.
g) Soffit forms and supports capable of being left in position if required.

SECTION: D6
SHEET 13 OF 28
h) Capable of being cleaned and/ or coated if necessary immediately prior to

casting the concrete; design temporary openings where necessary for
these purposes and to facilitate the preparation of construction joints.
8.4
The formwork may be of timber, plywood, steel, plastic or concrete depending

upon the type of finish specified. Sliding forms and slip form may be used with
the approval of ENGINEER. Timber for formwork shall be well seasoned, free
from sap, shakes, loose knots, worm holes, warps and other surface defects.
Joints between formwork and structures shall be sufficiently tight to prevent
loss of slurry from concrete, using seals if necessary.
8.5
The faces of formwork coming in contact with concrete shall be cleaned and
two coats of approved mould oil applied before fixing reinforcement. All
rubbish, particularly chippings, shavings, sawdust, wire pieces, dust, etc shall
be removed from the interior of the forms before the concrete is placed. Where
directed, cleaning of forms shall be done by blasting with a jet of compressed
air at no extra cost.
8.6
Forms intended for reuse shall be treated with care. Forms that have
deteriorated shall not be used. Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly
scraped, cleaned, nails removed, holes suitably plugged, joints repaired and
warped lumber replaced to the satisfaction of ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR
shall equip himself with enough shuttering to allow for wastage so as to
complete the job in time.
8.7
Permanent formwork shall be checked for its durability and compatibility with
adjoining concrete before it is used in the structure. It shall be properly
anchored to the concrete.
8.8
Wire ties passing through beams, columns and walls shall not be allowed. In
their place bolts passing through sleeves shall be used. Formwork spacers left
in situ shall not impair the desired appearance or durability of the structure by
causing spalling, rust staining or allowing the passage of moisture.
8.9
For liquid retaining structures sleeves shall not be provided for through bolts
nor shall through bolts be removed if provided. The bolts, in the latter case,
shall be cut at 25 mm depth from the surface and the hole made good by
cement mortar of the same proportion as the concrete just after striking the
formwork.
8.10
Where specified or shown on drawings all corners and angles exposed in the
finished structure shall have chamfers or fillets of 20 mm x 20 mm size.
8.11
Forms for substructure may be omitted when, in the opinion of ENGINEER,

open excavation is firm enough (in hard non-porous soils) to act as a form.

SECTION: D6
SHEET 14 OF 28
Such excavations shall be slightly larger, as directed by ENGINEER, than that

required as per drawing to compensate for irregularities in excavation.
8.12
CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate props of adjustable steel pipes carried

down to a firm bearing without overloading any of the structures.
8.13
The shuttering for beams and slabs shall be so erected that the side shuttering
of beams can be removed without disturbing the bottom shuttering. If the
shuttering for a column is erected for the full height of the column, one side
shall be built up in sections as placing of concrete proceeds or windows left for
placing concrete from the side to limit the drop of concrete to 1.0 m or as
directed by ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall temporarily and securely fix
items to be cast (embedments/ inserts) in a manner that will not hinder the
striking of forms or permit loss of grout.
8.14
Formwork showing excessive distortion, during any stage of construction, shall

be removed. Placed concrete affected by faulty formwork, shall be entirely
removed and formwork corrected prior to placement of new concrete at
CONTRACTORs cost.
8.15
The striking time for formwork shall be determined based on the following
requirements:
a) Development of adequate concrete strength
b) Permissible deflection at time of striking form work
c) Curing procedure employed - its efficiency and effectiveness
d) Subsequent surface treatment to be done
e) Prevention of thermal cracking at re-entrant angles
f)
Ambient temperatures and
g) Aggressiveness of the environment (unless immediate adequate steps are

taken to prevent damage to the concrete).
8.16
Under normal circumstances (generally where temperatures are above 20 C)

forms may be struck after expiry of the time period given in IS: 456 unless
directed otherwise by ENGINEER. For Portland Pozzolana/ slag cement the
stripping time shall be suitably modified as directed by the ENGINEER. It is the
CONTRACTORs responsibility to ensure that forms are not struck until the
concrete has developed sufficient strength to support itself, does not undergo
excessive deformation and resist surface damage and any stresses arising
during the construction period.

SECTION: D6
SHEET 15 OF 28
9.0
REINFORCEMENT WORKMANSHIP
9.1
Reinforcing bars supplied bent or in coils shall be straightened cold without

damage at any extra cost. No bending shall be done when ambient
temperature is below 5 C. Local warming may be permitted if steel is kept
below 100 C.
9.2
All bars shall be accurately bent gradually and according to the sizes and
shapes shown on the drawings/ schedules or as directed by ENGINEER.
9.3
Re-bending or straightening incorrectly bent bars shall not be done without

approval of ENGINEER.
9.4
Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed and maintained firmly in the correct

position by the use of blocks, spacers, chairs, binding wire, etc to prevent
displacement during placing and compaction of concrete. The tied in place
reinforcement shall be approved by ENGINEER prior to concrete placement.
Spacers shall be of such materials and design as will be durable, not lead to
corrosion of the reinforcement and not cause spalling of the concrete cover.
9.5
Binding wire shall be 16 gauge soft annealed wires. Ends of the binding wire
shall be bent away from the concrete surface and in no case encroach into the
concrete cover.
9.6
Substitution of reinforcement, laps/ splices not shown on drawing shall be

subject to ENGINEERs approval.
10.0
TOLERANCES
10.1
Tolerance for formed and concrete dimensions shall be as per IS: 456 unless
specified otherwise.
10.2
Tolerance specified for horizontal or vertical building lines or footings shall not
be construed to permit encroachment beyond the legal boundaries.
11.0
PREPARATION PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT
11.1
Before concrete is actually placed in position, the inside of the formwork shall
be cleaned and mould oil applied, inserts and reinforcement shall be correctly
positioned and securely held; necessary openings, pockets, etc provided.
11.2
All arrangements - formwork, equipment and proposed procedure, shall be

approved by PURCHASER. CONTRACTOR shall maintain separate Pour Card
for each pour as per the format enclosed.

SECTION: D6
SHEET 16 OF 28
12.0
TRANSPORTING, PLACING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE
12.1
Concrete shall be transported from the mixing plant to the formwork with
minimum time lapse by methods that shall maintain the required workability
and will prevent segregation, loss of any ingredients or ingress of foreign
matter or water.
12.2
In all cases concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable directly in its

final position. To avoid segregation, concrete shall not be re-handled or caused
to flow. For locations where direct placement is not possible and in narrow
forms, CONTRACTOR shall provide suitable drops and Elephant Trunks.
Concrete shall not be dropped form a height of more than 1.0 m as stipulated in
clause 8.13.
12.3
Concrete shall not be placed in flowing water. Under water, concrete shall be
placed in position by tremies or by pipeline from the mixer and shall never be
allowed to fall freely through the water.
12.4
While placing concrete the CONTRACTOR shall proceed as specified below

and also ensure the following:
a) Continuously between construction joints and predetermined abutments.
b) Without disturbance to forms or reinforcement.
c) Without disturbance to pipes, ducts, fixings and the like to be cast in;
ensure that such items are securely fixed. Ensure that concrete cannot
enter open ends of pipes and conduits, etc.
d) Without dropping in a manner that could cause segregation or shock.
e) In deep pours only when the concrete and formwork is designed for this
purpose and by using suitable chutes or pipes.
f)
Do not place if the workability is such that full compaction cannot be

achieved.
g) Without disturbing the unsupported sides of excavations; prevent

contamination of concrete with earth. Provide sheeting if necessary. In
supported excavations, withdraw the linings progressively as concrete is
placed.
h) If placed directly onto hardcore or any other porous material, dampen the
surface to reduce loss of water from the concrete.
i)
Ensure that there is no damage or displacement to sheet membranes.

SECTION: D6
SHEET 17 OF 28
j)
Record the time and location of placing structural concrete.
12.5
Concrete shall normally be compacted in its final position within thirty minutes
of leaving the mixer. Concrete shall be compacted during placing with
approved vibrating equipment without causing segregation until it forms a solid
mass free from voids thoroughly worked around reinforcement and embedded
fixtures and into all corners of the formwork. Immersion vibrators shall be
inserted vertically at points not more than 450 mm apart and withdrawn slowly
till air bubbles cease to come to the surface, leaving no voids. When placing
concrete in layers advancing horizontally, care shall be taken to ensure
adequate vibration, blending and melding of the concrete between successive
layers. Vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact with reinforcement,
formwork and finished surfaces after start of initial set. Over-vibration shall be
avoided.
12.6
Concrete may be conveyed and placed by mechanically operated equipment

after getting the complete procedure approved by PURCHASER. The slump
shall be held to the minimum necessary for conveying concrete by this method.
When concrete is to be pumped, the concrete mix shall be specially designed
to suit pumping. Care shall be taken to avoid stoppages in work once pumping
has started.
12.7
Except when placing with slip forms, each placement of concrete in multiple lift,
work shall be allowed to set for at least 24 hours after the final set of concrete
before the start of subsequent placement. Placing shall stop when concrete
reaches the top of the opening in walls or bottom surface of slab, in slab and
beam construction, and it shall be resumed before concrete takes initial set but
not until it has had time to settle as determined by ENGINEER. Concrete shall
be protected against damage until final acceptance.
13.0
MASS CONCRETE WORKS

Sequence of pouring for mass concrete works shall be as approved by
ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR shall exercise great care to prevent shrinkage
cracks and shall monitor the temperature of the placed concrete if directed.
14.0
CURING
14.1
Curing and protection shall start immediately after the compaction of the
concrete to protect it from:
a) Premature drying out, particularly by solar radiation and wind
b) Leaching out by rain and flowing water

SECTION: D6
SHEET 18 OF 28
c) Rapid cooling during the first few days after placing

d) High internal thermal gradients
e) Low temperature or frost
f)
Vibration and impact which may disrupt the concrete and interfere with its
bond to the reinforcement.
14.2
All concrete, unless directed otherwise by ENGINEER, shall be cured by use of

continuous sprays or ponded water or continuously saturated coverings of
sacking, canvas, hessian or other absorbent material for the period of complete
hydration with a minimum of 7 days. The quality of curing water shall be the
same as that used for mixing.
14.3
Where a curing membrane is directed to be used by the ENGINEER, the same

shall be of a non-wax base and shall not impair the concrete finish in any
manner. The curing compound to be used shall be got approved from the
ENGINEER before use and shall be applied with spraying equipment capable
of a smooth, even textured coat.
14.4
Curing may also be done by covering the surface with an impermeable material
such as polyethylene, which shall be well sealed and fastened.
14.5
Extra precautions shall be exercised in curing concrete during cold and hot
weather.
15.0
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND KEYS
15.1
Construction joints will be as shown on the drawing or as approved by

ENGINEER. Concrete shall be placed without interruption until completion of
work between construction joints. If stopping of concreting becomes
unavoidable anywhere, a properly formed construction joint shall be made with
the approval of ENGINEER.
15.2
Dowels for concrete work, not likely to be taken up in the near future, shall be
coated with cement slurry and encased in lean concrete as indicated on the
drawings or as directed by ENGINEER.
15.3
Before resuming concreting on a surface which has hardened all laitance and
loose stone shall be thoroughly removed by wire brushing/ hacking and surface
washed with high pressure water jet and treated with thin layer of cement slurry
for vertical joints and a 15 mm thick layer of cement sand mortar for horizontal
layers, the ratio of cement and sand being the same as in the concrete mix.

SECTION: D6
SHEET 19 OF 28
15.4
When concreting is to be resumed on a surface which has not fully hardened,

all laitance shall be removed by wire brushing, the surface wetted, free water
removed and a coat of cement slurry applied. On this a layer of concrete not
exceeding 150 mm thickness shall be placed and well rammed against the old
work. Thereafter work shall proceed in the normal way.
16.0
FOUNDATION BEDDING
16.1
All earth surfaces upon which or against which concrete is to be placed, shall
be well compacted and free from standing water, mud or debris. Soft or spongy
area shall be cleaned out and back filled with either soil-cement mixture, lean
concrete or clean sand compacted as directed by ENGINEER. The surfaces of
absorptive soils shall be moistened.
16.2
Concrete shall not be deposited on large sloping rock surfaces. The rock shall
be cut to form rough steps or benches by picking, barring or wedging. The rock
surface shall be kept wet for 2 to 4 hours before concreting.
17.0
FINISHES
17.1
General
The formwork for concrete works shall be such as to give the finish as
specified. The CONTRACTOR shall make good as directed any unavoidable
defects consistent with the type of concrete and finish specified; defects due to
bad workmanship (e.g.: damaged or misaligned forms, defective or poorly
compacted concrete) will not be accepted. CONTRACTOR shall construct the
formwork using the correct materials and to meet the requirements of the
design and to produce finished concrete of required dimensions, plumbs,
planes and finishes.
17.2
Surface Finish Type F1

This type of finish shall be for non-exposed concrete surfaces against which
back fill or concrete is to be placed. The main requirement is that of dense, well
compacted concrete. No treatment is required except repair of defective areas,
filling all form tie holes and cleaning up of loose or adhering debris. For
surfaces below grade which will receive waterproofing treatment the concrete
shall be free of surface irregularities which would interfere with proper and
effective application of waterproofing material specified for use.
17.3

This type of finish shall be for all concrete work which will be exposed to view
upon completion of the job. The appearance shall be that of a smooth dense,

SECTION: D6
SHEET 20 OF 28
well-compacted concrete showing the slight marks of well fitted shuttering

joints. The CONTRACTOR shall make good any blemishes.
17.4

This type of finish shall be for concrete work which will be exposed to view but
to give an appearance of smooth, dense, well-compacted concrete with no
shutter marks, stain free and with no dis-colourisation, blemishes, arises, air
holes, etc. Only lined or coated plywood with very tight joints shall be used to
achieve this finish. The panel size shall be uniform and as large as practicable.
Any minor blemishes that might occur shall be made good by CONTRACTOR.
17.5
Integral Cement Finish on Concrete Floor

In all cases where integral cement finish on a concrete floor has been
specified, the top layer of concrete shall be screeded off to proper level and
tamped with tamper having conical projections so that the aggregate shall be
forced below the surface. The surface shall be finished with a wooden float and
a trowel with pressure. The finish shall be continued till the concrete reaches its
initial set. No cement or cement mortar finish shall be provided on the surface.
Where specified, a floor hardener as approved by the ENGINEER shall be
supplied and used as recommended by the manufacturer.
18.0
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF UNSATISFACTORY CONCRETE
18.1
Immediately after the shuttering is removed, all the defective areas such as
honey-combed surfaces, rough patches, holes left by form bolts, etc shall be
brought to the notice of ENGINEER who may permit patching of the defective
areas or reject the concrete work.
18.2
All through holes for shuttering shall be filled for full depth and neatly plugged
and flushed with surface.
18.3
Rejected concrete shall be removed and replaced by CONTRACTOR at no

additional cost to PURCHASER.
18.4
For patching of defective areas all loose materials shall be removed and the
surface shall be prepared as directed by the ENGINEER.
18.5
Bonding between hardened and fresh concrete shall be done either by placing
cement mortar or by applying epoxy. The decision of the ENGINEER as to be
the method of repairs to be adopted shall be final and binding on the
CONTRACTOR and no extra claim shall be entertained on this account. The
surface shall be saturated with water for 24 hours before patching is done with
1:5 cement sand mortar. The use of epoxy for bonding fresh concrete shall be
carried out as directed by ENGINEER.

SECTION: D6
SHEET 21 OF 28
19.0
VACUUM DEWATERING OF SLABS

Where specified floor slabs, either on grade or suspended, shall be finished by
vacuum dewatering including all operations such as poker vibration, surface
vibration, vacuum processing, floating and trowel-ling as per equipment
manufacturers recommendation. The equipment to be used shall be subject to
ENGINEERs approval.
20.0
HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENT
20.1
Concreting during hot weather shall be carried out as per IS: 7861 (Part - I).
20.2
Adequate provisions shall be made to lower concrete temperatures which shall

not exceed 40 C at the time of placement of fresh concrete.
20.3
Where directed by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall spray non-wax based

curing compound on unformed concrete surface at no extra costs.
21.0
COLD WEATHER REQUIRMENTS
21.1
Concreting during cold weather shall be carried out as per IS: 7861 (PART - 2).
21.2
The ambient temperature during placement and up to final set shall not fall
below 5 C. Approved anti-freeze/ accelerating additive shall be used where
directed.
21.3
For major and large scale concreting works the temperature of concrete at
times of mixing and placing, the thermal conductivity of the formwork and its
insulation and stripping period shall be closely monitored.
22.0
LIQUID RETAINING STRUCTURES
22.1
The CONTRACTOR shall take special care for concrete of liquid retaining
structures, under ground structures and those other specifically called for to
guarantee the finish and water tightness.
22.2
The minimum level of surface finish for liquid retaining structures shall be type
F2. All such structures shall be hydro-tested.
22.3
The CONTRACTOR shall include in his price hydro-testing of structure, all

arrangements for testing such as temporary bulk heads, pressure gauges,
pumps, pipe lines, etc.

SECTION: D6
SHEET 22 OF 28
22.4
Any temporary arrangements that may have to be made to ensure stability of

the structures shall also be considered to have been taken into account while
quoting the rates.
22.5
Any leakage that may occur during the hydro-test or subsequently during the
defects liability period or the period for which the structure is guaranteed shall
be effectively stopped either by cement/ epoxy pressure grouting, guniting or
such other method as may be approved by the ENGINEER. All such
rectification shall be done by the CONTRACTOR to the entire satisfaction of
the PURCHASER at no extra cost to the PURCHASER.
23.0
TESTING CONCRETE STRUCTURES FOR LEAKAGE
23.1
Hydro-static test for water tightness shall be done at full storage level or soffit
of cover slab, as may be directed by ENGINEER, as described below:
a) In case of structures whose external faces are exposed, such as elevated
tanks, the requirements of the test shall be deemed to be satisfied if the
external faces show no sign of leakage or sweating and remain completely
dry during the period of observation of seven days after allowing a seven
day period for absorption after filling with water.
b) In the case of structures whose external faces are submerged and are not
accessible for inspection, such as underground tanks, the structures shall
be filled with water and after the expiry of seven days after filling; the level
of the surface of the water shall be recorded. The level of water shall be
recorded again at subsequent intervals of 24 hrs over a period of seven
days. Backfilling shall be withheld till the tanks are tested. The total drop in
surface level over a period for seven days shall be taken as an indication of
the water tightness of the structure. The ENGINEER shall decide on the
actual permissible nature of this drop in the surface level, taking into
account whether the structures are open or closed and the corresponding
effect it has on evaporation losses. Unless specified otherwise, a structure
whose top is covered shall be deemed to be water tight if the total drop in
the surface level over a period of seven days does not exceed 40 mm.
c) Each compartment/ segment of the structure shall be tested individually
and then all together.
23.2
For structures such as pipes, tunnels, etc the hydrostatic test shall be carried
out by filling with water, after curing as specified, and subjecting to the
specified test pressure for specified period. If during this period the loss of
water does not exceed the equivalent of the specified rate, the structure shall
be considered to have successfully passed the test.

SECTION: D6
SHEET 23 OF 28
24.0
OPTIONAL TEST
24.1
If the ENGINEER feels that the materials i.e., cement, sand, coarse
aggregates, reinforcement and water are not in accordance with the
specifications or if specified concrete strengths are not obtained, he may order
tests to be carried out on these materials in laboratory, to be approved by the
ENGINEER, as per relevant IS Codes. PURCHASER shall pay only for the
testing of material supplied by the PURCHASER; otherwise CONTRACTOR
shall have to pay for the tests. Transporting of all material to the laboratory
shall however be done by the CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to
PURCHASER.
24.2
In the event of any work being suspected of faulty material or workmanship

requiring its removal or if the works cubes do not give the stipulated strengths,
ENGINEER reserves the right to order the CONTRACTOR to take out cores
and conduct tests on them or do ultrasonic testing or load testing of structure,
etc. All these tests shall be carried out by CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to
the PURCHASER. Alternately ENGINEER also reserves the right to ask the
CONTRACTOR to dismantle and re-do such unacceptable work at the cost of
CONTRACTOR.
24.3
If the structure is certified by Engineer as having failed, the cost of the test and
subsequent dismantling/ reconstruction shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
24.4
The quoted unit rates/ prices of concrete shall deem to provide for all tests
mentioned above.
25.0
GROUTING
25.1
Grout shall be provided as specified on the drawings. The proportion of

Standard Grout shall be such as to produce a flow-able mixture consistent with
minimum water content and shrinkage. Surfaces to be grouted shall be
thoroughly roughened and cleaned. All structural steel elements to be grouted
shall be cleaned of oil, grease, dirt, etc. Use of hot, strong caustic solution for
this purpose will be permitted. Prior to grouting, the hardened concrete shall be
saturated with water and just before grouting water in all pockets shall be
removed. Grouting once started shall be done quickly and continuously.
Variation in grout mixes and procedures shall be permitted if approved by
ENGINEER. The grout proportions shall be limited as follows:
Use
a)
-----Fluid
mix
Grout
Thickness
---------------Under 25 mm
Mix proportion
--------------------One part Portland
Cement to one part
sand
W/C Ratio
(max)
-------------0.44

SECTION: D6
SHEET 24 OF 28
25.2
b)
General
mix
25 mm and
over but less
than 50 mm
One part Portland

cement to 2 parts of
sand
0.53
c)
Stiff
mix
50 mm and over
One part Portland

cement to 3 parts of
sand
0.53
Non-Shrink Grout
Non-shrink grout where called for in the Schedule of Quantities or specified on
the drawings shall be provided in strict accordance with the manufacturers
instructions/ specifications on the drawings.
26.0
INSPECTION
All materials, workmanship and finished construction shall be subject to
continuous inspection and approval of ENGINEER. Materials rejected by
ENGINEER shall be expressly removed from site and shall be replaced by
CONTRACTOR immediately at no extra cost to PURCHASER.
27.0
CLEAN-UP
Upon the completion of concrete work, all forms, equipment, construction tools,
protective coverings and any debris, scraps of wood, etc resulting from the
work shall be removed and the premises left clean.
28.0
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
28.1
Any concrete work shall satisfy the requirements given below individually and
collectively for it to be acceptable:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
Properties of constituent materials

Characteristic compressive strength
Specified mix proportions
Minimum cement content
Maximum free-water/ cement ratio
Workability
Temperature of fresh concrete
Density of fully compacted concrete
Cover to embedded steel
Curing
Tolerances in dimensions
Tolerances in levels
Durability

SECTION: D6
SHEET 25 OF 28
n) Surface finishes
o) Special requirements such as:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
Water tightness
Resistance to aggressive chemicals
Resistance to freezing and thawing
Very high strength
Improved fire resistance
Wear resistance
Resistance to early thermal cracking.
28.2
The ENGINEERs decision as to the acceptability or otherwise of any concrete

work shall be final and binding on the CONTRACTOR.
28.3
For work not accepted, the ENGINEER may review and decide whether
remedial measures are feasible and so as to render the work acceptable. The
ENGINEER shall in that case direct the CONTRACTOR to undertake and
execute the remedial measures. These shall be expeditiously and effectively
implemented by the CONTRACTOR. Nothing extra shall become payable to
the CONTRACTOR by the PURCHASER for executing remedial measures.
29.0
MODE OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
29.1
The unit rate for concrete work under various categories shall be all inclusive
and no claims for extra payment on account of such items on leaving holes,
embedding inserts, etc shall be entertained unless separately provided for in
the Schedule of Quantities. No extra claim shall also be entertained due to
change in the number, position and/ or dimensions of holes, slots or openings,
sleeves, inserts or on account of any increased lift, lead of scaffolding etc. All
these factors should be taken into consideration while quoting the unit rates.
Unless provided for in the Schedule of Quantities the rates shall also include
fixing inserts in all concrete work, whenever required.
29.2
Payments for concrete will be made on the basis of unit rates quoted for the
respective items in the Schedule of Quantities. No deduction in the concrete
quantity will be made for reinforcements, inserts, etc and opening less than
0.100 sqm, in areas where concrete is measured in sqm and 0.010 cum where
concrete is measured in cubic metres. Where no such deduction for concrete is
made, payment for shuttering work provided for such holes, pockets, etc will
not be made. Similarly the unit rates for concrete work shall be inclusive or
exclusive of shuttering as provided for in the Schedule of Quantities.
29.3
Payment for beams will be made for the quantity based on the depth being
reckoned from the underside of the slabs and length measured as the clear
distance between supports. Payment for columns shall be made for the
quantity based on height reckoned up to the underside of slabs/ beams.

SECTION: D6
SHEET 26 OF 28
29.4
The unit rate for precast concrete members shall include formwork, mouldings,
finishing, hoisting and setting in position including setting mortar, provision of
lifting arrangement, etc complete. Reinforcement and inserts shall be
measured and paid for separately under respective item rates.
29.5
Only the actual quantity of steel embedded in concrete including laps as shown
on drawings or as approved by ENGINEER shall be measured and paid for,
irrespective of the level or height at which the work is done. The unit rate for
reinforcement shall include all wastages, binding wires, chairs, spacer bars etc
for which no separate payment shall be made.
29.6
Where the formwork is paid for separately, it shall be very clearly understood
that payment for formwork is inclusive of formwork, shuttering, shoring,
propping, scaffolding, etc complete. Only the net area of concrete formed
(shuttered) shall be measured for payment.
CONCRETE POUR CARD

CLIENT:
DATE:
POUR NO.:
PROJECT:
STRUCTURE:
CONTRACTOR:
MAX AGGREGATE SIZE:
SLUMP:
MM/
MM
DRG. NO.:
CONCETE GRADE/ QUANTITY: M
START/ COMPLETION TIME:

/
M3
MIXING TIME:

SECTION: D6
SHEET 27 OF 28
SL.
NO.
ITEM
CENTERLINES CHECKED
FORMWORK & STAGING
CHECKED
3.
REINFORCEMENT
CHECKED
4.
COVER TO REINFORCEMENT CHECKED
5.
VERFIED TEST
YES/ NO
YES/ NO
CERTIFICATE FOR
CEMENT/ STEEL
6.
ADEQUENCY OF
YES/ NO
YES/ NO
MATERIALS /EQUIPMENT
FOR POUR
7.
EMBEDED CIVIL
PARTS
CHECKED MECHANICA
(LOCATIO
L
N
ELECTRICAL
AND
PLUMB)
POUR AUTHORISED SITE ENGINEER
8.
SOFFIT(S) AND POUR TOP(T) S(B)
T(B)
LEVELS CHECKED
S(A)
T(A)
BEFORE(B) AND AFTER(A)
FROM REMOVAL (ONLY OF
BEAMS OF OVER 10 M SPAN
AND IMPORTANT
STRUCTURES LIKE T.G. ETC)
9.
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
LOCATION AND TIME (IF NOT
AS PER DRAWING)
10. CEMENT CONSUMPTION IN
KGS.
11. NUMBER OF CUBES AND
IDENTIFICATION MARK
12. TEST CUBE RESULTS (7
/
DAYS/ 28 DAYS)
13. CONCRETE CONDITION ON
V.GOOD/ GOOD/ FAIR/ POOR
FORM REMOVAL
SITE-IN-CHARGE
BEFORE CONCRETING
1.
2.
CONTRACTORS ENGINEERS REMARKS

REP.
SIGNATURE
SIGNATURE

SECTION: D6
SHEET 28 OF 28
NOTES:
1.
EACH ITEM TO BE CHECKED AND SIGNED BY THE RESPECTIVE

ENGINEERS.
2.
ITEMS 8 TO 13 (BOTH INCLUSIVE) TO BE FILLED BY ONLY TCE

ENGINEER.
EACH POUR TO HAVE SEPARATE CARDS, IN TRIPILCATE ONE EACH
FOR CLIENT, TCE & SITE OFFICE. FORM 279.
3.
4.
UNDER
REMARKS
INDICATE
DEVIATIONS
FROM
DWGS
&
SPECIFICATIONS, CONGESTION IN REINFORCEMENT IF ANY, UNUSUAL
OCCURENCES, SUCH AS FAILURE OF EQUIPMENTS, SINKING OF
SUPPORTS/ PROPS, HEAVY RAINS AFFECTING CONCRETEING, POOR
COMPACTION,
IMPROPER
CURING,
OTHER
DEFICIENCIES,
OBSERVATION, ETC.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 1 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
1.0
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for building works
comprising brick and stone masonry, flooring, doors, windows, ventilators,
wood/ aluminium work, water-proofing, plastering, painting and such other
related works forming a part of this job, which may be required to be carried out
though not specifically mentioned above. The works under this specification
shall consist of furnishing of all tools, plants, labour, materials, and everything
necessary for carrying out the works.
2.0

The following codes, standards and specifications are made a part of this
specification. All standards, specifications, codes of practice referred to herein
shall be the latest version on the date of offer made by the Bidder.
In case of discrepancy between this specification and those referred to herein,
this specification shall govern.
IS: 110
Ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler for enamels for

use-over primers
IS: 280
Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering

purposes
IS: 287
Recommendations for maximum permissible moisture

content of timber used for different purposes
IS: 337
Varnish, finishing interior
IS: 345
Wood filter transparent liquid
IS: 348
French polish
IS: 383
Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural

sources for concrete.
IS: 412
Expanded metal steel sheets for general purposes
IS: 419
Specification for putty for use on window frames
IS: 426
Paste filler for colour coats
IS: 428
Distemper, oil emulsion, colour as required
IS: 702
Specification for industrial bitumen

SECTION: D7
SHEET 2 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
IS: 710
Specification for marine plywood
IS: 712
Specification for building limes
IS: 733
Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, bars, rods and

sections for general engineering purposes
IS: 1003
Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutters

(Part - 1)
IS: 1003
- DO - (Part - 2)
IS: 1038
Specification for steel doors, windows and ventilators
IS: 1077
Specification for common burnt clay building bricks
IS: 1081
Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel &

aluminium) doors, windows and ventilators
IS: 1124
Method of test for determination of water absorption,

apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building
stones
IS: 1200
Method of measurement of building and civil engineering

works.
IS: 1203
Determination of penetration of bitumen
IS: 1237
Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles
IS: 1322
Bitumen felts for water-proofing and damp-proofing.
IS: 1346
Code of practice for water-proofing of roofs with bitumen

felts
IS: 1361
Specification for steel windows for industrial buildings
IS: 1397
Specification for Kraft paper
IS:1443
Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete

flooring tiles
IS: 1542
Specification for sand for plaster

SECTION: D7
SHEET 3 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
IS: 1580
Specification for bituminous compounds for water-proofing

and caulking purposes
IS: 1597
Code of practice for construction of stone masonry: Rubble

stone masonry (Part 1)
IS: 1658
Specification for fibre hardboards
IS: 1659
Specification for block boards
IS: 1661
Code of practice for application of cement and cement lime plaster finishes
IS: 1834
Specification for hot applied sealing compound for joint in

concrete
IS: 1838
Specification for preformed fillers for expansion joint in

concrete pavements and structures (non-extruding and
resilient type): Bitumen impregnated fibre (Part -1).
IS: 1948
Specification for aluminium doors, windows and ventilators
IS: 1949
Specification for aluminium windows for industrial buildings
IS: 2074
Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide - zinc chrome

priming
IS: 2114
Code of practice for laying in-situ terrazzo floor finish
IS: 2116
Specification for sand for masonry mortars
IS: 2185
Specification for concrete masonry units (Parts - 1, 2 & 3)
IS: 2202
Specification for wooden flush door shutters: Solid core

type (Part - 1)
IS: 2202
- DO- (Part -2)
IS: 2212
Code of practice for brickwork
IS: 2250
Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry

mortars
IS: 2338
Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based

materials (Part - 1).

SECTION: D7
SHEET 4 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
IS: 2338
- DO- (Part - 2)
IS: 2339
Aluminium paint for general purposes, in dual container
IS: 2395
Code of practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster

surfaces (Part - 1)
IS: 2395
- DO (Part 2)
IS: 2402
Code of practice for external rendered finishes
IS: 2571
Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete flooring
IS: 2572
Code of practice for construction of hollow concrete block

masonry
IS: 2645
Specification of integral cement water-proofing compounds
IS: 2690
Specification for burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Machine

made (Part - 1)
IS: 2691
Specification for burnt clay facing bricks
IS: 2750
Specification for steel scaffoldings
IS: 2835
Flat transparent sheet glass
IS: 2932
Specification for enamel, synthetic, exterior type:

(a) Undercoating (b) Finishing
IS: 3036
Code of practice for laying lime concrete for a waterproofed roof finish
IS: 3067
Code of practice of general design details and preparatory

work for damp-proofing and water-proofing of buildings
IS: 3068
Specification for broken brick (burnt

aggregates for use in lime concrete
IS: 3384
Specification for bitumen primer for use in water-proofing

and damp-proofing
IS: 3461
Specification for PVC - asbestos floor tiles
IS: 3462
Specification for un-backed flexible PVC flooring
clay)
coarse

SECTION: D7
SHEET 5 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
IS: 3495
Method of test for burnt clay building bricks: (Part - 1 to 4)
IS:3536E
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, wood primer,

pink
IS: 3564
Specification for door closers (hydraulically regulated)
IS: 3696
Safety code of scaffolds and ladders (Part - 1)
IS: 3696
- DO- (Part - 2)
IS: 4020
Methods of test for wooden flush door (Part - 1 to 16)
IS: 4021
Specification for timber door, window and ventilator frames
IS: 4351
Specification for steel door frames
IS: 4443
Code of practice for use of resin type chemical resistant

mortars
IS: 4457
Specification for ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting

tile
IS: 4631
Code of practice for laying epoxy resin floor toppings
IS: 4832
Specification for chemical resistant mortars (Part - 2)
IS: 4860
Specification for acid resistant bricks
IS: 4948
Specification for welded steel wire fabric for general use
IS: 5318
Code of practice for laying of flexible PVC sheet and tile

flooring
IS: 5410
Cement paint, colour as required
IS: 5411
Specification for plastic emulsion paint (Part - 1)
IS: 54112
- DO- (Part - 2)
IS: 5437
Wired and figured glass
IS: 5491
Code of practice for laying of in-situ granolithic concrete

floor topping

SECTION: D7
SHEET 6 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
IS: 6041
Code of practice for construction of autoclaved cellular

concrete block masonry
IS: 6042
Code of practice for construction of light weight concrete

block masonry
IS: 6248
Specification for metal rolling shutters and rolling grills
IS: 7193
Specification for glass fibre base coal tar pitch and bitumen
felts
IS: 7452
Specification for hot rolled steel sections for doors,

windows and ventilators
IS: 8042
Specification for white Portland cement
IS: 8112
Specification for 43 grade ordinary Portland cement
IS: 8543
Methods of Testing Plastics (Part - 4/ Section - 1)
IS: 9197
Specification for epoxy resin, hardeners and epoxy resin

composites for floor topping
IS: 9766
Flexible PVC compounds specification
IS: 9862
Specification for ready mixed paint, brushing, bituminous,

black, lead-free, acid, alkali, water and chlorine resisting
IS: 12200
Code of practice for provision of water-stops at transverse

contraction joints in masonry and concrete dams
IS: 12830
Rubber based adhesive for fixing PVC tiles to cement
IS: 13756
Dust pressed ceramic tiles with low water absorption of

E3% group B1 - specification
IS: 13360
Method of testing plastics:

Mechanical properties (Part - 5)
Determination of hardness (Sec - 11)
IS: 15058
PVC water stops at transverse contraction joints

specification
3.0
BRICKWORK
3.1
Materials

SECTION: D7
SHEET 7 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
3.1.1
Bricks used in the works shall conform to the requirements laid down in IS:
1077. The class of the bricks shall be as specifically indicated in the respective
items of work.
3.1.2
Standard modular size of common bricks shall be 190mm x 90mm x 90mm as

per IS: 1077. The nominal thickness of one brick and half brick walls using
modular bricks shall be considered as 200 mm and 100 mm respectively. In the
event of use of non-modular bricks, standard size shall be 230mm x 110mm x
70mm. The nominal thickness of one brick and half brick walls using nonmodular bricks shall be considered as 230 mm and 115 mm respectively. The
dimensional tolerances of modular and non-modular sized bricks over the
standard sizes shall be as per IS: 1077.
3.1.3
Bricks shall be sound, hard, homogenous in texture, well burnt in kiln without
being vitrified, hand/ machine moulded, deep red, cherry or copper coloured, of
regular shape and size & shall have sharp and square edges with smooth
rectangular faces. The bricks shall be free from pores, cracks, flaws and
nodules of free lime. Hand moulded bricks shall be moulded with a frog and
those made by extrusion process may not be provided with a frog. Bricks shall
give a clear ringing sound when struck and shall have a minimum crushing
strength of 5 N/sqmm unless otherwise specified in the item.
3.1.4
The average water absorption shall not be more than 20 percent by weight up
to class 12.5 and 15 percent by weight for higher classes. Bricks which do not
conform to this requirement shall be rejected. Over or under burnt bricks are
not acceptable for use in the works.
3.1.5
Sample bricks shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval and bricks
supplied shall conform to approved samples. If demanded by ENGINEER, brick
samples shall be got tested as per IS: 3495 by CONTRACTOR at no extra cost
to PURCHASER. Bricks rejected by ENGINEER shall be removed from the site
of works within 24 hours.
3.1.6
Mortar for brick masonry shall consist of cement and sand and shall be
prepared as per IS: 2250. Mix shall be in the proportion of 1:5 for all
brickworks, unless otherwise specified in the respective items of work. Sand for
masonry mortar shall conform to IS: 2116. The sand shall be free from clay,
shale, loam, alkali and organic matter and shall be of sound, hard, clean and
durable particles. Sand shall be approved by ENGINEER. If so directed by the
ENGINEER, sand shall be screened and washed till it satisfies the limits of
deleterious materials.
3.1.7
For preparing cement mortar, the ingredients shall first be mixed thoroughly in
dry condition. Water shall then be added and mixing continued to give a
uniform mix of required consistency. Mixing shall be done thoroughly in a

SECTION: D7
SHEET 8 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
mechanical mixer, unless hand mixing is specifically permitted by the

ENGINEER. The mortar thus mixed shall be used as soon as possible,
preferably within 30 minutes from the time water is added to cement. In case,
the mortar has stiffened due to evaporation of water, this may be re-tempered
by adding water as required to restore consistency, but this will be permitted
only up to 30 minutes from the time of initial mixing of water to cement. Any
mortar which is partially set shall be rejected and shall be removed forthwith
from the site. Droppings of mortar shall not be re-used under any
circumstances.
3.1.8
The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for test on mortar samples if so directed by

the ENGINEER.
3.2
Workmanship
3.2.1
Workmanship of brick work shall conform to IS: 2212. All bricks shall be
thoroughly soaked in clean water for at least one hour immediately before
being laid. The cement mortar for brick masonry work shall be as specified in
the respective item of work. Brick work 200 mm/ 230 mm thick and over shall
be laid in English Bond unless otherwise specified. 100 mm/ 115 mm thick
brickwork shall be laid with stretchers. For laying bricks, a layer of mortar shall
be spread over the full width of suitable length of the lower course. Each brick
shall be slightly pressed into the mortar and shoved into final position so as to
embed the brick fully in mortar. Only full size bricks shall be used for the works
and cut bricks utilised only to make up required wall length or for bonding.
Bricks shall be laid with frogs uppermost.
3.2.2
All brickwork shall be plumb, square and true to dimensions shown. Vertical
joints in alternate courses shall come directly one over the other and be in line.
Horizontal courses shall be levelled. The thickness of brick courses shall be
kept uniform. In case of one brick thick or half brick thick wall, at least one face
should be kept smooth and plane, even if the other is slightly rough due to
variation in size of bricks. For walls of thickness greater than one brick both
faces shall be kept smooth and plane. All interconnected brickwork shall be
carried out at nearly one level so that there is uniform distribution of pressure
on the supporting structure and no portion of the work shall be left more than
one course lower than the adjacent work. Where this is not possible, the work
shall be raked back according to bond (and not saw toothed) at an angle not
exceeding 450. But in no case the level difference between adjoining walls shall
exceed one metre. Brick-work shall not be raised more than one metre per day.
3.2.3
Bricks shall be so laid that all joints are well filled with mortar. The thickness of
joints shall not be less than 6 mm and not more than 10 mm. The face joints
shall be raked to a minimum depth of 10 mm /15 mm by raking tools during the
progress of work when the mortar is still green, so as to provide a proper key
for the plastering/ pointing respectively to be done later. When plastering or

SECTION: D7
SHEET 9 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be uniform in thickness and
be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. The face of brickwork shall be
cleaned daily and all mortar droppings removed. The surface of each course
shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt before another course is laid on top.
3.2.4
During inclement weather conditions, newly built brick masonry works shall be
protected by tarpaulin or other suitable covering to prevent mortar being
washed away by rain.
3.2.5
Brickwork shall be kept constantly moist on all the faces for at least seven
days. The arrangement for curing shall be got approved from the ENGINEER.
3.2.6
Double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports shall be provided to

facilitate execution of the masonry works. The scaffolding shall be designed
adequately considering all the dead, live and possible impact loads to ensure
safety of the workmen, in accordance with the requirements stipulated in IS:
2750 and IS: 3696 (Part - 1). Scaffolding shall be properly maintained during
the entire period of construction. Single scaffolding shall not be used on
important works and will be permitted only in certain cases as decided by the
ENGINEER. Where single scaffolding is adopted, only minimum number of
holes, by omitting a header shall be left in the masonry for supporting
horizontal scaffolding poles. All holes in the masonry shall be carefully made
good before plastering/ painting.
3.2.7
In the event of usage of traditional bricks of size 230 mm x 115 mm x 75 mm,

the courses at the top of the plinth and sills as well as at the top of the wall just
below the roof/ floor or slabs and at the top of the parapet shall be laid with
bricks on edge.
3.2.8
All brickwork shall be built tightly against columns, floor slabs or other structural
members.
3.2.9
To overcome the possibility of development of cracks in the brick masonry

following measures shall be adopted.
3.2.9.1
For resting RCC slabs, the bearing surface of masonry wall shall be finished on
top with 12 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 and provided with 2 layers of Kraft
paper Grade 1 as per IS: 1397 or 2 layers of 50 micron thick polyethylene
sheets.
3.2.9.2
RCC/ steel beams resting on masonry wall shall be provided with plain or
reinforced concrete bed blocks of dimensions as indicated in the drawings duly
finished on top with 2 layers of Kraft paper Grade 1 as per IS: 1397 or 2 layers
of 50 micron thick polyethylene sheets.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 10 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
3.2.9.3
Steel wire fabric shall be provided at the junction of brick masonry and concrete
as specified elsewhere before taking up plastering work.
The above items shall be measured and paid for separately under the
respective items of work.
3.2.10
Bricks for partition walls shall be stacked adjacent to the structural member to
pre-deflect the structural member before the wall is taken up for execution.
Further, the top most course of half or full brick walls abutting against either a
de-shuttered slab or beam shall be built only after any proposed masonry wall
above the structural member is executed to cater for the deflection of the
structural element.
3.2.11
Reinforced cement concrete transoms and mullions of dimensions as indicated

in the construction drawings are generally required to be provided in half brick
partition walls. Reinforced concrete for transoms and mullions shall be
measured and paid for separately under the respective items of work.
3.2.12
Where drawings indicate that structural steel sections are to be encased in

brickwork, the brick masonry shall be built closely against the steel section,
ensuring a minimum of 20 mm thick cement - sand 1:4 over all the steel
surfaces. Steel sections partly embedded in brickwork shall be provided with
bituminous protective coating to the surfaces at the point of entry into the brick
masonry.
3.2.13
CONTRACTOR shall note that the unit rates quoted for the masonry work shall
be deemed to include for the installation of miscellaneous inserts such as pipe
sleeves, bolts, steel sections with anchors, etc and providing pockets, leaving
openings, cutting chases, etc in accordance with the construction drawings.
Miscellaneous inserts shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR. Any of the
miscellaneous inserts which are required to be fabricated and supplied by the
CONTRACTOR and cement concrete to be provided in the pockets for the hold
fasts of door/ window frames, etc shall however, be measured and paid
separately under the respective items of work.
3.2.14
Facing bricks of the type specified conforming to IS: 2691 shall be laid in the
positions indicated on the drawings and all facing brickwork shall be well
bonded to the backing bricks/ RCC surfaces. The level of execution of the
facing brickwork shall at any time be lower by at least 600 mm below the level
of the backing brickwork.
3.2.15
Facing bricks shall be laid over 10 mm thick backing of cement mortar. The
mortar mix, thickness of joint and the type of painting to be carried out shall be
as specified in the item of work. The pattern of laying the bricks shall be as
specifically indicated in the drawings.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 11 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
3.2.16
For facing brickwork, double scaffolding shall be used.
3.2.17
Faced works shall be kept clean and free from damage, discoloration, etc at all
times.
3.2.18
Cutting of chases in 230 thick wall and above for routing GI pipes, CI pipes or
for any other services shall preferably be in the vertical direction. Horizontal
chases shall be avoided, as far as possible. The depth of vertical chases and
horizontal chases, if any shall not exceed one third and one sixth of the
thickness of masonry respectively. Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2 m
in any stretch. Not more than 2 horizontal chases shall be permitted in a stretch
of wall and these should be located in upper or lower one third height of wall.
No continuous horizontal chase should exceed 1 m length. No horizontal
chases will be permitted in half brick wall.
3.2.19
No lintel needs to be provided for circular openings up to 400 mm diameter in

230 mm thick wall and above. Similarly, no lintel needs to be provided for
rectangular holes of 300 mm wide and below. No openings shall be provided in
115 mm thick brick wall.
3.3
Measurement
3.3.1
Measurement shall be in cum correct to two places of decimal for brickwork of

thickness one brick i.e., 200 mm/ 230 mm and above. Measurement shall be in
sqm correct to two places decimal for facing brickwork and brickwork of
thickness half brick i.e., 100 mm/ 115 mm and below. Measurement shall be for
the quantities as actually executed duly deducting for openings, lintels,
transoms/ mullions, etc subject to clauses 3.3.2 & 3.3.3 below.
3.3.2
No deductions shall be made for openings less than 0.1 sqm area or for
embedments up to 0.1 sqm in section.
3.3.3
Brick works curved in plan to a mean radius up to 6 m shall be measured and

paid as curved wall as a separate item of works. Brick works curved in plan to a
mean radius more than 6 m shall be measured and paid like a straight wall.
3.3.4
All concrete works shall he measured and paid for separately under the
4.0
UNCOURSED RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY, IN FOUNDATION, PLINTH

AND SUPERSTRUCTURE
4.1
Materials
4.1.1
Stones for the works shall be of the specified variety which is hard, durable,
fine grained and uniform in colour (for superstructure work) free from veins,

SECTION: D7
SHEET 12 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
flaws and other defects. Quality and work shall conform to the requirements
specified in IS: 1597 (Part - 1). The percentage of water absorption shall not
exceed 0.5 percent as per test conducted in accordance with IS: 1124. The
CONTRACTOR shall supply sample stones to the ENGINEER for approval.
Stones shall be laid with its grains horizontal so that the load transmitted is
always perpendicular to the natural bed.
4.1.2
Cement-sand mortar for stone masonry works shall be in the proportion of 1:6
unless otherwise specified in the respective items of work. Materials and
preparation of mortar shall be as specified in clauses 3.1.6 to 3.1.8.
4.2
Workmanship
4.2.1
For all works below ground level the masonry shall be random rubble uncoursed with ordinary quarry dressed stones for the hearting and selected
quarry dressed stones for the facing.
4.2.2
For all works above ground level and in superstructure the masonry shall be
random rubble un-coursed, well bonded, faced with hammer dressed stones
with squared quoins at corners. The bushings on the face shall not be more
than 40 mm on an exposed face and on the face to be plastered it shall not
project by more than 12 mm nor shall it have depressions more than 10 mm
from the average wall surface.
4.2.3
Face stones shall extend back sufficiently and band well with the masonry. The
depth of stone from the face of the wall inwards shall not be less than the
height or breadth at the face. The length of the stone shall not exceed three
times the height and the breadth on base shall not be greater than threefourths the thickness of wall nor less than 150 mm. The height of stone may be
up to a maximum of 300 mm. Face stones or hearting stones shall not be less
than 150 mm in any direction.
4.2.4
Chips and spalls shall be used wherever necessary to avoid thick mortar joints
and to ensure that no hollow spaces are left in the masonry. The use of chips
and spalls in the hearting shall not exceed 20 percent of the quantity of stone
masonry. Spalls & chips shall not be used on the face of the wall and below
hearting stones to bring them to the level of face stones.
4.2.5
The maximum thickness of joints shall not exceed 20 mm. All joints shall be
completely filled with mortar. When plastering or pointing is not required to be
done, the joints shall be struck flush and finished as the work proceeds.
Otherwise, the joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm by a raking
tool during the progress of the work while the mortar is still green.
4.2.6
Through or bond stones shall be provided in walls up to 600 mm thick and in

case of walls above 600 mm thickness, a set of two or more bond stones

SECTION: D7
SHEET 13 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
overlapping each other by at least 150 mm shall be provided in a line from face
to back. In case of highly absorbent types of stones (porous lime stone and
sand stone, etc) the bond stone shall extend about two-thirds into the wall and
a set of two or more bond stones overlapping each other by at least 150 mm
shall he provided. Each bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be provided
for every 0.5 sqm of wall surface.
4.2.7
All stones shall be sufficiently wetted before laying to prevent absorption of

water from the mortar. All connected walls in a structure shall be normally
raised uniformly and regularly. However if any part of the masonry is required
to be left behind, the wall shall he raked back (and not saw toothed) at an angle
not exceeding 450. Masonry work shall not be raised by more than one metre
per day.
4.2.8
Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. Masonry work
shall be kept constantly moist on all the faces for a minimum period of seven
days for proper curing of the joints.
4.2.9
Type of scaffolding to be used shall be as specified in clause 3.2.6.
4.2.10
Installation of miscellaneous inserts in the masonry shall be as specified in

clause 3.2.13.
4.3
Measurement
4.3.1
Measurement shall be in cum correct to two places of decimal. The quantities

measured and paid for, shall be those as actually executed after making
deductions for openings, lintels, etc.
4.3.2
No deductions shall be made for openings less than 0.1 sqm area or for
embedments up to 0.1 sqm in section.
4.3.3
Brick works curved in plan to a mean radius up to 6 m shall be measured and

paid as curved wall as a separate item of works. Brick works curved in plan to a
mean radius more than 6 m shall be measured and paid like a straight wall.
5.0
COURSED RUBBLE MASONRY (FIRST SORT) FOR SUPERSTRUCTURE
5.1
Materials
The material specification for the work shall be as per clause 4.1.
5.2
Workmanship

SECTION: D7
SHEET 14 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
5.2.1
All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and shall be of the same height in any
course. The height of course shall not be less than 150 mm and not more than
300 mm. The width of stone shall not be less than its height.
5.2.2
Face stones shall tail into the work for not less than their height and at least
1/3rd the number of stones, shall tail into the work for a length not less than
twice their height but not more than three-fourths the thickness of the wall
whichever is smaller. These should be laid as headers and stretchers
alternately to break joints by at least 75 mm.
5.2.3
The face stones shall be squared on all joints and beds; the bed joints being
hammer or chisel dressed true and square for at least 80 mm back from the
face and the side joints for at least 40 mm. The face of the stone shall be
hammer dressed so that the bushing shall not be more than 40 mm on an
exposed face and 10 mm on a face to be plastered. No portion of the dressed
surface shall show a depth of gap more than 6 mm from a straight edge placed
on it. The remaining unexposed portion of the stone shall not project beyond
the surface of bed and side joints.
5.2.4
No spalls or pinnings shall be allowed on the face. All bed joints shall be
horizontal and side joints shall be vertical and no joints shall be more than 10
mm in thickness. When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the
joints shall be struck flush and finished as the work proceeds. Otherwise, the
joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm by a raking tool, during the
progress of the work while the mortar is still green.
5.2.5
Hearting shall consist of flat bedded stones carefully laid on their proper beds
and solidly bedded in mortar. The use of chips shall be restricted to the filling of
interstices between the adjacent stones, in hearting and these shall not exceed
10 percent of the quantity of the stone masonry. Care shall be taken so that no
hollow spaces are left anywhere in the masonry.
5.2.6
The requirement regarding through or bond stones shall be as specified in

clause 4.2.6 with the further stipulation that these shall be provided at 1.5 m to
1.8 m apart clear in every course but staggered at alternate courses.
5.2.7
The quoins which shall be of the same height as the course, in which they
occur, shall not be less than 450 mm in any direction. Quoin stones shall be
laid as stretchers and headers alternately. They shall be laid square on their
beds, which shall he rough chisel dressed to a depth of at least 100 mm from
the face. These stones shall have minimum uniform chisel drafts of 25 mm
width at four edges, all the edges being in the same plane.
5.2.8
Type of scaffolding to be used shall be as per Clause 3.2.6.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 15 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
5.2.9
Requirements of execution of the work and curing shall be as stipulated in

clause 4.2.7 and clause 4.2.8.
5.2.10
Installation of miscellaneous inserts in the masonry shall be as specified in

clause 3.2.13.
5.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be in cum correct to two places of decimal. The quantities
measured and paid for, shall be those as actually executed after making
necessary deductions for openings, lintels, etc.
6.0
CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY
6.1
Materials
6.1.1
Masonry units of hollow and solid concrete blocks shall conform to the
requirements of IS: 2185 (Part - 1).
6.1.2
Masonry units of hollow and solid light-weight concrete blocks shall conform to
the requirements of IS: 2185 (Part - 2).
6.1.3
Masonry units of autoclaved cellular concrete blocks shall conform to the

requirements of IS: 2185 (Part - 3).
6.1.4
The height of the concrete masonry units shall not exceed either its length or
six times its width.
6.1.5
The nominal dimensions of concrete block shall be as under:

Length 400, 500 or 600 mm
Height 100 or 200 mm
Width 100 to 300 mm in 50 mm increments
Half blocks shall be in lengths of 200, 250 or 300 mm to correspond to the full
length blocks. Actual dimensions shall be 10 mm short of the nominal
dimensions.
6.1.6
The maximum variation in the length of the units shall not be more than 5 mm
and maximum variation in height or width of the units shall not be more than 3
mm.
6.1.7
Concrete blocks shall be either hollow blocks with open or closed cavities or
solid blocks.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 16 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
6.1.8
Concrete blocks shall be sound, free of cracks, chipping or other defects which
impair the strength or performance of the construction. Surface texture shall be
as specified. The faces of the units shall be flat and rectangular, opposite faces
shall be parallel and all arises shall be square. The bedding surfaces shall be
at right angles to the faces of the block.
6.1.9
The concrete mix for the hollow and solid concrete blocks/ light weight concrete
blocks shall not be richer than one part of cement to six parts of combined
aggregates by volume i.e., 1:6.
6.1.10
Concrete blocks shall be of approved manufacture, which satisfy the limitations

in the values of water absorption, drying shrinkage and moisture movement, as
specified for the type of block as per relevant IS code. CONTRACTOR shall
furnish the test certificates and also supply the samples, for the approval of
ENGINEER.
6.2
Workmanship
6.2.1
The type of the concrete block, thickness and grade based on the compressive
strength for use in load bearing and/ or non-load bearing walls shall be as
specified in the respective items of work. The minimum nominal thickness of
non-load bearing internal walls shall be 100 mm. The minimum nominal
thickness of external panel walls in framed construction shall be 200 mm.
6.2.2
The workmanship shall generally conform to the requirements of IS: 2572 for
concrete block masonry; IS: 6042 for light weight concrete block masonry and
IS: 6041 for autoclaved cellular concrete block masonry works.
6.2.3
From considerations of durability, generally concrete block masonry shall be

used in superstructure works above the damp-proof course level.
6.2.4
Concrete blocks shall be embedded with a mortar which is relatively weaker

than the mix of the blocks in order to avoid the formation of cracks. Cement
mortar of proportion 1:6 shall be used for the works unless otherwise specified
in the respective items of work. Preparation of mortar shall be as specified in
clauses 3.1.6 to 3.1.8.
6.2.5
The thickness of both horizontal and vertical joints shall be 10 mm. The first
course shall be laid with greater care, ensuring that it is properly aligned,
levelled and plumb since this will facilitate in laying succeeding courses to
obtain a straight and truly vertical wall. For the horizontal (bedding) joint, mortar
shall be spread over the entire top surface of the block including front and rear
shells as well as the webs to a uniform layer of 10 mm. For vertical joints, the
mortar shall be applied on the vertical edges of the front and rear shells of the
blocks. The mortar may be applied either to the unit already placed on the wall

SECTION: D7
SHEET 17 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
or on the edges of the succeeding unit when it is standing vertically and then
placing it horizontally, well pressed against the previously laid unit to produce a
compacted vertical joint. In case of two cell blocks with slight depression on the
vertical sides these shall also be filled up with mortar to secure greater lateral
rigidity. To assure satisfactory bond, mortar shall not be spread too far ahead
of actual laying of the block as the mortar will stiffen and lose its plasticity.
Mortar while hardening shrinks slightly and thus pulls away from the edges of
the block. The mortar shall be pressed against the units with a jointing tool after
it has stiffened to effect intimate contact between the mortar and the unit to
obtain a weather tight joint. The mortar shall be raked to a depth of 10 mm as
each course is laid to ensure good bond for the plaster.
6.2.6
Dimensional stability of hollow concrete blocks greatly affected by variations of

moisture content in the units. Only well dried blocks should be used for the
construction. Blocks with moisture content more than 25% of maximum water
absorption permissible shall not be used. The blocks should not be wetted
before or during laying in the walls. Blocks should be laid dry except slightly
moistening their surface on which mortar is to be applied to obviate absorption
of water from the mortar.
6.2.7
As per the design requirements and to effectively control cracks in the

masonry, RCC bond beam/ studs, joint reinforcement shall be provided at
locations as per details indicated in the construction drawings. Joint
reinforcement shall be fabricated either from mild steel wires conforming to IS:
280 or welded wire fabric/ high strength deformed bars as per the drawings.
6.2.8
For jambs of doors, windows and openings, solid concrete blocks shall he
provided. If hollow units are used, the hollows shall be filled with concrete of
mix 1:3:6. Hold fasts of doors/ windows should be arranged so that they occur
at block course level.
6.2.9
At intersection of walls, the courses shall be laid up at the same time with a
true masonry bond between at least 50% of the concrete blocks. The sequence
for construction of partition walls and treatment at the top of load bearing walls
for the RCC slab shall be as detailed under clause 3 for the brick work.
6.2.10
Curing of the mortar joints shall be carried out for at least 7 days. The walls
should only be lightly moistened and shall not be allowed to become
excessively wet.
6.2.11
Double scaffolding as per clause 3.2.6 shall be adopted for execution of block
masonry work.
6.2.12
Cutting of the units shall be restricted to a minimum. All horizontal and vertical
dimensions shall be in multiples of half length and full height of units

SECTION: D7
SHEET 18 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
respectively, adapting modular co-ordination for walls, opening locations for

doors, windows, etc.
6.2.13
Concrete blocks shall be stored at site suitably to avoid any contact with
moisture from the ground and covered to protect against wetting.
6.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be in cum correct up to two places of decimal for walls of
thickness 200 mm and above. Measurement shall be in sqm correct up to two
places of decimal for walls of 100 mm/ 150mm in thickness. Measurement shall
be for the quantities as actually executed duly deducting for openings and
concrete works. Concrete and reinforcement will be measured and paid
separately. The rate quoted shall be for the type of masonry blocks specified in
the respective items of work which shall include for the specific sequential
operations as stipulated in the construction drawings.
7.0
DAMP-PROOF COURSE
7.1
Materials and Workmanship
7.1.1
Where specified, all the walls in a building shall be provided with damp-proof
course to prevent water from rising up to the wall. The damp-proof course shall
run without a break throughout the length of the wall, even under the door or
other openings. Damp-proof course shall consist of 50 mm thick cement
concrete of 1:2:4 nominal mix with approved water-proofing compound
admixture conforming to IS: 2645 in proportion as directed by the
manufacturer. Concrete shall be with 10 mm down graded coarse aggregates.
7.1.2
The surface of brick/ stone masonry work shall be levelled and prepared before
laying the cement concrete. Side shuttering shall be properly fixed to ensure
that slurry does not leak through and is also not disturbed during compaction.
The upper and side surface shall be made rough to afford key to the masonry
above and to the plaster.
7.1.3
Damp-proof course shall be cured properly for at least seven days after which it
shall be allowed to dry for taking up further work.
7.2
Measurement
Measurement of damp-proof course shall be in sqm correct to two places of
decimal as actually executed. No separate payment will be made for formwork.
8.0
MISCELLANEOUS INSERTS, BOLTS, ETC

SECTION: D7
SHEET 19 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
8.1
All the miscellaneous inserts such as bolts, pipes, plate embedments, etc to be
furnished by the CONTRACTOR shall be accurately installed in the building
works at the correct locations and levels, all as detailed in the construction
drawings. CONTRACTOR shall prepare and use templates for this purpose, if
so directed by the ENGINEER. In the event, any of the inserts are improperly
installed, CONTRACTOR shall make necessary arrangements to remove and
re-install at the correct locations/ levels, all as directed by the ENGINEER
without any extra cost to the PURCHASER.
8.2
Measurement
Miscellaneous inserts, supplied by the CONTRACTOR shall be measured and
paid for as per the respective items of work.
9.0
WOOD WORK IN DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS & PARTITIONS
9.1
Materials
9.1.1
Timber to be used shall be first class Teak wood as per IS: 4021. Timber shall
be of the best quality and well seasoned by a suitable process before being
planed to the required sizes. The maximum permissible moisture content shall
be from 10 to 16 percent for timber 50 mm and above in thickness and 9 to 14
percent of timber less than 50 mm in thickness for different regions of the
country as stipulated In IS: 287. Timber shall be close grained, of uniform
colour and free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pockets or
streaks on the exposed edges, borer holes, splits and cracks.
9.1.2
Flush door shutters of the solid core type with plywood face panels shall
conform to IS: 2202 (Part - 1) and with particle board/ hard board face panels
shall conform to IS: 2202 (Part - 2).
9.1.3
Transparent sheet glass shall conform to the requirements of IS: 2835. Wired
and figured glass shall be as per IS: 5437.
9.1.4
Builder's hardware fittings and fixtures shall be of the best quality from
approved manufacturers.
9.2
Workmanship
9.2.1
The workmanship and finish of wood work in doors, windows, ventilators and
partitions shall be of a very high order. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that work
executed in a professional manner by skilled carpenters for good appearance,
efficient and smooth operation of the shutters.
9.2.2
All works shall be executed as per the detailed drawings and/ or as directed by
the ENGINEER.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 20 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
9.2.3
All members of the door, window, and ventilator shall be straight without any
warp or bow and shall have smooth well planed faces. The right angle shall be
checked from the inside surfaces of the respective members of the frame.
Frames shall have mortise and tenon joints which shall be treated with an
approved adhesive and provided with metal or wood pins. The vertical
members of the door frame shall project 50 mm below the finished floor level.
The finished dimension of frames shall be rebated on the solid for keying with
the plaster and for receiving the shutters. The depth of rebate for housing the
shutter shall be 15 mm. The size of the frames shall be as specified in the
respective items of work. The workmanship shall generally conform to the
requirements specified in IS: 4021.
9.2.4
The face of the frames abutting the masonry or concrete shall be provided with
a coat of coal tar.
9.2.5
Three hold fasts using 25 mm x 6 mm mild steel flats 225 long with split ends
shall be fixed on each side of door and window frames, one at the centre and
the other two at 300 mm from the top and bottom of the frame. For window and
ventilator frames less than 1 m in height, two hold fasts on each side shall be
fixed at quarter points.
9.2.6
Timber panelled shutters for doors, windows and ventilators shall be

constructed in the form of framework of stiles and rails with panel insertion. The
panels shall be fixed by either providing grooves in the stiles and rails or by
beading. Glazing bars shall be as detailed in the drawings. The stiles and rails
shall be joined by mortise and tenon joints at right angles. All members of the
shutter shall be straight without any warp or bow and shall have smooth, well
planed faces at right angles to each other. The right angle for the shutter shall
be checked by measuring the diagonals and the difference shall not be more
than 3 mm. Timber panels made from more than one piece shall be jointed
with a continuous tongued and grooved joint, glued together and reinforced
with metal dowels. The workmanship shall, generally conform to the
requirements specified in IS: 1003 (Parts - 1 & 2). The thickness of the shutter,
width/ thickness of the stiles/ rails/ panel type shall be as indicated in the bid
drawings/ item of work. Marine plywood panels conforming to IS: 710 shall be
used for doors where specified.
9.2.7
Details of the wooden flush door shutters, solid core type with specific
requirement of the thickness; core, face panels, viewing glazed panel, Venetian
louver opening, teak wood lipping, etc shall be as indicated in the respective
items of work. Panels of shutter shall be of marine plywood conforming to IS:
710, if so specified in the item of work. Flush door shutters shall be from
reputed manufacturers and CONTRACTOR shall submit test results as per IS:
4020, if so desired by the ENGINEER.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 21 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
9.2.8
Glazing of door, window, ventilator and partitions shall be with either flat
transparent sheet glass, wired or figured glass. Transparent sheet glass shall
be of 'B' quality as per IS: 2835. The thickness and type of glazing to be
provided shall be as specified in the item of work.
9.2.9
The material of the fittings and fixtures either of chromium plated steel, cast
brass, copper oxidised or anodised aluminium shall be as specified in the item
of work. The number, size and type of the fittings and fixtures shall be as
indicated in the drawings/ item of work.
9.2.10
Wood work shall not be provided with the finishes

unless it has been approved by the ENGINEER.
number of coats shall be as stipulated in the
Preparation of the wood surface and application
accordance with clause 35.
9.2.11
Wooden hand railing and architraves shall be of the size and shape with the
fixing arrangement as indicated in the bid drawings/ described in the item of
work.
9.2.12
The framework of the partitions with mullions and transoms shall be with the
sections of dimensions as per the item at work. Panels of double/ single
glazing/ plywood shall be fixed as per details indicated in the drawings.
Partitions shall be fixed rigidly between the floor and structural columns/ beams
including provision of necessary shims for wedging etc. Finished work shall be
of rigid construction, erected truly plumb to the lines and levels, at locations as
per the construction drawings.
9.2.13
Any carpentry work which show defects due to inadequate seasoning of the
timber or bad workmanship shall be removed and replaced by CONTRACTOR
with work as per specification requirements, at no extra cost to the
PURCHASER.
9.3
Measurement
of painting, galvanising, etc

The type of finish and the
of the finishes shall be in
Measurement for doors, windows, ventilators architraves and partitions shall be

in sqm correct to two places of decimal. Hand railing shall be measured in
running metres, correct to two places of decimal. Measurement shall be from
out to out of the frames. Rate quoted shall be for all the works including
glazing, painting, builder's hardware fittings and fixtures as specifically
described in the respective items of work.
10.0
STEEL DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
10.1
Materials

SECTION: D7
SHEET 22 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
10.1.1
Hot rolled steel sections for the fabrication of steel doors, windows and
ventilators shall conform to IS: 7452, which are suitable for single glazing.
10.1.2
Pressed steel door frames for steel flush doors shall be out of 1.25 mm thick
mild steel sheets of profiles as per IS: 4351.
10.1.3
10.1.4
Builder's hardware fittings and fixtures shall be of the best quality from
approved manufacturers.
10.2
Workmanship
10.2.1
All steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be of the type as specified in the
respective items of work and of sizes as indicated in the drawings. Steel doors,
windows and ventilators shall conform to the requirements as stipulated in IS:
1038. Steel windows shall conform to IS: 1361, if so specified.
10.2.2
Doors, windows and ventilators shall be of an approved manufacture.

Fabrication of the units shall be with rolled sections, cut to correct lengths and
mitred. Corners shall be welded to form a solid fused welded joint conforming
to the requirements of IS: 1038. Tolerance in overall dimensions shall be within
1.5mm. The frames and shutters shall be free from warp or buckle and shall
be square and truly plane. All welds shall be dressed flush on exposed and
contact surfaces. Punching of holes, slots and other provisions to install fittings
and fixtures later shall be made at the correct locations as per the
requirements. Samples of the units shall be got approved by the ENGINEER
before further manufacture/ purchase by the CONTRACTOR.
10.2.3
Type and details of shutters, hinges, glazing bar requirement, couplings,

locking arrangement, fittings and fixtures shall be as described in the
respective items of work and/ or as shown in the drawings for single or
composite units.
10.2.4
For windows with fly proof mesh as per the item of work, rotor operator
arrangement, for the operation of the glazed shutters from the inside shall be
provided.
10.2.5
Pressed steel doer frames shall be provided with fixing lugs at each jamb,
hinges, lock-strike plate, mortar guards, angle-threshold, shock-absorbers of
rubber or similar material as per the requirements of IS: 4351. Pressed steel
door frames shall be fixed as 'built-in', as the masonry work proceeds. After
placing it plumb at the specified location, masonry walls shall be built up solid
on both side and each course grouted with mortar to ensure solid contact with

SECTION: D7
SHEET 23 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
the door frame, without leaving any voids. Temporary struts across the width
shall be fixed, during erection to prevent bow/ sag of the frame.
10.2.6
Door shutters of flush welded construction shall be 45 mm thick, fabricated with

two outer skins of 1.25 mm thick steel sheets, 1 mm thick steel sheet sufferers
and steel channels an all four edges. Double shutters shall have meeting stile
edge bevelled or rebated. Provision of glazed viewing panel, louvers shall be
made as per the item of work and/ or drawings. Shutters shall be suitably
reinforced for lock and other surface hardware and to prevent sagging/ twisting.
Single sheet steel door shutters shall be fabricated out of 1.25 mm thick steel
sheets, mild steel angles and stiffeners as per the drawings.
10.2.7
Doors, windows and ventilators shall be fixed into the prepared openings. They
shall not be 'built-in' as the masonry work proceeds, to avoid distortion and
damage of the units. The dimensions of the masonry opening shall have 10
mm clearance all-round the overall dimensions of the frame for this purpose.
Any support of scaffolding members on the frames/ glazing bars is prohibited.
10.2.8
Glazing of the units shall be either with flat transparent glass or wired/ figured
glass of the thickness as specified in the item of work. All glass panels shall
have properly squared corner and straight edges. Glazing shall be provided on
the outside of the frames.
10.2.9
Fixing of the glazing shall be either with spring glazing clips and putty
conforming to IS: 419 or with metal beads. Pre-formed PVC or rubber gasket
shall be provided for fixing the beads with concealed screws. The type of fixing
the glazing shall be as indicated in the item of work and/ or in drawings.
10.2.10 Steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be provided with finish of either
painting as specified or shall be hot dip galvanised with thickness of zinc
coating as stipulated all as described in the respective items of work.
10.2.11 The material of the Builders hardware fittings and fixtures of chromium plated
steel, cast brass, brass copper oxidised or anodised aluminium shall be as
specified in the item of work. The number, size and type of fittings and fixtures
shall be as in the bid drawings/ item of work.
10.2.12 Installation of the units with fixing lugs, screws, mastic caulking compound at
the specified locations shall generally conform to the requirements of IS: 1081.
Necessary holes etc required for fixing shall be made by the CONTRACTOR
and made good after installation. Workmanship expected is of a high order for
efficient and smooth operation of the units.
10.3
Measurement

SECTION: D7
SHEET 24 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
Measurement shall be in sqm correct to two places of decimal. Measurement

shall be from out to out of the frames. Rates quoted shall be for the works
including glazing, painting, Builder's hardware fittings and fixtures as
specifically described in the respective items of work.
11.0
ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS & PARTITIONS
11.1
Materials
11.1.1
Aluminium alloy used in the manufacture of extruded sections for the

fabrication of doors, windows, ventilators shall conform to designation 63400
WP of IS: 733.
11.1.2
11.1.3
Builder's hardware fittings & fixtures shall be of the best quality from approved
manufacturers.
11.2
Workmanship
11.2.1
All aluminium doors, windows, ventilators and partitions shall be of the type as
specified in the respective items of work and of sizes as indicated in the
drawings. The doors, windows, ventilators shall conform to the requirements of
IS: 1948. Aluminium windows shall conform to IS: 1949, if so specified.
11.2.2
All aluminium units shall be supplied with anodised finish. The minimum anodic
film thickness shall be 0.015 mm.
11.2.3
Doors, windows and ventilators shall be of an approved manufacture.

Fabrication of the units shall be with the extruded sections, cut to correct
lengths, mitred and welded at the corners to a true right angle conforming to
the requirements of IS: 1948. Tolerance in overall dimensions shall be within
1.5 mm. The frames and shutters shall be free from warp or buckle and shall
be square and truly plane. Punching of holes, slots and other provisions to
install fittings or fixtures later shall be made at the correct locations, as per the
requirements.
11.2.4
Aluminium swing type doors, aluminium sliding windows, partitions shall be as

described in the item of work and/ or bid drawings which indicate generally the
arrangement along with the overall size of the various components and weight
per running metre of the extruded sections to be adopted.
11.2.5
IS: 1948 and IS: 1949 referred to incorporates the size, shape, thickness and
weight per running metre of extruded sections for the various components of
the units. However, new sizes, shapes, thicknesses with modifications to suit

SECTION: D7
SHEET 25 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
snap-fit glazing clips, etc are continuously being added by various leading
manufacturers of extruded sections, which are available in the market. As such,
the sections of the various components of the unit proposed by the
CONTRACTOR, will be reviewed by the ENGINEER and will be accepted only
if they are equal to or marginally more than that specified in the codes/ item of
works.
11.2.6
The framework of the partitions with mullions and transoms shall be with
anodised aluminium box sections of dimensions as per the item of work.
Anodised Aluminium box sections shall be in-filled with timber of class 3 (silver
oak or any other equivalent) as per IS: 4021. Panels of double/ single glazing/
plywood shall be fixed as per details indicated in the drawing. Partitions shall
be fixed rigidly between the floor and the structural columns/ beams including
provision of necessary shims for wedging etc. Finished work shall be of rigid
construction, erected truly plumb to the lines and levels, at locations as per the
11.2.7
Specific provisions as stipulated for steel doors, windows, ventilators under

clauses 10.2.3, 10.2.4 and 10.2.7 to 10.2.12 shall also be applicable for this
item of work. Glazing beads shall be of the snap-fit type suitable for the
thickness of glazing proposed as indicated in the item of work. A layer of clear
transparent lacquer shall be applied on aluminium sections to protect them
from damage during installation. This lacquer coating shall be removed after
the installation is completed.
11.3
Measurement
shall be from out to out of the frames. Rate quoted shall be for the works
including glazing, Builder's hardware fittings and fixtures as specifically
described in the respective items of work.
12.0
METAL ROLLING SHUTTERS AND ROLLING GRILLS
12.1
12.1.1
Metal Rolling shutters and rolling grills shall be of an approved manufacture,

conforming to the requirements specified in IS: 6248.
12.1.2
The type viz. self coiling type (manual) for clear areas up to 12 sqm, gear
operated type (mechanical) for clear areas up to 35 sqm and electrically
operated type for areas up to 50 sqm shall be as specified in the respective
items of work. Mechanical type shall be suitable for operation from both inside
and outside with the crank handle or chain gear operating mechanism duly
considering the size of wall/ column. Electrical type shall also be provided with
a facility for emergency mechanical operation.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 26 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
12.1.3
Rolling shutters/ grills shall be supplied duly considering the type, specified
clear width/ height of the opening and the location of fixing as indicated in the
drawings.
12.1.4.1 Rolling Shutter curtain shall be built-up of interlocking laths 75 mm width

between rolling centres formed from cold rolled steel strips. The thickness of
the steel strip shall not be less than 0.9 mm for shutters up to 3.5 m width and
not less than 1.2 mm for shutters above 3.5 m width. Each lath section shall be
continuous single piece without any welded joint.
12.1.4.2 Fabrication and assembly of rolling grill curtain shall have the type of links and
other additional requirements as specified in the item of works.
12.1.5
The guide channels out of mild steel sheets of thickness not less than 3.15 mm
shall be of either rolled, pressed or built up construction. The channel shall be
of size as stipulated in IS: 6248 for various clear width of the shutters/ grills.
12.1.6
Hood covers shall be of mild steel sheets not less than 0.9 mm thick and of
approved shape.
12.1.7
Rolling shutters/ grills shall be provided with a central hasp and staple safety
device in addition to one pair of lever locks and sliding locks at the ends.
12.1.8
Where a rolling shutter is combined with rolling grill, height of rolling grill shall
be 500 mm maximum.
12.1.9
All steel components (excepting springs and insides of guide channels) shall be
provided with one coat of zinc chrome primer conforming to IS: 2074 at the
shop before supply. These surfaces shall be given an additional coat of primer
after erection at the site along with the number of coats and type of finish paint
as specified in the respective Items of work. Painting shall be carried out as per
clause 36.
12.1.10 Where galvanising is called for, the curtain sections, guides, lock plates,
bracket plates, suspension shaft and the hood cover shall be hot dip
galvanised with a zinc coating containing not less than 97.5 percent pure zinc.
The weight of the zinc coating per sqm shall be as specified in the item of work.
12.1.11 Guide channels shall be installed truly plumb at the specified location. Bracket
plate shall be rigidly fixed with necessary bolts and holdfasts. Workmanship of
erection shall ensure strength and rigidity of rolling shutter for trouble free and
smooth operation.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 27 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
12.1.12 Rolling shutter/ grill manufactured by reputed manufacturer as part of their

standard product can also be used, provided the quality and size of members
satisfy the stipulations above.
12.2
Measurement
Measurement shall be in sqm correct to two places of decimal of the clear area
of the opening. Quoted rate shall be inclusive of painting as specified in the
item of work.
13.0
RUBBLE SUB-BASE
13.1
Materials
13.1.1
Stones used for rubble packing under floors on grade, foundations, etc shall be
clean, hard, durable rock free from veins, flaws, laminations, weathering and
other defects. Stones shall generally conform to the requirements stipulated in
IS: 1597 (Part - I).
13.1.2
Stones shall be as regular as can be obtained from quarries. Stones shall be of

height equal to the thickness of the packing proposed with a tolerance of 10
mm. Stones shall not have a base area less than 250 sqcm nor more than 500
sqcm, and the smallest dimension of any stone shall not be less than half the
largest dimension. The quality and size of stones shall be subject to the
approval of the ENGINEER.
13.2
Workmanship
13.2.1
Stones shall be hand packed carefully and laid with their largest base
downwards resting flat on the prepared sub-grade and with their height equal to
the thickness of the packing. Stones shall be laid breaking joints and in close
contact with each other. All interstices between the stones shall be wedged-in
by small stones of suitable size, well driven in by crow bars and hammers to
ensure tight packing and complete filling-in of the interstices. The wedging shall
be tarried out simultaneously with the placing in position of rubble packing and
shall not lag behind. After this, any interstices between the smaller wedged
stones shall be in-filled with clean hard sand by brooming so as to fill the joints
completely.
13.2.2
The laid rubble packing shall be sprinkled with water and compacted by using
suitable rammers.
13.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be in sqm correct to two places of decimal for the specified
compacted thickness of rubble sub-base.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 28 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
14.0
BASE CONCRETE
14.1
The thickness and grade of concrete shall be as specified in the item of work.
14.2
Before placing the blinding concrete, 50/ 75 mm thick as per the item of work,
the sub-base of rubble packing shall be properly wetted and rammed. Concrete
for the base shall then be deposited between the forms, thoroughly tamped and
the surface finished level with the top edges of the forms. Two or three hours
after the concrete has been laid in position, the surface shall be roughened
using steel wire brush to remove any scum or laitance and swept clean so that
the coarse aggregates are exposed. The surface of the base concrete shall be
left rough to provide adequate bond for the floor finish to be provided later.
14.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be in sqm correct to two places of decimal. This work could
be either separate or combined along with the floor finish as indicated in the
15.0
TERRAZZO AND PLAIN CEMENT TILING WORK
15.1
Materials
15.1.1
Terrazzo tiles and cement tiles shall generally conform in all respects to
standards stipulated in IS: 1237. Tiles shall be of the best quality manufactured
adopting hydraulic pressure of not less than 14 N/mm2.
15.1.2
The type, quality, size, thickness colour, etc of the tiles for flooring/ dado/
skirting shall be as specified in the respective items of work.
15.1.3
The aggregates for terrazzo topping shall consist of marble chips which are
hard, sound and dense. Cement to be used shall be either ordinary Portland
cement or white cement with or without colouring pigment. The binder mix shall
be with 3 parts of cement to 1 part of marble powder by weight. The proportion
of cement shall be inclusive of any pigments. For every one part of cementmarble powder binder mix, the proportion of aggregates shall be 1.75 parts by
volume, if the chips are between 1 mm to 6 mm and 1.5 parts by volume if the
chips are between 6 mm to 25 mm.
15.1.4
The minimum thickness of wearing layer of terrazzo tiles shall be 5 mm for tiles
with chips of size varying from 1 mm up to 6 mm or from 1 mm up to 12 mm.
This shall be 6 mm for tiles with chips varying from 1 mm up to 25 mm. The
minimum thickness of wearing layer of cement/ coloured cement tiles shall he 5
mm. This shall be 6 mm for heavy duty tiles. Pigment used in the wearing layer
shall not exceed 10 percent of the weight of cement used in the mix.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 29 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
15.2
Workmanship
15.2.1
Laying and finishing of tiles shall conform to the requirements of workmanship

stipulated in IS: 1443.
15.2.2
Tiling work shall be commenced only after the door and window frames are
fixed and plastering of the walls/ ceiling is completed. Wall plastering shall not
be carried out up to about 50 mm above the level of proposed skirting/ dado.
15.2.3
The base concrete shall be finished to a reasonably plane surface about 40 to

45 mm below the level of finished floor. Before the tiling work is taken up, the
base concrete or structural slab shall be cleaned of all loose materials, mortar
droppings, dirt, laitance, etc using steel wire brush and well wetted without
allowing any water pools on the surface.
15.2.4
A layer of 25 mm average thickness of cement mortar consisting of one part of

cement to four parts of sand shall be provided as bedding for the tiles over the
base concrete. The thickness of bedding mortar shall not be less than 10 mm
at any place. The quantity of water to be added for the mortar shall be just
adequate to obtain the workability for laying. Sand for the mortar shall conform
to IS: 2116 and shall have minimum fineness modulus of 1.5. The surface shall
be left rough to provide a good bond for the tiles. The bedding shall be allowed
to harden for a day before laying of the tiles.
15.2.5
Neat cement slurry using 4.4 kg of cement per one sqm of floor area shall be
spread over the hardened mortar bedding over such an area at a time as would
accommodate about 20 tiles. Tiles shall be fixed in this slurry one after the
other, each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly
bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. The joints shall be in straight lines
and shall normally be 1.5 mm wide. On completion of laying of the tiles in a
room, all the Joints shall be cleaned and washed fairly deep with a stiff broom/
wire brush to a minimum depth of 5 mm. The day after the tiles have been laid,
the joints shall be filled with cement grout of the same shade on the colour of
the matrix of the tile. For this purpose white cement or grey cement with or
without pigments shall be used. The flooring should be kept moist and left
undisturbed for 7 days for the bedding/ joints to set properly. Heavy traffic shall
not be allowed on the floor for at least 14 days after fixing of the tiles.
15.2.6
About a week after laying the tiles, each and every tile shall be lightly tapped
with a small wooden mallet to find out if it gives a hollow sound; if it does, such
tiles along with any other cracked or broken tiles shall be removed and
replaced with new tiles to proper line and level. The same procedure shall be
followed again after grinding the tiles and all damaged tiles replaced, properly
jointed and finished to match. For the purpose of ensuring that such replaced

SECTION: D7
SHEET 30 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
tiles match with those laid earlier, it is necessary that the CONTRACTOR shall
procure sufficient quantity of extra tiles to meet this contingency.
15.2.7
Wherever a full tile cannot be provided, tiles shall be cut to size and fixed. Floor
tiles adjoining the wall shall go about 10 mm under the plaster, skirting or dado.
15.2.8
Tile skirting and dado work shall be executed only after laying tiles on the floor.
For dado and skirting work, the vertical wall surface shall be thoroughly
cleaned and wetted. Thereafter it shall be evenly and uniformly covered with 12
mm thick backing of 1:4 cement sand mortar. For this work the tiles as obtained
from the factory shall be of the size required and practically full polished. The
back of each tile to be fixed shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cement
paste and the tile shall then be gently tapped against the wall with a wooden
mallet. Fixing shall be done from the bottom of the wall upwards. The joints
shall be in straight lines and shall normally be 1.5 mm wide. Any difference in
the thickness of the tiles shall be evened out in the backing mortar or cement
paste so that the tile faces are in conformity & truly plumb. Tiles for use at the
corners shall be suitably cut with bevelled edges to obtain a neat and true joint.
After the work has set, hand polishing with carborundum stones shall be done
so that the surface matches with the floor finish.
15.2.9
Wall plastering of the strip left out above the level of skirting/ dado shall be
taken up after the tiles are fixed.
15.2.10 CONTRACTOR shall note that the unit rate quoted for skirting shall also
include for any chipping of the brick work required to be carried out for this
item.
15.2.11 Chequered terrazzo tiles for flooring and for stair treads shall be delivered to
site after the first machine grinding.
15.2.12 Machine grinding and polishing shall be commenced only after a gap of 14
days of laying. The sequence and three numbers of machine grinding
operations, usage of the type of carborundum stones, filling up of pin holes,
watering, etc shall be carried out all as specified in IS: 1443.
15.2.13 Tiles shall be laid to the levels specified. To ensure this, finished floor levels
should be marked at all door locations and also on the floor at frequent
intervals. Where large areas are to be tiled the level of the central portion shall
be kept 10 mm higher than that at the walls to overcome optical illusion of a
depression in the central portion. Localised deviation of 3 mm in any 3 m
length is acceptable in a nominally flat floor.
15.2.14 All corners shall be in perfect right angle matching up with the corners of walls.
If due to any misalignment during construction, the corners of wall are not at
right angle, adjustment shall be made in the tile portion lying below skirting.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 31 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
15.2.15 Flooring in toilets, kitchen shall be taken up only after fixing water closet,
squatting pans & floor traps.
15.3
Measurement
Measurement for floor tiling and dado shall be in sqm correct to two places of
decimal. Actual quantity of tiling work as laid shall be measured for payment as
per the respective items of work after making deductions for openings etc. No
deduction shall be made nor any extra to be paid for openings not exceeding
0.2 sqm. Measurement for skirting be in running metres correct to two places of
decimal for the specified height as per the item of work.
16.0
IN-SITU TERRAZZO WORK
16.1
Materials
16.1.1
The requirements of marble aggregates for terrazzo topping shall be as per

clause 15.1.3.
16.1.2
Cement shall first be mixed with the marble powder in dry state. The mix thus
obtained shall be mixed with the aggregates in the specified proportions. Care
shall be taken not to get the materials into a heap which results in the coarsest
chips falling to the edges and cement working to the centre at the bottom.
Materials shall be kept, as far as possible, in an even layer during mixing. After
the materials have been thoroughly mixed in the dry state, water shall be
added, just adequate to obtain plastic consistency for the desired workability for
laying. The mix shall be used in the works within 30 minutes of the addition of
water to the cement.
16.2
Workmanship
16.2.1
The thickness, type, quality, size and colour of chips, etc for the in-situ terrazzo
finish for flooring/ dado skirting shall be as specified in the respective items of
work. Laying and finishing of in-situ work shall conform to the requirements of
workmanship stipulated in IS: 2114.
16.2.2
In-situ terrazzo finish shall be laid over hardened concrete base. The finish
layer consists of an under layer and terrazzo topping. The under layer shall be
of cement concrete of mix 1:2:4 using 10 mm down graded coarse aggregates.
The combined thickness of under layer and topping shall not be less than 30
mm for flooring and 20 mm for dado/ skirting work.
16.2.3
The minimum thickness of topping shall be 6 mm if chips used are between 1

mm to 4 mm, 9 mm if chips are between 4 mm to 7 mm and 12 mm if chips are

SECTION: D7
SHEET 32 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
between 7 mm to 10 mm. If chips larger than 10 mm size are used, the

minimum thickness shall be one and one third the maximum size of chips.
16.2.4
Both the under layer and later the topping shall be divided into panels not
exceeding 2 sqm for laying so as to reduce the possibility of development of
cracks. The longer dimension of any panel shall not exceed 2 m. Dividing strips
shall be used to separate the panels. When the dividing strips are not provided,
the bays shall be laid alternately, allowing an interval of at least 24 hours
between laying adjacent bays.
16.2.5
Dividing strips shall be either of aluminium, brass or other material as indicated

in the item of work. Aluminium strips should have a protective coating of
bitumen. The thickness of the strips shall be not less than 1.5 mm and width
not less than 25 mm for flooring work.
16.2.6
Concrete base shall be finished to a reasonably plane surface to a level below

the finished floor elevation equal to the specified thickness of terrazzo finish.
Before spreading the under-layer, the base concrete surface shall be cleaned
of all loose materials, mortar droppings, dirt, laitance, etc and well wetted
without allowing any water pools on the surface. Dividing strips or screed strips,
if dividing strips are not provided, shall be fixed on the base and levelled to the
correct height to suit the thickness of the finish. Just before spreading the
under-layer the surface shall be smeared with cement slurry at 2.75 kg/sqm.
Over this slurry, the under-layer shall be spread and levelled with a screed
board. The top surface shall be left rough to provide a good bond for the
terrazzo topping.
16.2.7
Terrazzo topping shall be laid while the under-layer is still plastic and normally
between 18 to 24 hours after the under-layer is laid. Cement slurry of the same
colour as the topping shall be brushed on the surface immediately before laying
is commenced. The terrazzo mix shall be laid to a uniform thickness and
compacted thoroughly by tamping and with a minimum of trowelling. Straight
edge and steel floats shall be used to bring the surface true to the required
level in such a manner that the maximum amount of marble chips come up and
spread uniformly all over the surface.
16.2.8
The surface shall be left dry for air-curing for a period of 12 to 18 hours.
Thereafter it shall be cured by allowing water to stand in pools for a period of
not less than 4 days.
16.2.9
Machine grinding and polishing shall be commenced only after a gap of 7 days
from the time of completion of laying. The sequence and four numbers of
machine grinding operations, usage of the type of carborundum stones, filling
up of pinholes, wet curing, watering, etc shall be carried out all as specified in
IS: 2114. Where machine polishing is not possible, polishing shall be carried
out by hand in the same sequence and procedure as for machine polishing.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 33 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
16.2.10 Where the dampness from ground may find its way to the top of floor, concrete
floor on the ground or basement shall be provided with an effective damp proof
course as described in clause 20.2.9 later.
16.2.11 Flooring in toilet and kitchen shall be taken up after fixing water closet,
squatting pans and floor trap.
16.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be as per clause 15.3.1.
17.0
SHAHABAD/ TANDUR/ KOTA STONE SLAB WORK
17.1
Materials
17.1.1
The slabs shall be of approved selected quality, hard, sound, dense and
homogenous in texture, free from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws. The
percentage of water absorption shall not exceed 5 percent as per test
conducted in accordance with IS: 1124.
17.1.2
The slabs shall be hand or machine cut to the required thickness. Tolerance in
thickness for dimensions of tile more than 100 mm shall be 5 mm. This shall
be 2 mm on dimensions less than 100 mm.
17.1.3
Slabs shall be supplied to the specified size with machine cut edges or fine
chisel dressed to the full depth. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true
and square, free from any chipping giving a plane surface. Slabs shall have the
top surface machine polished (first grinding) before being brought to site. The
slabs shall be washed clean before laying.
17.2
Workmanship
17.2.1
The type, size, thickness and colour/ shade, etc of the slabs for flooring/ dado/
skirting shall be as specified in the respective items of the work.
17.2.2
Preparation of the concrete base, laying and curing shall be as per clause
15.2.3 to clause 15.2.5. Concrete base shall be finished below the finished floor
level equal to the thickness of stone slab and cement mortar below.
17.2.3
Dado/ skirting work shall be as per clause 15.2.8. The thickness of the slabs for
dado/ skirting work shall not be more than 25 mm. Slabs shall be so placed that
the back surface is at a distance of 12 mm from the wall. If necessary, slabs
shall be held in position temporarily by suitable method. After checking for
verticality, the gap shall be filled and packed with cement sand mortar of
proportion 1:3. After the mortar has acquired sufficient strength, the temporary

SECTION: D7
SHEET 34 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
arrangement holding the slab shall be removed. The recommended mortar mix
for joints and beddings for stone blocks shall be two parts of white cement and
seven parts of stone dust. The thickness of joints shall be 5 mm. For fixing of
stones to the walls, fixing clamps of non-ferrous metal should be used.
17.2.4
Grinding and polishing shall be as per clause 15.2.12 except that first grinding
with coarse grade carborundum shall not be done and cement slurry with or
without pigment shall not be applied before polishing.
17.3
Measurement
18.0
CARBORUNDUM TILE FINISH
18.1
Materials
18.1.1
Carborundum tiles shall generally conform in all respects to the standards

stipulated in IS: 1237 for heavy duty tiles. Tiles shall be of the best quality
manufactured adopting hydraulic pressure of not less than 14 N/mm2.
18.1.2
Each tile shall bear on its back, permanent and legible trade mark of the
manufacturer. All angles of the tiles shall be right angle, all edges sharp and
true, colour and texture of the wearing face uniform through out. Maximum
tolerance/ allowance for length and breadth shall be +1 mm and thickness +3
mm along the wearing surface of the tile and the wearing surface shall be
planed free from pin-holes and other blemishes.
18.1.3
The backing shall be composed of 1 part ordinary grey cement, 2 parts sand
and 4 parts of stone chips by volume and mixed with water.
18.1.4
The topping shall be uniform and of thickness not less than 6 mm. The quantity
of carborundum grit shall be not less than 1.35 kg/sqm used with cement with
or without pigment. The carborundum grit shall pass through 1.18 mm mesh
and shall be retained on 0.6 mm mesh. The total thickness of tiles including the
topping shall be not less than 20 mm.
18.1.5
The tile shall be cured at the shop for at least 14 days before delivery to site.
Tiles shall be packed properly to prevent damage during transit and storage.
The tiles must be stored carefully to prevent staining by damp, rust, oil and
grease or other chemicals. Tiles made in each batch shall be kept and used
separately so that the colour of each area of floor may remain uniform.
18.1.6
The manufacturer shall supply along with the tiles the grout mix containing
cement and pigment in exact proportions as used in topping of tiles. The

SECTION: D7
SHEET 35 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
containers of the grout mix shall be suitably marked to relate it to the particular
type and batch of tiles.
18.1.7
The size, thickness, colour and plain or chequered etc of the tiles for flooring/
skirting shall be as specified in the respective items of work. The under bed for
floors shall be 1 part cement: 2 parts coarse sand: 4 parts stone aggregate by
volume mix with sufficient water to form a stiff workable mass. For skirting and
dado, it shall be 1 part cement: 3 parts coarse sand by volume.
18.1.8
The total average thickness shall be minimum 50 mm for floors and 30 mm for
walls.
18.2
Workmanship
Requirements as detailed for terrazzo/ cement tile finish under clause 15.2
shall be applicable for carborundum tile flooring.
18.3
Measurement
19.0
GLAZED TILE FINISH
19.1
Materials
Glazed earthenware tiles shall conform to the requirements of IS: 13756. Tiles
shall be of the best quality from an approved manufacturer. The tiles shall be
flat, true to shape and free from flaws such as crazing, blisters, pinholes,
specks or welts. Edges and underside of the tiles shall be free from glaze and
shall have ribs or indentations for a better anchorage with the bedding mortar.
Dimensional tolerances shall be as specified in IS: 13756.
19.2
Workmanship
19.2.1
The size, thickness, colour, with or without designs, etc of the tiles for flooring/
dado/ skirting shall be as specified in the respective items of work.
19.2.2
The total thickness of glazed tile finish including the bedding mortar shall be
maximum 20 mm in flooring/ dado/ skirting. The minimum thickness of bedding
mortar shall be 12 mm for flooring and 10 mm for dado/ skirting work.
19.2.3
The bedding mortar shall consist of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of sand mixed
with just sufficient water to obtain proper consistency for laying. Sand for the
mortar shall conform to IS: 2116 and shall have minimum fineness modules of
1.5.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 36 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
19.2.4
Tiles shall be soaked in water for about 10 minutes just before laying. Where
full size tiles cannot be fixed, tiles shall be cut to the required size using special
cutting device and the edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints.
19.2.5
Coloured tiles with or without designs shall be uniform and shall be preferably
procured from the same batch of manufacture to avoid any differences in the
shade.
19.2.6
Tiles for the flooring shall be laid over hardened concrete base. The surface of
the concrete base shall be cleaned of all loose materials, mortar droppings, etc
well wetted without allowing any water pools on the surface. The bedding
mortar shall then be laid evenly over the surface, tamped to the desired level
and allowed to harden for a day. The top surface shall be left rough to provide
a good band for the tiles. For skirting and dado work, the brick walls shall be
raked to a depth of 15 mm. In case of concrete walls, the surfaces shall be
hacked. The raked/ hacked masonry surfaces shall be cleared, wet and then
the bedding mortar to specified thickness shall be applied. The mortar surfaces
shall be roughened using wire brush and allowed to harden.
19.2.7
Neat cement slurry using 3.3 kg cement per one sqm of floor area shall be
spread over the hardened mortar bed over such an area as would
accommodate about 20 tiles. Tiles shall be fixed in this slurry one after the
other, each tile being gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly
bedded and in level with the adjoining tiles. For skirting and dado work, the
back of the tiles shall be smeared with cement slurry for setting on the backing
mortar. Fixing of tiles shall be done from the bottom of the wall upwards. The
joints shall be in perfect straight lines and as thin as possible but shall not be
more than 1 mm wide. Tiles used for corners shall be suitably bevelled to
obtain a true and neat joint. The surface shall be checked frequently to ensure
correct level/ required slope. Floor tiles near the walls shall enter skirting/ dado
to a minimum depth of 10mm. Tiles shall not sound hollow when tapped.
19.2.8
All the joints shall be cleaned of grey cement with wire brush to a depth of at
least 3 mm and all dust, loose mortar, etc shall be removed. White cement with
or without pigment shall then be used for flush pointing the joints. Curing shall
then be carried out for a minimum period of 7 days for the bedding and joints to
set properly. The surface shall then be cleaned using a suitable detergent, fully
washed and wiped dry.
19.2.9
Specials consisting of caves, internal and external angles, cornices, beads and
their corner pieces shall be of thickness not less than the tiles with which they
are used.
19.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be as per Clause 15.3.1.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 37 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
20.0
IN-SITU CEMENT CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING
20.1
Materials
20.1.1
The mix proportion for the in-situ concrete floor topping shall be 1: 2:3 (one
part cement: two and half parts sand: three and half parts coarse aggregates)
by volume unless otherwise specified in the item of work.
20.1.2
The aggregates shall conform for the requirements of IS: 383.
20.1.3
Coarse aggregates shall have high hardness surface texture and shall consist
of crushed rock of granite, basalt, trap or quartzite. The aggregate crushing
value shall not exceed 30 percent. The grading of the coarse aggregates shall
be of size 12.5 mm and below and shall be as per IS: 2571.
20.1.4
Grading of the sand shall be within the limits indicated in IS: 2571.
20.2
Workmanship
20.2.1
The thickness of the floor topping shall be as specified in the item of work. The
minimum thickness of the floor topping shall be 25 mm, if it is laid separately.
15mm thick wearing course of cement concrete 1:2 (1 cement: 2 stone)
aggregate of size 4.75 & below) by volume shall be applied monolithically over
floor topping, if called for in the schedule of item. Wearing course shall be 20
mm thick, if it is cast monolithically over ground floor slab. Laying and finishing
of in-situ topping shall conform to the requirements of IS: 2571.
20.2.2
Preparation of base concrete/ structural slab before laying the topping shall be
as per clause 15.2.3. The surface shall be rough to provide adequate bond for
the topping. It shall be finished to a level below the finished floor equal to the
thickness of topping and/ or wearing courses, if specified.
20.2.3
Mixing of concrete shall be done thoroughly in a mechanical mixer unless hand

mixing is specifically permitted by the ENGINEER. The concrete shall be as
stiff as possible and the amount of water added shall be the minimum
necessary to give just sufficient plasticity for laying and compacting. The mix
shall be used in the work within 30 minutes of the addition of water for its
preparation.
20.2.4
Floor finish shall be laid in suitable panels to reduce the risk of cracking. No
dimension of a panel shall exceed 2 meters and the length of a panel shall not
exceed one and a half times its breadth. Topping shall be laid in alternate
panels, the intermediate panels being cast after a gap of at least one day.
Construction joints shall be plain vertical butt joints.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 38 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
20.2.5
Screed strips shall be fixed dividing the area into suitable panels. Immediately
before depositing the concrete topping, neat cement slurry at 2.75 kg/sqm of
area shall be thoroughly brushed into the prepared surface. Topping shall then
be laid, very thoroughly tamped, struck off level and floated with wooden float.
The surface shall then be tested with a straight edge and mason's spirit level to
detect any inequalities from that specified in the drawings and these shall be
made good immediately.
20.2.6
Finishing of the surface by trowelling shall be spread over a period of one to six
hours depending upon the temperature and atmospheric conditions. The
surface shall be trowelled 3 times at intervals so as to produce a smooth
uniform and hard surface. Immediately after laying, the first trowelling just
sufficient to give a level surface shall be carried out avoiding excessive
trowelling at this stage. The surface shall be re-trowelled after sometime to
close any pores and to scrap off excess water or laitance, which shall not be
trowelled back into the topping. Final trowelling shall be done well before the
concrete has become too hard but at a time when considerable pressure is
required to make any impression on the surface. Sprinkling of dry cement or
cement-sand mixture for absorbing moisture shall not be permitted.
20.2.7
Immediately after the surface is finished, it shall be protected suitably from

rapid drying due to wind/ sunlight. After the surface has hardened sufficiently to
prevent any damage to it, the topping shall be kept continuously moist for a
minimum period of 10 days.
20.2.8
It is preferable to lay the topping on hardened base concrete, as against being

laid monolithically with a lesser thickness, since proper levels and slopes with
close surface tolerance, is achievable in practice, owing to its greater
thickness. Further, as this would be laid after all other building operations are
over, there will be no risk of any damages or discoloration of the floor finishes
which are difficult to repair satisfactorily.
20.2.9
In severe condition, where dampness from ground may find its way on the top
of the floor, the floor slab shall be cast in two equal halves. The top surface of
bottom half shall be made plane and smooth after it is cast. A coat of bitumen
primer conforming to IS: 3384 shall be applied on the hard surface over which
two coats of bitumen conforming to IS: 1580 shall be applied @ 1.5 kg/m2 for
each layer. After the bitumen surface is dry, the top half of floor slab shall be
cast.
20.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be in sqm correct up to two places of decimal.
21.0
IN-SITU GRANOLITHIC CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING

SECTION: D7
SHEET 39 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
21.1
21.1.1
The requirements of materials and workmanship shall be all as per clause 20

for in-situ cement concrete floor topping except that the mix proportion of the
concrete shall be 1:1:2 (cement: sand: coarse-aggregates) by volume.
21.1.2
The thickness of the floor topping shall be as specified in the item of work. The
minimum thickness of granolithic floor topping on hardened concrete base shall
be 40 mm, if laid separately. It shall be 20 mm, if the topping is laid
monolithically over the floor concrete.
21.2
Measurement
Measurement shall be in sqm correct up to two places of decimal.
22.0
FLOOR HARDENER TOPPING
22.1
Materials & Workmanship
22.1.1
Floor hardener topping shall be provided either as integrally finished over the
structural slab/ grade slab or laid monolithically with the concrete/ granolithic
floor finish on top of hardened concrete base.
22.1.2
Floor hardener of the metallic or non-metallic type suitable for the performance
of normal/ medium/ heavy duty function of the floor, the quantum of ingredients
and the thickness of topping shall be as specified in the respective items of
work.
22.1.3
For monolithic application with the floor finish/ slab, the thickness of the layer
shall be 15 mm. It shall be 20 mm if it is laid separately over floor slab. The
topping shall be laid within 2 to 3 hours after concrete is laid and it is still plastic
but stiffened enough for the workmen to tread over it by placing planks. The
surface of the concrete layer shall be kept rough for providing adequate band
for the topping. Laitance shall be removed before placing the topping. The
topping shall be screeded and thoroughly compacted to the finished level.
Trowelling to a smooth finish shall be carried out as per clause 20.2.6. After the
surface has hardened sufficiently, it shall be kept continuously moist for at least
10 days.
22.1.4
The procedure for mixing the floor hardener topping shall be as per
manufacturer's instructions.
22.1.5
Floor hardener topping shall be prevented from any damages due to

subsequent building operations by covering with 75 mm thick layer of sand, if it
is laid monolithically with the slab.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 40 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
22.2
Measurement
Measurement shall be in sqm correct to two places of decimal. This work could
be either separate or combined along with the floor finish as indicated in the
23.0
PVC SHEET/ TILE FLOORING
23.1
Materials
23.1.1
PVC floor covering shall be of either unbacked homogeneous flexible type in

the form of sheets/ tiles conforming to IS: 3462 or homogeneous PVC asbestos
tiles conforming to IS: 3461.
23.1.2
The surface of the sheets/ tiles shall be free from any physical defects such as
pores, blisters, cracks, etc which affects the appearance and serviceability.
Tiles/ sheets shall meet with the tolerance limits in dimensions specified in the
IS codes. CONTRACTOR shall submit the test certificates, if so desired by the
ENGINEER.
23.1.3
Each tile/ sheet shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the name of the
manufacturer or his trade mark, IS certificate mark and batch number.
23.1.4
The adhesive to be used for laying the PVC flooring shall be rubber based
conforming to IS: 12830 and of the make as recommended and approved by
the manufacturer of PVC sheets/ tiles.
23.1.5
The type, size, thickness, colour, plain or mottled and the pattern shall be as
specified in the respective items of work.
23.2
Workmanship
23.2.1
Laying of PVC sheets/ tiles shall conform IS: 5318. PVC floor covering shall be
provided over an under-bed of cement concrete floor finish over the base
concrete or structural slab. It is essential that the sub-floor and the under-bed
are perfectly dry before laying the PVC flooring. This shall be ensured by
methods of testing as stipulated in Appendix - A of IS: 5318. Concrete floor on
the ground/ basement shall be treated with an effective damp proof course as
described in clause 20.2.9.
23.2.2
The surface of the under-bed shall have trowelled finish without any
irregularities which creates poor adhesion. Surface shall be free of oil or grease
and thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt and wiped with a dry cloth.
23.2.3
PVC sheets/ tiles shall be brought to the temperature of the area in which they
are to be laid by stacking in a suitable manner within or near the laying area for

SECTION: D7
SHEET 41 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
a period of about 24 hours. Where air-conditioning is installed, the flooring shall

not be laid on the under-bed until the AC units have been in operation for at
least 7 days. During this period, the temperature range shall be between 20 0C
and 30 0C and this shall be maintained during the laying operations and also for
48 hours thereafter.
23.2.4
Layout of the PVC flooring shall be marked with guidelines on the under-bed
and PVC tiles/ sheets shall be first laid for trial, without using the adhesive,
according to the layout.
23.2.5
The adhesive shall be applied by using a notched trowel to the surface of the
under-bed and to the backside of PVC sheets/ tiles. When the adhesive has set
sufficiently for laying, it will be tacky to the touch, which generally takes about
30 minutes. The time period need be carefully monitored since a longer interval
will affect the adhesive properties. Adhesive shall be uniformly spread over
only as much surface area at one time which can be covered with PVC flooring
within the stipulated time.
23.2.6
PVC sheet shall be carefully taken and placed in position from one end
onwards slowly so that the air will be completely squeezed out between the
sheet and the background surface and no air pockets are formed. It shall then
be pressed with a suitable roller to develop proper contact. The next sheet shall
be laid edge to edge with the sheet already laid, so that there is minimum gap
between joints. The alignment shall be checked after each row of sheet is
completed and trimmed if considered necessary.
23.2.7
Tiles shall be laid in the same manner as sheets and preferably, commencing
from the centre of the area. Tiles should be lowered in position and pressed
firmly on to the adhesive with minimum gap between the joints. Tiles shall not
be slided on the surface. Tiles shall be rolled with a light wooden roller of about
5 kg to ensure full contact with the underlay. Work should be constantly
checked to ensure that all four edges of adjacent tiles meet accurately.
23.2.8
Any excess adhesive which may squeeze up between sheets/ tiles shall be
wiped off immediately with a wet cloth. Suitable solvents shall be used to
remove hardened adhesive.
23.2.9
A minimum period of 24 hours shall be given after laying for the development of
proper bond of the adhesive. When the flooring in thus completed, it shall be
cleaned with a wet cloth soaked in warm soap solution.
23.2.10 Metallic edge strips shall be used to protect the edges of PVC sheets/ tiles
which are exposed as in doorways/ stair treads.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 42 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
23.2.11 Hot sealing of joints between adjacent PVC sheet flooring to prevent creeping
of water through the joints shall be carried out, if specified in the item of work,
using special equipment as per manufacturer's instructions.
23.2.12 It is desirable that the PVC flooring are taken up after completing all other
works in the area so as to avoid any accidental damage to the flooring.
23.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be in sqm correct to two places of decimal. The item could
be either separate or as a combined item with the floor finish as specified in the
24.0
ACID RESISTING BRICK/ TILING WORK
24.1
Materials
24.1.1
The ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tiles shall conform to the
requirements of IS: 4457. Acid resistant bricks shall be of class - I and shall
conform to the requirements of IS: 4860.
24.1.2
The finished tile/ brick when fractured shall appear fine grained in texture,
dense and homogeneous. Tile/ brick shall be sound, true to shape, flat, free
from flaws and any manufacturing defects affecting their utility. Tolerance in the
dimensions shall be within the limits specified in the respective IS.
24.1.3
The tiles/ bricks shall be bedded and jointed using chemical resistant mortar
prepared from resin type conforming to IS: 4832 (Part - II) filter, accelerator and
catalyst mixed in proportion as recommended by manufacturer. Method of
usage shall generally be as per the requirements of IS: 4443.
24.2
Workmanship
24.2.1
The size and thickness of tiles/ size and class of bricks for use in the flooring/
skirting/ dado shall be as specified in the respective items of work.
24.2.2
The resin shall have viscosity for readily mixing with the filler by manual
methods. The filler shall have graded particles which permit minimum joint
thickness of 1.5 mm.
24.2.3
The base concrete surface shall be free from dirt and thoroughly dried. The
surface shall be applied with a coat of bitumen primer conforming to IS: 3384.
The primed surface shall then be applied with a uniform coat of bitumen
conforming to IS: 1580. Tiles or bricks shall be laid directly without the
application of bitumen, if epoxy or polyester resin is used for the mortar.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 43 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
24.2.4
Just adequate quantity of mortar which can be applied within the pot life as
specified by the manufacturer shall be prepared at one time for bedding and
jointing. Rigid PVC/ Stainless steel/ chromium plated tools shall be used for
mixing and laying.
24.2.5
For laying the floor 6 to 8 mm thick mortar shall be spread on the back of the
tile/ brick. Two adjacent sides of the tile/ brick shall be smeared with 4 to 6 mm
thick mortar. Tile/ brick shall be pressed into the bed and pushed against the
floor and with the adjacent tile/ brick, until the joint in each case is 2 to 3 mm
thick. Excess mortar shall then be trimmed off and allowed to harden fully.
Similar procedure shall be adopted for the work on walls by pressing the tile/
brick against the prepared wall surfaces and only one course shall be laid at a
time until the initial setting period.
24.2.6
The mortar joints shall be cured for a minimum period of 72 hours with 20 to
25% hydrochloric acid or 30 to 40% sulphuric acid. After acid curing, the joints
shall be washed with water and allowed to thoroughly dry. The joints shall then
be filled with mortar to make them smooth and plane. Acid curing is not
required to be carried out if epoxy or polyester resin is used for the mortar.
24.2.7
Resin mortars are normally self curing. The area tiled shall not be put to use
before 48 hours in case epoxy, polyester and furane type of resin is used for
the mortar. If phenolic or cashew nut shell liquid resin is used for the mortar,
the area tiled shall not be put to use for 7 to 28 days respectively, without heat
treatment. This period shall be 2 to 6 days respectively if heat treatment is
given with infrared lamp.
24.2.8
Temperature during preparation of mortar, its application, curing, etc shall be

controlled and maintained as recommended by manufacturer.
24.2.9
It is necessary that the concrete slab/ wall shall be made leak proof against
water, if necessary by pressure grouting etc before taking up any titling works.
Cost of such works shall be deemed to have included in the cost of tiling works,
whether same is specifically mentioned or not.
24.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be in sqm correct to two places of decimal for flooring/
dado. Measurement shall be in running metres correct to two places of decimal
for skirting of height as specified in the item of work.
25.0
EPOXY LINING WORK
25.1
Materials

SECTION: D7
SHEET 44 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
25.1.1
The epoxy resin and hardener formulation for laying of pointless lining work in
floors and walls of concrete tanks/ trenches, floor toppings, etc shall be as per
the requirements of IS: 9197. Method of laying shall be as per the requirements
of IS: 4631.
25.1.2
The epoxy composition shall have the chemical resistance to withstand the
following conditions of exposure:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Hydrochloric acid up to 30% concentration

Sodium hydroxide up to 50% concentration
Liquid temperature up to 60 C
Ultraviolet radiation
Alternate wetting and drying
25.1.3
Epoxy resin shall be of liquid type of suitable grade and class as recommended
by the manufacturer.
25.1.4
The hardener shall be of the liquid type such as Aliphatic Amine or an Aliphatic/
Aromatic Amine Adduct or a polyamide or amino polyamine of suitable
characteristics. The hardener shall react with epoxy resin at normal ambient
temperature above 5 C.
25.1.5
Sand shall conform to grading zone III or IV of IS: 383.
25.1.6
Accelerator, plasticizer and coal-tar may be added for the preparation of epoxy
composition, to the proportion as recommended in IS: 9197.
25.1.7
CONTRACTOR shall furnish test certificates for satisfying the requirements of

the epoxy formulation if so directed by the ENGINEER.
25.2
Workmanship
25.2.1
The minimum thickness of epoxy lining shall be as recommended in IS: 4631

based on type of application & usage. The thickness and areas of application
shall be as specified in the respective items of work. It is essential that the base
concrete is properly cured, dried and made rough at the time of application.
25.2.2
The epoxy lining shall be of the trowel type to facilitate execution of the
required thickness for satisfactory performance.
25.2.3
The concrete surfaces over which epoxy lining is to be provided shall be

thoroughly cleaned of oil or grease by suitable solvents, wire brushed to
remove any dirt/ dust and laitance. The surfaces shall then be washed with
dilute hydrochloric acid (10% to 15%) and rinsed thoroughly with plenty of
water or dilute ammonia solution. The surfaces shall then be allowed to dry. It

SECTION: D7
SHEET 45 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
is essential to ensure that the surfaces are perfectly dry and even, before the
commencement of epoxy application.
25.2.4
Just adequate quantity of epoxy resin which can be applied within the pot life
as specified by the manufacturer shall be prepared at one time for laying and
jointing.
25.2.5
Rigid PVC/ stainless steel/ chromium plated tools shall be used for laying.
Trowelling shall be carried out to obtain uniformly the specified thickness of
lining.
25.2.6
Lining shall be allowed to set without disturbance for a minimum period of 24

hours. The facility shall be put to use only after a minimum period of 7 days of
laying of the lining.
25.2.7
For epoxy lining over the inside concrete surfaces of underground tank or
trenches, it should be ensured that they are leak proof against water by
conducting leakage test as described in clause 24.2.9.
25.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be in sqm correct to two places of decimal.
26.0
WATER-STOPS
26.1
Material
26.1.1
The material for the PVC water-stops shall be a plastic compound with the
basic resin of polyvinyl chloride and additional resins, plasticizers, inhibitors,
which satisfies the performance characteristics specified below as per IS:
15058. Testing shall be in accordance with IS: 8543 (Part - 4/ Sec - 1), IS:
13360 (Part - 5/ Sec - 11) and IS: 9766.
a) Tensile strength
:
13.8 MPa minimum
b) Ultimate elongation
:
285% minimum
c) Hardness (Shore A)
:
65, minimum
d) Water absorption
:
0.6 maximum
e) Cold bend temp
at which samples do not crack :
-25 C minimum
f) Accelerated extraction
i) Tensile strength
:
10.3 MPa minimum
ii) Ultimate elongation
280% minimum
g) Effect of Alkali
7 days
i)
0.25% maximum
Weight increase

SECTION: D7
SHEET 46 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
ii) Weight decrease
0.10% maximum
iii) Hardness change
5 points
h) Effect of Alkali
28 days
i)
0.40% maximum
ii) Weight decrease
0.30% maximum
iii) Dimension change
1%
Weight increase
26.1.2
PVC water-stops shall be either of the bar type, serrated with centre bulb and
end grips for use within the concrete elements or of the surface (kicker) type for
external use. The width, type, minimum thickness and safe hydraulic head
requirements shall be as specified in the individual items of work.
26.1.3
PVC water stops shall be of approved manufacture. Samples and the test
certificate shall be got approved by the ENGINEER before procurement for
incorporation in the works.
26.2
Workmanship
26.2.1
Water-stops shall be laid as per IS: 12200. It should be cleaned before placing
them in position. Oil or grease shall be removed thoroughly using water and
suitable detergents.
26.2.2
Water-stops shall be procured in long lengths as manufactured to avoid joints

as far as possible. Standard L or T type of intersection pieces shall be procured
for use depending on their requirement. Any non-standard junctions shall be
made by cutting the pieces to profile for jointing. Lapping of water-stops shall
not be permitted. All jointing shall be of fusion-welded type as per
manufacturers instructions.
26.2.3
Water-stops shall be placed at the correct location/ level and suitably supported
at intervals with the reinforcement to ensure that it does not deviate from its
intended position during concreting and vibrating. Care shall also be taken to
ensure that no honey-combing occurs because of the serrations/ end grips, by
placing concrete with smaller size aggregates in this region. Projecting portions
of the water-stops embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
mortar/ concrete coating before resuming further concreting operations. The
projecting water-stop shall also be suitably supported at intervals with the
reinforcement to maintain its intended position during concreting so as to
ensure that it does not bend leading to formation of pockets. In addition,
smaller size aggregate shall be used for concreting in this region also.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 47 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
26.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be in running metres correct to two places of decimal. No
separate payment shall be made for joints or intersection pieces.
27.0
PREFORMED FILLERS AND JOINT SEALING COMPOUND
27.1
Materials
27.1.1
Preformed filler for expansion/ isolation joints shall be non-extruding and

resilient type of bitumen impregnated fibres conforming to IS: 1838 (Part - I).
27.1.2
Bitumen coat to concrete/ masonry surfaces for fixing the preformed bitumen
filler strip shall conform to IS: 702. Bitumen primer shall conform to IS: 3384.
27.1.3
Sealing compound for filling the joints above the preformed bitumen filler shall
conform to Grade 'B' as per IS: 1834.
27.2
Workmanship
27.2.1
The thickness of the preformed bitumen filler shall be as specified in the

respective items of work. CONTRACTOR shall procure the strips of the desired
thickness and width in lengths as manufactured. Assembly of small pieces/
thicknesses of strips to make up the specified size shall not be permitted.
27.2.2
The concrete/ masonry surface shall be cleaned free from dust and any loose
particles. When the surface is dry, one coat of bitumen primer conforming to IS:
3384 to be applied over which one coat of industrial blown type bitumen of
grade 85/25 conforming to IS: 702 shall be applied hot by brushing at the rate
of 1.20 kg/sqm. When the bitumen is still hot, the preformed bitumen filler shall
be pressed and held in position till it completely adheres. The surface of the
filler against which further concreting/ masonry work is to be done shall
similarly be applied with one coat of hot bitumen at the rate of 1.20 kg/sqm.
27.2.3
Sealing compound shall be heated to a pouring consistency for enabling it to

run molten in a uniform manner into the joint. Before pouring the sealing
compound, the vertical faces of the concrete joint shall be applied with a coat of
hot bitumen primer conforming to IS: 3384 in order to improve the adhesive
quality of the sealing compound.
27.2.4
Expansion joints between beams/ slabs shall be provided with 100 mm wide x
4 mm thick mild steel plate at the soffit of RCC beams/ slabs to support and
prevent the preformed joint filler from dislodging. This plate shall be welded to
an edge angle of ISA 50 x 50 x 6 mm provided at the bottom corner, adjacent
to the expansion joint of one of the beams/ slabs, by intermittent fillet welding.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 48 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
Steel surfaces shall be provided with 2 coats of red oxide zinc chrome primer
and 3 coats of synthetic enamel paint finish.
27.3
Measurement
Measurement for the preformed joint filler shall be in sqm correct to two places
of decimal for the specified thickness as per the items of work. Measurement
for applying the bitumen coat to concrete/ masonry surfaces shall be in sqm
correct to two places of decimal. Measurement for the joint sealing compound
shall be in running metres correct to two places of decimal for the specified
width and thickness as per the items of work. Measurement for the mild steel
corner angle and plate shall be by weight as per the item of work.
28.0
WATER-PROOFING OF ROOFS WITH BITUMEN FELTS
28.1
Materials
28.1.1
Bitumen felt shall be either Hessian-base self-finished felt Type 3 Grade 1

conforming to IS: 1322 or glass fibre base self-finished felt Type 2 Grade-1
conforming to IS: 7193.
28.1.2
Bitumen primer shall conform to IS: 3384.
28.1.3
Bitumen used as bonding material shall be Industrial blown type bitumen of

Grade 85/25 conforming to IS: 702.
28.1.4
Pea sized gravel shall be hard, round, of size 6 mm and down, free from fine
sand, dust, etc.
28.2
Workmanship
28.2.1
Water-proofing treatment to roofs shall be either normal or heavy or extra

heavy depending upon the requirements. The type of treatment and the type of
bitumen felt to be used shall be as specified in the item of work and conforming
to IS: 1346.
28.2.2
Normal treatment which provides for one layer of felt shall comprise of five
courses as under.
a) Bitumen primer at the rate of 0.27 litre/sqm (min)
b) Bitumen bonding material hot applied at the rate of 1.20 kg/sqm (min)
c) One layer of bitumen felt
d) Bitumen bonding material hot applied at the rate of 1.20 kg/sqm (min)

SECTION: D7
SHEET 49 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
e) Pea sized gravel at the rate of 0.006 cum/sqm.

28.2.3
Heavy treatment which provides for two layers of felt shall comprise of seven
courses as under.
a) Bitumen primer at the rate of 0.27 litre/sqm (min)
b) Bitumen bonding material hot applied at the rate of 1.20 kg/sqm (min)
c) One layer of bitumen felt
d) Bitumen bonding material hot applied at the rate of 1.20 kg/sqm (min)
e) Second layer of bitumen felt
f)
g)
Bitumen bonding material hot applied at the rate of 1.20 kg/sqm (min)
Pea sized gravel at the rate of 0.006 cum/sqm.
28.2.4
Extra heavy treatment provides for three layers of felt and comprises of nine
courses laid in the same procedure as above.
28.2.5
The roof slope shall be at least 1 in 100. Concrete or mortar screed to achieve
the specified slope as per drawings shall be executed and properly cured
before taking up water-proofing treatment.
28.2.6
The surfaces over which water-proofing treatment is to be carried out, shall be

cleaned of all foreign matter by wire brushing, dusting and made thoroughly
dry. Preparation of surfaces shall be as stipulated In IS: 3067. Bitumen primer
shall then be applied uniformly.
28.2.7
Each length of felt shall be prepared by brushing them clean and laid out flat on
the roof for softening to eliminate curls. Bitumen bonding material shall be
heated to the correct working temperature for pouring across the full width of
the rolled felt and the felt steadily rolled out and pressed down. Excess bonding
material squeezed out at the ends shall be removed as the laying proceeds.
28.2.8
Felts shall be laid in lengths at right angles to the direction of the run-off
gradient, commencing at the lowest level and working up to the crest. Minimum
overlaps of 100 mm at the ends and 75 mm at the sides of the felt strip shall be
provided. All overlaps shall be firmly bonded with hot bitumen. Laying of the
second layer of felt shall be so arranged that the joints are staggered with
those of the layer beneath it.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 50 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
28.2.9
It shall be ensured that a concave fillet 75 mm in radius is provided in cement

mortar 1:4 at the junction of the roof and vertical face of masonry or RCC
parapet wall or column projections.
28.2.10 Water-proofing treatment shall be taken up on the brick masonry wall/ parapet/
column projection by a minimum of 150 mm. Felts shall be laid as flashing with
minimum overlap of 100 mm. The lower edge of the flashing shall overlap the
felt laid on the flat portion of the roof and the upper edge shall be tucked into
the groove. Each layer shall be arranged so that the joints are staggered with
those of the layer beneath it. For the vertical portion of the felt, two coats of
bituminous paint at the minimum rate of 0.1 litres/sqm shall be provided in lieu
of pea size gravel finish. Groove 75 mm wide and 65 mm deep shall be left for
tucking in the waterproofing treatment and the groove filled with cement mortar
1:4 for securing it satisfactorily. Curing of the mortar shall be carried out
properly for at least 4 days to avoid shrinkage cracks.
28.2.11 Water-proofing treatment for gutters shall normally contain 2 layers of felt
corresponding to heavy treatment. The sixth course of hot bitumen shall
however be at the rate of 1.50 kg/sqm (min). Pea sized gravel finish shall
however be replaced by 2 coats of bituminous paint at the minimum rate of 0.1
litre/sqm. The felt layers shall be carried down the outlet pipes for a minimum
depth of 100 mm.
28.2.12 Expansion joints shall be treated with water-proofing treatment in a manner as
illustrated in IS: 1346 in accordance with the type and details specified in the
28.2.13 In order to avoid damage to water-proofing treatment where it is subjected to
traffic, additional surface treatment by provision of cement concrete flooring
tiles conforming to IS: 1237 or machine made burnt clay flat terracing tiles
conforming to IS: 2690 (Part - 1) shall be made if so specified in the item of
work. Execution of these works shall be as specified in clauses 29.2.11 or
29.2.12.
28.2.14 Testing against an leakage or soaking of water below the roof shall be carried
out as specified in clause 29.2.13.
28.2.15 The contractor shall give guarantee for all of his works as specified in clause
29.2.14.
28.3
Measurement
shall be for the plan area where the treatment is executed. No separate
payment will be made for the overlapping of the felts, fillets and work as
specified on vertical faces. Screed on top of roof, cement concrete tiling work

SECTION: D7
SHEET 51 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
or machine pressed clay tile work shall be paid for separately unless they are
specifically included in the item of work.
29.0
WATER-PROOFING OF ROOFS WITH LIME CONCRETE
29.1
Materials
29.1.1
Broken brick coarse aggregates prepared from well/ over burnt bricks shall be
well graded having a maximum size of 25 mm and shall generally conform to
IS: 3068.
29.1.2
Lime shall be class "C lime (fat lime)" or factory made hydrated lime conforming
to IS: 712.
29.2
Workmanship
29.2.1
Unless noted otherwise, lime concrete shall be laid as per IS: 3036. Lime
concrete shall be prepared by thoroughly mixing the brick aggregates inclusive
of brick dust obtained during breaking with the slaked lime in the proportions of
2 (two and a half) parts of brick aggregates to 1 part of slaked lime by volume.
Water shall be added just adequate to obtain the desired workability for laying.
Washing soap and alum shall be dissolved in the water to be used. The
quantity of these materials required per cum of lime concrete shall be 12 kg of
washing soap and 4 kg of alum. Brick aggregates shall be soaked thoroughly in
water for a period of not less than six hours before use in the concrete mix.
Lime concrete shall be used in the works within 24 hours after mixing.
29.2.2
The roof surface over which the water-proof treatment is to be carried out shall
be cleaned of all foreign matter by wire brushing, dusting and made thoroughly
dry. Preparation of surfaces shall be as stipulated in IS: 3067.
29.2.3
The slope of the finished water-proofing treatment shall be not less than 1 in 60
for efficient drainage. This shall be achieved either wholly in the lime concrete
layer or otherwise as indicated in the drawings.
29.2.4
The average thickness of lime concrete, slope and the finish on top of machine
made burnt clay flat terracing tiles conforming to IS: 2690 (Part - 1) shall be as
specified in the item of work. Cement concrete flooring tiles in lieu of clay
terracing tiles shall be provided if so specified in the item of work, duly
considering the traffic the terrace will be subjected to.
29.2.5
The minimum compacted thickness of lime concrete layer shall be 75 mm and

average thickness shall not be less than 100 mm. In case, the thickness is
more than 100 mm, it shall be laid in layers not exceeding 100 mm to 125 mm.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 52 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
29.2.6
Laying of lime concrete shall be commenced from a corner of the roof and
proceeded diagonally towards centre and other sides duly considering the
slopes specified for effectively draining the rain water towards the down take
points.
29.2.7
Lime concrete fillet for a minimum height of 150 mm shall be provided all along
the junction of the roof surface with the brick masonry wall/ parapet/ column
projections. These shall then be finished a top with provision of clay terracing
tiles/ cement concrete tiles.
29.2.8
After the lime concrete is laid it shall be initially rammed with a rammer
weighing not more than 2 kg and the finish brought to the required evenness
and slope. Alternatively, bamboo strips may be used for the initial ramming.
Further consolidation shall be done using wooden THAPIES with rounded
edges. The beating will normally have to be carried on for at least seven days
until the THAPI makes no impression on the surface and rebounds readily from
it when struck. Special care shall be taken to properly compact the lime
concrete at its junction with parapet walls or column projections.
29.2.9
During compaction by hand beating, the surface shall be sprinkled liberally with
lime water (1 part of lime putty and 3 to 4 parts of water) and a small proportion
of sugar solution for obtaining improved water-proofing quality of the lime
concrete. On completion of beating, the mortar that comes on the top shall be
smoothened with a trowel or float, if necessary, with the addition of sugar
solution and lime putty. The sugar solution may be prepared in any one of the
following ways as directed by the ENGINEER.
a) By mixing about 3 kg of Jaggery and 1.5 kg of BAEL fruit to 100 litres of
water by boiling.
b) By mixing about 600 gm of KADUKAI (the dry nuts shall be broken to small
pieces and allowed to soak in water), 200 gm of jaggery and 40 litres of
water for 10 sqm of work. This solution shall be brewed for about 12 to 24
hours and the resulting liquor decanted and used for the work.
29.2.10 The lime concrete after compaction shall be cured for a minimum period of ten
days or until it hardens by covering with a thin layer of straw or hessian which
shall be kept wet continuously.
29.2.11 For finishing on top, machine made burnt clay flat terracing tiles conforming to
IS: 2690 (Part - 1) or cement concrete flooring tiles conforming to IS: 1237 shall
be used and shall be of the size and thickness as specified in the item of work.
Tiles shall be soaked in water for at least one hour before laying. Bedding for
the tiles shall be 12 mm thick in cement mortar 1:3. Tiles shall be laid, open
jointed with 4 to 6 mm wide joints, flat on the mortar and lightly pressed and set
to plane surface true to slope, using a trowel and wooden straight edge. They

SECTION: D7
SHEET 53 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
shall be laid with their longitudinal lines of joints truly parallel and generally at
right angles to the direction of run-off gradient. Transverse joints in alternate
rows shall come directly in line with each other. Transverse joints in adjacent
courses shall break joints by at least 50 mm. The joints shall be completely
filled and flush pointed with cement mortar 1:2 mixed with water-proofing
compound as per manufacturer's instructions. Curing shall be carried out for a
minimum period of seven days.
29.2.12 Cement concrete tiles if used shall be supplied after the first machine grinding
of the surface.
29.2.13 After completing all the water-proofing works over the roof surface and curing,
the works shall be tested against any leakage/ soaking of water below the roof.
For this, arrangement shall be made by Contractor to store minimum 50 mm
height of water over the roof surface and shall be maintained for a period of 7
days. If any wet patch is observed on the ceiling, rectification of water proofing
works should be attended immediately by the contractor. The test should be
repeated till the leakage/ soaking through the ceiling completely stops.
29.2.14 The contractor shall give guarantee for a minimum period of 10 years against
any leakage / soaking through the ceiling, for the quality of materials supplied
and for the good workmanship carried out. The guarantee should be in writing
on a format prepared by PURCHASER. In case of any defect found in the
above during guarantee period, it should be attended to and rectified
immediately by the contractor at his own cost
29.3
Measurement
shall be for the plan area between the inside of plastered walls where the
treatment is executed. No separate payment shall be made for the fillets.
30.0
CEMENT PLASTERING WORK
30.1
Materials
The proportions of the cement mortar for plastering shall be 1:4 (one part of
cement to four parts of sand) unless otherwise specified under the respective
item of work. Cement and sand shall be mixed thoroughly in dry condition and
then water added to obtain a workable consistency. The quality of water and
cement shall be as per relevant IS. The quality and grading of sand for
plastering shall conform to IS: 1542. The mixing shall be done thoroughly in a
mechanical mixer unless hand mixing is specifically permitted by the
ENGINEER. If so desired by the ENGINEER sand shall be screened and
washed to meet the specification requirements. The mortar thus mixed shall be
used as soon as possible preferably within 30 minutes from the time water is

SECTION: D7
SHEET 54 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
added to cement. In case the mortar has stiffened due to evaporation of water
this may be re-tempered by adding water as required to restore consistency but
this will be permitted only up to 30 minutes from the time of initial mixing of
water to cement. Any mortar which is partially set shall be rejected and
removed forthwith from the site. Droppings of plaster shall not be re-used under
any circumstances.
30.2
Workmanship
30.2.1
Preparation of surfaces and application of plaster finishes shall generally

confirm to the requirements specified in IS: 1661 and IS: 2402.
30.2.2
Plastering operations shall not be commenced until installation of all fittings and
fixtures such as door/ window panels, pipes, conduits, etc are completed.
30.2.3
All joints in masonry shall be raked as the work proceeds to a depth of 10 mm/
20 mm for brick/ stone masonry respectively with a tool made for the purpose
when the mortar is still green. The masonry surface to be rendered shall be
washed with clean-water to remove all dirt, loose materials, etc. Concrete
surfaces to be rendered shall be roughened suitably by hacking or bush
hammering for proper adhesion of plaster and the surface shall be evenly
wetted to provide the correct suction. The masonry surfaces should not be too
wet but only damp at the time of plastering. The dampness shall be uniform to
get uniform bond between the plaster and the masonry surface.
30.2.4
Interior plain faced plaster - This plaster shall be laid in a single coat of 13
mm thickness. The mortar shall be dashed against the prepared surface with a
trowel. The dashing of the coat shall be done using a strong whipping motion at
right angles to the face of the wall or it may be applied with a plaster machine.
The coat shall be trowelled hard and tight forcing it to surface depressions to
obtain a permanent bond and finished to smooth surface. Interior plaster shall
be carried out on jambs, lintel and sill faces, etc as shown in the drawing and
as directed by the ENGINEER. Rate quoted for plaster work shall be deemed
to include for plastering of all these surfaces.
30.2.5
Plain Faced Ceiling plaster - This plaster shall be applied in a single coat of 6
mm thickness. Application of mortar shall be as stipulated in clause 30.2.4.
30.2.6
Exterior plain faced plaster - This plaster shall be applied in 2 coats. The first
coat or the rendering coat shall be approximately 14 mm thick. The rendering
coat shall be applied as stipulated in clause 30.2.4 except finishing it to a true
and even surface and then lightly roughened by cross scratch lines to provide
bond for the finishing coat. The rendering coat shall be cured for at least two
days and then allowed to dry. The second coat or finishing coat shall be 6 mm
thick. Before application of the second coat, the rendering coat shall be evenly
damped. The second coat shall be applied from top to bottom in one operation

SECTION: D7
SHEET 55 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
without joints and shall be finished leaving an even and uniform surface. The
mortar proportions for the coats shall be as specified in the respective item of
work. The finished plastering work shall be cured for at least 7 days.
30.2.7
Interior plain faced plaster - 20mm thick if specified for uneven faces of brick
walls or for random/ coursed rubble masonry walls shall be executed in 2 coats
similar to the procedure stipulated in clause 30.2.6.
30.2.8
Exterior Sand Faced Plaster - This plaster shall be applied in 2 coats. The
first coat shall be 14 mm thick and the second coat shall be 6 mm thick. These
coats shall be applied as stipulated in clause 30.2.6. However, only approved
quality white sand shall be used for the second coat and for the finishing work.
Sand for the finishing work shall be coarse and of even size and shall be
dashed against the surface and sponged. The mortar proportions for the first
and second coats shall be as specified in the respective items of work.
30.2.9
Wherever more than 20 mm thick plaster has been specified, this is intended
for purposes of providing beading, bands, etc. This work shall be carried out in
two or three coats as directed by the ENGINEER duly satisfying the
requirements of curing each coat (rendering/ floating) for a minimum period of 2
days and curing the finished work for at least 7 days.
30.2.10 In the case of pebble faced finish plaster, pebbles of approved size and quality
shall be dashed against the final coat while it is still green to obtain as far as
possible a uniform pattern all as directed by the ENGINEER.
30.2.11 Where specified in the drawings, rectangular grooves of the dimensions
indicated shall be provided in external plaster by means of timber battens when
the plaster is still in green condition. Battens shall be carefully removed after
the initial set of plaster and the broken edges and corners made good. All
grooves shall be uniform in width and depth and shall be true to the lines and
levels as per the drawings.
30.2.12 Curing of plaster shall be started as soon as the applied plaster has hardened
sufficiently so as not to be damaged when watered. Curing shall be done by
continuously applying water in a fine spray and shall be carried out for at least
7 days.
30.2.13 When the specification items of work calls for waterproofing plaster the
CONTRACTOR shall provide the waterproofing compound as specified while
preparing the cement mortar. Payment for water-proofing compound will be
made separately if it is not included as a combined item of work.
30.2.14 Where lath plastering is specified, it shall be paid for at the same rate as for
plaster work except that separate payment for metal lath will be made.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 56 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
30.2.15 For external plaster, the plastering operations shall be commenced from the
top floor and carried downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering operations
for the walls shall commence at the top and carried downwards. Plastering
shall be carried out to the full length of the wall or to natural breaking points like
doors/windows etc. Ceiling plaster shall be completed first before commencing
wall plastering.
30.2.16 Double scaffolding to be used shall be as specified in clause 3.2.6.
30.2.17 The finished plaster surface shall not show any deviation more than 4mm when
checked with a straight edge of 2m length placed against the surface.
30.2.18 To overcome the possibility of development of cracks in the plastering work
following measures shall be adapted.
a) Plastering work shall be deferred as much as possible so that fairly
complete drying shrinkage in concrete and masonry works takes place.
b) Steel wire fabric shall be provided at the junction of brick masonry and
concrete to overcome reasonably the differential drying shrinkage/ thermal
movement. This steel item shall be measured and paid for separately.
c) Ceiling plaster shall be done, with a trowel cut at its junction with wall
plaster. Similarly trowel cut shall be adopted between adjacent surfaces
where discontinuity of the background exists.
30.3
Measurement
Measurement for plastering work shall be in sqm correct to two places of
decimal. Unless a separate item is provided for grooves, mouldings, etc these
works are deemed to be included in the unit rates quoted for plastering work.
The quantity of work to be paid for under these items shall be calculated by
taking the projected surface of the areas plastered after making necessary
deductions for openings for doors, windows, fan openings, etc. The actual
plaster work carried out on jambs/ sills of windows, openings, etc shall be
measured for payment.
31.0
CEMENT POINTING
31.1
Materials
31.1.1
The cement mortar for pointing shall be in the proportion of 1:3 (one part of
cement to three parts of fine sand) unless otherwise specified in the respective
items of work. Sand shall conform to IS: 1542 and shall be free from clay,
shale, loam, alkali and organic matter and shall be of sound, hard, clean and

SECTION: D7
SHEET 57 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
durable particles. Sand shall be approved by ENGINEER and if so directed it

shall be washed/ screened to meet specification requirements.
31.2
Workmanship
31.2.1
Where pointing of joints in masonry work is specified on drawings/ respective

items of work, the joints shall be raked at least 15 mm/ 20 mm deep in brick/
stone masonry respectively as the work proceeds when the mortar is still
green.
31.2.2
Any dust/ dirt in the raked joints shall be brushed out clean and the joints shall
be washed with water. The joints shall be damp at the time of pointing. Mortar
shall be filled into joints and well pressed with special steel trowels. The joints
shall not be disturbed after it has once begun to set. The joints of the pointed
work shall be neat. The lines shall be regular and uniform in breadth and the
joints shall be raised, flat, sunk or 'V' as may be specified in the respective
items of work. No false joints shall be allowed.
31.2.3
The work shall be kept moist for at least 7 days after the pointing is completed.
Whenever coloured pointing is to be done, the colouring pigment of the colour
required shall be added to cement in such proportions as recommended by the
manufacturer and as approved by the ENGINEER.
31.3
Measurement
The quantity of work to be paid for under this Item shall be measured in sqm
correct to two places of decimal by taking the projected surface of the area
pointed after making necessary deductions for openings, etc.
32.0
METAL LATH & WIRE FABRIC
32.1
Materials
32.1.1
Welded steel wire fabric shall conform to IS: 4948.
32.1.2
Expanded metal shall conform to IS: 412.
32.1.3
Galvanised wire mesh shall be of approved quality.
32.2
Workmanship
32.2.1
The type and details of the steel material to be used for metal lath plastering
work and at the junctions of brick masonry/ concrete before wall plastering shall
be as specified in the respective items of work.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 58 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
32.2.2
For metal lath plastering work, the weight of steel material shall be not less
than 1.6 kg/sqm.
32.2.3
Steel material for use at the Junction of brick masonry/ concrete shall have the
mesh dimensions not greater than 50 mm.
32.2.4
Steel material shall be obtained in maximum lengths as manufactured to

restrict joints to the minimum. Overlap at the joints shall be minimum 25 mm
which shall be securely tied with wires of diameter not less than 1.25 mm at
spacing not more than 100 mm for lath plastering work. Nailing to wall shall be
at spacing not exceeding 200 mm. The material shall be straightened, cut and
bent to shape if required for fixing as per the details indicated in the drawings.
32.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be in sqm correct to two places of decimal for the type as
specified in the respective items of work.
33.0
WATER-PROOFING ADMIXTURE
Water-proofing admixture shall conform to the requirements of IS: 2645 and
shall be of approved manufacture. The admixture shall not contain calcium
chloride. The quantity of the admixture to be used for the works and method of
mixing, etc; shall be as per manufacturer's instructions and as directed by the
Engineer. Payment shall be made for the actual quantity of such admixture
used unless it is already covered in the rate for the relevant item of work.
34.0
PAINTING OF CONCRETE MASONRY & PLASTERED SURFACES
34.1
Materials
34.1.1
Oil bound distemper shall conform to IS: 428. The primer shall be alkali
resistant primer of the same manufacture as that of the distemper.
34.1.2
Cement paint shall conform to IS: 5410. The primer shall be a thinned coat of
cement paint.
34.1.3
Acrylic emulsion paint shall be of an approved manufacture.
34.1.4
Plastic emulsion paint shall conform to IS: 5411.
34.1.5
Lead free acid, alkali and chlorine resisting paint shall conform to IS: 9862.
34.1.6.1 White wash shall be made from good quality fat lime conforming to IS: 712. It
shall be slaked at site and mixed with water in the proportion of 5 litres of water
to 1 kg of un-slaked lime stirred well to make a thin cream. This shall be

SECTION: D7
SHEET 59 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
allowed to stand for a minimum period of one day and strained through a clean
coarse cloth. Four kg of gum dissolved in hot water shall be added to each cum
of cream. 1.30 kg of sodium chloride dissolved in hot water shall then be added
per 10 kg of lime used for the white wash to be ready for application.
34.1.6.2 Colour wash shall be made by addition of a suitable quantity of mineral
pigment, not affected by lime, to the prepared white wash to obtain the shade/
tint as approved by the ENGINEER.
34.1.7
All the materials shall be of the best quality from an approved manufacturer.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain prior approval of the ENGINEER for the brand of
manufacture and the colour/ shade. All materials shall be brought to the site of
works in sealed containers.
34.2
Workmanship
34.2.1
CONTRACTOR shall obtain the approval of the ENGINEER regarding the

readiness of the surfaces to receive the specified finish, before commencing
the work on painting.
34.2.2
Painting of new surfaces shall be deferred as much as possible to allow for

thorough drying of the sub-strata.
34.2.3
The surfaces to be treated shall be prepared by thoroughly brushing them free

from dirt, mortar droppings and any loose foreign materials. Surfaces shall be
free from oil, grease and efflorescence. Efflorescence shall be removed only by
dry brushing of the growth. Cracks shall be filled with Gypsum. Workmanship of
painting shall generally conform to IS: 2395.
34.2.4
Surfaces of doors, windows, etc. shall be protected suitably to prevent paint

finishes from splashing on them.
34.2.5
White Wash
The prepared surfaces shall be wetted and the finish applied by brushing. The
operation for each coat shall consist of a stroke of the brush first given
horizontally from the right and the other from the left and similarly, the
subsequent stroke from bottom upwards and the other from top downwards,
before the first coat dries. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next
coat is applied. Minimum of 2 coats shall be applied unless otherwise specified
in the item of work. The dry surface shall present a uniform finish without any
brush marks.
34.2.6
Colour Wash

SECTION: D7
SHEET 60 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
Colour wash shall be applied in the same way as for white wash. A minimum of
2 coats shall be applied unless otherwise specified in the item of work. The
surface shall present a smooth and uniform finish without any streaks. The
finished dry surface shall not show any signs of peeling/ powdery and come off
readily on the hand when rubbed.
34.2.7
Cement Paint
The prepared surfaces shall be wetted to control surface suction and to provide
moisture to aid in proper curing of the paint. Cement paint shall be applied with
a brush with stiff bristles. The primer coat shall be a thinned coat of cement
paint. The quantity of thinner shall be as per manufacturer's instructions. The
coats shall be vigorously scrubbed to work the paint into any voids for providing
a continuous paint film free from pinholes for effective water-proofing in
addition to decoration. Cement paint shall be brushed in uniform thickness and
the covering capacity for two coats on plastered surfaces shall be 3 to 4
kg/sqm. A minimum of 2 coats of the same colour shall be applied unless
otherwise specified in the item of work. At least 24 hours shall be left after the
first coat to become sufficiently hard before the second coat is applied. The
painted surfaces shall be thoroughly cured by sprinkling with water using a fog
spray at least 2 to 3 times a day. Curing shall commence after about 12 hours
when the paint hardens. Curing shall be continued for at least 2 days after the
application of final coat. The operations for brushing each coat shall be as
detailed in 34.2.5.
34.2.8
Oil Bound Distemper

The prepared surfaces shall be dry and provided with one coat of alkali
resistant primer by brushing. The surface shall be finished uniformly without
leaving any brush marks and allowed to dry for at least 48 hours. A minimum of
two coats of oil bound distemper shall be applied unless otherwise specified in
the item of work. The first coat shall be of a lighter tint. At least 24 hours shall
be left after the first coat to become completely dry before the application of the
second coat. Broad, stiff, double bristled distemper brushes shall be used for
the work. The operations for brushing each coat shall be as detailed in 34.2.5.
34.2.9
Plastic Emulsion Paint

The prepared surface shall be dry and provided with one coat of primer which
shall be a thinned coat of emulsion paint. The quantity of thinner shall be as per
manufacturer's instructions. The paint shall be laid an evenly and smoothly by
means of crossing and laying off. The crossing and laying off consists of
covering the area with paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time over
and then brushing alternately in opposite directions two or three times and then
finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles. In this process, no brush
marks shall be left after the laying off is finished. The full process of crossing

SECTION: D7
SHEET 61 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
and laying off constitutes one coat. The next coat shall be applied only after the
first coat has dried and sufficiently become hard which normally takes about 2
to 3 hours. A minimum of 2 finishing coats of the same colour shall be applied
unless otherwise specified in the item of work. Paint may also be applied using
rollers. The surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth finish and
uniform in shade without any patches.
34.2.10 Acrylic Emulsion Paint
Acrylic emulsion paint shall be applied in the same way as for plastic emulsion
paint. A minimum of 2 finishing coats over one coat of primer shall be provided
unless otherwise specified in the item of work.
34.2.11 Acid/ Alkali Resisting Paint
A minimum of 2 coats of acid/ alkali resisting paint shall be applied over the
prepared dry surfaces by brushing. Primer coat shall be as per manufacturer's
instructions.
34.3
Measurement
34.3.1

shall be for the areas as executed duly deducting for any openings etc. Rate
quoted shall take into account the provision of necessary enabling works such
as scaffolding, painter's cradle, etc.
35.0
PAINTING & POLISHING OF WOOD WORK
35.1
Materials
35.1.1
Wood primer shall conform to IS: 3536E.
35.1.2
Filler shall conform to IS: 110 or IS: 345.
35.1.3
Varnish shall conform to IS: 337.
35.1.4
French polish shall conform to IS: 348.
35.1.5
Synthetic enamel paint shall conform to IS: 2932.
35.1.6
All the materials shall be of the best quality from an approved manufacturer.
CONTRACTCOR shall obtain prior approval of the ENGINEER for the brand of
manufacture and the colour/ shade. All materials shall be brought to the site of
works in sealed containers.
35.2
Workmanship

SECTION: D7
SHEET 62 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
35.2.1
The type of finish to be provided for woodwork of painting or polishing, the

number of coats, etc shall be as specified in the respective items of work.
35.2.2
Primer and finish paint shall be compatible with each other to avoid, cracking
and wrinkling. Primer and finish paint shall be from the same manufacturer.
35.2.3
Painting shall be either by brushing or spraying. CONTRACTOR shall procure

the appropriate quality of paint for this purpose as recommended by the
manufacturer. The workmanship shall generally conform to the requirements of
IS: 2338 (Part - I).
35.2.4
All the wood surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly dry and free from any
foreign matter. Surfaces shall be smoothened with abrasive paper using it
across the grains and dusted off. Wood primer coat shall then be applied
uniformly by brushing. The number of primer coats shall be as specified in the
item of work. Stopping as per IS: 426 shall be used to fill up large holes &
cracks on the surface. For small holes or minor cracks, fillers as per IS: 110
should be used. Any slight irregularities of the surface shall then be made up
by applying an optimum coat of filler conforming to IS: 110 and rubbed down
with an abrasive paper for obtaining a smooth surface for the undercoat of
synthetic enamel paint conforming to IS: 2932. Paint shall be applied by
brushing evenly and smoothly by means of crossing and laying off in the
direction of the grain of wood. After drying, the coat shall be carefully rubbed
down using very fine grade of sand paper and wiped clean before the next coat
of finishing is applied. At least 24 hours shall elapse between the applications
of successive coats. Each coat shall vary slightly in shade and this shall be got
approved by the ENGINEER. The number of coats of paint to be applied shall
be as specified in the item of work.
35.2.5
All the wood surfaces to be provided with clear finishes shall be thoroughly dry
and free from any foreign matter. Surfaces shall be smoothened with abrasive
paper using it in the direction of the grains and dusted off.
Any slight irregularities of the surface shall be made up by applying an optimum
coat of transparent liquid filler conforming to IS: 345. The Surface when hard
shall be rubbed down with fine abrasive paper. All dust and dirt shall be
cleaned and on this surface water or spirit stains shall be applied to enhance
the natural grain or figuring effect of wood. After the surface is dry, a suitable
seater shall be applied to prevent bleeding of stain and filler into the finish coat.
The surface shall be rubbed down lightly, wiped off and allowed to dry. Over
this prepared surface, varnish conforming to IS: 337 shall be applied by
brushing. Varnish should not be retouched once it has begun to set. Staining if
required shall be provided as directed by the ENGINEER. When two coats of
varnish is specified, the first coat should be a hard-drying undercoat or flatting
varnish which shall be allowed to dry hard before applying the finishing coat.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 63 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
The number of coats to be applied shall be as per the item of work. For works
where clear finish of French polish is specified the prepared surfaces of wood
shall be applied with the polish using a pad of woollen cloth covered by a fine
cloth. The pad shall be moistened with polish and rubbed hard on the surface
in a series of overlapping circles to give an even finish over the entire area. The
surface shall be allowed to dry before applying the next coat. Finishing shall be
carried out using a fresh clean cloth over the pad, slight dampening with
methylated spirit and rubbing lightly and quickly in circular motions. The
finished surface shall have a uniform texture and high gloss. The number of
coats to be applied shall be as per the item of work.
35.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be in sqm correct to two place of decimal. Measurement
shall be for the projected area between out to out of frames and no multiplying
factor is allowed on any account. Rate shall be inclusive of enabling works
such as scaffolding, etc. Measurement and payment is applicable only if a
separate item is specified and not if it is already made as part of a combined
item.
36.0
PAINTING OF STEEL WORK

For painting of structural steel refer separate section.
37.0
FLASHING
37.1
Materials
37.1.1
Anodised aluminium sheets shall be 1 mm thick with anodic film thickness of

0.025 mm.
37.1.2
Galvanised mild steel sheets shall be 1 mm thick with zinc coating of 800
g/sqm.
37.1.3
Bitumen felt shall be either Hessian base self finished bitumen felt Type 3
Grade I conforming to IS: 1322 or glass fibre base self finished felt Type 2
Grade I conforming to IS: 7193.
37.2
Workmanship
37.2.1
The type of the flashing and method of fixing shall be as specified in the
37.2.2
Flashing shall be of the correct shape and size as indicated in the construction
drawings and they shall be properly fixed to ensure their effectiveness.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 64 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
37.2.3
Flashing shall be of long lengths so as to provide minimum number of joints.

The minimum overlap at joints shall be 100 mm.
37.2.4
Fixing of the flashing shall be either by bolting with bitumen washers or by

tucking into the groove 75 mm wide X 65 mm deep in masonry/ concrete along
with cement mortar 1:4 filleting as indicated in the drawings. Curing of the
mortar shall be carried out for a minimum period of 4 days.
37.2.5
Bitumen or glass fibre felt flashing of the type as specified shall be provided
with 1 coat of bitumen primer as per IS: 3384 and 2 coats of bituminous
bonding material, hot applied, of grade 85/25 conforming to IS: 702 at the rate
of 1.2 kg/sqm, after the installation.
37.3
Measurement
shall be for the actual area of the flashing material provided and the rate shall
include for all the incidental works of bending to shape and fixing details as per
the construction drawings.
38.0
INSERTS AND CUTOUTS IN CONCRETE WORK
38.1
Numerous inserts are required to be fixed/ embedded in concrete as indicated

in construction drawings/ as directed by the Engineer. These inserts comprise
plates, angles, pipe sleeves, anchor bolt assemblies, etc are required to be
supplied and fabricated by the Contractor. These would be indicated clearly on
the construction drawings.
38.2
The rate quoted by the Bidder for concrete works shall hold good for accurately
fixing the inserts at the correct levels/ alignment and shall include the cost of
any temporary supports/ anchors such as bars including cutting, bending,
welding, etc as required.
38.3
Steel templates shall be used by the CONTRACTOR to locate and very

accurately position bolts, groups of bolts, inserts, embedded parts, etc at his
cost. Such templates shall be got previously approved by the Engineer.
Templates shall invariably be supported such that the same is not disturbed
due to vibration, movement of labourers, materials, shuttering work,
reinforcement, etc while concreting. The CONTRACTOR will have to suitably
bend, cut or otherwise adjust the reinforcement in concrete at the location of
inserts, as directed by the Engineer. If the Engineer so directs, the inserts will
have to be welded to reinforcement to keep these in place. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the accuracy of dimensions, levels, alignments and
centre lines of the inserts in accordance with the drawings and for maintenance
of the same until the erection of equipment/ structure or final acceptance by the
PURCHASER.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 65 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
38.4
The Contractor shall ensure proper protection of all bolts, inserts, etc from
weather by greasing or other approved means such as applying white lead
putty and wrapping them with gunny bags or canvas or by other means as
directed by the Engineer to avoid damage due to movement of his labourers,
materials, equipment, etc. No extra claim from the Contractor on this account
shall be entertained. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all damage
caused to bolts, inserts, etc due to his negligence and in case damage does
occur, they shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the
Contractor's cost.
38.5
Cut outs, chamfers, pockets, etc shall be left as indicated in the drawings and
no extra cost shall be payable for providing these at their correct locations. The
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the cut outs from
accidentally getting filled up or the edges getting broken.
38.6
Measurement
Inserts which are fabricated by contractor at his workshop will be weighed and
paid as per the items of work.
39.0
FALSE CEILING
39.1
Fibre Board False Ceiling
39.1.1
Fibre Board
39.1.1.1 The hard fibre board to be used in false ceiling shall be of an approved
manufacture as per IS: 1658 or as approved by the PURCHASER.
39.1.1.2 The fibre boards shall be made from substances compound of vegetable fibres
such as wood pulp, wood chips or shavings bonded by a synthetic resin.
Veneered particle boards shall have a core of particle board sandwiched or
glued in between two or more veneers on outer surfaces.
39.1.1.3 The fibre boards shall be fire resistant, termite and insect resistant, weather
resistant, acoustically satisfactory, dimensionally stable, warp-free, easily
workable, treated with anti-fungus chemicals, heat insulated and of adequate
structural strength and should have good surface finish as approved by the
PURCHASER.
39.1.1.4 The size of fibre board ceiling tile shall generally be 600 x 600 x 12 mm thick.
All types of boards and ceiling tiles shall be stored flat under cover at a clean
dry place on firm ground. The Contractor should ensure that boards are not
stacked on termite infected, wet or loose ground. The boards should be always
carried on edges.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 66 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
39.1.2
Metal Frame Work

The metal frame work shall be interlocking type and made of sections of light
metal, such as extruded anodised aluminium. The shape and cross section
shall be such as to facilitate proper suspension and proper fixing of the ceiling
boards covering them and shall be structurally sound and rigid.
39.1.3
Construction
39.1.3.1 The Contractor shall ensure that the frame to support the ceiling is designed for
its structural strength to withstand the weight of ceiling boards to be fixed, live
2
load of 75 kg/m and other loads such as that of air-conditioning ducts, grills,
electrical wiring and lighting fixtures, thermal insulation, etc as shown on the
drawings. The Contractor shall also submit a detailed drawing to show the grid
work, sizes of grid members, method of suspension, position of openings for
air-conditioning and lighting, access doors, etc.
39.1.3.2 The metal frame work of extruded anodised aluminium false ceiling grid system
shall consist of aluminium main members of special T-profile of 32 mm x 32
mm interlocking with each other and run both ways at 600 mm centre to centre.
The aluminium false work shall be suspended from the roof structures by
means of aluminium painted steel hangers at suitable intervals and supported
at the walls by means of extruded aluminium wall angles.
39.1.3.3 In the case of aluminium grid system, boards are just placed into the frames
formed by the main 'T' members and the cross members fitted with the clips for
locking the boards. Contractor should take utmost care so as not to force the
boards in position, and a very little gap is preferable to a tight joint. Fixing fibre
boards by adhesives shall not be permitted unless approved by the
PURCHASER. The fibre boards should be cut with a fine toothed saw, if
required.
39.1.3.4 The hard boards shall be conditioned by wetting the screen surface with clean
water by a sponge or brush. The damp boards should be stacked back to back
on flat surface at site for 48 hours and then fixed immediately. Conditioning if
required shall be done as per the manufacturer's specifications.
39.1.3.5 As the work of false ceiling may be interconnected with the work of airconditioning ducts and lighting, the Contractor shall fully cooperate with other
agencies entrusted with the above works and who may be working
simultaneously. The Contractor shall provide necessary openings, in the false
ceiling work for air-conditioning, lighting and other fixtures. Additional framing, if
required, for the above openings shall also be provided at no extra cost to the

SECTION: D7
SHEET 67 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
PURCHASER. Removable or hinged type inspection or access trap doors shall

be provided at locations specified by the PURCHASER.
39.2
Gypsum Plaster Board False Ceiling
39.2.1
Gypsum Plaster Board
39.2.1.1 Gypsum Plaster Board to be used in false ceiling shall be of an approved

manufacturer and approved by PURCHASER/ ENGINEER.
39.2.1.2 The boards shall be of maximum size 1220 mm x 1800 mm and 12.5 mm thick
with tapered edges. They should be dimensionally stable, warp free, easily
workable and should have a good surface finish.
39.2.1.3 The boards should be
recommendations.
39.2.2
carried
and
stacked as
per
manufacturer's
Metal Frame Work Construction
39.2.2.1 The metal framework shall consist of a GI perimeter channel fixed along the
perimeter of the ceiling having a size of 27 mm x 0.5 mm thick with one flange
of 20 mm and the other flange of 30 mm. Channels are to be held in position by
means of screw driven rawl plugs at 600 mm centres. GI intermediate channels
of size 45 mm x 15 mm (flange) x 0.9 mm thick shall be suspended from the
soffit at a maximum spacing of 1220 mm by means of MS flats 25 mm x 3 mm
fixed to the soffit at 1220 mm centres by means of a GI cleat and expansion
fasteners. GI Ceiling sections of 0.5 mm thickness having knurled wedge 51.5
mm and two flanges of 26 mm each with lips of 10.5 mm are then fixed to the
intermediate channel by means of connecting clips perpendicular to the
direction of the intermediate channel at 450 mm centres.
Gypsum plaster boards of 12.5 mm thick shall then be fixed to the ceiling
sections by means of drywall screws at 230 mm centres. The joints between
boards shall be staggered.
39.2.3
The tapered edges shall be jointed in the following manner:

A band of jointing compound is applied to the taper in the board joints.
Required length of paper tape is pressed in to the band of jointing compound
by means of a taping knife. After the joints have dried, a thin layer of jointing
compound is applied as a first coat of finish, followed by the same treatment as
a second coat of finish. Finally two coats of top coat are applied on the entire
surface to get an even form surface. All nail and screw heads should be filled
flush with the board surface.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 68 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
39.2.4
The Contractor shall ensure that the frame to support the ceiling is designed for
its structural strength to withstand the weight of ceiling boards to be fixed, live
2
load of 75 kg/m , and other loads such as that of air-conditioning ducts, grills,
electrical wiring and lighting fixtures, thermal insulation, etc as show on the
drawings. The Contractor shall also submit a detailed drawing to show the grid
work, sizes of grid members, method of suspension, position of openings for
air-conditioning and lighting, access doors, etc.
39.2.5
As the work of false ceiling may be interconnected with the work of airconditioning ducts and lighting, the Contractor shall fully cooperate with other
agencies entrusted with the above works and who may be working
simultaneously. The Contractor shall provide necessary openings, in the false
ceiling work for air-conditioning, lighting and other fixtures. Additional framing, if
required, for the above openings shall also be provided at no extra cost to the
PURCHASER. Removable or hinged type inspection or access trap doors shall
be provided at locations specified by the PURCHASER.
39.3
Pre-Painted Coil coated Steel False Ceiling System
39.3.1
The false ceiling frame work shall be designed to withstand the self weight, and
weight of AC grills, lighting fixture etc.
39.3.2
Based on the outline duly furnished by PURCHASER locating AC grills, lighting

fixtures, etc the Contractor shall prepare detailed working drawings including
framing around openings, access doors, etc. Only on obtaining approval on the
drawings shall the fabrication commence.
39.4
Measurement
Measurement for payment shall be superficial area of the false ceiling less
openings if any. Openings in false ceilings less than 0.2 sqm in area shall not
be deducted for the purpose of payment.
40.0
THERMAL INSULATION FOR CEILING
40.1
Material
40.1.1
Thermal Insulation material consisting of boards, slabs and rolls of approved

manufacture shall be of approved thermal conductivity for creating the required
design conditions and shall be provided as indicated in item of works and as
shown in the drawings. The insulation shall be provided after the sample is
approved by the PURCHASER.
40.1.2
The quoted rate shall include supply, delivery, cutting and fixing of all materials
for covering the roof with thermal insulation material, including wood pegs,
slotted angle, G.I rawl plugs, wood/ coach screws, lacing wire, G.I washers,

SECTION: D7
SHEET 69 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
wire mesh, any covering as stipulated in schedule of prices and quantities,

finishing at all levels and elevation etc complete.
40.2
Measurement
Measurement for payment shall be same as given in clause 39.4.
41.0
WATER-PROOFING WITH ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE (ISOTHANE EMA)
41.1
Materials
41.1.1
It is a liquid which is Urethane Pre-polymer based that can be applied with a

brush on concrete surfaces to form a permanent, flexible, seamless membrane
coating after it is cured.
41.1.2
The salient features of Isothane EMA are as given below:

Application temp limit
0 to 70 degree centigrade
Elongation percent
500
Approx. drying time
a) 12 to 20 hours for touch dry

b) 7 days for full cure
Accelerated weathering
No appreciable depreciation after

1200 hrs
Resistant to Ultraviolet rays,

hydrolysis and Industrial
environment
Excellent
Resistant to Mechanical Damage
Good
Shelf life
9 months
41.1.3
Once the can containing the liquid is opened, it starts to cure and form a scum
on the top. It should be removed to use the material below.
41.2
Workmanship
41.2.1
The roof shall be sloped with concrete or mortar screed to achieve the
specified slope as per drawing and shall be properly cured before taking up
water-proofing treatment.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 70 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
41.2.2
The surface shall be cleaned of all foreign matters by wire brushing, dusting,
etc and shall be made thoroughly dry. All cracks and voids on the surface shall
be filled with mastic sealant, if required.
41.2.3
Over the cleaned surface, a suitable coat of polyurethane primer @ 5 6 sqm/

litre shall be applied.
41.2.4
First coat of Isothane EMA elastomeric membrane shall be applied on the

primed surface @ 0.50 kg/sqm with a minimum average thickness of 0.5 mm.
41.2.5
After the first coat is touched dry, second coat of Isothane EMA @ 0.5
kg/sqmm and minimum average thickness of 0.5 mm shall be applied.
41.2.6
Due to unavoidable circumstances, if application of second coat is delayed,

special primer shall be applied over the entire surface of first coat and is
allowed to dry for 4 to 8 hours before second coat is applied.
41.2.7
It shall be ensured that a concave fillet 75 mm in radius is provided in cement

mortar 1:4 at the junction of roof and vertical faces of masonry or RCC parapet
wall or column projections.
41.2.8
Water proofing treatment shall be taken on the brick masonry wall/ parapet/
column projection by a minimum of 150 mm along its height. Groove 75 mm
wide and 65 mm deep in masonry shall be left for tucking the water proofing
treatment. The groove shall be filled with 1:4 cement mortar for securing the
water proofing treatment firmly.
41.2.9
All completed works shall be cleaned to remove any spillage from chemicals.
41.2.10 Finishing on top with cement concrete floor tiles or machine made burnt clay
flat terracing tiles shall be carried out, if specified, as described in clause
29.2.11.
41.2.11 Testing against any leakage or soaking of water through the roof shall be
carried out as specified in clause 29.2.13.
41.2.12 The contractor shall give guarantee for all of his works as specified in clause
29.2.14.
41.3
Measurement
Measurement shall be for the plan area of treatment and for the finished work.
No separate payment shall be made for the fillets and work as specified on the
vertical faces. Cement concrete tiling works or machine pressed clay tile works
shall be paid separately, unless they are specifically included in the item of
works.

SECTION: D7
SHEET 71 OF 71
GENERAL CIVIL WORKS
42.0
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR
42.1
42.1.1
These doors shall be from reputed approved manufacturers specialised in this

area of works. However, it shall have following minimum features.
42.1.2
Size of module shall be 6000 mm wide and 2400 mm height. Clear door
opening shall be 2000 mm wide and 2400 mm height. It shall have 2000 mm
wide fixed panels on either side.
42.1.3
It should consist of microprocessor control unit, monitoring device for opening

and closing, automatic reverse system on contact with obstruction. In general,
it should be operable without the use of any additional instrumentation or
gadgets by the user.
42.1.4
The module should be provided with short circuit proof power supply unit for
power rating of 220/240 V, 50/60 Hz. A power point will be made available at a
suitable location by electrical contractor.
42.1.5
The door shall have facilities for activation by infrared movement detector on
both sides.
42.1.6
The door shall have adjustable shutter speed as follows:
42.1.6.1 Opening and closing speed 10 to 60 cm/sec/leaf.

42.1.6.2 Creep speed 3 to 9 cm/sec/leaf
42.1.6.3 Opening time 0 to 180 sec
42.1.7
Both the fixed and sliding panels shall be made of 12 mm thick toughened
glass with or without etching. It should be provided with all required fittings and
fixtures, digital entry exit function on the top and electro- mechanical locking
system.
42.2
Payment
The rate shall be on lump-sum basis and shall include the cost of all materials,
labour, transport, handling, loading and unloading, installation, power
requirement, testing, commissioning all necessary hardware, structural
supports required for erection, protecting the module and glass till handing over
and all other features as per manufacturers specification.

SECTION: D8
SHEET 1 OF 8
1.0
SCOPE
This Specification covers the general requirements of chemical admixtures for
concrete used in general construction, their applicability, acceptability criteria,
proportioning, sampling, testing and precautions to be taken. The different
types of admixtures covered by this specification are Accelerator, Retarder, Airentraining agents, Plasticizers and Super plasticizers. However, the
requirements of Integral water proofing admixtures/ compounds shall be in
accordance with IS: 2645.
2.0
APPLICABLE CODES & SPECIFICATIONS

The following specifications, standards and codes, including all official
amendments/ revisions and other specifications and codes referred to therein,
shall be considered a part of this specification. In all cases the latest issue/
edition/ revision shall apply. In case of any discrepancy between this
specification and those referred to herein, this specification shall govern.
1) IS: 9103
Specification for Admixtures for concrete
2) IS: 2645
Specification for Integral Cement Water Proofing

Compounds
3) IS: 3812
Specification for fly ash for use as Admixture

for concrete (Part - II)
4) IS: 4926
Ready mixed concrete
5) IS: 1199
Method of sampling and analysis of concrete
6) IS: 516
Method of test for strength of concrete
7) IS: 6925
Methods of test for determination of water

soluble chlorides in Concrete admixtures
8) BS: 5075
Specification for accelerating admixtures,

retarding admixtures and water reducing
admixtures (Part - 1)
9) BS: 5075
Specification for Super plasticising admixtures

(Part - 3)
10) ASTM: 494
Standard specification for chemical admixtures

for concrete

SECTION: D8
SHEET 2 OF 8
3.0
TERMINOLOGY
3.1
Admixture
A material other than water, aggregates and hydraulic cement, used as an
ingredient of concrete or mortar and added to the batch immediately before or
during its mixing to modify one or more of the properties of concrete in the
plastic or under hardening state.
3.2
Accelerator
A substance, when added to concrete, mortar or grout, increases the rate of
hydration of hydraulic cement, shortens the time of set or increases the rate of
hardening or strength development.
3.3
Retarder
An admixture which delays the setting of cement-paste and hence of mixtures,
such as cement mortar or concrete.
3.4
Air Entraining Agent

An admixture for concrete or mortar which causes air to be incorporated in the
form of minute bubbles in the concrete or mortar during mixing, usually to
increase workability and resistance to freezing and thawing and disruptive
action of de-icing salts.
3.5
Water Reducing Admixture or Plasticiser

A material which either increases workability of freshly mixed mortar or
concrete without increasing water content or maintains workability with a
reduced amount of water. The reduction in water content for plasticisers is of
the order of not more than 10 to 15%.
3.6
High Range of Water Reducers (Super Plasticisers)

Super plasticisers are the high range water reducing admixtures. The reduction
in water content in the case of super plasticisers will be of the order of 25 30%. Chloride based Super plasticisers are not recommended for reinforced
concrete, which may give rise to corrosion of steel.
4.0
GENERAL
4.1
Chemical admixtures may be used if permitted by the Engineer based upon

evidence that with the passage of time neither the compressive strength nor its
durability is reduced. In case their use is permitted, the type, amount and

SECTION: D8
SHEET 3 OF 8
method of use of an admixture proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted

to the Engineer for approval. No admixture shall be considered for use unless
all tests complying with relevant codes (IS: 9103 or IS: 2645) have been done
and a complete report from an independent laboratory of standing is submitted
for scrutiny and approval of the Engineer.
4.2
The admixture shall be chloride free and shall be tested in accordance with IS:
6925.
4.3
Calcium chloride shall not be used for accelerating set of the cement for any
concrete containing reinforcement or embedded parts. When Calcium chloride
is permitted such as in mass concrete works, it shall be dissolved in water and
added to the mixing water by an amount not exceeding 1.5 percent of the
weight of the cement in each batch of concrete. The designed concrete mix
shall be corrected accordingly.
4.4
The contractor shall provide the following information concerning each

admixture to the Engineer:
a) Compliance to Indian/International standards with test reports
b) Description of the product and its composition/ chemical names of main
ingredients and properties
c) Primary uses of the product, applicability, advantages etc
d) Information to be considered in relevant mix design
e) Manufacturer's instructions regarding usage of admixtures
f)
Typical dosage/ consumption and effects of over dosage, chances of air

entrainment when used as per the recommended dosage
g) The chloride ion content and water soluble sulphate content (expressed as
SO 3 ) expressed as percentage by weight of admixture
h) Manufacturer's written confirmation of compatibility of two or more
admixtures if proposed to be used in any one mix
i)
Any deleterious effects on concrete or any increase in risk of corrosion of

the reinforcement or other embedments
j)
Product storage procedure
k) Precautions to be taken while using the product.

SECTION: D8
SHEET 4 OF 8
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
Concrete made with admixtures when compared with identical concrete made
without the admixture (Reference or Control Concrete) in accordance with
clause 6.0 shall conform to the requirements given in Table-1, except in the
case of Air-entraining admixture. In the case of Air-entraining admixtures, a
reference admixture of approved quality shall be used in the control concrete to
entrain identical amount of air.
TABLE - 1: PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
(Ref: Compiled from IS: 9103, BS: 5075, ASTM: 494)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Water content,
percent of control
sample, Max
Time of setting,
allowable deviation
from control
sample
hours:
Initial
Max
Min
Final
Max
Min
Compressive
strength, percent
of control sample,
Min
3 days
7 days
28 days
6 months
1 year
Flexural strength,
percent of control
sample, Min
Air-Entraining
Admixture
High Range
Retarding
High Range
Retarding
Accelerating
Requirements
Normal
Sl.
No
.
Retarding
Admixture
Water Reducing Admixture

Accelerating
Admixture
5.0
95
95
95
88
88
-3
-1
+3
+1
+1
-
-3
+3
+3
-
+1
+1
+3
-
-2
-1
+3
-
+1
-
-2
-1
+3
-
+1
-
+3
-
125
100
100
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
110
110
110
100
100
125
110
110
100
100
110
110
110
100
100
125
115
110
100
100
125
115
110
100
100
90
90
90
90
90

SECTION: D8
SHEET 5 OF 8
v)
3 days
7 days
28 days
Length change,
percent of control
Percent increase
over control
sample, Max
28 days
6 months
1 year
vi)
vii)
viii)
Bleeding, percent
increase over
control sample,
Max
Compacting factor
(nor more than
below control mix)
Workability
(Slump, mm)
(nor more than
below control mix)
110
100
90
135
90
90
90
135
100
100
100
135
110
100
100
135
100
100
100
135
110
100
100
135
110
100
100
135
90
90
90
-
0.010 0.010 0.010 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.010

0
0
0
0
0.010 0.010 0.010 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.010
0
0
0
0
0.010 0.010 0.010 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.010
0
0
0
0
5
5
5
5
5
2
0.02
0.02 0.02
15
15
The compressive and flexural strength of concrete containing the admixture

under test at any test age shall be not less than 90 percent of that attained
at any previous test age. The objective of this limit is to maintain that the
compressive or flexural strength of concrete containing the admixture under
test shall not decrease with age.
** Percent of control limit applies when length change of control is 0.03

percent or greater; increase over control limit applies when length change
of control is less than 0.03 percent.
6.0
SAMPLING & TESTING

The performance and effect of admixtures for concrete shall be evaluated to
conform to the physical requirements given in Table-1 by testing the concrete
with admixture and comparing with reference concrete. The sampling and
testing shall be in accordance with stipulations given in IS: 9103.

SECTION: D8
SHEET 6 OF 8
6.1
Sampling
6.1.1
The method of sampling of admixtures and concrete for testing purpose shall
be in accordance with the stipulations given in IS: 9103.
6.1.2
Samples of admixtures shall be packed in moisture proof air containers.
6.1.3
The admixture shall be used strictly as per the recommendations of the

manufacturer.
6.1.4
For general evaluation of admixture the cement shall conform to Portland

cement to IS: 269 and aggregates shall conform to the requirements given in
IS: 383.
6.1.5
When an admixture is required to be evaluated for a specific work as directed

by the Engineer the test samples shall be prepared using the materials
proposed to be used on that particular work.
6.1.6
Whenever the admixture has not been used previously with particular
combination of materials and/ or when special types of cements are adopted,
and also when the mixing and placing temperatures are outside the normal
range, then in all such cases the admixtures shall be specifically evaluated for
that work.
6.1.7
When an admixture is to be tested for air entrainment, it shall be used in such a

quantity that it produces air content in the range of 3.5 to 7 %.
6.1.8
The concrete mix shall be proportioned to have the cement content specified
for the work and to meet the stipulated workability and strength requirements.
6.2
Testing
The fresh concrete and hardened concrete shall be tested for the tests
described below:
6.2.1
Testing of Fresh Concrete

Sampling of fresh concrete shall be done according to the requirements given
in IS: 1199. The concrete shall be analysed for the following tests:
(a) Test for workability as per IS: 1199
(b) Test for air-content as per IS: 1199
(c) Test for Time of Setting as per IS: 8142

SECTION: D8
SHEET 7 OF 8
(d) Test for bleeding as per IS: 9103

(e) Test for water content as per IS: 9103
The above tests shall be carried out at the time of actual concreting work at
site.
6.2.2
Testing of Hardened Concrete

Specimens for tests on hardened concrete shall be prepared from at least three
separate batches for concrete with and without the admixture. The specimen
shall be analysed for the following tests below:
(a) Test for Compressive Strength as per IS: 516
(b) Test for Flexural Strength as per IS: 516
(c) Tests for Length Change (Drying Shrinkage): It shall be determined as
given in IS: 1199. The moist-curing period, including the period in moulds
shall be 14 days.
7.0
USE OF ADMIXTURES
7.1
Admixtures shall be used strictly in accordance with the instructions provided

by the Manufacturer of the admixture.
7.2
Intermixing of admixtures prior to introduction into the concrete should be

avoided unless tests indicate that there will be no adverse effect or the
manufacturer's instructions permit.
7.3
The time of addition of admixture into the concrete shall be clearly obtained
from the manufacturer.
7.4
The maximum water content in the concrete mix containing super plasticiser
shall be 88 % to 84 % of water content in control mix.
7.5
The admixtures shall be added precisely and mixed thoroughly. In general, the
admixture should be added to the mix along with approximately 25 percent of
total mixing water. First, about 50 percent of the total water is added on the dry
mix of cement and aggregates for about 15 to 30 seconds, then the mixture of
admixture and 25 percent of the total water is added and finally the balance 25
percent of the total water is poured into the mix. However, careful attention
should be given to the instructions provided by the manufacturer.
7.6
An admixture shall be compatible with other admixtures when used in the same
concrete. All admixtures should be added to the concrete separately and must

SECTION: D8
SHEET 8 OF 8
not be mixed together prior to addition. Also trials to assess the effects of
overdosing in a particular mix are strongly recommended. Preference to
Melamine-based Super plasticizer for concrete in cold weather condition and to
Naphthalene-based (retarding type) super plasticiser in hot weather conditions
shall be given.
8.0
MODE OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Admixture shall not be measured separately if its usage is already included in
the scope of the concrete work, since the rate per cubic meter of concrete work
is deemed to include for admixtures as specified. In such case the item
description for concrete work shall explicitly mention the term "providing
necessary admixtures". If it is envisaged to maintain the "use of admixtures in
concrete" as a separate item i.e., without including in the cost of concrete work
then the method of payment shall be based on the volume of concrete in which
the admixture is added.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 1 OF 46
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification covers the general requirements of providing and laying

water mains and water supply piping, providing and fixing sanitary fixtures and
piping and providing and laying drainage lines.
1.2
For specifications, mode of measurements and scope of work covered under

the respective items for the work included under this contract, following
documents shall be referred to in the order of precedence as given below:
a) Description of the items and notes if any given in the Schedule of

Quantities
b) Specifications
c) Additional Conditions of Contract
d) General Conditions of Contract
e) Applicable Codes and Standards as specified herein with amendments/
revisions issued till date.
In the event of any discrepancy among the documents referred above, the
document in the higher order of precedence shall prevail.
1.3
In the event of any element of specification not being available in any of the
documents mentioned above, the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge in
writing shall be followed by the Contractor.
1.4
The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the drawings and designs as
would be issued to the Contractor by the Engineer duly signed and stamped by
him. The Contractor shall not take cognisance of any drawings, designs,
specifications, etc. not bearing Engineer's signature and stamp. Similarly the
Contractor shall not take cognisance of instructions given by any other
Authority except the instructions given by the Engineer in writing.
1.5
The Work shall be executed and measured as per metric dimensions given in
the Schedule of Quantities, drawings etc.
1.6
The Contractor shall acquaint himself fully with the partial provisions for
supports that may be available in the structure and utilise them to the extent

SECTION : D9
SHEET 2 OF 46
possible. In any case the Contractor shall provide all the supports regardless of
provisions that have been already made. Nothing extra shall be payable for
situations where bed plates (for supports) are not available or are not useful.
1.7
The Contractor shall incorporate seismic considerations of anchoring and

isolation in the design of the systems as called for the different equipment.
1.8
Shop coats of paint that may be damaged during shipment or erection shall be
cleaned off with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected
areas, then coated with paint to match the finish over the adjoining shop
painted surface.
1.9
In addition to the sectional testing carried out during the construction, the
Contractor shall test the entire installation after connections to the overhead
tanks or pumping system or mains. He shall rectify all leakage and shall
replace all defective materials in the system. Any consequential damage done,
on account of Contractors carelessness, open or burst pipes or failure of
fittings, during testing and commissioning to the building, furniture and fixtures
shall be made good by the Contractor.
2.0
SCAFFOLDING
Only steel tube scaffolding of approved design shall be used for all works. The
scaffold structure shall comply with the requirements of IS: 4014 and IS: 3696.
An independent tied scaffold (double scaffold), which has two lines of
standards, shall be provided with the inner line kept at least one board clear of
the finished face with extended transoms, or hop up baskets to carry an inside
board. Diagonal braces shall not prevent the material being moved along the
scaffold run. The scaffolding shall be suitably packed at the ends to prevent
damage to the finished work.
3.0
PROTECTION
3.1
Protection against damage: Care shall be taken to avoid damage from any
cause at all stages. Packing pieces used for protection shall not disfigure or
otherwise permanently mark the Works.
3.2
Surface protection shall be afforded by careful handling and the avoidance of

the use of hooks, crowbars, or other implements that are likely to damage the
works.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 3 OF 46
3.3
Protection during construction: Decorative surfaces shall be carefully protected

during construction by a temporary cover.
3.4
Protection of finished work: At all stages of the Contract it is essential that all
works are properly protected.
3.5
Suitable packing shall be used to ensure that scaffolding does not damage
erected stone, marble, granite or other finished works.
3.6
Any disfigurement, discolouration or imperfection whatsoever due to any

reason shall not be accepted and the Contractor shall either remedy the same
or redo the work at no extra cost. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge has
to whether any work either in whole or in part is acceptable or not shall be final
and binding on the Contractor.
4.0
GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall guarantee and undertake to maintain and rectify the
various components of the Plumbing work installed by him for their successful
performance for a period of 10 years. The Contractor shall indemnify the
Engineer-in-Charge for a similar period against any damage to property and
injury to persons on account of any defective work or maintenance carried out
by the Contractor. The format and text of the Guarantee and the Indemnity
Bond shall be given by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.0
APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS

All equipment, supply, erection, testing and commissioning shall comply with
the requirements of Indian Standards and code of practices given below as
amended till date. All equipment and material being supplied by the contractor
shall meet the requirements of IS, and other Codes/ Publications as given
below.
SP: 6 (1)
Structural steel sections
IS: 27
Pig lead
IS: 325
Three phase induction motors
IS: 554
Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are

required on the threads

SECTION : D9
SHEET 4 OF 46
IS: 694
PVC insulated cables for working voltages up to and including

1100 V
IS: 779
Specification for water meters (Domestic type)
IS: 782
Specification for caulking lead
IS: 800
Code of Practice for general construction in steel
IS: 1068
Electroplated coatings of nickel plus chromium and copper plus

nickel plus chromium
Code of Basic requirements for water supply drainage and
sanitation
Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners:
Introduction and general information (Part - 1)
Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners: Product
grade sand tolerances (Part - 2)
PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: For working voltages
up to and including 1100 V (Part - 1)
PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: For working voltages
from 3.3 kV up to and including 11 kV (Part - 2)
IS: 1172
IS:1367
IS: 1367
IS: 1554
IS: 1554
IS: 1726
Specification for cast iron man hole covers and frames
IS: 1742
Code of practice for building drainage
IS: 2064
Selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliances Code of practice
IS: 2065
Code of practice for water supply in buildings
IS: 2104
Specification for water meter boxes(Domestic type)
IS:2373
Specification for water meters (Bulk type)
IS: 2379
Colour code for identification of pipelines
IS: 2527
Code of practice for fixing rain water gutters and down pipes for
roof drainage
IS: 2629
Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing on iron and steel
IS: 3114
Code of practice for laying of cast iron pipes
IS: 4111
Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system:

Manholes (Part - 1)

SECTION : D9
SHEET 5 OF 46
IS: 4127
Code of practice for laying glazed stoneware pipes
IS: 4853
Recommended practice for radiographic inspection of fusion

welded butt joints in steel pipes
Unplasticised PVC pipes for potable water supplies specification.
Code of practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for
buildings
IS: 4985
IS: 5329
IS: 5455
Cast iron steps for manholes
IS: 6159
Recommended practice for design and fabrication of material

prior to galvanising
IS: 7558
Code of practice for domestic hot water installations
IS: 8321
Glossary of terms applicable to plumbing work
IS:8419
Requirements for water filtration equipment: Filtration media

sand and gravel (Part - 1)
Requirements for water filtration equipment: Under drainage
system (Part - 1)
IS: 8419
IS: 9668
Maintenance of water supplies and fire fighting
IS: 9842
Preformed fibrous pipe insulation
IS: 9912
Coal tar based coating materials and suitable primers for

protecting iron and steel pipe lines
Code of practice for coating and wrapping of underground mild
steel pipelines
IS: 10221
IS: 10234
Recommendations for general pipeline welding
IS: 10446
Glossary of terms relating to water supply and sanitation
IS: 11149
Rubber Gaskets
IS: 11790
Code of practice for preparation of butt welding ends for pipes,

valves, flanges and fittings
Code of practice for plumbing in multi-storeyed buildings: Water
Supply (Part - 1)
IS: 12183
IS: 12251
Code of practice for drainage of building basements
BS: 5572
Code of practice for sanitary pipe work

SECTION : D9
SHEET 6 OF 46
BS: 6700
Specification for design, installation, testing and maintenance of

services supplying water for domestic use within buildings and
their cartilages
BS: 8301
Code of practice for building drainage
BS: EN274 Sanitary tap ware, waste fittings for basins, bidets and baths:
General technical specifications
IS: 458
Specification for precast concrete pipes(with and without
reinforcement)
IS: 651
Salt glazed stoneware pipes and fittings
IS: 1239
Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings: Mild
steel tubes (Part - 1)
IS:1239
Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings
IS:1536
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and
sewage
IS: 1537
Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
IS: 1538
Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
IS: 1729
Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating
pipes, fitting sand accessories
IS: 1879
Malleable cast iron pipe fittings
IS: 1978
Line pipe
IS: 1979
High test line pipe
IS: 2501
Copper tubes for general engineering purposes
IS: 2643
Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Basic profile

and dimensions (Part - 1)
Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Tolerances
(Part - 2)
Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Limits of
sizes (Part - 3)
IS: 2643
IS: 2643
IS: 3468
Pipe nuts
IS: 3589
Seamless or electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and

sewage(168.3 mm to 2032 mm outside diameter)

SECTION : D9
SHEET 7 OF 46
IS: 3989
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and
ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories
IS: 4346
Specifications for washers for use with fittings for water services
IS: 4711
Methods for sampling steel pipes, tube sand fittings
IS: 6392
Steel pipe flanges
IS: 6418
Cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering
purposes
Specification for horizontally cast iron double flanged pipes for
water, gas and sewage
Specification for copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for
water works purposes
Specification for sluice valves for water works purposes (50 mm
to 300 mm size)
Specification copper alloy float valves (horizontal plunger type)
for water supply fittings
Specification for sluice valves for water works purposes (350 mm
to 1200 mm size)
IS: 7181
IS: 778
IS: 780
IS: 1703
IS: 2906
IS: 3950
Specification for surface boxes for sluice valves
IS: 5312
Specification for swing check type reflux (non return) valves:

Single door pattern (Part - 1)
Specification for swing check type reflux (non return) valves:
Multi-door pattern (Part - 2)
IS: 5312
IS: 12992
Safety relief valves, spring loaded: Design (Part - 1)
IS: 13095
Butterfly valves for general purposes
IS: 771
Specification for glazed fire clay sanitary appliances (Part - 1 to

3)
Specification for flushing cistern for water closets and urinals
(other than plastic cistern)
Specification for cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins
and sinks
Specification for cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop
valves for water services
IS: 774
IS: 775
IS: 781
IS: 1700
Specification for drinking fountains
IS: 2326
Specification for automatic flushing cisterns for

SECTION : D9
SHEET 8 OF 46
IS: 2548
IS: 2548
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
IS: 2556
Specification for plastic seats and covers for water closets:

Thermoset seats and covers (Part - 1)
Specification for plastic seats and covers for water closets:
Thermoplastic seats and covers (Part - 2)
Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china):
General requirements (Part - 1)
Specific requirements of wash-down water closets (Part - 2)
Specific requirements of squatting pans (Part - 3)
Specific requirements of wash basins (Part - 4)
Specific requirements of urinals (Part - 6), Half stall urinals (Sec
- 2)
Specific requirements of urinals (Part - 6), Partition slabs
(Section - 4)
Specific requirements of urinals (Part - 6), waste fittings (Section
- 5)
Specific requirements of urinals (Part - 6), Water spreaders for
half stall urinals (Section - 6)
Specific requirements of half round channels (Part - 7)
Specific requirements of siphonic wash-down water closets (Part
- 8)
Specific requirements for shower rose (Part - 11)
Specific requirements of floor traps (Part - 12)
Specific requirements of universal water closets (Part - 15)
IS: 2692
Specification for ferrule for water services
IS: 2717
Glossary of terms relating to vitreous enamel ware and ceramic

metal systems
Specifications for copper alloy waste fittings for wash basins and
sinks
IS: 2963

SECTION : D9
SHEET 9 OF 46
IS: 3311
Specification for waste plug and its accessories for sinks and
wash basins.
IS: 5961
Specification for cast iron gratings for drainage purposes
IS: 6249
Specification for flush valves and fittings for marine use
IS: 6411
Specification for gel coated glass fibre reinforced polyester resin

bath tubs
Specification for copper alloy fancy single taps, combination tap
assembly and stop valves for water services
Specification for flush valves and fitting for water closets and
urinals
IS: 8931
IS: 9758
6.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
6.1
The Work shall conform to high standards of design and workmanship, shall
be structurally sound and aesthetically pleasing. Quality standards prescribed
shall form the backbone for the quality assurance and quality control system.
6.2
At the site level the Contractor shall arrange the materials, their stacking/
storage in appropriate manner to ensure the quality. Contractor shall provide
equipment and manpower to test continuously the quality of materials,
assemblies etc. as directed by the Engineer. The test shall be conducted
continuously and the result of tests maintained. In addition the Contractor shall
keep appropriate tools and equipment for checking alignments, levels, slopes
and evenness of surface.
6.3
The Engineer shall be free to carry out tests as may be considered necessary
by him at his sole discretion, from time to time, in addition to those specified in
this document. The Contractor shall provide the samples and labour for
collecting the samples. Nothing extra shall be payable to the Contractor for
samples or for the collection of the samples.
6.4
The test shall be conducted at the site laboratory that may be established by
Engineer-in-Charge or at any other Standard Laboratory selected by Engineerin-Charge.
6.5
The Contractor shall transport the samples to the laboratory for which nothing
extra shall be payable. In the event of Contractor failing to arrange
transportation of the samples in proper time Engineer shall have them
transported and recover two times the actual cost from the Contractor's bills.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 10 OF 46
6.6
Testing charges shall be borne by the Contractor.
6.7
Testing may be witnessed by the Contractor or his authorised representative.

Whether witnessed by the Contractor or not, the test results shall be binding on
the Contractor.
7.0
SANITARY AND OTHER APPLIANCES
7.1
Scope of Work
Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, sanitary and other
appliances shall inter-alia include the following:
a) Sanitary appliances and fixtures for toilets

b) Chromium plated brass fittings
c) Stainless steel sinks
d) Accessories e.g. towel rods, toilet paper holders, soap dish, liquid soap
dispensers, towel rails, coat hooks etc.
e) Mirrors, hand driers, drinking water fountains, etc.

7.2
Whether specifically mentioned or not the Contractor shall provide for all
appliances and fixtures all fixing devices, nuts, bolts, screws, hangers as
required.
7.3
All exposed pipes within toilets and near appliances/ fixtures shall be of
chromium plated brass or copper unless otherwise specified.
7.4
General requirements
7.4.1
All materials shall be new and of quality conforming to specifications and

subject to the approval of the Engineer. Wherever particular makes are
mentioned, the choice of selection shall remain with the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.4.2
All appliances, fixtures and fittings shall be provided with all such accessories
as are required to complete the item in working condition whether specifically
mentioned or not in the Schedule of Quantities, specifications, and drawings.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 11 OF 46
Accessories shall include proper fixing arrangement, brackets, nuts, bolts,

washers, screws and required connection pieces.
7.4.3
Fixing screws shall be half round head chromium plated (CP) brass screws,
with CP brass washers unless otherwise specified.
7.4.4
Porcelain sanitary ware shall be glazed vitreous china of first quality free from
warps, cracks and glazing defects conforming to IS: 2556. The choice of the
colour of the Sanitary ware shall be that of the Engineer and nothing extra shall
be payable to the Contractor for fixing of Sanitary ware of any colour.
7.4.5
Sinks for kitchen shall be of stainless steel or as specified in the Schedule of

Quantities.
7.4.6
Chromium plated fittings shall be cast brass chromium plated of the best
quality approved by the Engineer.
7.4.7
All appliances, fittings and fixtures shall be fixed in a neat workmanlike manner
true to level and to heights shown on the drawings and in accordance with the
manufacturer recommendations. Care shall be taken to fix all inlet and outlet
pipes at correct positions. Faulty locations shall be made good and any
damage to the finished floor, tiling, plaster, paint, insulation or terrace shall be
made good by the Contractor at his own cost.
7.4.8
All materials shall be rust proofed; materials in direct or indirect contact shall
be compatible to prevent electrolytic or chemical (bimetallic) corrosion.
7.4.9
Sanitary appliances, subject to the type of appliance and specific requirements,

shall be fixed in accordance with the relevant standards and the following:
a) Contractor shall, during the entire period of installation and afterwards

protect the appliances by providing suitable cover or any other protection in
order to absolutely prevent any damage to the appliances until handing
over. (The original protective wrapping shall be left in position for as long
as possible).
b) The appliance shall be placed in correct position or marked out in order

that pipe work can be fixed or partially fixed first.
c) The appliance shall be fixed in a manner such that it will facilitate

subsequent removal if necessary.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 12 OF 46
d) All appliances shall be securely fixed. Manufacturers' brackets and fixing

methods shall be used wherever possible. Compatible rust proofed fixings
shall be used. Fixing shall be done in a manner that minimises noise
transmission.
e) Appliances shall not be bedded (e.g. WC pans, pedestal units) in thick

strong mortar that could crack the unit (e.g. a ceramic unit).
f) Pipe connections shall be made with de-mountable unions. Pipe work shall
not be fixed in a manner that it supports or partially supports an appliance.
g) Appliances shall be fixed so that water falls to the outlet (e.g. baths).
h) Appliances shall be fixed true to level firmly fixed to anchor or supports
provided by the manufacturer and additional anchors or supports where
necessary.
7.4.10
Sizes of Sanitary fixtures given in the Specifications or in the Schedule of

Quantities are for identification with reference to the catalogues of makes
considered. Dimensions of similar models of other makes may vary within
+10% and the same shall be provided and no claim for extra payment shall be
entertained nor shall any payment be deducted on this account.
7.5
Squatting type Water Closet - Orissa pattern
7.5.1
Squatting type water closet (WC) pan shall be of Orissa pattern of size as
specified in Schedule of Quantities. Each WC pan shall be provided with a
100mm dia cast iron or porcelain P or S trap with or without vent horn as
directed by the Engineer.
7.5.2
WC shall be flushed by means of concealed type or exposed type (as detailed

in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge) 32mm size CP brass
flush valve with regulator valve.
7.6
Wash-down Water Closet
7.6.1
WC shall be wash down or siphonic wash down type floor or wall mounted set,
as shown in the drawings, designed for low volume flushing from 5-7 litres of
water, flushed by means of a porcelain flushing cistern or an exposed or
concealed type (as detailed in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer)
32 mm size CP brass flush valve with regulator valve. Flush pipe/

SECTION : D9
SHEET 13 OF 46
bend shall be connected to the WC by means of a suitable rubber adaptor.

Wall hung WC shall be supported by C.I. floor mounted chair which shall be
fixed in a manner as approved by the Engineer.
7.6.2
Each WC set shall be provided with a solid plastic seat, rubber buffers and
chromium plated hinges. Plastic seat shall be so fixed that it remains
absolutely stationary in vertical position without falling down on the WC.
7.6.3
Each WC set shall be provided with a fixed type CP brass ablution jet, if called
for in schedule of quantities, complete with CP/ plastic piping, concealed type
CP brass angle cock etc. all of approved make and brand. The nozzle of the
ablution jet and its holding down plate shall have smooth and rounded edges
and shall not be capable of causing any injury to a user or cleaner.
7.7
Universal type Water Closet
7.7.1
Universal type water closet shall be wash down or siphonic type floor mounted
porcelain ware flushed by means of a porcelain flushing cistern or an exposed
or concealed type (as detailed in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer)
32 mm size CP brass flush valve with regulator valve. Flush pipe/ bend shall be
connected to the WC by means of a suitable rubber adaptor.
7.7.2
Each WC set shall be provided with a solid plastic seat, rubber buffers and
chromium plated hinges. Plastic seat shall be so fixed that it remains
absolutely stationary in vertical position without falling down on the WC.
7.7.3
Clause 0 shall apply.
7.8
Urinals
7.8.1
Urinals shall be lipped type half stall white glazed vitreous china of size as
called for in the Schedule of Quantities.
7.8.2
Half stall urinals shall be provided with 15mm dia CP spreader, 32mm dia CP
domical waste and CP cast brass bottle trap with pipe and wall flange and shall
be fixed to wall by C.I. brackets, C.I. wall clips and CP brass screws as
recommended by manufacturer complete as directed by the Engineer.
7.8.3
Flushing for urinals shall be by means of no hand operation, PVC Flushing

cistern with all internal fittings, mounted on a C.I. brackets, and painted with
two coats of approved paint of approved shade and confirming to IS: 2326.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 14 OF 46
7.8.4
Flush pipes shall be GI pipes concealed in wall chase but with chromium plated
bends at inlet and outlet or as given in Schedule of Quantities. These shall be
measured and paid for separately.
7.8.5
GI waste pipes shall be provided for urinals. Waste pipes may be exposed on
wall or concealed in chase as directed by the Engineer. These shall be
measured and paid for separately.
7.9
Urinal partitions
7.9.1
Urinal partitions shall be white glazed vitreous china of size specified in the
Schedule of Quantities.
7.9.2
Porcelain partitions shall be fixed at proper heights with CP brass bolts, anchor
fasteners and MS clips as recommended by the manufacturer and directed by
the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.10
Wash basin
7.10.1
Wash basins shall be white glazed vitreous china of size, shape and type
specified in the Schedule of Quantities.
7.10.2
Each basin shall be provided with painted MS angle or C.I. brackets and clips
and the basin securely fixed to wall. Placing of basins over the brackets without
secure fixing shall not be accepted. The MS angle shall be provided with two
coats of red oxide primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of make,
brand and colour as approved by the Engineer.
7.10.3
Each basin shall be provided with 32mm dia CP waste with overflow, pop-up
waste or rubber plug and CP brass chain as specified in the Schedule of
Quantities, 32mm dia CP brass bottle trap with CP pipe to wall flange.
7.10.4
Wash basin shall be provided with hot and cold water mixing fitting or as
specified in the Schedule of Quantities.
7.10.5
Basins shall be fixed at proper heights as shown on drawings. If height is not

specified, the rim level shall be 790mm from finished floor level or as directed
by the Engineer.
7.11
Sinks

SECTION : D9
SHEET 15 OF 46
7.11.1
Sinks shall be stainless steel or any other material as specified in the Schedule
of Quantities.
7.11.2
Each sink shall be provided with painted MS or C.I. brackets and clips and
securely fixed. Counter top sinks shall be fixed with suitable painted angle iron
brackets or clips as recommended by the manufacturer. Each sink shall be
provided with 40mm dia CP waste and rubber plug with CP brass chain as
given in the Schedule of Quantities. The MS angle shall be provided with two
coats of red oxide primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of make,
brand and colour as approved by the Engineer.
7.11.3
Supply fittings for sinks shall be deck mounted CP swivel faucets with or
without hot and cold water mixing fittings as specified in the Schedule of
Quantities. These shall be measured and paid for separately.
7.12
Mirrors
7.12.1
Mirrors shall be electro coated, 6.0 mm thick glass of approved make, plane or
bevelled edge. The size shall be as specified in the Schedule of Quantities or
as shown on the drawings. The image shall be clear and without waviness at
all angles of vision.
7.12.2
Mirrors shall be provided with backing of 12 mm thick marine plywood, fixed

with CP brass semi-round headed screws and cup washers or CP brass
clamps as specified or instructed by Engineer.
7.113
Shower Set
7.13.1
Shower set shall comprise of two CP brass concealed stop cocks, four/ five
way auto-diverter, adjustable type overhead shower, all with CP wall flanges of
approved quality all as specified in the Schedule of Quantities. Bath spout,
hand showers and pop up wastes shall also be provided wherever specified.
7.13.2
Wall flange shall be kept clear off the finished wall. Wall flanges embedded in
the finishing shall not be accepted.
7.14
Toilet Paper Holder
7.14.1
Toilet paper holder shall be white glazed vitreous china of size, shape and type
specified in the Schedule of Quantities or of stainless steel/powder coated
brass.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 16 OF 46
7.14.2
Porcelain toilet paper holder shall be fixed in walls and set in cement mortar
1:2 (1 cement: 2coarse sand) and fixed in relation to the tiling work.
7.14.3
The latter shall be fixed by means of crews/capping having finish similar to the
toilet paper holder in wall/ timber partitions with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves.
When fixed on timber partition, it shall be fixed on a solid wooden base ember
provided by the Engineer-in-Charge through another agency.
7.15
Towel Rail
7.15.1
Towel rail shall be chromium plated brass or of stainless steel or powder

coated brass of size, shape and type specified in the Schedule of Quantities.
7.15.2
Towel rail shall be fixed with screws/capping having finish similar to the towel
rail in wall with rawl plugs or nylon sleeves and shall include cutting and
making good as required or directed by the Engineer.
7.16
Liquid Soap Dispenser
7.16.1
Liquid Soap dispenser shall be wall/ counter mounted suitable for dispensing
liquid soaps, lotions, detergents.
7.16.2
Liquid soap dispenser shall be with C.P. brass bracket, caps etc. fixed to wall
with C.P. brass screws, and screwed onto wooden rawl plug. The container
shall be of C.P. brass.
7.17
Drinking water fountain
7.17.1
Drinking water fountain shall be wall mounting type made of vitreous china,
stainless steel or any other material as given in the Schedule of Quantities.
7.17.2
The drinking water fountain shall be with anti-squirt bubble less, self closing
valve type with automatic volume regulator.
7.17.3
The drinking water fountain shall be provided with an anti-splash back and
integral strainer with 32mm or 40mm cast brass trap.
7.18
Hand Drier
7.18.1
The hand drier shall be no touch operating type with solid state time delay to
allow user to keep hand in any position.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 17 OF 46
7.18.2
The hand drier shall be fully hygienic, rated for continuous repeat use (CRU).
7.18.3
The rating of hand drier shall be such that time required to dry a pair of hands
up to wrists is approximately 30 seconds.
7.18.4
The hand drier shall be of wall mounting type suitable for 230 V, single phase,
50 Hz, ac power supply.
7.19
Measurement and rates
7.19.1
Sanitary fixtures (Porcelain ware and CP fittings) shall be measured by

numbers.
7.19.2
Rate for providing and fixing of sanitary fixtures, accessories, shall include all
items, and operations stated in the respective specifications and Schedule of
Quantities and nothing extra is payable.
7.19.3
Rates for all items under specification Clauses above shall be inclusive of
cutting holes and chases and making good the same, CP brass screws, nuts,
bolts and any other fixing arrangements required and recommended by
manufacturers, testing and commissioning etc. complete.
8.0
SOIL, WASTE, VENT AND RAINWATER PIPES
8.1
Scope of Work
All soil, waste and storm water disposal for the portion above ground level to
the public sewers shall be by gravity whereas from the basements it shall be by
pumping. Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the soil, waste,
vent and rain water pipes system shall inter-alia include the following:
a) Vertical and horizontal soil, waste, vent and rainwater pipes and fittings,
joints, clamps and connections to fixtures.
b) Connection of all pipes to sewer lines as shown on the drawings at ground

level.
c) Floor and urinal traps, clean out plugs, inlet fittings and rainwater (roof)
outlets.
d) Testing of all pipes and fittings in the workshop.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 18 OF 46
e) Testing of all pipes lines after installation.

8.2
General requirements
8.2.1
Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required
in a neat workmanlike manner.
8.2.2
Pipes shall be fixed in a manner so as to provide easy accessibility for repair

and maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.
8.2.3
Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls, and ceilings by suitable clamps at

intervals specified. Only approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used for
fixing pipes on RCC ceilings and RCC/ masonry walls.
8.2.4
Access doors for fittings and clean outs shall be so located that they are easily
accessible for repair and maintenance.
8.2.5
Short or long bends shall be used on all main pipelines as far as possible. Use
of elbows shall be restricted for short connections.
8.2.6
Wherever piping is going across the separation/expansion joints of buildings,

piping shall be provided with flexible connectors on both sides of such joints or
on single side depending on whether any wall is to be crossed or not.
8.3
Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings
8.3.1
Soil, waste, vent and anti-siphonage pipes, fittings and accessories shall be
cast iron pipes. All pipes shall be straight and smooth and their inside free from
irregular bore, blow holes, crack sand other manufacturing defects. Pipes shall
be centrifugally cast (spun) iron soil pipes conforming to IS: 3989 or sand cast
to IS: 1729.
8.3.2
Lead as per IS: 782 shall be used in the joints and caulked to a depth not less
than that given in IS: 3114.
8.3.3
Fittings
a) Fittings shall conform to the same Indian Standard as for pipes. Contractor
shall use pipes and fittings of matching specifications.
b) Fittings shall be of the required degree of curvature with or without access

door as detailed in the drawings or as directed.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 19 OF 46
c) Access door shall be made up with 3mm thick insertion rubber washer and
white lead. The bolts shall be lubricated with grease or white lead for easy
removal later. The fixing shall be air and water tight.
8.3.4
Fixing
a) All vertical pipes shall be fixed by MS clamps truly vertical. Branch pipes
shall be connected to the stack at the same angle as that of the fittings. No
collars shall be used on vertical stacks. Each stack shall be terminated at
top with a cowl (terminal guard).
b) Horizontal pipes running along ceiling shall be fixed on structural adjustable

clamps of special design shown on the drawings or as directed. Horizontal
pipes shall be laid to uniform slope and the clamps adjusted to the proper
levels so that the pipes fully rest on them.
c) Contractor shall provide all sleeves, openings, hangers, inserts during the
construction. He shall provide all necessary information to the building
Contractor for making such provisions in the structure as necessary. All
damages shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost to restore
the surfaces.
8.3.5
Clamps
a) Holder bat clamps shall be of standard design fabricated from MS flats

40x3mm thick and 12 mm dia MS rod and 6mm nuts and bolts; painted with
two coats of black bitumen paint before fixing. The clamps shall be fixed in
cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 sand: 4 stone aggregate 20mm
nominal size) blocks 100x100x100 mm deep.
b) Where holder bat clamps are to be fixed in RCC column or slotted angles,
walls or beam they shall be fixed with 40x3 mm flat iron "U" type clamps
with anchor fasteners of approved design.
c) Structural clamps shall be fabricated from MS structural members e.g.

rods, angles, channels, flats as per detailed drawing or as directed.
Contractor shall provide all nuts, bolts, welding material and paint the
clamps with one coat of red oxide and two or more coats of black enamel
paint to give an even shade.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 20 OF 46
d) Slotted angle/ channel supports on walls shall be provided wherever shown

on drawings. Angles/ channels/ bolts shall be of sizes shown on drawings
or specified in Schedule of Quantities. Angles/ channels shall be fixed to
brick walls with bolts embedded in cement concrete blocks of 1:2:4 mix
(1cement: 2sand: 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and to RCC
walls with suitable anchor fasteners as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The spacing of support bolts horizontally shall not exceed 1 m.
e) Wherever MS clamps are required to be anchored directly to brick walls,

concrete slabs, beams or columns, nothing extra shall be payable for
clamping arrangement, RCC block and making good with.
f) Cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 sand: 4 stone aggregate 20 mm

nominal size) as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.3.6
Traps
a) Cast iron "P" siphon traps

Cast iron "P" siphon traps shall be cast iron trap of self cleaning design.
The trap and waste pipes shall be set in cement concrete blocks of size
300 mm x 300 mm and of required depth, firmly supported on the structural
floor. The blocks shall be in 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and extended to 40mm below finished floor
level. Contractor shall provide all necessary shuttering and centring for the
blocks at no extra cost.
b) Urinal traps
Urinal traps shall be cast iron P or S traps with or without vent and set in
cement concrete block specified under clause 0 a).
c) Floor trap inlet

Floor trap shall be C.I. floor trap as per IS: 3989. Bath room traps and
connections shall ensure free and silent flow of discharging water. Where
specified, Contractor shall provide a special type cast iron inlet hopper
without or with one or two or three inlet sockets to receive the waste pipe.
Joint between waste and hopper inlet socket shall be lead caulked. Hopper
shall be connected to a C.I. P or S trap with at least 50mm seal (hopper
and traps shall be paid for separately). Floor trap inlet hoppers and the

SECTION : D9
SHEET 21 OF 46
traps shall be set in cement concrete blocks as specified under clause 0

above without extra charge.
d) Cockroach trap
Floor/ urinal traps shall be provided with 100-150 mm square or round
stainless steel cockroach trap assembly complete with ring, outer cup,
inner cup, jali etc. of an approved make.
8.3.7
Wire Balloons/ gratings for rain water pipes
a) The wire balloons and the domical gratings shall conform to IS: 1729. The
wire balloons shall be of galvanised steel. The C.I. domical gratings for the
roof outlet shall be minimum 13 mm thick.
b) Leaf and Gravel grates along with a perforated ring shall be made out of
M.S. flat/ bars of a design and dimension as shown in the drawing or as
directed by the Engineer. These shall be painted with epoxy paint with a
DFT of 200 microns.
8.4
Jointing
8.4.1
Soil, waste, vent, anti-siphonage and rain water pipes shall be jointed with
refined pig lead conforming to IS: 782. Sufficient skein of jute rope shall be
caulked to leave a minimum space for the pig lead to be poured in. After the
pouring, the lead shall be caulked into the joint with caulking tool and hammer.
All surplus lead shall be cut and joint neatly finished flush with the rim of the
socket.
8.4.2
The following minimum procedures shall be complied with while making the
pipe joints:
a) Ensure that the pipes are clean internally and undamaged.

b) The pipes shall be cut square with sharp tools.
c) The cut ends of the pipes shall be filed/ reamed and finished smooth.
d) Any deformed ends shall be re-rounded.
e) It shall be ensured that the pipe ends shall enter the fittings and sockets to
full depth of the jointing area.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 22 OF 46
f) The pipe work shall be assembled in a manner such that it does not entail
making of joints in restricted locations.
g) Each metal pipe spigot shall be centred with three lightly wedged pieces of
hardwood or folded lead.
h) The jointing surfaces shall be cleaned to remove any coatings or cutting

oils, etc.
8.5
Clean out plugs

Contractor shall provide cast brass clean out plugs as required. Clean out
plugs shall be threaded and provided with keyholes for opening. Clean out
plugs shall be fixed to the pipe by a GI socket and lead caulked joint.
8.6
Waste pipe from appliances
8.6.1
Waste pipe from appliances e.g. washbasins, baths, sinks and urinals etc.
shall be of Galvanized iron or as given in the Schedule of Quantities.
8.6.2
All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the outfalls of drains. Pipes inside a
toilet room shall be in chase unless otherwise shown on drawings. Where
required pipes may be run at ceiling level in suitable gradient and supported on
structural clamps as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Spacing for the
clamps shall be 3000 mm for vertical runs and 2400 mm for horizontal runs.
8.6.3
Galvanized pipes
Pipes shall be galvanized steel tubes conforming to IS: 1239 (Heavy Class)
and quality certificates shall be furnished. Pipes shall be provided with all
required malleable fittings conforming to IS: 1879 e.g., tees, couplings, bends,
elbows, unions, reducers, nipples, plugs etc. All GI waste pipes shall be
terminated at the point of connection with the appliance with an outlet of
suitable diameter. Pipes shall be painted as specified under Clause 0.
8.7
Rainwater Pipes
All rainwater pipes shall be of PVC conforming to IS: 4985 and 6 kg/sqcm.
Pressure rating or as specified in the Schedule of quantities.
8.8
Cast iron pipes for drainage

SECTION : D9
SHEET 23 OF 46
8.8.1
All drainage lines passing under building, floors, in exposed position above
ground e.g., basement ceiling shall be cast iron pipes. Position of such pipes
shall generally be shown on the drawings.
8.8.2
Cast iron pipes shall be centrifugally spun iron pipes conforming to IS: 1536 or
sand cast conforming to IS: 1729. Quality certificates shall be furnished.
8.8.3
Fittings
a) Fittings used for C.I. drainage pipe shall conform to IS: 1538. Wherever
possible junction from branch pipes shall be made by a Y tee.
b) Clean out plugs shall be provided on head of each drain and at location
indicated on plans or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Clean out plugs
shall be of size matching the full bore of the pipe. Plugs shall be made out
with GI coupling caulked into the socket of the pipe or fittings. The end
shall be provided with a brass screwed plug with suitable key for opening.
8.8.4
Laying
a) All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be jointed with best quality soft pig lead
(conforming to IS: 27) which shall be free from impurities. In wet trenches
joints shall be made from lead wool. Nothing extra shall be paid for lead
wool joints. Depth of pig lead and weight for joints shall be as per the
relevant IS code.
b) The spigot of pipe or fittings shall be centred in the adjoining socket by

caulking. Sufficient turns of tarred gaskin shall be given to leave unfilled the
required depth of socket for depth of 45 mm when the gaskin has been
caulked tightly home. Joining ring shall be placed round the barrel and
against the face of the socket. Molten pig lead shall then be poured to fill
the remainder of the socket. This shall be done in one pouring. The lead
shall then be solidly caulked with suitable tools and hammers weighing not
less than 2 kg.
c) For lead wool joints the socket shall be caulked with tarred gaskin, as
explained above. The lead wool shall be inserted into the sockets and
tightly caulked home, skein by skein, with suitable tools and hammers of
not less than 2 kg weight until joint is filled.
8.8.5
Cement Concrete Encasing

SECTION : D9
SHEET 24 OF 46
Cast iron soil and waste pipes under floor finish in sunken slabs and in wall
chases (when cut specially for the pipe) shall be encased in cement concrete
1:2:4 mix (1 cement :2 coarse sand :4stone aggregate 12mm size) 75mm in
bed and all around. When pipes are running well above the structural slab, the
encased pipes shall be supported with suitable cement concrete pillars, the
details of which shall be furnished by the Engineer of required height at
intervals of 1.8m. Rate for concrete all around pipes shall be inclusive of pillars,
supports, shuttering and centring.
8.9
Painting
8.9.1
Soil, waste, vent, anti-siphonage and rain water pipes in any exposed location
in shafts, pipe spaces etc. shall be painted with two coats of primer and two or
more coats of synthetic enamel paint of colour as specified to give an even
shade.
8.9.2
Pipes shall be painted with paint of approved quality and shade in accordance
with approved pipe colour code.
8.9.3
GI waste pipes in chase shall be painted with two coats of bitumen paint.
Exposed pipes shall be painted with two or more coats of synthetic enamel
paint over two coats of etch primer.
8.9.4
C.I. soil and waste pipes below ground and those covered in cement concrete
shall not be painted.
8.10
Cutting and making good holes/ chases

Pipes shall be fixed and tested as the building work proceeds. Contractor shall
provide all necessary holes, cut outs and chases in structural members as the
building work proceeds. Wherever holes are cut or left originally, they shall be
made good with cement concrete 1:1:2 (1 cement: 1coarse sand :2 stone
aggregate 20 mm nominal size) or cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement :2 coarse
sand) as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and the surface restored as in
original condition to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer at no extra cost.
8.11
Testing
8.11.1
Testing shall be done in accordance with IS: 1172 and IS: 5329 except as may
be modified herein under.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 25 OF 46
8.11.2
Before use at site all C.I. pipes shall be tested by filling up with water for at
least 30 minutes. After filling, pipes shall be struck with a hammer and
inspected for blow holes and cracks. All defective pipes shall be rejected and
removed from the site within 48 hours. Pipes with minor sweating may be
accepted at the discretion of the Engineer.
8.11.3
Soil and waste pipes shall be tested in sections after installation, by filling up
the stack with water. All openings and connections shall be suitably plugged as
approved by the Engineer. The total head in the stack shall be 4.5m at the
highest point of the section under test. A tolerance of 2 litres/cm of
diameter/km of pipeline measured during the last ten minutes of the period of
test shall be allowed. The period of test shall be as directed by the Engineer. If
any leakage is visible, the defective part of the work shall be cut out and made
good. A slight amount of sweating which is uniform may be allowed but
excessive sweating from a particular pipe or joint shall be watched and shall be
construed to be a defect and shall be made good.
8.11.4
The Contractor shall test all vent pipes by a smoke testing machine. Smoke
shall be pumped into the stack after plugging all inlets and connections and
filling water in all trap seals. The test shall be conducted under a pressure of
25 mm of water and shall be maintained for 15 minutes. The stack shall then
be observed for leakages and all defective pipes and fittings removed or
repaired as directed by the Engineer.
8.11.5
A test register shall be maintained and all entries signed and dated by
Contractor and Engineer-in-Charge. A pro-forma of the proposed test register
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
8.11.6
All pipes in wall chase or meant to be encased or buried shall be hydro tested
before the chase is plastered or the pipe encased or buried.
8.12
8.12.1
General
a) Rates for all items shall be inclusive of all work and items called for in the
specifications given above and the Schedule of Quantities as applicable for
the work under floors, in shafts or at ceiling level at all heights and depths.
b) All rates are inclusive of cutting holes and chases in RCC and masonry
work and making good the same.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 26 OF 46
c) All rates are inclusive of shop testing, pre-testing at site and final testing of
the installations, materials and commissioning.
8.12.2
Pipes
a) The unit of measurement shall be linear metre to the nearest centimetre.

b) All C.I. soil, waste, vent, anti-siphonage and rain water pipes shall be
measured net, correct to a centimetre, including all fittings along their
length after fixing. The length shall be taken along centre line of the pipes
and fittings. No allowance shall be made for the portions of pipe lengths
entering the sockets of the adjacent pipes or fittings. The above shall apply
to all cases i.e. whether pipes are fixed on wall face or pillars or embedded
in masonry or pipes running at ceiling level. The quoted rate shall include
lead jointing.
c) GI pipes shall be measured in running metre correct to a centimetre for the

finished work which shall include fittings e.g. bends, tees, elbows, reducers,
crosses, sockets, nipples, nuts, unions etc. The length shall be taken along
centre line of the pipes and fittings. All pipes and fittings shall be classified
according to their diameter, method of jointing and fixing substance, quality
and finish. The diameters shall be nominal diameter of internal bore. In
case of fittings of unequal bore, the largest bore shall be considered.
8.12.3
Pipe Encasing/ supports

Cement concrete around pipes shall be measured along the centre of the pipe
line measured per linear metre and include any masonry supports, shuttering
and centring, curing, cutting etc., complete as described in the relevant
specifications.
8.12.4
Angles/ channels
Slotted angles/ channels shall be measured per linear metre of finished length
and shall include support bolts and nuts, length embedded in the cement
concrete blocks of 1:2:4 (1cement: 2 coarse sand:4 stone aggregate 20mm
nominal size) formed in the masonry walls; nothing extra shall be paid for the
cement concrete block and making good the masonry wall, anchor fasteners
etc., complete.
8.12.5
Traps

SECTION : D9
SHEET 27 OF 46
Unit of measurement shall be the number of pieces. All urinal traps, trap
gratings, hoppers, clean out plugs shall be measured by number and shall
include all items described in the relevant specifications and Schedule of
Quantities. Cockroach traps shall not be measured separately and are deemed
to be included in the rate for Traps.
8.12.6
Painting
Painting of pipes shall be measured per running metre for each diameter of
pipe and shall be inclusive of all fittings and clamps. No deduction shall be
made for fittings.
8.12.7
Excavation for soil pipes

No extra payment shall be admissible for excavation, dewatering, back filling,
consolidation and disposal of surplus earth for soil and waste pipes.
8.12.8
Wire balloons/Gratings for rain water pipes
a) Wire balloons/gratings for rainwater pipes shall be measured by numbers

for different sizes.
b) Leaf and gravel grates along with the perforated ring shall be measured in
kg.
9.0
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
9.1
Scope of Work
The water supply system shall inter-alia include the following:
a) Distribution system from main supply or overhead tank to all fixtures and
appliances for cold and hot water.
b) Insulation for hot water pipes

c) Pipe protection and painting.
d) Control valves, masonry chambers and other appurtenances.
e) Connections to all plumbing fixtures, tanks, appliances and municipal
mains

SECTION : D9
SHEET 28 OF 46
f) Inserts, nozzles for R.C.C. tanks

g) The term water supply is used as indicative of all water supply work
required and necessary for the building including such external work as
may be necessary to make the system functional.
9.2
General Requirements
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
If necessary and if approved by the Engineer, where unavoidable, bends may

be formed by means of a hydraulic pipe bending machine for pipes up to
20mm dia. No bending shall be done for pipes of 25mm dia and above. After
bending zinc rich paint shall be applied wherever the zinc coating is damaged.
9.2.7
Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located as to provide easy

accessibility for operations, maintenance and repairs. Valves shall be located
at a height not exceeding 1.6 m above their operating floor/ platform level.
Where such a provision is not possible and the valve is to be frequently
operated a MS chain shall be provided for its operation.
9.2.8
9.3
GI pipes, Fittings and Valves
9.3.1
All pipes inside the buildings and where specified, outside the building shall be
M.S. galvanized steel tubes conforming to IS: 1239 of Class specified. When
Class is not specified they shall be Heavy Class.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 29 OF 46
9.3.2
Fittings shall be of malleable cast iron galvanized, of approved make. Each

fitting shall have manufacturer's trade mark stamped on it. Fittings for GI pipes
shall include couplings, bends, tees, reducers, nipples, unions, bushes etc.
Fittings etc. shall conform to IS: 1879.
9.3.3
Pipes and fittings shall be jointed with screwed joints using Teflon tape suitable
for water pipes. Care shall be taken to remove burr from the end of the pipe
after cutting by a round file. All pipes shall be fixed in accordance with layout
and alignment shown on the drawings. Care shall be taken to avoid air
pockets. Necessary vents and drains shall be provided at all high and low
points respectively. GI pipes inside toilets shall be fixed in wall chases well
above the floor. No pipes shall be run inside a sunken floor as far as possible.
Pipes may be run under the ceiling or floors and other areas as shown on
drawings. All pipe joints after testing of the line shall be seal welded and the
weld plus the adjoining portion shall be given two coats of zinc rich primer.
9.3.4
Bib Cocks and Stop Cocks

All bib cocks and stop cocks shall be of C.P. brass conforming to IS: 781 of
tested quality and approved make and design, of diameter as specified in
schedule of quantities.
9.3.5
Clamps
GI pipes in shafts and other locations shall be supported by GI clamps of
design approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Pipes in wall chases shall be
anchored by iron hooks. Pipes at ceiling level shall be supported on structural
clamps fabricated from MS structural as described in Clause 0. Pipes in shafts
shall be supported on slotted angles/ channels as specified/ as directed.
9.3.6
Unions
Contractor shall provide adequate number of unions on all pipes to enable
easy dismantling later when required. Unions shall be provided near each
gunmetal valve, stop cock or check valve and on straight runs as necessary at
appropriate locations as required for easy dismantling and/ or as directed by
the Engineer.
9.3.7
Flanges
Flanged connections shall be provided on pipes as required for maintenance/
ease in dismantling or where shown on the drawings, all equipment

SECTION : D9
SHEET 30 OF 46
connections as necessary and required or as directed by the Engineer.

Connections shall be made by the correct number and size of the GI nuts/ bolts
as per relevant IS Standards and made with 3mm thick insertion rubber
washer/gasket. Where hot water or steam connections are made insertion
gasket shall be of suitable high temperature grade and quality approved by the
Engineer. Bolt hole dia for flanges shall conform to match the specification for
C.I. sluice valve as per IS: 780. Gaskets shall conform to IS: 11149.
9.3.8
Trenches
All GI pipes below ground shall be laid in trenches with a minimum cover of
600mm. The width and depth of the trenches shall be as follows except at
places where welding/ jointing etc. needs larger width of trench. Additional
width/ depth shall be provided as necessary for welding/ jointing etc. at no
additional cost:
9.3.9
Diameter of pipe
Width of trench
Depth of trench
15 mm to 50 mm
300 mm
750 mm
65 mm to 100 mm
450 mm
1000 mm
Sand Filling
GI pipes in trenches shall be protected with fine sand 150 mm all around
before filling in the trenches.
9.3.10
Painting
a) All pipes above ground shall be painted with one coat of red lead and two
coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved shade and quality to give an
even shade, or as specified by the Engineer.
b) Hot water pipes in chase:

All hot water pipes fixed in wall chase shall be painted with two coats of
bitumen paint and no insulation shall be provided.
9.3.11
Pipe Protection

SECTION : D9
SHEET 31 OF 46
Where specified, pipes below floor or below ground shall be protected against
corrosion by the application of two or more coats of solvent based rubberised
asphaltic primer to give a uniform coat covered with 'Pipecoat Hiper', a
puncture resistant non woven polyester mat. The application of pipecoat primer
and "Hiper" membrane shall be as specified by the manufacturer.
9.4
Gunmetal Valves
9.4.1
Valves 65mm dia and below shall be heavy gunmetal full way valves or globe
valves conforming to Class I of IS: 778. Valves shall be tested at
manufacturer's works and the same stamped on it.
9.4.2
All valves shall be approved by the Engineer before they are allowed to be
used in the Work.
9.5
Sluice Valves
9.5.1
Unless otherwise specified all valves 80mm dia and above shall be C.I. double
flanged sluice valves with non rising spindle. Sluice valves shall be provided
with wheel when they are in exposed positions and with a cap top when they
are located underground. Contractor shall provide suitable operating keys for
sluice valves with cap tops.
9.5.2
Sluice valves shall be of approved makes conforming to IS: 780 of Class as

specified.
9.6
Butterfly Valves
9.6.1
Where specified Valves 80mm dia and above shall be cast iron butterfly valve
to be used for isolation and/ or flow regulation as directed by the Engineer-inCharge. The valves shall be tight shutoff/ regulatory type with resilient seat
suitable for flow in either direction and seal in both directions.
9.6.2
Butterfly valve shall conform to IS: 13095.
9.7
Non Return Valve

Where specified non return valve (swing check type) shall be provided through
which flow can occur in one direction only. It shall be single door swing check
type of best quality conforming to IS: 5312.
9.8
Testing

SECTION : D9
SHEET 32 OF 46
9.8.1
All pipes, fittings and valves shall be tested in accordance with IS: 2065 except
as may be modified herein under. All pipes, fittings and valves, after fixing at
site, shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 5 kg/sqcm or 1.5 times the
shut off head of the pump whichever is greater.
9.8.2
The test pressure shall be maintained for a period of at least thirty minutes
without any drop in pressure.
9.8.3
A test register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed and dated by
Contractor(s) and the Engineer.
9.8.4
After commissioning of the water supply system, the Contractor shall test each
valve by closing and opening it a number of times to observe if it is working
efficiently and effectively. Valves which do not operate efficiently and
effectively shall be replaced by new ones at no extra cost and the same shall
be tested as above.
9.8.5
All pipes in wall chase or meant to be encased or buried shall be hydro tested
before the chase is plastered or the pipe encased or buried.
9.9
Insulation
9.9.1
All open hot water flow and return pipes (not in chase), shall be insulated with
preformed fibrous pipe sections conforming to IS: 9842.
9.9.2
Insulation to pipes shall be with pre-moulded pipe sections, thickness for

sections shall be:
a) Pipe 50 mm dia and below - 25 mm thick

b) Pipe 65 mm dia and above - 40 mm thick
9.9.3
Application
a) All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush.

b) One layer of approved primer shall be applied and pre-moulded pipe
insulation sections shall be fixed.
c) One layer of aluminium foil of thickness 0.711 mm (20 SWG), shall be

applied as a finish layer.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 33 OF 46
9.9.4
Insulation for hot water pipes in chase:

All hot water pipes fixed in wall chase shall be painted with two coats of
bitumen paint of approved make.
9.10
Sterilization of installation
The water supply installation shall be sterilized as per standards and as
follows:
a) Tanks and pipes shall be filled and flushed out.

b) All bib cocks (taps) shall be closed.
c) Tanks and pipes shall be re-filled while adding sterilizing admixture
containing 50 parts chlorine to one million parts water.
d) When the installation is filled all bib cocks (taps) shall be opened
progressively and each allowed to run until the water smells of chlorine.
e) The installation shall be topped up and more sterilizer added.

f) The installation shall then be left for three hours and shall then be tested
for residual chlorine; if none is found, the installation shall be drained and
the process repeated.
g) The installation shall be finally drained and flushed with potable water
before use.
9.11
9.11.1
GI Pipes
a) GI pipes above ground shall be measured per linear metre (to the nearest
cm) along the centre line of the pipe and shall be inclusive of all fittings e.g.
couplings, tees, bends, elbows, unions, flanges, etc. Deduction for valves
shall be made. Rates quoted shall be inclusive of all fittings, clamps, cutting
holes chases and making good the same and all other items mentioned in
the specifications and Schedule of Quantities.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 34 OF 46
b) GI pipes below ground shall be measured per linear metre (to the nearest
cm) along the centre line of the pipe and shall be inclusive of all fittings e.g.
couplings, tees, bends, elbows, unions and flanges, etc. Deduction for
valves shall be made. Rates quoted shall be inclusive of all fittings, cutting
holes and chases and making good the same and all other items
mentioned in the specifications and Schedule of Quantities. Excavation,
filling, back filling with selected excavated earth, compaction and disposal
of surplus earth, fine sand filling around GI pipes, in external work shall be
measured separately, as per respective items.
9.11.2
Valves, Bib Cocks and Stop Cocks

Gunmetal and cast iron valves, Bib cocks and stop cocks shall be measured by
numbers.
9.11.3
Flanges for Nozzles
a) Flanges for nozzles shall be measured by numbers and the quoted rate
shall include welding of the flanges to the pipe nozzles.
b) Painting/ pipe protection/ insulation

Unless otherwise specified painting/ pipe protection/ insulation for pipes shall
be measured and paid for separately. These shall be measured per linear
metre along the centre line of the pipe, over the finished surface and shall
include all valves and fittings for which no deduction shall be made.
10.0
DRAINAGE
10.1
Scope of Work
10.1.1
Clause 0 shall apply to the extent applicable.
10.1.2
Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the drainage system shall
inter-alia include:
a) Sewer lines including earthwork for excavation, disposal, backfilling and

compaction, pipelines, manholes, drop connections and connections to the
municipal or existing sewer.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 35 OF 46
b) Storm water drainage, earth works for excavation, disposal, backfilling and
compaction, pipe lines, manholes, catch basins and connections to the
existing municipal storm water drain or connected as indicated by the
Engineer.
10.2
General Requirements
10.2.1
10.2.2
Drainage lines and open drains shall be laid to the required gradients and
profiles.
10.2.3
All drainage work shall be done in accordance with the Local municipal byelaws.
10.2.4
Contractor shall obtain necessary approval and permission for the drainage
system from the municipal or any other competent Authority.
10.2.5
Location of all manholes, etc. shall be got confirmed by the Engineer-inCharge before the actual execution of work at site. As far as possible, no
drains or sewers shall be laid in the middle of road unless otherwise specifically
shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer in writing.
10.2.6
10.3
Excavation
Alignment and grade
10.3.1
The sewer pipes shall be laid to alignment and gradient shown on the drawings
but subject to such modifications as shall be ordered by the Engineer from time
to time to meet the requirements of the Works. No deviations from the lines,
depths of cutting or gradients of sewers shown on the plans and sections shall
be permitted except by the express direction in writing of the Engineer.
10.3.2
Excavation in tunnels
Excavation for sewer works shall be open cutting unless the permission of the
Engineer-in-Charge for the ground to be tunnelled is obtained in writing. Where
sewers have to be constructed along narrow passages, the Engineer may
order the excavation to be made partly in tunnel and in such cases the
excavated soil shall be brought back later on for refilling.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 36 OF 46
10.3.3
Opening out trenches
a) In excavating the trenches, etc. the solid road metalling, pavement,

kerbing, etc. and turf shall be placed on one side and preserved for
reinstatement after the trenches or other excavation is filled up. Before any
road metal is replaced, it shall be carefully shifted and only clean metal
used for replacing. The surface of all trenches and holes shall be restored
and maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer and of the Owners of the
roads or other property traversed and the Contractor shall not cut out or
break down any live fence of trees in the line of the proposed works but
shall tunnel under them, unless the Engineer shall order to the contrary.
b) The Contractor shall grub up and clear the surface over the trenches and
other excavations of all trees, stumps roots and all other encumbrances
affecting execution of the work and shall remove them from the site.
10.3.4
Obstruction of roads
The Contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation more than one
half of the width of any road or street and sufficient space shall then be left for
public and private transit. He shall remove the materials excavated and bring
them back again when the trench is required to be refilled. The Contractor shall
obtain the consent of the concerned authority in writing before closing any road
to vehicular traffic. The foot walks must be clear at all times.
10.3.5
Removal of filth
All night soil, filth or any other offensive matter met with during the execution of
the works, shall not be deposited on to the surface of any street or where it is
likely to be a nuisance or passed into any sewer or drain but shall be
immediately, after it is taken out of any trench, sewer or cess pool, put into the
carts and removed to a suitable place to be provided by the Contractor.
10.3.6
Excavation to be taken to proper depths

The trenches shall be excavated to such a depth that the sewer shall rest on
concrete as specified in the clauses relating thereto, so that the inverts may be
at the levels given in the sections. In bad ground, the Engineer-in-Charge may
order the Contractor to excavate to a greater depth than that shown on the
drawings and to fill up the excavation to the level of the sewers with concrete,
broken stone, gravel or other materials as directed by the Engineer. Such extra

SECTION : D9
SHEET 37 OF 46
excavation, concrete, broken stone, gravel or other materials, shall be

measured and paid for separately if the extra work was ordered by the
Engineer-in-Charge in writing, but if the Contractor should excavate the trench
to a greater depth than is required without a specific order to that effect in
writing of the Engineer-in-Charge, the extra depth shall have to be filled up with
cement concrete 1:4:8 (1 cement: 4coarse sand 8: stone aggregate 20 mm
nominal size) at the Contractor's own costs and charges, as directed by and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
10.3.7
Refilling
After the sewer or other work has been laid and proved to be water tight, the
trench or other excavations shall be back filled with selected excavated earth
and compacted. Utmost care shall be taken in doing this, so that no damage
shall be caused to the sewer and other permanent work. The filling in the
haunches and up to 75mm above the crown of the sewer shall consist of the
finest selected materials, as directed by the Engineer, placed carefully in
150mm layers, then flooded and consolidated. After this has been laid, the
trench and other excavation shall be refilled carefully in 150mm layers with
materials taken from the excavation, each layer being watered to assist in the
consolidation unless the Engineer shall otherwise direct.
10.3.8
Contractor to restore settlement and damages

The Contractor shall, at his own costs and charges, make good promptly any
settlement that may occur in the surfaces of roads, berms, footpaths, gardens,
open spaces etc. whether public or private caused by his trenches or by his
other excavations and he shall be liable for any accidents caused thereby. He
shall also, at his own expense and charges, repair and make good any
damage done to buildings and other property. If in the opinion of the Engineer
he fails to make good such works with all practicable despatch, the Engineer
shall be at liberty to get the work done by other means and the expenses
thereof shall be paid by the Contractor or deducted from any money that may
be or become due to the Contractor or recovered from the Contractor in any
other manner according to the law of the land.
10.3.9
Disposal of surplus soil

The Contractor shall at his own costs and charges provide places for disposal
of all surplus materials not required to be used on the works. As each trench is
refilled the surplus soil shall be immediately removed, the surface properly
restored and the site cleared.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 38 OF 46
10.3.10 Timbering of sewer and trenches
a) The Contractor shall at all times support efficiently and effectively the sides
of all the trenches and other excavations by suitable timbering, piling and
sheeting and they shall be close timbered in loose or sandy strata and
below the surface of the sub soil water level.
b) All timbering, sheeting and piling with their wallings and supports shall be of
adequate dimensions and strength and fully braced and strutted so that no
risk of collapse or subsidence of the walls of the trench shall take place.
c) The Contractor shall be held responsible and shall be accountable for the
sufficiency of all timbering, bracing, sheeting and piling used and also for,
all damage to persons and property resulting from improper quality,
strength, placing, maintaining or removing of the same.
10.3.11 Shoring of buildings
The Contractor shall shore up all buildings, walls and other structures, the
stability of which is liable to be endangered by the execution of the work and
shall be fully responsible for all damages to persons or property resulting from
any accident.
10.3.12 Removal of water from sewer, trench etc
The Contractor shall at all times during the progress of the work keep the
trenches and excavations free from water which shall be disposed of by him in
a manner as shall neither cause injury to the public health nor to the public or
private property nor to the work completed or in progress nor to the surface of
any roads or streets nor cause any interference with the use of the same by
the public at no extra cost.
10.3.13 Width of trench
a) The Engineer-in-Charge shall have power by giving an order in writing to

the Contractor to increase the maximum width/ depth in respect of which
payment shall be allowed for excavation and back filling in trenches for
various classes of sewer, manholes, and other works in certain lengths to
be specifically laid down by him, where on account of bad ground or other
unusual conditions, he considers that such increased widths/ depths are
necessary in view of the site conditions.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 39 OF 46
b) The width of trenches at the bottom shall be as follows:100mm dia pipe - 550mm
150mm dia pipe - 550mm
225-250mm dia pipe - 600mm
300mm dia pipe - 750mm
Maximum width of the bed concrete shall also be as above. No additional
payment is admissible for widths greater than specified unless directed by the
Engineer as given in clause above.
10.4
Salt glazed stoneware pipes
10.4.1
Stoneware pipes shall be new and of first Class quality salt glazed and free
from rough texture inside and outside and straight. All pipes shall comply with
IS: 651 and have the manufacturers name marked on them.
10.4.2
Laying of salt glazed stoneware pipes
a) Pipes are liable to be damaged in transit and not withstanding tests that
may have been made before despatch each pipe shall be examined
carefully on arrival at site. Each pipe shall be lightly struck with a wooden
hammer or mallet and those that do not ring true and clear shall be
rejected. Sound pipes shall be carefully stacked to prevent damage. All
defective pipes shall be segregated, marked in a conspicuous manner and
their use in the works prevented by expeditiously removing them from the
work site.
b) The pipes shall be laid with sockets leading uphill and should rest on solid
and even foundations for the full length of the barrel. Socket holes shall be
formed in the foundation sufficiently deep to allow the pipe jointer room to
work right round the pipe and as short as practicable to admit the socket
and allow the joint to be made.
c) Where pipes are not bedded on concrete the trench bottom shall be left
slightly high and carefully bottomed up as pipe laying proceeds so that the
pipe barrels rest on firm ground. If excavation has been carried too low it

SECTION : D9
SHEET 40 OF 46
shall be made up with cement concrete 1:4:8 (1 cement: 4coarse sand: 8

stone aggregate 20mm nominal size) at the Contractor's cost and charges.
10.4.3
Jointing of salt glazed stoneware pipes
a) Tarred gaskin shall first be wrapped round the spigot of each pipe and the
spigot shall then be placed into the socket of the pipe previously laid, the
pipe shall then be adjusted and fixed in its correct position and the gaskin
caulked tightly home so as to fill not more than one quarter of the total
length of the socket.
b) The remainder of the socket shall be filled with stiff mix of cement mortar (1
cement: 1 clear sharp washed sand). When the socket is filled, a fillet shall
be formed round the joint with a trowel forming an angle of 45 degrees with
the barrel of that pipe. The mortar shall be mixed as needed for immediate
use and no mortar shall be beaten up and used after it has begun to set.
c) After the joint has been made any extraneous materials shall be removed
from the inside of the joint with a suitable scraper of "badger". The newly
made joints shall be protected until set, from the sun, drying winds, rain or
dust. Sacking or other materials which can be kept damp shall be used.
The joints shall be exposed and space left all around the pipes for
inspection by the Engineer. The inside of the sewer must be left absolutely
clear in bore and free from cement mortar or other obstructions throughout
its entire length, and shall efficiently drain and discharge.
10.4.4
Gully traps
a) Gully traps shall be of the same quality as described for stoneware pipes
under clause 0.
b) Gully traps shall be fixed in a masonry chamber as detailed in CPWD

specifications. The C.I. sealed cover and frame shall weigh not less than
7.3 kg. Where necessary, sealed cover shall be replaced with C.I. grating
of the same size.
10.5
Reinforced cement concrete pipes
10.5.1
All underground storm water drainage pipes and sewer lines where specified
(other than those specified as cast iron) shall be centrifugally spun S&S RCC
pipes of specified Class conforming to IS:458. Pipes shall be true and straight
with uniform bore, throughout. Cracked, warped pipes shall not be used on the

SECTION : D9
SHEET 41 OF 46
work. All pipes shall be tested by the manufacturer and the Contractor shall
produce a certificate to that effect from the manufacturer.
10.5.2
Laying
RCC S&S spun pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed or cradles as
specified and shown on the detailed drawings. The cradles may be pre cast
and sufficiently cured to prevent cracks and breakage in handling. The invert of
the cradles shall be left 12mm below the invert level of the pipe properly placed
on the soil to prevent any disturbance. The pipe shall then be placed on the
bed concrete or cradles and set for the line and gradient by means of sight
rails and bonding rods etc. Cradles or concrete bed may be omitted, if directed
by the Engineer.
10.5.3
Jointing of pipes
Clauses under 0 shall apply.
10.6
Cement concrete and masonry works (for manholes and chambers etc)
10.6.1
Materials
All materials used in cement concrete and masonry works e.g., water, coarse
aggregates, sand, cement, reinforcement bars, bricks etc. shall conform to
relevant Indian Standards and the Specifications of the Central Public Works
Department.
10.6.2
Cement concrete for pipe support
a) Wherever specified or shown on the drawings, all pipes shall be supported

on a bed, all around or in haunches. The thickness and mix of the concrete
shall be as given in the Schedule of Quantities. Width of the bedding shall
be as per clauses under 0.
b) Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer cement concrete for bed, all
around or in haunches shall be laid as follows:-
Up to 1.5m
Depth
Stoneware pipes in All round
open ground
(1:5:10)
Up to 3m
Depth
In haunches
(1:5:10)
Beyond 3m
Depth
In haunches
(1:5:10)

SECTION : D9
SHEET 42 OF 46
(no sub soil water)

RCC or SW in subsoil water
C.I. Pipes
(in all conditions)
RCC Pipes or C.I.
pipes under building
All round
(1:3:6)
All round
(1:3:6)
All round
(1:3:6)
In haunches
(1:3:6)
In haunches
(1:3:6)
All round
(1:3:6)
In haunches
(1:3:6)
In haunches
(1:3:6)
All round
(1:3:6)
(1=cement, 3/5=coarse sand, 6/10=stone aggregate40mm nominal size)

c) RCC pipes or C.I. pipes shall be supported on brick masonry or pre cast
RCC or in situ cradles as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
d) Pipes in loose soil or above ground shall be supported on brick or stone
masonry pillars as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
10.7
Manholes and chambers
10.7.1
All manholes, chambers and other such works as specified shall be

constructed in brick masonry in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand)
or as specified in the Schedule of Quantities.
10.7.2
All manholes and chambers, etc. shall be supported on base of cement

concrete of such thickness and mix as given in the Schedule of Quantities or
shown on the drawings.
10.7.3
Where not specified, manholes shall be constructed as follows:(All dimensions are clear internal dimensions in mm)
Size / type
of manhole
Maximum
depth
Average
thickness
of RCC
slab
Size of
cover
900x800
Rect.
1200x900
Rect.
900 dia
Conical
1400dia
Conical
1000
2400
2500
5000
150
150
600x450
500dia
500dia
500dia

SECTION : D9
SHEET 43 OF 46
Weight of
cover
38kg light
duty
116kg medium
duty
116kg medium
duty
116kg
medium duty
Reinforcement - As directed by Engineer.

10.7.4
All manholes shall be provided with cement concrete benching in 1:2:4 nominal
mixes. (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate 20mm nominal size). The
benching shall have slope of 1:10 towards the channel. The depth of the
channel shall be full diameter of the pipe. Benching shall be finished with a
floating coat of neat cement.
10.7.5
All manholes shall be plastered with 12/15 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 (1
cement: 3 coarse sand) and finished with a floating coat of neat cement inside.
Manhole shall be plastered outside as above but with rough plaster with
waterproofing compound.
10.7.6
All manholes with depths greater than 1 m. shall be provided with 20mm
square or 25mm round C.I. footrests set in cement concrete blocks
250x100x100 m min 1:2:4 mix (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate 20
mm nominal size), at 300mm centre to centre vertically and staggered.
Footrests shall be coated with coal tar before embedding.
10.7.7
All manholes shall be provided with cast iron covers and frames and
embedded in reinforced cement concrete slab. Weight of cover, frame and
thickness of slab shall be given above.
10.8
Making connections
Contractor shall connect the new sewer line to the existing manhole by cutting
the walls, benching and restoring them to the original condition. A new channel
shall be cut in the benching of the existing manhole for the new connection.
Contractor shall remove all sewage and water if encountered in making the
connection without additional cost. Back filling and compaction shall be done
carefully in layers, simultaneously on both sides so as to prevent unequal earth
pressure. Back filling shall not be taken up till testing has been successfully
completed.
10.9
Testing
10.9.1
All testing shall be done in accordance with IS: 1172 and IS: 5329 except as
may be modified herein under.

SECTION : D9
SHEET 44 OF 46
10.9.2
All lengths of the sewer/ drain/ pipelines shall be fully tested for water tightness
by means of water pressure. Testing shall be carried out from manhole to
manhole. All pipes shall be subjected to a test pressure of at least 2.5m head
of water. The test pressure shall, however, not exceed 6m head at any point.
The pipes shall be plugged preferably with standard design rubber plugs on
both ends. The upper end shall, however, be connected to a pipe for filling with
water and getting the required head. The sewer/ drain/ pipeline shall be filled
with water and left to stand for 2 hours and topped up. The leakage over 30
minutes shall then be measured and the loss in water shall not exceed 2
litres/cm. of diameter/km of pipeline measured during the last 10 minutes of
the period of test.
10.9.3
Sewer lines shall be tested for straightness:
a) By inserting a smooth ball 12mm less than the internal diameter of the
pipe. In the absence of obstructions such as yarn or mortar projecting at
the joints the ball should roll down the invert of the pipe and emerge at the
lower end,
b) By means of a mirror at one end and a lamp at the other end. If the pipe
line is straight the full circle of light shall be seen other wise obstruction or
deviation shall be apparent.
10.9.4
A test register shall be maintained which shall be signed and dated by the
Contractor and the Engineer.
10.9.5
The pipeline shall be covered only after the testing is successfully completed.
10.10
10.10.1 Excavation
a) Measurement for excavation of pipe trenches shall be made per linear

metre under the respective category of soil classification encountered at
site.
i)
Ordinary soil
ii) Hard soil (hard murrum and soft rock)

iii) Hard rock requiring chiselling

SECTION : D9
SHEET 45 OF 46
iv) Hard rock requiring blasting.
b) Trenches shall be measured between outside walls of manholes at top and

the depth shall be the average depth between the two ends to the nearest
centimetre. The rate quoted shall be for a depth up to 1.5 m or as given in
the Schedule of Quantities.
c) Payment for trenches more than 1.5m in depth shall be made for extra
depth as given in the Schedule of Quantities over and above the rate for
depth upto1.5 m.
d) The original ground levels shall be jointly recorded prior to start of work.
10.10.2 Timbering and Shoring
Rate quoted for excavation shall be inclusive of Timbering and shoring as
specified and nothing extra shall be payable for the same.
10.10.3 Saturated Soil
Rate quoted for excavation shall be inclusive of pumping and bailing out of
water encountered from any source whatsoever.
10.10.4 Refilling, Consolidation and Disposal of Surplus Earth
Rate quoted for excavation shall be inclusive of refilling, consolidation and
disposal of surplus earth.
10.10.5 Stoneware/ RCC/ C.I. pipes
Stoneware/ RCC/ C.I. pipes shall be measured for the finished length of the
pipeline per linear meter i.e.
a) Lengths between manholes shall be recorded from inside face of one

manhole to inside face of other manhole,
b) Length between gully trap and manhole shall be recorded between socket
of pipe near gully trap and inside face of manhole. Rate shall include all
items given in the Schedule of Quantities and specifications.
10.10.6 Gully Traps

SECTION : D9
SHEET 46 OF 46
Gully traps shall be measured by the number and rate shall include all
excavation, back filling, foundation, concrete brick masonry, cement plaster
inside and outside, C.I. grating and sealed cover and frame etc. complete.
10.10.8 Cement Concrete for Pipes
Cement concrete in bed and all around or in haunches shall be paid per
running metre between the outside wall of manholes at bottom of the trench.
No additional payment is admissible in respect of concreting done for widths
greater than that specified, for shuttering or centering, concreting and curing or
work in subsoil water conditions.
10.10.8 Manholes
a) All manholes shall be measured by numbers and shall include all items
specified above and necessary excavation in all types of soils, refilling,
compaction and disposal of surplus earth.
b) Manholes with depths greater than that specified under the main item shall
be paid for under "extra depth" and shall include all items as given for
manholes. Measurement shall be done to the nearest centimetre. Depth of
the manholes shall be measured from top of the manhole cover to bottom
of channel.
c) C.I. covers, frames & steps shall be paid separately as per schedule of
quantities.
10.10.9 Making Connections
Item for making connection to municipal sewer shall be paid for by number and
shall include all items given in the Schedule of Quantities and specifications.

SECTION: D10
SHEET 1 OF 1
FALSE OR CAVITY FLOOR
1.0
SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements of false or cavity floor constructed
over reinforced concrete floor slabs for control rooms, computer rooms and other
similar structures.
2.0
FRAME WORK
2.1
The false floor shall consist of a framework of suitable structural member

designed to carry the loads specified. This frame work shall be supported on
suitably designed stools placed at 600 mm centre to centre in both directions.
The stools shall consist of a mild steel base plate with a mild steel stud having
adjustable lock nut and coupling at the centre and another mild steel plate at top
serving as a prop head. The above framework shall be suitably designed to
accommodate 35 mm thick, 600 mm square panels. The base plate shall be fixed
to the reinforced concrete floor with an approved adhesive compound or with 4
nos. 6 mm dia. anchor fasteners. Bedding of 1:2 or richer cement sand mortar
shall be provided locally under the base plates of stools to provide a level
surface.
2.2
The prop head shall be provided with mild steel lugs welded on top and each
placed perpendicular to the other for proper positioning and supporting the main
and cross members. The stools shall be capable of adjustment to accommodate
concrete floor level irregularities up to plus or minus 15 mm. The framing
members shall be completely removable and shall remain in position without
screwing or bolting to the prop heads. All steel framework including steel stools
shall be given a coat of zinc chromate primer and two coats of enamel paint of
approved colour and shade.
3.0
FLOOR PANELS
3.1
The floor panels shall be made of 600 mm x 600 mm x 35 mm thick medium

density un-veneered/ non-prelaminated teak wood particle boards having a
density of not more than 800 kg/cum bonded with boiling water proof phenol
formaldehyde synthetic resin and shall be of fire resistant, termite resistant and
moisture proof quality; generally conforming to IS: 3087 - Specification for wood
particle boards (Medium Density) for general purposes. The thermal conductivity
of the boards shall not exceed 0.12 kCal/hr/sqm/C/m.
3.2
The panel size given above may be suitably modified near electrical panel/
equipment and also to suit room dimensions with panel size not more than 600
mm under any circumstances. Exposed 2 mm thick vinyl edging shall be
provided on all edges of individual panels. Each panel shall be given a coat of
primer and two coats of approved fire resistant paint from underside.

SECTION: D11
SHEET 1 OF 6

STRUCTURAL STEEL
1.0
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for supply where specified,
fabrication and delivery at site of structural steel. This specification also covers
fabrication and painting of structures.
2.0
APPLICABLE CODES & SPECIFICATIONS

The following specifications, standards and codes are made as a guide line and
a part of this specification. All standards, specifications and codes of practices
referred to herein shall be the latest editions including all applicable official
amendments and revisions.
In case of discrepancy between this specification and other documents referred
to herein, this specification shall govern.
a) Materials
i)
IS: 2062 -
Steel for General Structural Purposes
ii) IS: 2074 -
Ready Mixed Paint, Air drying, Red Oxide Zinc Chrome

and Priming
iii) IS: 5369 -
General Requirements for Plain Washers and Lock

Washers
iv) IS: 5372 -
Taper Washers for Channels
v) IS: 5374 -
Taper Washer for I Beams
vi) IS: 6639 -
Hexagonal bolts for steel structures
b) Codes of Practice
i)
IS: 800
Code of Practice for General Construction in Steel
ii) IS: 816
Code of Practice for use of Metal Arc Welding for General

construction in Mild Steel
iii) IS: 818
Code of Practice for safety and health requirement in

electric and gas welding and cutting operations
iv) IS: 822
Code of Procedure for Inspection of Welds
v) IS: 1477
Code of Practice for Painting of (Parts - 1 & 2) Ferrous

Metals in Buildings

SECTION: D11
SHEET 2 OF 6

STRUCTURAL STEEL
3.0
vi) IS: 3016
Code of Practice for fire precaution in welding and cutting

operations
vii) IS: 3600
Methods for testing fusion welded joints and weld metal in

steel
viii) IS: 7215
Tolerances for Fabrication of Steel Structures
ix) IS: 7318
Approval test for welders when welding procedure

approval is not required - Fusion welding of steel (Part - 1)
SUPPLIED MATERIALS
All materials required for construction shall be supplied by the contractor.
4.0
DRAWINGS PREPARED BY THE OWNER
4.1
Design drawings will be furnished to the VENDOR/ CONTRACTOR and all

drawings so furnished shall form a part of this specification. These design
drawings prepared by the PURCHASER will show all the levels, forces on
members where shall necessary, size and orientation of each member, location/
size of openings to enable the VENDOR/ CONTRACTOR carry out fabrication
and erection.
4.2
The PURCHASER reserves the right to make changes. Revisions to drawings,

even after release for preparation of shop drawings, are very likely to be made to
reflect additional data/ details received and updated requirements. Revisions to
drawings and any new drawings made to include additional work by the
VENDOR/ CONTRACTOR shall be considered a part of this specification and
contract.
4.3
Should the VENDOR/ CONTRACTOR during the execution of his work find
discrepancies in the information furnished by the PURCHASER, he shall refer
such discrepancies to the PURCHASER before proceeding with such work.
5.0
FABRICATION
5.1
General
All workmanship and finish shall be of the best quality and shall conform to the
best approved method of fabrication. All materials shall be finished straight and
shall be machined/ ground smooth true and square where so specified. All holes
and edges shall be free of burrs. Shearing and chipping shall be neatly and
accurately done and all portions of work exposed to view shall be neatly finished.
Unless otherwise directed/ approved, reference may be made to relevant IS

SECTION: D11
SHEET 3 OF 6

STRUCTURAL STEEL
codes for providing standard fabrication tolerance. Material at the shops shall be
kept clean and protected from weather.
5.2
Connections
5.2.1
Shop/ field connections shall be as per approved design drawings.
5.2.2
In case of bolted connections, taper washers or flat washers or spring washers

shall be used with bolts as necessary. The length of the bolt shall be such that at
least one thread of the bolt projects beyond the nut, except in case of high
strength friction grip bolts where this projection shall be at least three times the
pitch of the thread.
5.2.3
In all cases where bearing is critical, the unthreaded portion of bolt shall bear on
the members assembled. A washer of adequate thickness may be provided to
exclude the threads from the bearing thickness, if a longer grip bolt has to be
used for this purpose.
5.2.4
Fasteners of all grades, consumables, etc shall be supplied/ brought to site 10%
in excess of the requirement in each category and size.
5.3
Straightening
All materials shall be straight and if necessary, before being worked shall be
straightened and/ or flattened by pressure and shall be free from twists. Heating
or forging shall not be resorted to without the prior approval of the ENGINEER in
writing.
5.4
Cutting, punching, drilling, welding and fabrication tolerances shall be generally

as per relevant IS codes.
5.5
Welding
5.5.1
Welding shall be entrusted to only qualified and experienced welders who shall
be periodically tested and graded as per IS: 817, IS: 7310 (Part - 1) and IS: 7318
(Part - 1).
5.5.2
While fabricating plated beams and built up members, all shop splices in each
component part shall be made before such component part is welded to other
parts of the members. Wherever weld reinforcement interferes with proper fit-up
between components to be assembled for welding, these welds shall be ground
flush prior to assembly.
5.5.3
Approval of the welding procedure by the PURCHASER shall not relieve the
CONTRACTOR of his responsibility for correct and sound welding without undue
distortion in the finished structure.

SECTION: D11
SHEET 4 OF 6

STRUCTURAL STEEL
5.5.4
No welding shall be done when the surface of the members is wet nor during
periods of high wind.
5.5.5
Each layer of a multiple layer weld except root and surfaces runs may be
moderately peened with light blows from a blunt tool. Care shall be exercised to
prevent scaling or flaking of weld and base metal from over-peening.
5.5.6
No welding shall be done on base metal at a temperature below -5 Deg. C. Base

metal shall be preheated to the temperature as per relevant IS codes.
5.5.7
Electrodes other than low hydrogen electrodes shall not be permitted to use for
higher thicknesses as per standard practice.
5.5.8
Inspection of Welds
All welds shall be inspected for flaws by any of the methods described under
clause 8 "Inspection". The choice of the method adopted shall be determined by
the PURCHASER.
5.5.9
The correction of defective welds shall be carried out as directed by the

PURCHASER without damaging the parent metal. When a crack in the weld is
removed, magnetic particle inspection or any other equally positive means as
prescribed by the PURCHASER shall be used to ensure that the whole of the
crack and material up to 25 mm beyond each end of the crack has been
removed. Cost of all such tests and operations incidental to correction shall be to
the CONTRACTOR's account.
5.6
Tolerances
The dimensional and weight tolerance for rolled shapes shall be in accordance
with IS: 1852 for indigenous steel. The tolerances for fabrication of structural
steel shall be as per IS: 7215.
6.0
INSPECTION
6.1.1
The CONTRACTOR shall give due notice to the PURCHASER in advance of the
works getting ready for inspection. All rejected material shall be promptly
removed from the shop and replaced with new material for the PURCHASER's
approval/ inspection. The fact that certain material has been accepted at the
VENDOR/ CONTRACTOR's shop shall not invalidate final rejection at site by the
PURCHASER if it fails to conform to the requirements of these specifications, to
be in proper condition or has fabrication inaccuracies which prevents proper
assembly nor shall it invalidate any claim which the PURCHASER may make
because of defective or unsatisfactory materials and/ or workmanship. Vendor

SECTION: D11
SHEET 5 OF 6

STRUCTURAL STEEL
shall have to extend all facilities to Engineer to inspect the material at any stage
during execution.
6.1.2
No materials shall be painted or despatched to site without inspection and

approval by the PURCHASER unless such inspection is waived in writing by the
PURCHASER.
6.1.3
The CONTRACTOR shall provide all the testing and inspection services and
facilities for shop work except where otherwise specified.
6.1.4
For fabrication work carried out in the field the same standard of supervision and
quality control shall be maintained as in shop fabricated work. Inspection and
testing shall be conducted in a manner satisfactory to the PURCHASER.
6.2
Dimensions, Workmanship & Cleanliness

Members shall be inspected at all stages of fabrication and assembly to verify
that dimensions, tolerances, alignment, surface finish and painting are in
accordance with the requirements shown in the CONTRACTOR's approved
fabrication drawings and the PURCHASER's drawings.
6.3
Test Failure
In the event of failure of any member to satisfy inspection or test requirement, the
CONTRACTOR shall notify the PURCHASER or his authorised representative.
The CONTRACTOR must obtain permission from the PURCHASER before
repair is undertaken. The quality control procedures to be followed to ensure
satisfactory repair shall be subject to approval by the PURCHASER.
6.4
The ENGINEER has the right to specify additional testing as he deems

necessary, and the additional cost of such testing shall be borne by the
PURCHASER, only in case of successful testing.
6.5
The CONTRACTOR shall maintain records of all inspection and testing which
shall be made available to the PURCHASER or his authorised representative.
7.0
MARKING OF MEMBERS
7.1
After checking and inspection, all members shall be marked for identification
during erection. This mark shall correspond to distinguishing marks on approved
erection drawings and shall be legibly painted and stamped on it. The erection
mark shall be stamped with a metal dye with figures at least 20 mm high and to
such optimum depth as to be clearly visible.
7.2
All erection marks shall be on the outer surface of all sections and near one end,
but clear of bolt holes. The marking shall be so stamped that they are easily

SECTION: D11
SHEET 6 OF 6

STRUCTURAL STEEL
discernible when sorting out members. The stamped marking shall be encircled
boldly by a distinguishable paint to facilitate easy location.
7.3
Erection marks on like pieces shall be in identical locations. Members having

lengths of 7 m or more shall have the erection mark at both ends.
8.0
ERRORS
Any error in shop fabrication which prevents proper assembling and fitting up of
parts in the field by moderate use of drift pins or moderate amount of reaming will
be classified by the ENGINEER as defective workmanship. In case ENGINEER
rejects such material or defective workmanship, the same shall be replaced by
the materials and workmanship conforming to the ENGINEER's requirements by
CONTRACTOR free of cost at site.
9.0
PAINTING
All fabricated steel material, except those galvanised shall receive protective
paint coating as specified.
10.0
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
10.1
For the purpose of payment, the weight of the actual completed structures shall
be calculated from the approved drawings for different items of work. The
CONTRACTOR shall submit to the PURCHASER relevant material list containing
weight of each item.
10.2
No allowances will be permitted for bolts, nuts, washers, studs, screws, etc;
galvanizing, welding or for rolling margins. One tonne for the purpose of payment
shall mean ONE METRIC TONNE i.e., 1000 kg.
10.3
The weight of a member made out of standard rolled section such as beams,
channels, angles, etc shall be based on the standard IS: 808 without deductions
for holes, notches, bevel cuts, etc. Where a component consists of a cut joist or
channels, the full weight of the rolled section shall be considered only if more
than half the depth of the original section is used. Otherwise, only half the section
unit weight shall be considered for calculation of the weight of the components.
Deductions shall be made in the weight of gussets/ plates for cuts and notches of
900 sqcm or larger.
10.4
For gussets/ plates used in trusses, bracings, columns, beams, etc the area shall
be that of the minimum circumscribing rectangle except as stated in 10.3 above.
10.5
The weight of any built-up members shall be based on the weight of each
component.

SECTION: D12
SHEET 1 OF 15
ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
1.0
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for erection of structural
steel. In addition to provision of erection and transport equipment, the scope of
work includes supply of tools and tackles, consumables, materials, labour and
supervision and shall cover the following:
1.1
Storing and staking of all fabricated structural components/ units/ assemblies at

site storage yards till the time of erection.
1.2
Transportation of structures from storage yard to site of erection, including

multiple handling, if required.
1.3
All minor rectifications/ modifications such as:a. Removal of bends, kinks, twists, etc for parts damaged during
transportation and handling.
b. Reaming of holes which do not fit properly or which are damaged, for use of
next higher size bolt.
c. Plug-welding and re-drilling of holes which do not register and which cannot
be reamed for use of next higher size bolt.
d. Drilling of holes which are either not drilled at all or are drilled in incorrect
position during fabrication.
1.4
Fabrication of minor missing items as directed by the PURCHASER.
1.5
Verification of the position of embedded anchor bolts and inserts with respect
to lines and levels, installed by others based on Geodetic Scheme/ Bench
Mark/ Reference co-ordinates to be furnished by PURCHASER.
1.6
Verification of actual dimensions of structures (erected by others) which would

have bearing on the cutting lengths, end connections, etc of those members
which are to be erected under this scope of work.
1.7
Assembly at site of steel structural components wherever required, including

temporary supports and staging.
1.8
Making arrangements for providing all facilities for

a. Conducting Ultrasonic Testing (UT) by reputed testing laboratories
approved by PURCHASER.
b. Making available test films/ graphs with reports/ interpretation.

SECTION: D12
SHEET 2 OF 15
1.9
Rectifying at site damaged portions of shop primer by cleaning and application

touch-up paint.
1.10
Erection of structures including making connections by bolts/ High strength

Friction Grip bolts/ welding as per drawing.
1.11
Alignment of all structures true to line, plumb and dimensions within specified
limits of tolerance.
1.12
Application at site after erection, required number of coats of primer and

finishing paint as per specification.
1.13
Rectification of structures as per preliminary acceptance report and Final

acceptance report.
1.14
All necessary items of work required for satisfactory completion of job on

schedule.
2.0
APPLICABLE CODES STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS

The pertinent clauses of the following Indian Codes, Standards and
Specifications (latest editions including all applicable official amendments,
reaffirmations and revisions) shall apply to the material and workmanship
covered by this specification. In the event of the conflict of certain requirements
between this specification and the codes referred herein, this specification shall
govern.
It is not the intent to specify herein all the codes and standards required for the
satisfactory completion of work. The list of codes and standards indicates
certain primary codes & standards and not all the codes required for the work
under the contract. It is understood that all the pertinent codes and standards
shall form the part of this specification whether explicitly indicated or not.
Reference codes and standards:
IS: 800 -
General Construction in Steel Code of Practice (3rd Rev)
IS: 806 -
Code Of Practice For Use of Steel Tubes In General Building

Construction (1st Rev)
IS: 822 -
Code of Procedure for Inspection of Welds - Reaffirmed 2003
IS: 4000 -
Code of Practice for High strength bolts in Steel Structures (1st

Rev) - Reaffirmed 2003

SECTION: D12
SHEET 3 OF 15
3.0
IS: 7205 -
Safety code for erection of structural steel (Reaffirmed 2005)
IS: 12843 -
Tolerances for erection of steel structures (Reaffirmed 2005)
SP:6(1) -
Structural Steel Sections
AWS D1.1 -
Structural Welding Code: Steel
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
The work covered in this specification, shall comply with all relevant
government and local laws, regulations and standards. For subjects not
covered by regulations, codes, standards or specifications, the materials and
construction shall be based on good engineering practice, subject to approval
by PURCHASER.
4.0
ERECTION SCHEME
4.1
Contractor after the award of work shall submit a detailed erection scheme
covering the period of completion of all the works covered under the
specification for Engineers approval. The erection scheme shall include but not
limited to the following.
a. Methods proposed to be employed for transporting his equipments, tools,
tackles, gas cylinders, electrodes and all that is necessary to site.
b. Type, capacity and quantity of equipment that the Contractor proposes to
bring to site for unloading, transporting within the site, handling,
assembling, hoisting and erecting of the structural steel components for all
these operations.
c. Strength and trade wise composition of the work force and supervisory
personnel that will be deployed by the Contractor for the various operations.
d. Any special specific scheme being adopted for erection of special/
complicated structural elements.
4.2
A brief write-up covering the above activities shall be submitted along with the
bid document by the Bidder during submission of his bid.

SECTION: D12
SHEET 4 OF 15
4.3
PURCHASER reserves the right to direct the Contractor either at the start or
during the contract period, to mobilize additional resources in terms of labour,
material, equipment, tools and plant, etc at no cost to the PURCHASER if in his
opinion that the resources employed by the Contractor does not meet the
schedule of completion.
5.0
ERECTION PROGRAMME
5.1
Within two (2) weeks of acceptance of bid the Contractor shall submit a
detailed erection programme with dates and estimated completion time for
various parts of the work for Engineers approval. This programme shall
broadly comprise the following:
a. Layout plan identifying the areas proposed for unloading, main storage,
subsidiary storage and assembly.
b. Transportation of fabricated material between the storage and work areas.
c. Layout to indicate the points at which proposed erection begins, direction in
which it is proposed to progress, the deployment of equipment, access
route for cranes to reach work areas, etc.
d. The locations and extent of site offices and stores, labour quarters, if any.
e. Layout of electrical cables and water pipes from the tap-off points.
f.
Details of the method of handling, transport, hoisting and erection including

false work/ staging, temporary bracing, guying, etc along with complete
details of the quantity and capacity of the various items of erection
equipment that will be used.
g. Site organization chart showing the number of supervisory personnel; and

the number and composition of the various gangs.
5.2
Any modifications to the erection programme directed by ENGINEER for the

reasons of inadequacy of
a. The quantity and/ or capacity of the erection equipment
b. Erection personnel and supervisors, temporary bracing, guying etc
c. Safety of the erection methods or stability of the erected portions of
structures or unsuitability of the erection sequence due to interference with
the work of other agencies.

SECTION: D12
SHEET 5 OF 15
d. Any other unforeseen events which may delay the schedule;

shall be incorporated by Contractor and the work shall be carried out in
accordance with the revised programme. Approval by PURCHASER shall not
relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for the safe, sound, accurate and
timely erection of structural steel work as required by PURCHASER. Contractor
shall also make no extra claims for bringing additional equipment to site for
erection, if so directed by PURCHASER. Contractor shall be deemed to have
visualized all erection problems while bidding for the work and no additional
compensation shall be claimed on this account.
6.0
SITE OPERATIONS
6.1
Contractor shall employ an experienced and qualified Engineer who shall be in

full time charge of the job and responsible for all site activities.
6.2
Contractor shall complete all preliminary works at site well before the arrival of
structural steel, such as establishment of a well equipped and adequately
staffed site office, stores, unloading gantry, unloading and pre-assembly yard,
labour quarters if any, electrical and water connections, electrical winches,
derricks, cranes, compressors, all tools and tackles, rivet guns, welding sets,
torque wrenches, spud wrenches, staging, etc as well as experienced erection
and supervisory personnel as part of this contract and any other work that may
be necessary so as to start erection immediately after the arrival of the first
batch of steel at site.
6.3
Contractor shall furnish at his own expense, the necessary non-inflammable

staging and hoisting materials or equipment required for the erection work and
shall remove and take them away after completion of the job. Contractor shall
also provide necessary passageways, fences, safety belts, helmets, lights and
other fittings to the satisfaction of PURCHASER and to meet the rules of local
authorities and for protection to his men and materials. A licensed electrician
shall be kept on the job for the entire duration of the work to maintain
Contractors electrical equipment and connections.
6.4
Contractor shall protect all existing plant, structures, piping, conduits,

equipments and facilities against damage during erection. Any damage caused
by Contractor shall be rectified entirely at Contractors cost, to the satisfaction
of PURCHASER. If work has to be carried out adjacent to existing switch yards
or electrical installations which are live, Contractor must ensure suitable safety
precautions in consultation with PURCHASER.
6.5
If a portion of the work of the project area cannot be made available to

Contractor for his activities due to operations being carried out by other

SECTION: D12
SHEET 6 OF 15
agencies, he shall suitably modify his sequence of operations so as to continue

work without interruption. Contractor shall work in coordination with other
agencies working on the project site and plan his work suitably so as not to
hinder the progress of construction at site.
7.0
ACCEPTANCE OF STEEL, ITS HANDLING & STORAGE
7.1
The fabricated material received at erection site shall be verified with respect of
marking on the key plan/ marking plan or shipping list.
7.2
Any material found damaged or defective shall be stacked separately and the
damaged or defective material shall be painted in distinct colour for
identification and the same shall be brought to the notice of Engineer.
7.3
No dragging of steel shall be permitted. All fabricated items shall be stored 300
mm above ground on suitable packing to avoid damage. It shall be stored in
the order required for erection, with erection marks visible. All storage areas
shall be prepared and maintained by Contractor. Steel shall not be stored in the
vicinity of areas where excavation or grading will be done and, if so stored
temporarily, this shall be removed by Contractor well before such excavation
and/ or grading commences to a safe distance to avoid burial under debris.
7.4
Scratched or abraded steel shall be given a coat of primer after unloading and
handling prior to erection. All milled and machined surfaces shall be properly
protected from rust/ corrosion by suitable coating and also from getting
damaged.
8.0
ANCHOR BOLTS, EMBEDDED PARTS & FOUNDATIONS
8.1
Contractor shall carefully check the location and layout of anchor bolts
embedded in foundations constructed by others, to ensure that the structures
can be properly erected as shown on the drawings. Any discrepancy in the
anchor bolts/ foundation shall be reported to Engineer.
8.2
Contractor shall carefully check the actual dimensions of structures and also
the location, level and sizes of embedded parts a) in the RC beam/ column
and/ or b) cleats/ plates provided in steel beam/ column constructed by others
to receive structures covered under this scope of work. Contractor shall take
note of discrepancies if any, shall be reported to Engineer and fabricate the
structures covered under this contract suitably before the commencement of
erection.
8.3
Levelling of column bases to the required elevation may be done either by

providing shims or three nuts on the upper threaded portion of the anchor bolt.
All shim stock required for keeping the specified thickness of grout and in
connection with erection of structures on foundations, crane brackets or at any

SECTION: D12
SHEET 7 OF 15
other locations shall be of good M.S. plates and shall be supplied by Contractor
at his cost.
8.4
A certain amount of cleaning of foundations and preparing the area is

considered normal and shall be carried out by Contractor at no extra cost.
8.5
Where beams bear in pockets or on walls, bearing plates shall be set and
levelled as part of the work. All grouting under column base plates or beam
bearing plates will be carried out by Contractor, unless the grouting is
specifically excluded from the Contractors scope.
9.0
ASSEMBLY & CONNECTIONS
9.1
Field connections may be effected either by bolting, welding or by use of high

strength friction grip bolts as shown in the design and erection drawings.
9.2
All bolts, nuts, washers, rivets, electrodes required for field connections shall
be supplied by Contractor free of cost. The materials shall have prior approval
from the PURCHASER and necessary test certificates shall be furnished to
Engineers approval. Materials shall be procured from the reputed
manufacturers with prior approval from PURCHASER.
9.3
All assembling shall be carried out on a level platform.
9.4
Drifts shall be used only for drawing the work to proper position and must not
be used to such an extent as to damage the holes. Size of drifts larger than the
nominal diameter of hole shall not be used. Any damaged holes or burrs must
be rectified to the satisfaction of Engineer.
9.5
Corrections of minor misfits and reasonable amount of reaming shall be

considered as a part of erection. Any error in the shop, which prevents proper
fit on a moderate amount of reaming and slight chipping or cutting, shall be
immediately reported to Engineer.
10.0
ERECTION
10.1
Erection work shall be taken up after receipt of clearance from the

PURCHASER.
10.2
All structural steel shall be erected as per approved Design/ fabrication

drawings.
10.3
For safety requirements during erection, provisions of IS: 7205, IS: 7969 and
other relevant codes shall be strictly followed.

SECTION: D12
SHEET 8 OF 15
10.4
Erection shall be carried out with the help of maximum mechanization possible.
Prior to commencement of erection, all the erection equipment, tools, tackles,
ropes, etc shall be tested for their load carrying capacity. Such tests may be
repeated at intermediate stages also if considered necessary. Frequent visual
inspection shall be done of all vulnerable areas and components to detect
damages or distress in the erection equipments, if any.
10.5
Temporary bracing, whenever required, shall be provided to sustain forces due

to erection loads and equipment, etc. Erected parts of the structure shall
remain stable during all stages of erection when subjected to action of wind,
dead weight and erection forces etc. Such bracings shall be left in place as
long as may be required for safety and stability. Specified sequence of erection
of vertical and horizontal structural members shall be followed.
10.6
Erected members shall be held securely in place by bolts to take care of dead
load, wind/ seismic load and erection load.
10.7
All structural members shall be erected with erection marks in the same relative
position as shown in the appropriate erection and shop drawings.
10.8
All connections shall achieve free expansion and contraction of structures

wherever provided.
10.9
No final bolting or welding of joints shall be done until the structure has been
properly aligned and approved by Engineer.
10.10
For positioning beams, columns and other steel members, the use of steel
sledges is not permitted.
Instrumental checking of correctness of initial setting out of structures and
adjustment of alignment shall be carried out in sequence and at different
stages as required. The final levelling and alignment shall be carried out
immediately after completion of each section of a building.
10.11
The Contractor shall design, manufacture, erect and provide false work,
staging, temporary support, etc required for safe and accurate erection of
structural steelwork and fully responsible for the adequacy of the same.
10.12
The Contractor shall also provide facilities such as adequate temporary access,
ladders, gangways, tools & tackles, instruments, etc to PURCHASER for his
inspection at any stage during erection.

SECTION: D12
SHEET 9 OF 15
10.13
Proper size steel cable slings, etc shall be used for hoisting. Guys shall not be
anchored to existing structures, foundations, etc unless so permitted by
Engineer in writing. Care shall be taken to see that ropes in use are always in
good condition.
10.14
Steel columns in the basement, if any, are to be lowered and erected carefully
with the help of a crane and/ or derrick without damaging the basement walls,
steel or floor.
10.15
Structural steel frames shall be erected plumb and true. Frames shall be lifted
at such points that they are not liable to buckle and deform. Trusses shall be
lifted only at node points. All steel columns and beams shall be checked for
plumb and level individually before and after connections are made.
10.16
Chequered plates shall be fixed to supporting members by welding or by

countersunk bolts as shown/ specified in relevant drawings and/ or as directed
by Engineer. The edges shall be made smooth and no burrs or jagged ends
shall be left. While splicing, care should be taken so that there is continuity in
pattern between the two portions. Care should also be taken to avoid distortion
of the plate while welding. The erection of chequered plates shall include the
following:
a. Welding of stiffening angles/ vertical stiffening ribs as per drawings
b. Cutting to size and making holes to required shape wherever necessary to
allow service lines such as piping, cables etc to pass through
c. Splicing as shown in relevant drawings
d. Smoothening of edges
e. Fixing of chequered plates by welding and/ or countersunk bolts
f. Providing lifting hooks for ease of lifting.
10.17
Cutting, heating or enlarging holes may be carried out only with prior written
approval from the Engineer.
11.0
FIELD CONNECTIONS
11.1
Assembly by Permanent Bolts
11.1.1
The number of washers on permanent bolts shall not be more than two (2) and
not less than one (1) for the nuts and one (1) for the bolt head.

SECTION: D12
SHEET 10 OF 15
11.1.2
Only wooden rams or mallet shall be used in forcing members into position in
order to protect the metal from injury or shock.
11.1.3
Where bolting is specified on the drawing, the bolts shall be tightened to the
maximum limit. The threaded portion of each bolt shall project through the nut
by at least one thread. Tapered washers shall be provided for all heads and
nuts to achieve uniform bearing on sloping surface.
11.1.4
To prevent loosening of nuts, spring washers or lock-nuts shall be provided as

specified in the design/ shop drawings.
11.1.5
All machine fitted bolts shall be perfectly tight and the ends shall be checked to
prevent nuts from becoming loose. No unfilled holes shall be left in any part of
the structure.
11.2
Assembly by Welding
All field assembly by welding shall be executed in accordance with the
requirements for shop fabrication. Where the steel has been delivered painted,
the paint shall be removed before field welding for a distance of at least 50 mm
on either side of the joints to be welded.
11.3
Assembly by High Strength Friction Grip Bolts (HSFG Bolts).
11.3.1
Assembly of structures with HSFG bolts shall conform to IS: 4000.
11.3.2
The mating surface shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of

design in order to achieve required properties to develop adequate friction
between the surfaces.
11.3.3
The mating surfaces shall be absolutely free from grease. lubricant, dust, rust,
etc and shall be thoroughly cleaned before assembly.
11.3.4
The nuts shall be tightened up to the specific torque with the help of torque wrench or by half - turn method with the help of pneumatic wrench lever.
11.3.5
The direction of tightening of the nuts shall be from the middle towards the
periphery of assembly.
11.1.6
After desired tightening the bolt heads, nuts and edges of the mating surfaces
shall be sealed with a coat of paint to obviate entry of moisture.
12.0
INSPECTION

SECTION: D12
SHEET 11 OF 15
OWNER / CIPL/ PURCHASER / CONSULTANT or their authorised

representatives shall have free access to all parts of the job during erection and
all erection shall be subjected to their approval. In case of faulty erection, all
dismantling and re-erection required will be at Contractor's cost. No paint shall
be applied to rivet heads or field welds or bolts until these have been approved
by PURCHASER.
13.0
TOLERANCES
Tolerances mentioned below shall be achieved after the entire structure or part
thereof is in line, level and plumb. The tolerances specified below do not apply
to steel structures where the deviations from true position are intimately linked
with and directly influence technological process. In such cases, the tolerances
on erected steel structures shall be as per recommendations of process
technologists/ suppliers which will be indicated in the drawings.
13.1
COLUMNS
13.1.1
Deviation of column axes at foundation top level with respect to true axes
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
(a)
In longitudinal direction
5 mm
(b)
In lateral direction
5 mm
Deviation in the level of bearing surface of

columns at foundation top with respect to :
true level
5 mm
Out of plumbness (verticality) of column axis from true vertical axis, as

measured at column top
(a)
For columns up to and including 15

meter in height
1/1000 of column height in

mm or 15 mm whichever is
less
(b)
For columns exceeding 15 meter in

height

less
Deviation in straightness in longitudinal :

and transverse planes of column at any
point along the height

less

SECTION: D12
SHEET 12 OF 15
13.1.5
Difference in erected position of adjacent :

pair of columns along length or across
width of building prior to connecting width
of building prior to connecting trusses/
beams with respect to true distance
10 mm
13.1.6
Deviation in any bearing or seating level :

with respect to true level
5 mm
13.1.7
Deviation in differences in bearing levels of :

a member on adjacent pair of columns
both across and along the building
10 mm
13.2
Trusses and Beams
13.2.1
Shift at the centre of span of top chord :

member with respect to the vertical plane
passing through the centre of bottom
chord
1/250 of height of truss in

less
13.2.2
Lateral shift of top chord of truss at the :

centre of span from the vertical plane
whichever passing through the centre of
supports of the truss
1/1500 of span of truss in

mm or 15 mm is less
13.2.3
Lateral shift in location of truss from its true :

vertical position
10 mm
13.2.4
Lateral shift in location of purlin true :

position
5 mm
13.2.5
Deviation in difference of bearing levels of

trusses or beams from the true difference
i) 20 mm for trusses
ii) For beams:
Depth < 1800mm: 6 mm
Depth > 1800mm: 10 mm

SECTION: D12
SHEET 13 OF 15
13.2.6
Deviation in sag in chords and diagonals :

of truss between node points
1/1500 of length in mm or 10
mm whichever is smaller
13.2.7
Deviation in sweep of trusses, beams, etc :

in the horizontal plane
1/1000 of span in mm subject

to a maximum of 10 mm
13.3
Crane Girders & Rails
13.3.1
Shift in the centre line of crane rail with :

respect to centre line of web of crane
girder
5 mm
13.3.2
Shift in plan of alignment of crane rail with :

respect to true axis of crane rail at any
point
5 mm
13.3.3
Difference in alignment of crane rail in plan :

measured between any two points 2
meters apart along rail
1 mm
13.3.4
Deviation in crane track with respect to

time gauge
(a)
For track gauges up to and including :

15 meters
5 mm
(b)
For track gauges more than 15 :

meters
[5 + 0.25 (S-15)] where S in

meters is true gauge
13.3.5
Deviation in the crane rail level at any :

distance point from true level
1/1200 of the gauge or 10

mm whichever is less
13.3.6
Difference in the crane rail actual levels :

between any two points 2 meters apart
along the rail length
2 mm
13.3.7
Difference in levels between crane track rails at

SECTION: D12
SHEET 14 OF 15
(a)
Supports of crane girders
15 mm
(b)
Mid span of crane girders
20 mm
2 mm subject to grinding of
surfaces for smooth transition
13.3.8
Relative shift of crane rail surfaces at a

joint in plan and elevation
13.3.9
Relative shift in the location of crane stops :

(end buffers) along the crane tracks with
track gauge S in mm
13.4
Chimneys and Towers
13.4.1
Out of plumbness (verticality) from the true :

vertical axis
13.5
Bunkers
13.5.1
Deviation in length of bunker from true :

length
1/1000 of length in mm
13.5.2
Deviation in width of bunker from true :

width
1/1000 of width in mm
13.5.3
Deviation in height of bunker from true :

height
1/500 of height in mm
13.5.4
Deviation in diagonal length in any :

horizontal cross-section from the true
diagonal length
1/500 of diagonal length in

mm
14.0
PAINTING
1/1000 of track gauge S in

mm subject to maximum of
20 mm
1/1000 of the height of the

chimney or tower in mm

SECTION: D12
SHEET 15 OF 15
After steel has been erected, all bare and abraded spots, field welds, bolt
heads and nuts shall be spot painted. Before paint is applied, the surface shall
be dry and free from dust, dirt, scale and grease.
15.0
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
15.1
For the purpose of payment, the weight of the actual, completed structures
shall be calculated from the approved fabrication drawings for different items of
work. Contractor shall submit to PURCHASER relevant material list containing
weight of each item.
15.2
No allowance will be permitted for weights of bolts, washers, screws, etc in

calculating the weight of the completed structure. No allowances will be
permitted for galvanizing, welding or for rolling margins. One tonne for the
purpose of payment shall mean ONE METRIC TONNE i.e., 1000 kg.
15.3
The weight of a member made out of standard rolled sections such as beams,
channels, angles, etc shall be based on the weight of the member given in IS:
808, without deducting for holes, notches, bevel cuts, etc. Where a component
consists of a cut joist or channel, the full weight of the rolled section shall be
considered only if more than half the depth of the section is used. Otherwise
only half the section unit weight shall be taken. Deductions shall be made in the
weight of gussets/ plates including chequered plates for skew cuts, notches
and openings of 900 sqcm or larger.
15.4
For gussets/ plates used in trusses, bracings, columns, beams, etc the area
shall be that of the minimum circumscribing rectangle, except as stated in
clause 15.3 above.
15.5
The weight of any built-up member shall be separated into the weight of each
component.
15.6
Erection bolts installed by erector shall be left in position on completion of

erection; however, no additional payment shall be made either for supply or
use of such bolts. If erection bolts are removed after erection is complete, holes
shall be plug welded and ground smooth. No extra payment shall be made for
such plug welding.
16.0
CLEAN UP OF WORK SITE

During erection, the Contractor shall without any additional payment, at all
times keep the working and storage areas used by him, free from accumulation
of waste materials or rubbish. Before completion of erection, he shall remove or
dispose of in a satisfactory manner all temporary structures, waste and debris
and leave the premises in a condition satisfactory to PURCHASER.

SECTION: D13
SHEET 1 OF 16
PAINTING OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
1.0
SCOPE
1.0
This specification covers the general requirements for shop and field painting for
Structural Steel works using hot/ cold rolled steel sections joined by using bolting
and/ or welding.
1.1
Briefly the scope of works covered under this specification are as follows:
i.
Supply of all primers, paints and all other materials required for painting other
than PURCHASER's supply.
ii. Furnishing of all labour, materials, tools & equipment and the performance of
all operations and incidentals necessary for surface preparation, painting,
handling, storing, transporting, scaffolding, etc.
iii. Testing of paints as per the relevant codes in the Standard Laboratory
identified by the PURCHASER and furnishing of required test certificates for
PURCHASERs approval.
iv. Repair work of damaged/ pre-erection/ fabrication shop primer and weld
joints at field.
v. Inspection of painting system after its application to conform to the
specification requirement.
vi. Any other requirement as required for satisfactory completion of specified
work.
1.2
Reference shall be made to Data Sheet-A for Paint system and Data Sheet - B
for the structures covered in the scope of works.
2.0
EXCLUSIONS
This specification excludes paintings of the following structures/ equipments:
i.
Mechanical & electrical equipment and parts
ii. Buried & Overhead piping works

iii. Storage tank
iv. Insulated parts
v. Any other items of work specifically excluded in the scope of works.

SECTION: D13
SHEET 2 OF 16
3.0
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

The pertinent clauses of the following Indian/ International Codes, Standards and
Specification (latest editions including all applicable official amendments,
reaffirmations and revisions) shall apply to the material and workmanship
covered by this specification. In the event of the conflict of certain requirements
between this specification and the codes referred herein, this specification shall
govern.
It is not the intent to specify herein all the codes and standards required for the
satisfactory completion of work. The list of codes and standards indicates certain
primary codes & standards and not all the codes required for the work under the
contract. It is understood that all the pertinent codes and standards shall form the
part of this specification whether explicitly indicated or not.
3.1
3.2
Indian Standard Codes:

i.
IS: 5 -
Colours for ready mixed Paints and Enamels
ii.
IS: 101 -
Methods of sampling and test for Paints, Varnishes and

related products (all parts & all sections)
iii.
IS: 104 -
Ready mixed paint, brushing, zinc chrome, priming
iv.
IS: 158 -
Ready Mixed paint, Brushing, Bituminous, Black, Lead

free, Acid, Alkali and heat resisting
v.
IS: 1303 -
Glossary of Terms relating to paints
vi.
IS: 1477 -
Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in

Buildings
vii.
IS: 2932 -
Enamel, synthetic, exterior:(a) undercoating (b) finishing Specification
viii.
IS: 9954 -
Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting of

Steel Surfaces
ix.
IS: 13183 -
Aluminium paint, Heat resistant - Specification
International Standard Codes:

i.
SSPC -
Society for Protective Coatings (USA) Vol. - I & II
ii.
NACE -
National Association of Corrosion Engineers, USA

(NACE)

SECTION: D13
SHEET 3 OF 16
iii.
ISO: 8501 -
Preparation of Steel Substrates before application of

paints and related products. Visual assessment of
surface cleanliness(Part - 1 & 2)
iv.
ISO: 8502 -

paints and related products - Tests for assessment of
surface cleanliness .(Part - 1 & 4)
v.
ISO: 8503 -

paints and related products - Surface roughness
characteristics of blast - cleaned steel substrates (Part 1 & 2)
vi.
ISO: 8504 -

paints and related products - Surface preparation
methods (Part - 1 & 3)
vii.
ISO: 12944 - Paints & Varnishes - Corrosion Protection of Steel

Structures by Protective Paint System
4.0
HEALTH, SAFETY AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
4.1
The work covered in this specification, shall comply with all relevant government
and local laws, regulations and standards. For subjects not covered by
regulations, codes, standards or specifications, the materials and construction
shall be based on good engineering practice, subject to approval by
PURCHASER.
4.2
Contractor shall ensure that all health and safety regulations are observed for the
erection of scaffolding and use of the selected paint material.
4.3
All necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure the safety of personal and
property. Extreme caution shall be used when working with oil or oil-based
paints, cleaning fluids, etc especially in close proximity to oxygen piping or
oxygen equipment. Heavy concentrations of volatile or toxic fumes must be
avoided and in confined areas, blowers or exhaust fans shall be used.
4.5
Rags and other waste material soiled with paints, thinners or solvents shall be
kept in tightly closed metal containers while on the jobsite and not in use. Legal
disposal of waste materials outside plant site premises is Contractors
responsibility.

SECTION: D13
SHEET 4 OF 16
5.0
SURFACE PREPARATION OF STEEL

One or more of the following methods of surface preparation shall be followed,
depending on condition of steel surface and as specified data sheet. Engineer
reserve the right to instruct the type of surface preparation depending upon the
condition of material. Recommended methods of surface preparation of steel
briefly are as under:
a) Solvent Cleaning
b) Manual or hand tool cleaning
c) Mechanical or power tool cleaning
d) Abrasive Blast cleaning.
It is necessary that the Contractor may have to resort to any one or combination
of the above method of surface preparation to achieve the required acceptable
standard. Hence the rate quoted shall take into account for such preparation.
5.1
Solvent Cleaning:
All contaminants like oil, grease removal shall be carried out either by special
solvents or by degreasing agents. Application and cleaning of solvents shall be
as per manufacturers instructions and shall be in accordance with SSPC - SP1.
5.2
Manual or Hand Tool Cleaning:

This method of cleaning shall be used to remove all loose mill scale, loose rust,
loose paint and other loose detrimental foreign matter by use of non-powered
hand tools. The minimum acceptable standards in case of manual or hand tool
cleaning shall be in accordance with ISO: 8501 - St2/ SSPC - SP2.
5.3
Mechanical or Power Tool Cleaning:

This method of cleaning shall be used to remove all mill scale, rust, paint and
other detrimental foreign matter by use of power assisted hand tools. The
minimum acceptable standards in case of power tool cleaning shall be in
accordance with ISO: 8501 - St3 / SSPC - SP3.
5.4
Abrasive Blast Cleaning (Shot Blasting/ Grit Blasting):
5.4.1
Shot/ Grit blasting shall be resorted to only after removal of grease, oil and other
contaminants as per SP-1. Special care shall be taken on weld areas to remove
flux and spatter. Precautions shall be taken when grit or shot blasting of light
gauge steel surfaces, to ensure that buckling does not occur due to continuous

SECTION: D13
SHEET 5 OF 16
impingement of grit or steel shots under high velocity. Surface anchor profiles
shall be measured by Testex tape press-o-film and the finished surfaces shall
conform to the requirements of ISO: 8501- Sa 2/ SSPC - SP10.
5.4.2
Blast cleaning shall not be performed where dust can contaminate surfaces
undergoing such cleaning or during humid weather conditions having humidity
exceeding 85%.
5.5
Tests on Surface Preparations:

The following inspection and tests shall be performed on the steel surfaces
subjected to surface preparation. Test/ inspection reports shall be submitted to
PURCHASER for his approval and acceptance:
i.
Visual examination of surface preparation with comparators.
ii. Profile check of the prepared surface with suitable profilometer", eg.:
TESTEX method.
6.0
PAINT MATERIAL
6.1
Procurement:
All types of paint required for the work shall be procured from the reputed
manufacturers. List of some of the manufacturers are as under. However
contractor shall obtain the detailed list of approved paint manufacturers from the
PURCHASER before initiating the procurement action.
i.
Asian Paints (I) Ltd.
ii. Berger Paints Ltd.

iii. Cipy Polyurethane Pvt. Ltd.
6.2
Storage:
The Paint material shall be stored strictly in accordance with the instructions of
the paint manufacture. In general painting materials should be stored in dry, cool,
well ventilated and frost free area.
6.3
Packing:
All paints delivered to the fabrication shop/ site shall be in original sealed
container, as packed by the manufacturer. Paint containers shall clearly mark
with paint manufacturers name, batch number, date of manufacture, shelf life
and a clear indication of the type and colour of the product.

SECTION: D13
SHEET 6 OF 16
6.4
Mixing:
Paint shall be thoroughly mixed prior to application. Mixing shall be done in a
well-ventilated, clean and dust-free area. Paint shall be mixed by rotating power
mixers or rolling rigs, until a uniform consistency is achieved.
Multiple pack paint materials shall be mixed in accordance and under the
conditions as specified by the paint manufacturer. Pot life as specified by the
paint manufacturer shall be strictly followed.
6.5
Thinner and Solvents:

Only additives, thinners, solvents, etc as recommended by the paint
manufacturer shall be used. A possible extension of the pot life by additions of
thinners is prohibited.
6.6
Tests on Paint:
In order to ensure that the supplied paint meets the stipulations, samples of paint
shall be tested in laboratories to establish quality of paint with respect to
i.
Viscosity
ii. Adhesion/ bond of paint in steel surfaces

iii. Adhesion/ simulated salt spray test
iv. Chemical analysis (percentage of solids by weight)
v. Normal wear resistance as encountered during handling & erection
vi. Resistance against exposure to acid fumes etc.
Alternatively manufacturers test certificates shall be furnished by the Painting
Contractor in respect of above tests for PURCHASERs approval and
acceptance. PURCHASER reserves the right to test the paint material either
before the commencement of work or during the progress of work, if in his
opinion the paints supplied are of inferior quality and does not meet the codal
requirements.
6.7
Paint Sample:
Before buying the paint in bulk, it is recommended to obtain sample of paint and
establish Control Area of Painting. On control area surface preparation, painting
shall be carried out in the presence of Engineer and the Manufacturer of paint.

SECTION: D13
SHEET 7 OF 16
6.8
Finishing Paint:
Colour/ Shade of the finishing paint shall be as per the choice of the
PURCHASER and Contractor shall obtain prior approval before procurement
action is initiated.
7.0
PAINT APPLICATION
Painting shall be carried out by any one or the combination of the following
method of application to suit the site condition and the type of paint being used.
Manufacturers recommended method of application shall be strictly followed.
i.
Brush Application
ii. Roller Application

iii. Spray Application
7.1
Brush Application:
Brush application of paint shall be in accordance with the following:
i.
Brushes shall be of a style and quality that will enable proper application of
paint
ii. Round, Oval or Wide flat brushes shall be used depending upon the surface
irregularity, rough or pitted steel, large flat painting areas, etc.
iii. There shall be a minimum of brush marks left in the applied paint.
iv. Surfaces not accessible to brushes shall be painted by spray.
7.2
Roller Application:
Suitable rollers of different nap length to suit varying surface roughness shall be
used. Rollers are not generally recommended for application of primers. Roller
application shall only be used if the first or priming coat of paint has been applied
by brush or other means. Manufacturers recommendation shall be strictly
followed for roller applied paints.
7.3
Spray Application:
7.3.1
Airless or pneumatic spray application shall be in accordance with the following:

SECTION: D13
SHEET 8 OF 16
i.
Airless spray application shall be as per steel structure paint Manual Vol. 1 &
Vol. 2 SSPC, USA.
ii. Spraying shall be carried out keeping the spray gun at the minimum suitable
distance from the work piece and consistently at 90 to the surface being
painted.
iii. Correct spray tips, air pressures, etc as recommended by the equipment
supplier shall be used.
7.3.2
Air spray application shall be in accordance with the following:

i.
The equipment used shall be suitable for the intended purpose, shall be
capable of properly atomizing the paint to be applied and shall be equipped
with suitable pressure regulators and gauges.
ii.
Appropriate pressure and nozzles shall be those recommended by the

manufacturer of the equipment for the material being sprayed. The equipment
shall be kept in satisfactory condition to permit proper paint application.
iii.
Correct combination of air volume, air pressure and fluid flow to give good
atomization shall be ensured to get a defect free painted surface.
iv.
Traps or separators shall be provided to remove oil and condensed water

from the air. These traps or separators must be of adequate size and must be
drained periodically during operations. The air from the spray gun impinging
against the surface shall show no condensed water or oil.
v.
Ingredients shall be kept properly mixed in the spray pots or containers

during application by continuous mechanical agitation.
vi.
Spray equipment shall be kept sufficiently clean so that dirt, dried paint and
other foreign materials are not deposited in the paint film. Any solvents left in
the equipment shall be completely removed before applying paint to the
surface being painted.
7.3.3
Selection of type of spray application shall depend upon the type of paint coating
being used. At all time paint manufacturers recommendation shall be strictly
followed.
8.0
COATING PROCEDURE
8.1
Compatibility
General Compatibility between primer, intermediate and top coats, as applicable
for individual painting system shall be established through the paint manufacturer

SECTION: D13
SHEET 9 OF 16
supplying the paints. Primer and finishing paint for the entire project shall
preferably be procured from the same manufacturer. Mixing of material from
different manufacturers is strictly prohibited.
8.2
Surface shall not be coated in rain, wind, when steel surface temperature is less
than 5 C or when the relative humidity is greater than 85%.
8.3
Applied paint system shall be allowed to cure at ambient and surface

temperatures between 10 C and 60 C with relative humidity below 85%. All
paint shall be air curing.
8.4
A suitable test area (approx 0.5 m2) shall be painted with agreed paint system.
The test area shall be fully coated with all coats of the agreed coating system
using the tools and equipment to be used for the actual coating work. The
painted test area shall be maintained for the duration of the project. Painting on
test piece shall be carried out such that all the coats shall be made visible for
reference at all time.
8.5
Structural steel shall be preferably prime coated at shop and subsequent finish
coats shall be carried out at site after the alignment and erection is complete.
Portions of structural steel members to be embedded into the concrete shall not
be painted.
8.6
Surfaces inaccessible after assembly shall receive two coats of primer prior to
assembly.
8.7
Surfaces inaccessible after erection, including top surfaces of floor beams

supporting grating/ chequered plate/ RC Slabs shall receive one additional coat
of finish paint over and above the number of coats specified prior to erection.
8.8
Each coat of paint material shall be applied as continuous film uniform thickness
free of pores. Any spot or areas missed in application shall be recoated and
permitted to dry before the next coat is applied. Applied paint should have the
desired wet film thickness.
8.9
Each coat shall be in proper state of cure or dryness before the application of
succeeding coat. Material shall be considered dry for recoating when an
additional coat can be applied without development of any detrimental film
irregularities such as lifting or loss of adhesion of the under coat. Manufacturers
instruction shall be strictly followed for inter-coat intervals.
8.10
No paint shall be force dried under conditions which will cause checking,
wrinkinling, blistering formation of pores or detrimentally affect the condition of
the paint.

SECTION: D13
SHEET 10 OF 16
8.11
No drier shall be added to paint on the job unless specifically called for in the
manufacturer's specification for the paint.
8.12
Paint shall be protected from rain, condensation, contamination, snow and

freezing until dry to the fullest extent practicable.
8.13
Blast cleaned surface shall be coated with one coat of primer before surface
degradation occurs but in no case later than 3 hrs. Irrespective of the method of
surface preparation, the first coat of primer shall be applied not later than 2-3
hours after preparation and on dry surface.
8.14
When the successive coat of the same colour is specified, alternate coat shall be
tinted as far as practicable; sufficiently to produce enough contrast to indicate
complete coverage of the surface. The tinting material shall be compatible with
the material and not detrimental to its service life.
8.15
All field welded areas on shop painted item shall be mechanically cleaned
(including the weld area proper, adjacent areas contaminated by weld spatter or
fumes and areas where existing primer, intermediate/ finishing paint is burnt).
Subsequently, new primer and finishing coats of paint shall be applied as per
painting specification.
8.16
Care shall be taken to protect adjacent equipment, piping, structures, etc from
spillage and spatter during field painting by use of adequate temporary covers. If
surfaces are accidentally spattered or sprayed, the paint shall be immediately
and thoroughly removed. For cleaning of spillages an inert absorbent material
shall be used
8.17
All structures shall receive appropriate number of primer, intermediate and

finishing coats in order to achieve overall DFT as per the drawings/
specifications/ data sheets.
9.0
PAINTING SYSTEM
The recommended painting system of all Structural Steel Works covering surface
preparation, application of Primer coats, Intermediate coats (if specified) and
Final coats to develop required minimum DFT shall be as per DATA SHEET.
10.0
REPAIR OF COATED SURFACE
10.1
Wherever shop primer painting is scratched, abraded or damaged, the surfaces

shall be thoroughly cleaned using emery paper and power driven wire brush
wherever warranted, and touched up with corresponding primer. Touching up
paint shall be matched and blended to eliminate conspicuous marks.

SECTION: D13
SHEET 11 OF 16
10.2
If more than 30% area of the painted surface of an item requires repair, the entire
surface shall be repainted. In such an event no extra payment will be permitted.
11.0
TEST ON PAINTING SYSTEM

Following inspection and tests shall be performed during and after the application
of paint system.
i.
Wet film thickness (WFT) spot checks shall be carried out during the course
of painting operation to ensure that film thickness is being maintained.
ii. Dry film thickness (DFT) check of intermediate and final coating layers in
accordance with the specification and/ or paint manufacturers
recommendation.
iii. Quality of adhesion between the coating system and the steel substrate and
of the adhesion between the coatings layers shall not be less than those
specified in the Codes/ Standards.
iv. Porosity Check: Holiday detection test shall be carried out and all indications
shall be repaired as per approved repair procedures.
12.0
FINAL INSPECTION
12.1
As part of the Quality Assurance, a final inspection in the presence of the

representatives of PURCHASER and Contractor shall be conducted prior to the
final acceptance of the paint work. Part of this final inspection checks shall
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
12.2
Visual check of the appearance

Checks on DFTs of the total applied coating system
Shade verification
Holiday Testing
Scratch Test
Adhesion test.
As part of acceptance procedure, a report shall be prepared that shall include

i.
General:
Names of the Painting Contractor and the responsible personal
Scope of work
Dates when the work was carried out
Copy of the work and quality plan
Deviations from this Specification and/ or the quality plan
ii. Inspection equipment

Type and calibration of instruments used

SECTION: D13
SHEET 12 OF 16
iii. Surface Preparation
Condition of surface before preparation

Checks on the requirements as specified for cleaned surface
iv. Coating application

Information on coating systems being applied (i.e., product names,
DFTs)
Checks on requirements as specified for coating application
Check on dry film thicknesses of the total coating system applied
v. Conditions
Checks on humidity, dew point and substrate temperature
vi. Inspection reports
Copy of the inspection reports of the Contractor
Inspection from an independent third party
13.0
DOCUMENTATION
Contractor shall keep records and furnish the following documents to the
PURCHASER.
i.
A written quality plan with procedure for qualification trials and for the actual
work.
ii. Daily progress report with details of weather conditions, particular of

applications, number of coats and type of material applied, anomalies,
progress of work versus program.
iii. Results of measurement of temperatures relative humidity, surface profile,
film thickness, holiday detection, adhesion tests with signature of appropriate
authority.
iv. Particulars of surface preparation and paint application during trials and
during the work.
v. Details of non-compliance, rejects and repairs.
vi. Type of testing equipments and calibration.
vii. Code and batch numbers of paint materials used including shelf life.
viii. Visual examination of surface preparation compared with the standards.

SECTION: D13
SHEET 13 OF 16
ix. Profile check of the prepared surface with suitable profilometer".

x. Dry film thickness check of intermediate and final coating layers, in
accordance with the specification and/ or paint manufacturers
recommendation.
xi. Checks/ tests carried out as per clauses above.
14.0
GUARANTEE
14.1
The paint system shall provide sufficient protection of the underlying steel
surface against the attack of the environment, other than mechanical damage,
chemical spillage as result of operational activities or other unusual occurrences
from the outside caused by others.
14.2
The Contractor is fully responsible for the quality of the work and for all related
QA/ QC activities as indicated in the specification.
14.3
The Contractor shall guarantee quality of their coating works for the period
specified in Data Sheet - B and for the coating condition as specified below.
14.4
The guarantee period starts from the date of acceptance of Contractors paint
work.
14.5
Initial acceptance of any new coating work by PURCHASER will not release the
Contractor of his obligation under this section until final inspection has been
carried out and acceptance of the completed work has been agreed in writing.
14.6
These guarantee clauses regarding coating specifications are prevailing and

supersede the warrantee requirements in General Conditions of Contract.
15.0
MEASUREMENT
Painting work shall not be measured separately, if primer painting and/or primer
and finish painting are already included in the scope of the item of work of
fabrication and erection of structural steel since the rate per ton of steel is
deemed to include for painting as specified.
In cases where primer and/ or finish painting work as specified is carried out on
erected structural steel executed by a different agency, the method of
measurement for painting shall be on the basis of tonnage of the steel erected.
For this purpose, the tonnage of erected steel as certified for payment to the
different agency shall be considered as the basis and no measurement will be
carried out separately.

SECTION: D13
SHEET 14 OF 16
DATA SHEET - A
PAINT SYSTEM
Paint
Surface
System Preparation
PS-1
PS-2
St-2
Primer Coat (m)

Inorganic Zinc
Phosphate
2x35=70
Inorganic Zinc Silicate
Sa 2
1x75 =75
PS-4
Sa 2
1x75 =75
PS-5
PS-6
Sa 2
1x75 =75
PS-7
Sa 2
1x75 =75
PS-8
Sa 2
1x75 =75
PS-9
Sa 2
1x75 =75
PS-10
PS-11
Sa 2
HB MIO
Epoxy
1x75=75
HB MIO
Epoxy
1x75=75
HB MIO
Epoxy
1x75=75
HB MIO
Epoxy
1x75=75
HB MIO
Epoxy
1x75 =75
1x75=75
HB MIO
Epoxy
1x100=100
HB MIO
Epoxy
2x75=150
Sa 2
1x75 =75
PS-12
HB MIO
Epoxy
1x75=75
HB MIO
Epoxy
1x75=75
Sa 2
1x75 =75
Sa 2
1x75 =75
Top Coat (m)
Synthetic Enamel
2x25=50
HB Epoxy Polyamide
(pigmented)
Sa 2
1x75 =75
PS-3
Intermediate
Coat (m)
Dft (m)
120
1x75=75
Aromatic Polyurathane
Acid Resistant
1x50=50
HB Epoxy Polyamide
(pigmented)
1x75=75
Aliphatic Polyurathene (UV
Resistant)
1x50=50
HB Epoxy Polyamide
(pigmented)
150
1x75=75
Acid Resistant
2x50=100
HB Epoxy Polyamide
(pigmented)
2x75=150
Resistant)
1x50=50
HB Epoxy Polyamide
(pigmented)
225
2x75=150
Acid Resistant
2x50=100
HB Epoxy Polyamide
(pigmented)
2x75=150
300
200
225
125
250
300
200
275
375

SECTION: D13
SHEET 15 OF 16

PS-13
Sa 2
PS-14
Sa 2
1x75 =75
or Epoxy Zinc Rich
1x75=75
HB MIO
Epoxy
1x75=75

Resistant)
2x50=100
Heat resistant -Silicon
Based aluminum paint
1x40=40
250
115
DATA SHEET-B
Recommended Painting System
Sl. No. Structures in the scope of work
1.
Station Building structures
2.
Mill & Bunker bay Structures
3.
Boiler structures
4.
ESP Structures
5.
Coal Handling Structures
6.
Ash Handling Structures
7.
DM Plant structures
8.
Pipe & Cable Racks
9.
Steel Chimney
10.
11.
Misc. Open Structures
12.
Other Buildings included in the scope

of work
Misc. covered building such as

Workshop, Store, Sheds, etc
Recommended Painting
System & surface
preparation as per Data
Sheet - A
Minimum
Guarantee
Period
in
Years

SECTION: D13
SHEET 16 OF 16

SECTION: D14
SHEET 1 OF 6
1.0
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for Anti-termite constructional
measures, chemical treatment of soils for the protection of buildings from attack
by subterranean termites, chemicals to be used with their minimum rates of
application and procedure to be followed while the building is under construction.
2.0

The following codes, standards and specifications are made a part of this
specification. All specifications, standards, codes of practices referred to herein
shall be the latest edition including all applicable official amendments and
revisions. In case of discrepancy between this specification and those referred to
herein, this specification shall govern:
i).
IS: 6313 (Part - I) :
Code of Practice for Anti-termite Measures in

Buildings Constructional Measures
ii).
IS: 6313 (Part - II) :
Pre-constructional Chemical Treatment Measures
iii).
IS: 8944
Specification
Concentrates
iv).
IS: 4015 (Part - I) :
Guide for Handling cases of Pesticide Poisoning

First Aid Measures
v).
IS: 4015 (Part - II) :
Symptoms, Diagnosis and Treatment
for
Chloropyrifos
Emusifiable
3.0
GENERAL
3.1
Contractor shall furnish all tools, plants. instruments, qualified supervisory

personnel, labour, materials, any temporary works, consumables, any and
everything necessary whether or no such items are specifically stated herein for
completion of the job in accordance with specification requirements.
3.2
All work shall be done in the order of progress required by PURCHASER's

construction programme.
3.3
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent any accident in

connection with the performance of the work.
3.4
On final completion of all work, Contractor shall leave the entire premises within
the site of his operation clean and free from all rubbish resulting from his
operation.

SECTION: D14
SHEET 2 OF 6
3.5
PURCHASER reserves the right to inspect, check and direct any or all operations
at any stage of the work and to require unsatisfactory work to be remedied at
Contractor's expense.
3.6
No work shall be carried out under unsuitable weather conditions viz., when
raining or when the soil is wet due to rain or sub-soil water.
3.7
Chemicals shall be brought to site of work in sealed original containers. The

materials shall be brought in; at a time, in adequate quantity to suffice for the
work. The material shall be kept in cool and locked stores. The empties shall not
be removed from the work site till the relevant item of work has been completed
and permission granted by PURCHASER.
3.8
Chemicals available in concentration forms with concentration indicated on the

sealed containers only shall be used. Chemicals shall be diluted with water in
required quantity before use, using graduated containers to achieve the desired
percentage of concentration:
Example:
Chloropyrifos 20
1 litre is diluted to 20 litres to give 1% emulsion.
4.0
PRE-CONSTRUCTIONAL CHEMICAL TREATMENT
4.1.1
Essential Requirements
Hand operated pressure pump with graduated containers shall be used to ensure
uniform spraying of the chemical. Continuous check shall be kept to ensure that
the specified quantity of chemical is used for the required area during the
operation.
4.1.2
Condition of Formation
The treated soil barrier shall be complete and continuous under the whole of the
structure to be protected. All foundations shall be fully surrounded by and in
close contact with the barrier of treated soil. Each part of the area treated shall
receive the specified dosage of chemical.
4.1.3
Time of Application
Soil treatment shall start when the foundation trenches and pits are ready to
receive mass concrete in foundations. Laying of mass concrete shall start when
the chemical emulsion has been absorbed by the soil and the surface is quite
dry. Treatment shall not be carried out when it is raining or soil is wet with rain or
sub-soil water. The foregoing also applies in the case of treatment to the filled
earth surface within the plinth before laying the sub-grade for the floor.

SECTION: D14
SHEET 3 OF 6
4.1.4
Disturbance
The treated soil barriers shall not be disturbed after they are formed. If by
chance, treated soil barriers are disturbed, immediate steps shall be taken to
restore the continuity and completeness of the barrier system.
4.2
Chemicals, Method and Rate of Application
4.2.1
Treatment of Mound and Soil

a) Mound Treatment
Termite mounds within the plinth and contingent apron area shall be
destroyed by means of insecticides in the form of water suspension or
emulsion which shall be poured into the mounds at several places after
breaking open the earthen structure and making holes with crow bars. For a
mound volume of about one (1) cum, four (4) litres of an emulsion in water of
the following shall be used:
0.5 percent Chloropyrifos
b) Soil Treatment
The following chemical (conforming to Indian Standard) in water emulsion
shall be applied uniformly over the area to be treated.
4.2.2
Chemical
Chloropyrifos
Concentration by weight
percent
1.0
Treatment of Column-pits, Wall-trenches and Basement excavations

a) The bottom surface and the sides (up to a height of about 300 mm) of the
excavations made for column pits, wall trenches and basements shall be
treated with the chemical at the rate of 5 litres per sqm of the surface area.
b) After the column foundations and the retaining walls of the basement come
up, the backfill in immediate contact with the foundation structure shall be
treated at the rate of 15 litres per sqm of the vertical surface of the substructure for each side. If water is used for ramming the earth-fill, the
chemical treatment shall be carried out after the ramming operation is done
by rodding the earth at 150 mm centres close to the wall surface and
spraying the chemical with the above dose. The earth shall be returned in
layers and the treatment shall be carried out in similar stages. The chemical
emulsion shall be directed towards the concrete or masonry surfaces of the

SECTION: D14
SHEET 4 OF 6
columns and walls so that the earth in contact with these surfaces is well
treated with the chemical.
c) In the case of R.C.C. framed structures with columns and plinth beams and
R.C.C. basements, with concrete mix 1:2:4 or richer, the treatment shall start
at the depth of 500 mm below ground level for columns and plinth beams.
From this depth the back-fill around the columns, beams and R.C.C
basement walls shall be treated at the rate of 15 litres/sqm of vertical surface.
The other details of treatment shall be as laid down in clause (b) above.
4.2.3
Treatment of Top Surface of Plinth Filling

The top surface of the filled earth within plinth beams/ walls shall be treated with
chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 litres per sqm of the surface before the sand
bed/ sub-grade is laid. Holes up to 50 to 70 mm deep at 150 mm centres both
ways shall be made with 12 mm dia. crow-bar on the surface to facilitate
saturation of the soil with chemical emulsion.
4.2.4
Treatment of Junction of Wall and Floor

To achieve continuity of vertical chemical barrier to inner wall surfaces from the
ground level, small channel 30 x 30 mm shall be made at all the junctions of wall
and columns with the floor (before laying the sub-grade) and rod holes made in
the channel up to ground level 150 mm apart and the chemical emulsion poured
along the channel at the rate of 15 litres/sqm of the vertical wall or column
surface so as to soak the soil right to the bottom. The soil shall be tamped back
into place after this operation.
4.2.5
Treatment of Soil under Apron along External Perimeter of Building

The top surface of the consolidated earth over which the apron is to be laid shall
be treated with chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 litres/sqm of the surface before
the apron is laid, by making rod holes 75 mm deep at 150 mm centres both
ways.
4.2.6
Treatment of Soil along External Perimeter of Building

After the building is complete, holes shall be made in the soil with iron rods along
the external perimeter of the building at interval of about 150 mm and depth 300
mm and these holes filled with chemical emulsion at the rate of 7.5 litres/metre of
perimeter of the external wall. If the earth outside the building is graded on
completion of building, this treatment shall be carried out on completion of such
grading. If the filling is more than 300 mm the external perimeter treatment shall
extend to the full depth of filling up to the original ground level so as to ensure
continuity of chemical barrier.

SECTION: D14
SHEET 5 OF 6
4.2.7
Treatment for Expansion Joints

Anti-termite treatment shall be supplemented by treating through the expansion
joint after the sub-grade has been laid at the rate of 2 litres per linear meter of
expansion joint.
4.2.8
Treatment of Soil Surrounding Pipes and Conduits

When pipes and conduits enter the soil inside the area of the foundations, the
soil surrounding the points of entry shall be loosened around each such pipe or
conduit for a distance of 150 mm and to a depth of 75 mm before treatment is
commenced. Whey they enter the soil external to the foundations, they shall be
similarly treated for a distance of over 300 mm unless they stand clear of the
walls of the building by about 75 mm.
5.0
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
5.1
All chemicals used for anti-termite treatment are poisonous and hazardous to
health. These chemicals can have an adverse effect upon health when absorbed
through the skin, inhaled as vapours or spray mists or swallowed. Person using
or handling these chemicals should be warned of these dangers and advised that
absorption through the skin is most likely source of accident poisoning. They
should be cautioned to observe carefully the safety precautions given below.
5.2
These chemicals are usually brought to site in the form of emulsifiable

concentrates. The containers should be clearly labelled and should be stored
carefully so that children and pet cannot get at them. They shall be kept securely
closed.
5.3
Particular care shall be taken to prevent skin contact with concentrates.

Prolonged exposure to dilute emulsions shall also be avoided. Workers shall
wear clean clothing and wash thoroughly with soap and water, especially before
eating and smoking. In the event of severe contamination, clothing shall be
removed at once and the skin washed with soap and water. If chemicals splash
into eyes they shall be flushed with plenty of soap and water and immediate
medical attention shall be sought.
5.4
The concentrates are oil solutions and present a fire hazard owing to the use of
petroleum solvents. Flames shall not be allowed during mixing.
5.5
Care shall be taken in the application of chemicals to see that they are not
allowed to contaminate wells or springs which serve as source of drinking water.
6.0
MEASUREMENTS

SECTION: D14
SHEET 6 OF 6
The measurements shall be made in sqm on the basis of plinth area of the
building at ground floor only for all operations described above. Nothing extra
shall be measured.
7.0
RATE
The rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the
operations described above including making holes and refilling and making
good the same.

SECTION: E
SHEET 1 OF 38
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
1.0
SCOPE OF CONTRACT
The scope of this Contract covers General Civil & Structural Works for 3x660
MW Super Critical TPP to be installed at Lalitpur, Lalitpur District, Uttar
Pradesh. The scopes also include supply of all materials and labour along with
necessary tools and tackles, detailing, fabrication and erection.
2.0
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
2.1
The term Contract or Contract Documents shall mean and include the
following, which shall be deemed to form an integral part of the Contract:
a) Contract Agreement for General Civil and Structural works
b) General Conditions of Contract for Civil and Structural Works
c) Specifications for Civil and Structural Works.
2.2
The several documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually

explanatory of one another but in case of ambiguities or discrepancies the
same shall be explained and adjusted by the PURCHASER, who shall
thereupon issue to the Contractor instructions directing in what manner the
Works are to be carried out.
3.0
DEFINITION OF TERMS
3.1
Codes and Standards shall mean all the applicable codes and standards as
indicated in the Specifications.
3.2
Commercial Use shall mean that use of the Works, which the Contract
contemplates or that for which Works are commercially capable.
3.3
Commissioning shall have the meaning specified in the Specifications.
3.4
Contract Price shall mean the price referred to in Clause 10 of this Contract,
and agreed Variations thereto as determined in accordance with Clause 31.
3.5
Contractor shall mean successful bidder and shall include its successors and
permitted assigns.
3.6
Contractors works shall mean and include the land and other places, which
are used by the Contractor or Sub-Contractor for the construction & fabrication
and for performing the works.
3.7
Defaulting Party shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Clause 17.3.

SECTION: E
SHEET 2 OF 38
3.8
Drawings shall mean

a) Any drawings furnished by the PURCHASER as a basis for proposals and
forming part of Specifications;
b) Any Supplementary drawings furnished by the PURCHASER to clarify and
to define in greater detail the intent of the Contract and forming part of
Specifications;
c) Drawings submitted by the Contractor with his proposal provided such
drawings are acceptable to the PURCHASER;
d) Drawings furnished by the PURCHASER to the Contractor during the
progress of the Work; and
e) Engineering data and drawings submitted by the Contractor during the
progress of the Work provided such drawings are acceptable to the
PURCHASER.
3.9
Effective Date shall mean Date of Issue of LOI.
3.10
CIPL shall mean M/s Carbery Infrastructure PTE Ltd or their duly authorised
representatives, who have been awarded complete Balance of Plant Package
for 3X660 MW Lalitpur Super Thermal Power Project.
3.11
PURCHASER mean M/s Bajaj Infrastructure Development Co. Ltd or their

duly authorised representatives, who have been assigned Procurement and
Supply of Equipment, Civil construction and Structural work and Erection,
Installation and commissioning activities for BOP package.
3.12
CONSULTANT / PROJECT CONSULTANT / CONSULTING ENGINEER shall

mean TATA Consulting Engineers Limited' or their duly authorised
representatives, who are the CONSULTANTS appointed by the OWNER for
the 'project'
3.13
PURCHASERs Instructions shall mean any Drawings and/ or instructions,

oral and/ or in writing, details, direction and explanations issued by the
PURCHASER from time to time during the period of this Contract.
3.14
Equipment shall mean the goods to be supplied by the Contractor under this
Contract as described in detail under the Specifications.
3.15
Certificate of virtual completion' shall have the meaning specified in the

Specifications.
3.16
Force Majeure shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Clause 18.1.

SECTION: E
SHEET 3 OF 38
3.17
Inspector shall mean the authorised representative appointed by the OWNER

/ CIPL / PURCHASER / CONSULTANT for purposes of inspection of
Equipment and other materials or works.
3.18
Letter of Intent means the letter of intent to be executed between the

contractor and the PURCHASER, stipulating commencement of the Works/
Supply in accordance with the terms and conditions set out in the Contract
Documents.
3.19
Milestones shall mean an event or part of the Work to be completed under the
Contract and described in the milestone schedule.
3.20
Month shall mean the calendar month; Week shall mean seven consecutive
days; and day shall mean 24 hours.
3.21
Non-Defaulting Party shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Clause 18.3.
3.22
Notice to Proceed (NTP) shall mean a notice by the PURCHASER to the

Contractor directing to proceed with the scope of supply, in the format set out.
3.23
Notice in Writing or Written Notice shall mean a notice in written, typed or

printed characters sent (unless delivered personally or otherwise proved to
have been received) by registered post/ facsimile to the address specified in
Clause 48.
3.24
Other Contractors shall mean contractors to whom orders have been placed
by the OWNER / CIPL / PURCHASER for the Project and shall include their
respective successors and permitted assigns.
3.25
Owner or LPGCL shall mean Lalitpur Power Generation Company Ltd. and
shall include its successors and assigns, as well as its authorised officers/
representatives.
3.26
Performance Guarantee
Specifications.
3.27
Project Schedule shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Clause 9.3.
3.28
Project shall mean 3x660 MW Super Critical TPP at Lalitpur, UP specified in

the Project Information of the Specifications.
3.29
Scheduled Completion Period shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Clause

14.1.1.
3.30
Specifications shall mean as detailed earlier.
shall
have
the
meaning
specified
in
the

SECTION: E
SHEET 4 OF 38
3.31
Site shall mean the actual place of the proposed Project as detailed in the
Specifications or any other place where Work is to be executed under the
Contract.
3.32
Sub-Contractor shall mean any person to whom a part of the Contract has
been delegated and shall include his heirs, legal representatives, successors
and permitted assigns.
3.33
Take-Over shall mean the take over of the works by the PURCHASER in
accordance with Clause 47.
3.34
Variation shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Clause 32.
3.35
Warranty Period or Defects Liability period shall mean the period during
which the Contractor shall remain liable for repair or replacement of any
defective parts of the works supplied under the Contract in accordance with
Clause 33.
3.36
Work or Works shall mean all work to be carried out by the Contractor,
pursuant to Contract and as per Specification.
3.37
When the words Approved, Subject to Approval, Satisfactory, Equal to,

Proper, Requested, As Directed, Where Directed, When Directed,
Determined By, Accepted, Permitted or words and phrases of like import are
used, the approval, judgement, direction, etc is understood to be a function of
PURCHASER.
3.38
Writing shall include any manuscript, typewritten or printed statement, under

or over signature and/ or seal, as the case may be.
3.39
Words importing the singular shall also include the plural and vice-versa where
the context so requires.
3.40
Words importing Person shall include firms, companies, corporations and

associations or body of individuals, whether incorporated or not.
3.41
References to the Contract or Contract Documents shall be construed as a

reference to such Contract/ Contract Documents as the same may from time to
time be amended, varied, supplemented or novated.
3.42
References to parties or party shall be construed as a reference to parties or

a party to this Contract, as the case may be.

SECTION: E
SHEET 5 OF 38
4.0
CONTRACTOR TO INFORM HIMSELF FULLY

The Contractor shall be deemed to have carefully examined all Contract
Documents to his entire satisfaction. If he shall have any doubt as to the
meaning of any portion of the Contract Documents, he shall, before signing the
Contract set forth the particulars thereof, and submit them to the PURCHASER
in writing, in order that such doubt may be removed. The PURCHASER shall
provide such clarifications as may be necessary in writing to the Contractor.
Any information otherwise obtained from the PURCHASER shall not in any way
relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to fulfil his obligations under the
Contract, nor shall amount to a Variation.
5.0
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
This Contract shall be signed between the parties and the expenses incurred in
the preparation and stamping of this Contract shall be to the account of the
PURCHASER and the PURCHASER shall furnish to the Contractor, free of
charge, an executed stamped counterpart of this Contract.
6.0
MANNER OF EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
6.1
This Contract shall be signed on a date and time to be mutually agreed within
the specified period. The Contractor shall present himself for signing of the
Contract, with proper power of attorney.
6.2
This Contract shall be signed in three originals and the PURCHASER shall
provide the Contractor with one signed original copy and retain the balance.
7.0
EFFECT AND JURISDICTION OF CONTRACT
7.1
This Contract shall come into force on the Effective Date.
7.2
The laws applicable to this Contract shall be the laws in force in India. Subject
to Clause 25, the Courts of NOIDA, Uttar Pradesh shall have exclusive
jurisdiction in all matters arising under this Contract.
8.0
ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT
8.1
The Contractor shall not assign the Contract or any part thereof or any benefit
or interest therein or there under (otherwise than by a charge in favour of the
Contractors bankers over any monies due or to become due to it under this
Contract), without the prior written consent of the PURCHASER.
8.2
The Contractor shall not sub-contract the whole or part of the Contract, except
where otherwise provided in this Contract. The Contractor shall not subcontract any part of this work without the prior written consent of the

SECTION: E
SHEET 6 OF 38
PURCHASER, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld and such

consent, if given, shall not relieve the Contractor, from any liability or obligation
under the Contract and he shall be responsible for the acts, defaults and
neglects of any Sub-Contractor, as if they were the acts, defaults or neglects of
the Contractor.
8.3
The Contractor shall be responsible for transmitting pertinent data of the

Contracts terms and conditions to the Sub-Vendors/ Sub-Contractors. The
Contractor shall furnish to the PURCHASER four (4) unpriced copies of major
sub-orders showing promised delivery dates/ places/ work program.
9.0
TIME IS THE ESSENCE OF CONTRACT
9.1
The time and the Scheduled Completion Period as stipulated in Clause 14.1.1
shall be the essence of the Contract. The Contractor shall so organise his
resources and perform his Work as to complete it not later than the date
agreed to. The time for completion of the works contracted for shall be
reckoned from the Effective Date.
9.2
The Contractor shall submit a detailed programme for the entire scope of
Works under this Contract within 4 weeks of the Effective Date.
9.3
The program submitted by the Contractor as per Clause 9.2 shall contain a
detailed break-up of the dates on which the works thereof under the Contract
would be completed, provided that all Work shall be completed within the
Scheduled Completion Period, which break-up shall be consistent with the
milestone schedule. Without prejudice to the Contractors obligations under the
Contract, the Contractor shall make such changes to the schedule as may be
requested by the Contractor and accepted by the PURCHASER or suggested
by the PURCHASER and accepted by the Contractor, and such schedule shall
be the reference for completion of Work by the Contractor (the Project
Schedule). Change suggested by the PURCHASER to the schedule,
submitted by the Contractor to conform to the requirements of the Contract,
shall not constitute a Variation.
10.0
CONTRACT PRICE
10.1
The Contract Price shall be Rs -------------- (Rupees-------) as per the details

given in the Schedule. However, payment will be made as per payment
schedule and works completion and certified by the Engineer.
10.2
The Contract Price is inclusive of supply of all materials (except cement &
reinforcement steel), labour, royalties, all Taxes and duties such as Sales Tax,
Work Contract Tax, Excise Duty etc and all insurance.
10.3
The Contract Price includes transit insurance up to Project site.

SECTION: E
SHEET 7 OF 38
10.4
Prices and rates quoted shall be firm for the entire duration of the contact and
any agreed extensions thereafter irrespective of any variation in the quantities
of individual items of work and/ or in the total contract price.
10.5
The quantities against various items of work are furnished in the schedule of
quantities in sectionC of the specification. This is an item rate Contract and
the quantities can vary to any extent. PURCHASER reserve the right to add or
delete any item or work depending upon the requirement of the project. No
claim shall be allowed because of actual quantities differ from the quantities
given in specification.
11.0
DEDUCTIONS FROM CONTRACT PRICE

The PURCHASER shall claim from the Contractor all costs, damages,
expenses or other liabilities that the PURCHASER may incur for which the
Contractor is liable under the Contract. All such claims shall be billed by the
PURCHASER to the Contractor regularly as and when they fall due. Such bills
shall be supported by appropriate and certified vouchers or explanations, to
enable the Contractor to properly identify such claims. Such claims shall be
paid by the Contractor within twenty-eight (28) days of the receipt of the
corresponding bills (if not disputed by the Contractor) and if not paid by the
Contractor within the said period, the PURCHASER may then, without further
notice, deduct the amount, from any monies due or becoming due by him to the
Contractor under the Contract or may recover such monies by actions of Law
or otherwise.
12.0
TAXES AND DUTIES

The Contract Price includes all Taxes and duties such as Sales Tax, Work
Contract Tax, and Excise Duty etc.
13.0
INSURANCE
Erection All Risk Policy will be arranged by the PURCHASER. The Contractor
is responsible to take insurance up to the Site.
14.0
SCHEDULED COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
14.1
Completion of Work under the Contract
14.1.1
The Contractor agrees that Works under the Contract shall be commenced and
carried on at such points, and in the order of precedence and at such times and
seasons as may be discussed and mutually agreed by the PURCHASER and
the Contractor and completed within ------- months from ---------- (the
Scheduled Completion Period). The Work under the Contract shall be

SECTION: E
SHEET 8 OF 38
carried out in accordance with the Project Schedule and the mile stones
schedule. The Contractor declares that he has familiarised himself with and
obtained all necessary information in connection with the Site, means of
communication, access to the Site and rights of way, with all the local
conditions (including climatic and environmental conditions), and with all the
circumstances which may or are likely to affect the performance and
completion of the Work, and that he has allowed for such conditions in the
preparation of this schedule. The Contractor further acknowledges that the
PURCHASER has engaged the Other Contractors for the supply of certain
other equipment and performance of certain services at the Site for the
purpose of the Project, and the Contractor has taken into account the work to
be carried out by such Other Contractors in the preparation of this Project
Schedule, and Schedule of Milestones. No extension of time shall be granted
to the Contractor on account of any work carried on or to be carried on by any
Other Contractor, which is affected due to delay or non-fulfilment of the
Contractors obligation. The progress of Work shall be checked at regular
monthly intervals and the percentage progress achieved shall be
commensurate with the time elapsed after the Effective Date.
14.1.1
Works under this Contract shall be said to have been completed for the
purpose of this Clause only upon Take-Over.
14.1.2
It is not incumbent upon the PURCHASER to notify the Contractor when

begin, to cease or resume Work, nor to give early notice of the rejection
faulty Work, nor in any way to superintend so as to relieve the Contractor
the responsibility or of any consequence of neglect or carelessness by him
his subordinates.
14.1.3
No necessity for an extension of time is anticipated, but if untoward or

extraordinary circumstances should arise beyond the control of the Contractor
for which the PURCHASER is responsible under the Contract, which in the
opinion of the PURCHASER should entitle the Contractor to a reasonable
extension of time, such extension shall be granted, but shall not operate to
relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations.
14.1.4
Without prejudice to the obligations of the Contractor under Clause 14.1.1 and
Clause 14.1.6, the Contractor shall promptly notify the PURCHASER of any
event or conditions which might delay the completion of Work in accordance
with the Project Schedule and the steps being taken to remedy such situation.
14.1.5
If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or during the

progress of Work under the Contract
a) By any wilful delay or gross neglect of the PURCHASER, or
to
of
of
or

SECTION: E
SHEET 9 OF 38
b) By changes ordered in the Works by the PURCHASER provided that no

direction, instructions, notes or request of the PURCHASER in respect of
the Work under the Contract shall be a change under this Clause 14.1.6
unless the Owner has agreed that such direction, instruction, order or
request constitutes a Variation in accordance with the procedure specified
in this section, or
(i) Suspension of Works by the PURCHASER under Clause 20.2, or

(ii) Force Majeure.
14.1.6
The time of completion shall be extended by a reasonable period as may be

mutually agreed. Provided that no extension shall be granted; unless the
Contractor makes an application for extension, within 15 days of the
occurrence of the events specified in this Clause.
14.1.7
The time stipulated in the Contract for the execution and completion of Works
under the Contract shall be deemed to be the essence of the Contract. In the
event the Contractor fails to execute and complete the Works under the
Contract within the time specified herein, then the Contractor shall pay to the
PURCHASER, compensation as provided in this Contract by way of Liquidated
Damages. The PURCHASER may, without prejudice to any method of
recovery, deduct the amount for such damages from any amount due or which
may become due to the Contractor. In the event of extension of time being
granted by the PURCHASER in writing for completion of the Works stated in
Clause 14.1.4 and Clause 14.1.6, this Clause 14.1.7 shall be applicable after
the expiry of such extension period.
14.2
Liquidated Damages for Delay
14.2.1
If the Contractor fails to perform the Contract within the stipulated time,
Contractor shall pay to the PURCHASER as liquidated damages a sum equal
to 0.5% per week of the Contract Price for first four weeks or part thereof and
1% of the Contract Price per week or part there of subject to the maximum of
5%.
14.2.2
In addition to the liquidated damages mentioned in Clause 14.2.1 above,

additional liquidated damages shall also be levied for the delay in achieving the
critical milestones as per the agreed schedule. The additional liquidated
damages to be levied for each of the critical mile stones are indicated below.
Sl.
No.
1
Liquidated damage
per week
(Rs. in Lakhs)
Critical Activity
List
will be provided
later

SECTION: E
SHEET 10 OF 38
during negotiation stage

14.2.3
The cumulative Liquidated Damages for all the above critical milestones
referred in Clause 14.2.2 shall not exceed 20% of the Total Contract Price. The
Liquidated Damages for the Critical Mile stones shall be recoverable during the
execution of the Contract.
14.3
Acknowledgement of Parties
The sums set out in the Clause 14.2 represent a genuine pre-estimate of the
damages likely to be suffered by the PURCHASER if the events described in
the Clause 14 may occur. The Parties (PURCHASER/ Contractor) agree that
the losses that will actually be sustained by the PURCHASER are uncertain
and impossible to determine with precision. The sums set out in this Clause
14.2 seek to limit the potential liability of the Contractor and constitute
liquidated damages and not a penalty.
15.0
MAXIMUM LIABILITY
Error! Reference source not found.The Contractors aggregate liability under
or arising out of or in connection with this Contract, its performance or breach
shall be limited to the Contract Price. This shall, however, exclude his liability
for Liquidated Damages for Delay and Performance, and any and all third party
liabilities or indemnities including Intellectual Property Indemnification and other
provisions of the Contract.
16.0
AGGREGATE LIABILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR
16.1
Notwithstanding anything contained in this Contract to the contrary, the

aggregate liability of the Contractor for liquidated damages under Clause 14.2
(Liquidated Damages) shall not exceed Twenty percent (20%) of the Contract
Price.
16.2
The Contractor's financial liability under this Contract shall expire with the
expiration of the Defects liability period.
17.0
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
Notwithstanding anything contained in any other provision of this Contract, but
subject to the provisions of Clause 15, 16 and related provisions of this
Contract, no party shall be liable to the other Party for any special or indirect or
consequential damages and for any loss of revenue, loss of profit, loss of use,
loss resulting from the liability of the party to any other person or for any
financial or economic loss.
18.0
DEFAULT

SECTION: E
SHEET 11 OF 38
18.1
Contractors Default
Default by Contractor shall include any of the following:
a) Negligence to execute Works under the Contract with due diligence and
expedition by the Contractor or negligence or refusal to comply with any
reasonable orders given in writing by the PURCHASER by the Contractor;
b) A petition is filed for the winding up, bankruptcy or insolvency of the
Contractor which is not set aside or stayed within 45 days of filing or the
Contractor enters into a compromise or a scheme of arrangement with its
creditors, or carries on business under a receiver, trustee or manager for
the benefit of its creditors;
c) Abandonment of this Contract or the Works;
d) Suspension of Work for reasons other than those specified under Clause
20.1 either at the commencement of the Contract or during the progress of
Work there under for 30 days or more;
e) A material breach of his obligations under the Contract;
f)
18.2
Failure to pay any liquidated damages or other sums due from the
Contractor under the Contract within 15 days of the relevant due date.
PURCHASERs Default
Default by the PURCHASER shall include any of the following:
a) failure to issue a certificate of payment without cause or failure to make any
of the payments, when due;
b) A petition is filed for the winding up, bankruptcy or insolvency of the
PURCHASER which is not set aside or stayed within 45 days of filing or the
PURCHASER enters into a compromise or a scheme of arrangement with
its creditors, or carries on business under a receiver, trustee or manager for
the benefit of its creditors;
c) Suspension of Work for reasons other than those specified under Clause
20.2, either at the commencement or during progress for 30 days or more;
d) Any material breach of its obligations under the Contract.
18.3
If either party (the Defaulting Party) commits a default of this Contract, the
other party (the Non-Defaulting Party), may serve a written notice of default

SECTION: E
SHEET 12 OF 38
on the Defaulting Party stating that it is a notice under this Clause and
specifying the default.
18.4
Upon serving of a notice under Clause 18.3, the Defaulting Party shall be
entitled to remedy the default within a period of thirty (30) days or such longer
period specified in the Notice by the Non-Defaulting Party.
19.0
FORCE MAJEURE
19.1
Force Majeure means any circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor
or the PURCHASER, as the case may be, which substantially affect the
performance of the Contract, such as but not limited to:
a) Natural phenomena, including but not limited to floods, droughts,
earthquakes, epidemics, storm & lightning substantially affecting Work.
b) Acts of any Government, including but not limited to war, declared or
undeclared, priorities, quarantines, embargoes, nationalisation, and
confiscation.
c) Accidents such as fire and explosions.
d) Strikes or industrial disputes (which are not related to the breach of
agreement with the employees by either Parties), and sabotage.
e) Riots, civil commotion, insurrection, act of terrorism, belligerence, hostilities,
and revolution.
Provided either party shall within fifteen (15) days from the occurrence of such
a cause notify the other in writing of such causes.
19.2
The Contractor or the PURCHASER shall not be liable under the Contract for
delays in performing his obligations resulting from any Force Majeure event.
The Scheduled Completion Period shall be extended by a reasonable time in
terms of Clause 14.1.7.
19.3
With the occurrence of a Force Majeure, the PURCHASERs shall not withhold
payments due under this Contract, unless the modus operandi of the payment
is affected by such Force Majeure.
19.4
If Force Majeure applies at any time prior to the Scheduled Completion Period
the parties shall meet to discuss a revised schedule for the completion of the
Contract and if the Force Majeure has applied for a period in excess of 120
days, the provisions of Clause 21 shall apply unless otherwise agreed between
the parties.

SECTION: E
SHEET 13 OF 38
19.5
The parties hereto shall consult with each other and take all reasonable steps
to minimise the losses of either party resulting from Force Majeure. In case of
strike or lockout, the Contractor shall, as soon as possible, give written notice
thereof to the PURCHASER, but the Contractor shall nevertheless constantly
endeavour to prevent delay and shall do all that may reasonably be required to
the satisfaction of the PURCHASER to proceed with the Works.
19.6
In addition, the Contractor shall be entitled to claim demonstrable and

reasonable compensation if such delays have resulted in any increase in the
cost, provided always that the PURCHASER shall be liable to make payment of
any increase in costs only if approved in accordance with the procedure set out
in Clause 32.
20.0
SUSPENSION
20.1
Suspension by Contractor
The Contractor shall be entitled to suspend the Work by giving a notice of 30
days to the PURCHASER, ifa) The Engineer fails to issue a certificate for payment, upon proper
application by the Contractor, without showing reasonable cause under the
terms of the Contract, or
b) The PURCHASER fails to make any payment that is due for payment as
per terms of payment given in clause 38.
20.2
Suspension of Work by PURCHASER
20.2.1
The PURCHASER reserves the right to suspend and reinstate performance of

the whole or any part of the Contract without invalidating the provisions of the
Contract. The PURCHASER shall issue all orders for suspension or
reinstatement of the Work under the Contract to the Contractor in writing.
20.2.2
Any necessary and demonstrable costs incurred by the Contractor as a result

of such suspension of the Works shall be payable by the PURCHASER
provided such costs are approved in terms of Clause 32.
20.3
Work Partly Abandoned

If any time after commencement of the work, the PURCHASER shall for any
reason whatsoever, not require the whole work thereof as specified in the
tender to be carried out, the Engineer shall give notice in writing of the fact to
the Contractor who shall have no claim to any payment of compensation
whatsoever on account of any profit or advantage which he might have derived
from the execution of the work in full but which he did not derive in

SECTION: E
SHEET 14 OF 38
consequence of the full amount of the work not having been carried out nor
shall he have any claim for compensation by reason of any change having
been made in the original specifications, drawings, designs and instructions
which shall involve any curtailment of the work as originally contemplated.
The Contractor shall be paid the charges on the cartage only of materials
actually brought to the site by the Contractor and rendered surplus as a result
of the abandonment or curtailment of the work or any portion thereof and taken
back by the Contractor, provided however, that the Engineer shall have in all
such cases, the right to purchase these materials at their purchase price or at
current local rates whichever may be less.
21.0
TERMINATION
21.1
Notwithstanding anything contained in this Contract, the non-defaulting Party in

case of (i) and (iii) below and the affected Party in case of (ii) below may
terminate this Contract by giving 60 days notice on any one or more of the
following grounds namely:
(i) A default as per Clause 18.0 is not remedied within the period indicated
therein;
(ii) A Force Majeure event has occurred, which continues for a period beyond
120 days as provided in Clause 19.4; or
(iii) For prolonged suspension of Work for a period exceeding 90 days.

21.2
Upon termination of the Contract by the Contractor due to the PURCHASERs

default, the PURCHASER shall pay to Contractor.
a) The amount payable in respect of any preliminary items so far as the work
or service comprised therein has been carried out and an appropriate
proportion of any such item in which the work comprised has only been
partially carried out or performed duly certified by the PURCHASER.
b) The cost of materials or goods for the Works or for use in connection with
the Works/ the amount of any other expenditure, which in the
circumstances was reasonably incurred by the Contractor in the
expectation of completing the Works, duly certified by the PURCHASER
based on documentary evidence.
21.3
Upon termination of the Contract by the PURCHASER due to the Contractors

default, the PURCHASER may Take-Over the Works and may complete any
Work pending under the Contract on his own or by other vendor/ contractor and
recover the cost of such completion from the Contractor, without prejudice to
the Contractors obligations hereunder. In such an event, the PURCHASER

SECTION: E
SHEET 15 OF 38
shall pay to the Contractor only for the Works accepted by the PURCHASER,
after adjusting the cost incurred by the PURCHASER towards getting the
pending Works completed. If the cost of completing the Work pending under
the Contract or executing a part thereof, exceeds the balance Contract Price
due to the Contractor at the time of termination, the Contractor shall indemnify
the PURCHASER and pay such excess amount to the PURCHASER, within 30
days of demand being made by the PURCHASER.
22.0
NO WAIVER OF RIGHTS
Neither any inspection by the PURCHASER, nor any order, instruction,
direction or issue of any certificate by the PURCHASER for payment of money,
or any payment for or acceptance of, the whole or any part of the Works by the
PURCHASER, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the
PURCHASER, nor any exercise by the PURCHASER of the rights of the
Contractor shall operate as a waiver of any provision of the Contract or of any
power herein reserved to the PURCHASER or any right to damages herein
provided, nor shall any waiver of any breach in the Contract be held to be a
waiver of any other or subsequent breach, or amount to a Variation, except in
compliance with Clause 32.
23.0
CERTIFICATE NOT TO AFFECT LIABILITY OF CONTRACTOR

No interim payment certificate of the PURCHASER, nor any sum paid on
account by the PURCHASER, nor any extension of time for performance of the
whole or any part of the Contract granted by the PURCHASER shall affect or
prejudice the rights of the PURCHASER against the Contractor or relieve the
Contractor of his obligations for the due performance of the Contract or be
interpreted as approval of the Work done or of the Equipment furnished and no
certificate shall create liability in the PURCHASER to pay for any alterations,
amendments, variations or additional Equipment, except pursuant to Clause 32
or discharge the liability of the Contractor for the payment of damages whether
due, ascertained, or certified or not or any sum against the payment of which
he is bound to indemnify the PURCHASER.
24.0
SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES
24.1
Any disputes or differences including those considered as such by only one of

the parties arising out of or in connection with the Contract shall be to the
extent possible settled amicably between the Parties.
24.2
If amicable settlement cannot be reached then all disputed issues shall be

settled by arbitration as provided in Clause 25 below.
25.0
ARBITRATION

SECTION: E
SHEET 16 OF 38
25.1
Subject to the provisions of Clause 25.4, if any dispute or difference of any kind
whatsoever shall arise between the PURCHASER and the Contractor, arising
out of, in relation to, or in connection with the Contract (including, in relation to
the validity of the whole or any part of the Contract), whether during the
progress of the Work under the Contract or after the completion thereof or
whether before or after the termination, abandonment or breach of the
Contract, it shall, in the first place, be referred to and settled by the
PURCHASER, who, within a period of thirty (30) days after being requested
shall give written notice of his decision to Contractor.
25.2
In the event the PURCHASER fails to notify their respective decision as

aforesaid, within thirty (30) days after being requested, or in the event the
Contractor is not satisfied with any such decision, either party may require and
claim within a further period of thirty (30) days after the expiry of the first
mentioned period of thirty (30) days that the matter in dispute be referred to
arbitration as here in after provided.
25.3
The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of The

Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996 of India.
25.4
The arbitrators shall have the power to grant interim relief and/ or interim
award.
25.5
The arbitrators shall have full powers to review and/ or revise any decision,
opinion, directions, certification or Valuation of the Engineer in consonance with
the contract and neither party shall be limited in the proceedings before such
arbitrators to the evidence or arguments put forth earlier. The award of the
arbitrators shall be final and binding on the parties.
25.6
Performance under the contract shall if reasonably possible continue during the
arbitration procedures and payment due if any to the Contractor by the
PURCHASER may not be withheld unless they are the subject matter of
arbitration proceedings.
25.7
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Contract, the Contractor shall

not be entitled to refer any dispute in respect of its obligations to pay liquidated
damages for arbitration, unless he has paid the liquidated damages which are
claimed to be due under the Contract by the PURCHASER. The liquidated
damages so paid or the relevant portion thereof shall be refunded to the
Contractor in the event it is finally decided by the Arbitrators that such
liquidated damages are not payable, or that a reduced sum is payable by the
Contractor to the PURCHASER.
26.0
LANGUAGE AND MEASURES

SECTION: E
SHEET 17 OF 38
All documents pertaining to the Contract including specifications, schedule,

notices, correspondence, operating and maintenance instructions, Drawings or
any other writing shall be written in English language. The metric system of
measurement shall be used exclusively in the Contract.
27.0
RELEASE OF INFORMATION
The Contractor shall not communicate or use in advertising, publicity, sales
releases or in any other medium, photographs or other reproduction of the
Works, any Equipment supplied or to be supplied under this Contract, or
descriptions of the Site, dimensions, quantity, quality or other information,
concerning the Equipment or the Works, without the prior written permission of
the PURCHASER.
28.0
COMPLETION OF CONTRACT
Unless otherwise terminated under the provisions of any other relevant clause,
this Contract shall be deemed to have been completed at the expiration of the
Defects liability period as provided under Clause 33.
29.0
ENFORCEMENT OF TERMS
The failure of either Party to enforce at any time any of the provisions of this
Contract or any rights in respect thereto or to exercise any option herein
provided shall in no way be construed to be a waiver of such provisions, rights
or options or in any way to affect the validity of the Contract. The exercise by
either party of any of the rights herein shall not preclude or prejudice either
party from exercising the same or any other right it may have hereunder.
30.0
PURCHASERS DECISION
30.1
In respect of all matters which are left to the decision of the PURCHASER
including the granting or withholding of the certificates, the PURCHASER shall,
if required to do so by the Contractor, give in writing a decision thereon.
30.2
If in the opinion of the Contractor, a decision made by the PURCHASER is not

in accordance with the meaning and intent of the Contract, the Contractor may
file with the PURCHASER, within fifteen (15) days after receipt of the decision,
a written objection to the decision. Failure to file an objection within the allotted
time shall be considered as acceptance of the PURCHASERS decision and
the decision shall become final and binding.
30.3
The PURCHASERS decision and the filing of the written objection thereto shall
be a condition precedent to the right to request arbitration. It is the intent of this
Contract, that there shall be no delay in the performance of the Contract and

SECTION: E
SHEET 18 OF 38
the decision of the PURCHASER shall be promptly observed, without relieving

the Contractor of its responsibilities under the Contract.
31.0
CO-OPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS

The Contractor agrees to co-operate with the Other Contractors and exchange
with them such technical information pertaining to the Contractors scope of
Work, as is necessary, for optimal interfacing to enable the PURCHASER to
obtain the most efficient and economical design for the Project to avoid
unnecessary duplication of efforts. However, all such exchanges shall be under
intimation to the PURCHASER.
32.0
VARIATION
32.1
No instruction, direction, order or request made by the PURCHASER with

respect to the Work to be performed under the Contract shall be construed as
an alteration in the obligations of the Contractor under the Contract, unless
such instruction, direction, order or request has been agreed as constituting a
Variation in accordance with this Clause 32.
32.2
No alterations, amendments, omissions, suspensions or variations of the Work

to be performed (hereinafter referred to as Variation) under the Contract as
detailed in the Contract Documents, shall be made by the Contractor except as
directed in writing by the PURCHASER.
32.3
The PURCHASER shall have full power, subject to the provision hereinafter
contained, from time to time during the performance of the Contract, by a
notice in writing to instruct the Contractor to make Variations without prejudice
to any of the rights of the PURCHASER under the Contract.
32.4
In the event the Contractor is of the opinion that any instruction, direction, order
or request made by the PURCHASER constitutes a Variation which entitles the
Contractor to (a) an extension of time for performance of the Contract, and/ or
(b) an increase in the Contract Price or the Contractor receives a notice of
Variation from the PURCHASER under Clause 32.3 and the Contractor is of
the opinion that such Variation entitles the Contractor to (a) an extension of
time for performance of the Contract, and/ or (b) an increase in the Contract
Price, the Contractor shall communicate the same to the PURCHASER in
writing within 15 days of making up of the instruction, direction, order or request
or the receipt of notice under Clause 32.3 as the case may be.
32.5
Any request for an extension of time or increase in Contract Price by the

Contractor under Clause 32.4 shall be based on the existing Project Schedule
and/ or the rates and prices contained in the Contract or where no comparable
rates or prices exist, it will be based on Clauses 32.11& 32.12.

SECTION: E
SHEET 19 OF 38
32.6
The PURCHASER shall communicate its decision regarding the extension in

time and/ or increase in Contract Price requested by the Contractor under
Clause 32.4 within 15 days of receipt of such request.
32.7
Upon the agreement in writing of the PURCHASER and the Contractor on the
extension of time and/ or increase in Contract Price for the proposed Variation
where the proposed Variation does not entitle the Contractor to any extension
of time or increase in Contract Price, the Contractor shall commence Work with
respect to such Variation immediately upon the receipt of notice of Variation
from the PURCHASER.
32.8
In case any change (increase or decrease) in price due to any Variation, such
change in price shall be payable as per Agreed Schedule.
32.9
The Contractor shall carry out Variation and be bound by the same conditions
as far as applicable as though the said variations occurred in the Contract
Documents. If any suggested variations would, in the opinion of the Contractor,
if carried out, prevent him from fulfilling any of his obligations or guarantees
under the Contract he shall notify the PURCHASER thereof in writing and the
PURCHASER shall decide forthwith whether or not, the same shall be carried
out, and if the PURCHASER confirms his instructions, the Contractors
obligations and guarantees shall be modified to such an extent as may be
mutually agreed. Any agreed difference in cost and time occasioned by any
such variation shall be added to or deducted from the Contract Price as the
case may be in the original Contract, as a Variation Order.
32.10
In the event the Contractor does not send any notification to the PURCHASER
in accordance with Clause 32.4 within the time specified therein then the
relevant instruction, direction, order or request made by the PURCHASER shall
not be considered as a Variation for the purpose of this Contract.
32.11
Extra items if any shall be paid on the basis of vouchers of cost of materials
and labour produced by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid 10% (Ten
percent) of the cost of materials, labour and operation of plant and machinery
etc required to execute the item, towards his profit and overhead charges. For
such extra work, the Contractor shall maintain time sheets of personnel
engaged and machinery used for execution of same and get them certified by
the Engineer. Only such labour and plant cost based on above records, which
in the opinion of the Engineer is justified, shall be taken into account to
determine the extra item rate.
32.12
Items not covered by the Schedule of Quantities but are similar in nature to the
items already covered shall be paid for, the rates being worked out on the basis
of rates quoted for similar items.
33.0
WARRANTY OR DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

SECTION: E
SHEET 20 OF 38
33.1
The Contractor hereby represents and warrants that the works executed by it is
fit for purpose and in accordance with the Contract Documents and would be
free from defects in material and workmanship and shall be fit for Commercial
Use. A period of Thirty six (36) calendar months commencing from the date of
certificate of virtual completion will be deemed as Defects liability period. In
case any defects in the work due to bad materials and/ or bad workmanship
develop before the expiry of this period, the contractor on notification by the
PURCHASER shall rectify or remedy the defects at his own cost and he shall
make his own arrangements to provide materials, labour, equipment and any
other appliance required in this regard.
33.2
Repairs, adjustment or replacement of parts as may be required, shall be

commenced by the Contractor within 72 hours from the time of reporting the
defect. In case the Contractor is unable to attend the defect within 72 hours the
Contractor shall advise the PURCHASER through E-Mail/ Fax within the same
period of 72 hours. In case defects are not attended by the Contractor within 72
hours as indicated above, the PURCHASER may proceed to do the Work at
the Contractors risk and costs, but without prejudice to any other rights which
the PURCHASER may have against the Contractor in respect of such defects.
The appropriate remedial measures to be carried out by the PURCHASER and
cost of such repair shall be to Contractors account. In the event the
PURCHASER takes such action, the Contractor shall be notified promptly and
he shall assist wherever possible in making the necessary corrections. This
shall not extinguish the Contractors liability under the terms and conditions of
the Contract.
33.3
The Contractor shall conduct such tests as may be required by the

PURCHASER to demonstrate that any part of the Plant which has been
repaired or replaced is functioning in the manner in which such part is required
to function under the Contract.
33.4
If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to replace or renew any defective

Works under this clause, the provisions of this clause shall apply to the portions
of the Works so replaced or renewed until the expiration of eighteen (18)
months from the date of such replacement or renewal.
33.5
The acceptance of the Works by the PURCHASER shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of his obligation under this Clause.
33.6
At the end of the Defects liability period, the Contractors liability shall cease.
34.0
DEFENCE OF SUITS
34.1
If any action in court is brought against the PURCHASER or an officer for

damage to third party property (except the works) caused by any act on the

SECTION: E
SHEET 21 OF 38
part of the Contractor to perform any acts, matters, covenants or things under
the contract or for death or injury to person caused by any act on the part of the
Contractor, or his Sub-Contractors, or in connection with any claim based on
lawful demands of Contractors Sub-contractors, unless such damage is
caused by negligence of the PURCHASER or due to non compliance of
statutory requirements on the part of Contractor or his sub contractors, the
contractor shall in all such cases indemnify and keep the PURCHASER and
the officer harmless from all losses, damages, expenses or decrees arising out
of such action.
34.2
The PURCHASER shall not make any commitment on behalf of the Contractor.
35.0
MARGINAL NOTES
The marginal notes to any clause of the Contract shall not affect or control the
construction of such clause.
36.0
PROGRESS REPORTS AND PHOTOGRAPHS
36.1
Progress report and photographs (wherever applicable) shall be furnished by

the Contractor to the PURCHASER once in a month in accordance with the
requirements listed in the Specifications.
36.2
A daily diary register will be kept in the Engineers office. The Contractor will
supply all detailed information every day at 9.00 hours for the day preceding
and the diary will be jointly signed by the Engineer and the Contractors
representatives, every day in token of its correctness. A works instruction book,
serially numbered will also be kept in the Engineers office and all day to day
instructions will be given in that book. The Contractors representative shall
report everyday to see these instructions and sign them at the bottom in token
of his having seen them.
36.3
The Contractor shall supply all information regarding procurement of materials

and progress of construction work, as is required by the Engineer for compiling
the weekly progress reports. This information shall be supplied by 9.00 hours
on every Monday, for the preceding week.
37.0
MEASUREMENT OF WORKS
37.1
PURCHASER may from time to time intimate to the Contractor that they require
the works to be measured and the Contractor shall attend or send a qualified
representative to assist the PURCHASER in taking such measurements and
calculations.
37.2
If the Contractor fails to attend or neglect or omit to send such representatives

then the measurements taken by the Engineer and the PURCHASER's

SECTION: E
SHEET 22 OF 38
representative or approved by them shall be taken to be the correct

measurements of the work. Such measurements shall be taken in accordance
with the mode of Measurements mentioned in the specification.
37.3
Any claim which the Contractor may have to make in respect of such
measurement shall be made by him in writing to the Engineer within seven
days of the date of these measurements, failing which the measurements shall
be deemed to have been accepted by the Contractor.
37.4
Where mode of measurement is not specified, the measurements will be taken

at site as per I.S. Code of Practice for Measurements. The Contractor shall
give all assistance for taking measurements like steel measuring tapes,
scaffolds, ladder etc.
37.5
The Contractor shall give not less than five days notice in writing to the
Engineer before covering up or otherwise, placing beyond the reach of
measurement, any work in order that the same may be measured and correct
dimensions thereof be taken and shall not cover up and place beyond the
reach of measurement any work without the consent in writing of the Engineer.
37.6
If any work shall be covered up or placed beyond the reach of measurement

without such notice having been given or consent obtained, the same shall be
uncovered at the Contractors expense or in default thereof no payment or
allowance shall be made for such work or the materials with which the same
was executed.
38.0
PAYMENT
38.1
Security Deposit
Successful Bidder shall be required to provide a security deposit of 2.5% of the
total contract price and shall furnish immediately after placement of LOI, either
in the form of unconditional Bank Guarantee (in the format given by
PURCHASER) from a Nationalized bank or Demand Draft drawn in favour of
M/s Bajaj Infrastructure Development Co. Ltd payable at Delhi/ Noida. This
Bank Guarantee shall be valid till completion of the defect liability period.
38.2
Mobilization Advance
Interest free mobilization advance of 5% (Five percent) of the contract
value will be paid to the successful bidder on submission of an
unconditional Bank Guarantee for equivalent amount in the standard format
given by the PURCHASER from a Nationalized bank. Mobilization advance will
be paid only on completion of mobilization at site and after the submission of
Security deposit.

SECTION: E
SHEET 23 OF 38
Mobilization advance shall be recovered from the running account bills of the
Contractor on pro-rata basis till the mobilization advance is fully recovered.
38.3
Retention Money
10% of the gross value of each RA bill shall be retained as retention money.
The retention money will be released only after satisfactory completion of all
the works and against a bank guarantee (from a Nationalized bank) of
equivalent amount. This bank guarantee towards retention money shall be valid
till completion of defects liability period.
38.4
The PURCHASER shall make progressive payments on pro-rata basis.
38.5
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the PURCHASER for approval
monthly invoice on or before the date fixed by the PURCHASER for all works
executed in the previous month. Engineer shall certify the payable amount of
the invoice within two week of the receipt. PURCHASER shall make the
payment with in 28 days of receipt of certified invoice from the Engineer.
38.6
The final Invoice shall be submitted by the Contractor within two months of the
completion of the work or of the date of the certificate of completion furnished
by the PURCHASER.
38.7
The contractor shall submit all the Invoices in printed forms and the amount in
the Invoices shall be based on the rates as per Schedule.
39.0
SECRECY/ CONFIDENTIALITY
39.1
The technical information, Drawings, Specifications and other related

documents furnished by the PURCHASER forming part of the enquiry or
Contract are the property of the Owner and shall not be used for any other
purpose, except for execution of the Contract. All rights, including rights in the
event of grant of a patent and registration of designs are reserved. The
technical information, Drawings, specifications, records and other documents
shall not be copied, transcribed, traced or reproduced in any other form or
otherwise in whole and/ or duplicated, modified, divulged and/ or disclosed to a
third party nor misused in any other form whatsoever, without the
PURCHASERs previous consent in writing, except to the extent required for
the execution of this Contract. This technical information, Drawings,
Specifications and other related documents shall be returned to the
PURCHASER with all approved copies and duplicates, if any, immediately after
they have been used for the agreed purpose.
39.2
In the event of any breach of this provision, the Contractor shall indemnify the
Owner from any loss, cost or damage or any other claims whatsoever from any
parties claiming from or through them in respect of such breach.

SECTION: E
SHEET 24 OF 38
39.3
The PURCHASER and the Contractor shall treat the details of the Contract and
any information made available in relation thereto as private and confidential and
neither of them shall publish or disclose the same or any particulars thereof
except to the extent required for the execution of this Contract, without the
previous consent of the other, provided that nothing in this Clause shall prevent
the publication or disclosure of any such information that has come within the
public domain otherwise than by breach of this Clause.
40.0
LIMIT OF CONTRACT
The works executed shall be complete in every respect as per Specifications
and suitable for safe operation of the equipment as required by applicable
codes though they may not have been specifically detailed in the respective
Specifications, unless included in the list of exclusions.
41.0
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION & WORKMANSHIP

The PURCHASER will engage his own supervisory staff at the site of works as
may be deemed fit. The Contractor shall afford the supervisors every facility
and assistance for examining the works and materials for checking and
measuring the works and materials.
The Supervisors will act as representatives of the and shall have power to give
notice to the Contractor or to his Foreman of non-approval of any work or
materials, and such work shall be suspended or the use of such material shall
be discontinued, until the decision of the Engineer is obtained.
The work shall be conducted under the general direction of the PURCHASER
and is subject to inspection by his supervisors to ensure strict compliance with
the terms of the Contract. No failure of the Engineer or his supervisors during
the progress of the work to discover or to reject materials, or work not in
accordance with the requirement of this Contract shall be deemed as
acceptance thereof or a waiver of defects therein and no payment by the
Engineer on partial or entire occupancy of the premises shall be construed to
be an acceptance of the work or materials which are not strictly in accordance
with the requirements of this Contract. No changes whatsoever to any provision
of the specifications shall be made without written authorization of the
PURCHASER.
The Contractor shall execute the whole and every part of the work in the most
substantial and workmanlike manner as regards material and in all other
respects.
If it shall appear to the PURCHASER that any work has been executed with
unsound, imperfect or unskilled workmanship, or that any materials or articles

SECTION: E
SHEET 25 OF 38
provided by him for the execution of the work are unsound, or of a quality
inferior to that contracted for, or otherwise not in accordance with the Contract,
the Contractor shall on demand in writing from the PURCHASER,
notwithstanding that the same may have been inadvertently passed, certified
and paid for, forthwith rectify or remove and reconstruct such work in whole or
in part as the case may require or as the case may be, remove such materials
or articles at his own proper charge and cost. In the event of his failing to do so
within seven days of receipt of the Engineers written notice thereof, or any
other period mentioned in such notice, the Engineer may rectify or remove and
re-execute the work or remove and replace with other materials and articles
complained of, as the case may be, at the risk and expense of the Contractor in
all respects. Also in the event the Contractor fails to carry out the rectification
within the period stipulated above, the Contractor shall be liable to pay
compensation at the rate of quarter (1/4) percent of the total Contract Value, for
every week or part thereof, beyond the period stipulated above, that the
rectification work remain incomplete.
The provisional acceptance of sections of the work for the purpose of preparing
partial estimates and the payment of money for such partial estimates shall not
operate as a waiver of any portion of this Contract and shall not be construed
so as to prevent the Engineer from requiring replacement of defective work that
may become apparent after the said provisional acceptance and shall not be
construed in any way as the basis for a claim of extra compensation for any
cause whatsoever by the Contractor.
The Contractor is normally expected to work during day time only and is
required to complete the work in all respects as stipulated elsewhere. However,
night work may be stipulated by the Engineer or permitted in exigencies with
prior approval of the Engineer.
Sufficient lights shall be provided to safeguard the workmen and the public and
to afford adequate facilities for properly placing and inspecting the material
when the night work is in progress.
42.0
DRAWINGS
One set of the drawings and specifications and schedule of quantities shall be
furnished by the PURCHASER to the Contractor, and PURCHASER shall
furnish, within such time as he may consider reasonable, one copy of any
additional drawing/ s which in his opinion may be necessary for the execution
of any part of the work. Such copies shall be kept on the works and the
PURCHASER and their representatives shall at all reasonable times have
access to the same, and they shall be returned to the PURCHASER by the
Contractor before the issue of the certificate for the balance of his account
under the Contract.

SECTION: E
SHEET 26 OF 38
43.0
MATERIAL SUPPLY AND FACILITIES BY THE PURCHASER
43.1
The PURCHASER will provide the following facilities to the Contractor on

chargeable basis:
a) Construction power at one point
b) Construction water at one point
43.2
The PURCHASER will provide the following facilities to the Contractor

free of cost:
(a) Provision of one permanent benchmark and base line for laying out.
(b) Supply of cement and reinforcement steel.
43.3
Following conditions and rates for reconciliation purpose are applicable for
Cement, reinforcement steel which are supplied free of cost by the
PURCHASER.
i) Cement OPC 43 Grade:
ii) Reinforcement steel:
iii) Empty cement bag:
Rs. 260/Bag of 50 kg
Rs. 43210/MT up to 12 mm
Rs.2.50/Bag (In case of non-return of empty
bags)
43.4
Issue of materials shall be based on actual weight of materials weighed on

Weigh Bridge (after deducting the tare weight). The timing of issue of materials
like cement and steel shall be mutually decided by the PURCHASER and
Contractor and shall be strictly followed.
43.5
In addition PURCHASER may supply any special materials/ fabricated parts, to

be provided in the works as per drawings. Such items shall be considered as
"Free Issue". Such special materials/ fabricated parts shall be collected by
Contractor from the PURCHASER's stores/ godowns and shall transport the
same to work-site.
43.6
No extra payment will be made to the Contractor for loading, transport and
unloading of materials, special materials/ fabricated parts from PURCHASER's
stores/ godowns to the actual site of construction work.
43.7
The Contractor shall submit to the PURCHASER his quarterly demand of such
materials at least one month in advance.
43.8
All materials supplied to the Contractor shall be used for the work only and
shall on no account be removed from the site of the work and shall at all time
be open to inspection by the PURCHASER. If at any time, it is noticed that any

SECTION: E
SHEET 27 OF 38
material issued by the PURCHASER is found missing or misused by the

Contractor the recovery for such material/ materials shall be made from the
Contractor at twice the issue rate including incidental charges or the current
market value, whichever is higher plus 25% supervision charges.
43.9
All materials issued by the PURCHASER rendered surplus or left unused in its
original shape and size and in perfectly good condition shall be returned to the
PURCHASER. The decision of the Engineer as to whether the material is in
good condition or not, shall be final and binding on the Contractor. The
contractor shall have no claim for compensation on account of such materials
so supplied to him as aforesaid remaining unused by him or for any wastage in
or damage to any such materials.
43.10
The materials will be supplied by the PURCHASER in bags, sizes and lengths
or in coils as available. The cost of all wastage, due to rolling tolerance, cutting,
conversion, straightening and/ or fabricating shall be borne by the Contractor,
at the issue rates of Clause above, as long as wastage margin does not
exceed following limits:
(a) Cement 3%.
(b) Reinforcement steel 3% of the theoretical requirements. All scraps shall be
properly accounted for and no scrap or cut pieces shall be removed from
site or disposed off without prior inspection and written permission by the
Engineer. All scraps are deemed to be included within the above
allowances. Engineer shall have the right to take back the cut pieces of the
following dimensions and above, with due credit to Contractor for such
return at full issue rate. The wastage allowed for above shall be inclusive of
variation in the actual and theoretical weights due to over/ under size,
consequent to rolling tolerance.
Reinforcement steel up to 16 mm dia - 2 metres and above
Reinforcement steel above 16 mm dia - 3 metres and above
Plates - All pieces of area 0.1 sqm each and above.
Provided further, if the Engineer so desires, the Contractor shall have to
return to the PURCHASER cut pieces or scrap even below the dimension
stated above. Due credit will be given for such return at rates to be fixed by
the Engineer.
43.11
Cut pieces not required by the PURCHASER shall be the property of the
Contractor and the Contractor shall be responsible for their removal from the
site after due inspection by the Engineer.

SECTION: E
SHEET 28 OF 38
43.12
Recovery for unaccountable wastage, i.e., excess over limits stated in Clause
42.10 which cannot be satisfactorily accounted for, shall be made from the
Contractor at twice the issue rate including incidental charges or prevailing
market rate whichever is higher. The quantities of materials for which such
value is to be recovered shall be decided by the PURCHASER and
PURCHASER's decision shall be final and binding.
43.13
If for some reasons the PURCHASER is unable at any time to issue materials
herein and the work has to be stopped for want of materials, the contractor
shall not be entitled to any monetary claim arising out of such circumstances,
provided always that the work shall not remain suspended due to reasons
stated above for more than three months. The Contractor, however, shall be
granted time-limit extension to the extent of such period as his work remains
suspended for want of materials to be issued by the PURCHASER. The
Contractor shall bring such circumstances to the notice of the PURCHASER in
writing within 24 hours of the arising of such a situation.
43.14
Usual damages during transit and handling shall not be the cause for refusal by
the Contractor to accept the materials.
43.15
The contractor shall keep an up-to-date record of the materials, supplied by

PURCHASER, consumed on the work in a daily register. The Contractor shall
also submit weekly statements for actual consumption of such materials and
stock position with him. The actual consumption shall be calculated based on
theoretical quantities worked out from construction drawings issued by
Engineer or as jointly recorded on site.
43.16
Contractor shall use reinforcement steel as supplied by the PURCHASER in

diameters and lengths available at the time of issue. Substitution of
reinforcement, if required, shall be done by the Contractor. Contractor shall
work out all substitutions and take PURCHASER's approval prior to the
execution of the work.
44.0
SETTING OUT WORKS
44.1
The Contractor shall set out the works and shall be responsible for the true and
perfect setting out of the same and for the correctness of the positions, levels,
dimensions and alignment of all parts thereof. If at any time, any error shall
appear during the progress of any part of the work, the Contractor shall at his
own expenses rectify such error, if called upon, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
44.2
The Contractor shall provide all facilities, instruments and attendance to the
Engineer or his deputed representative to check his work. Instruments brought
by the Contractor shall be in good working condition and are subject to
approval of the Engineer. Checking in part or full or any setting out or any line

SECTION: E
SHEET 29 OF 38
or level by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for the correctness thereof.
44.3
The Contractor shall establish and maintain base lines and bench marks
adjacent of the various sections of work. All such marks and stakes must be
carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of their destruction by him or
any of his employees, they shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
44.4
The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of all dimensions within
the various sections of the work according to the figures of dimensions on the
drawings.
45.0
ACCESS
OWNER / CIPL / PURCHASER / CONSULTNAT shall at all reasonable times
have free access to the works and/ or to the workshops, factories or other
places where materials are being prepared or constructed for the Contract and
also to any place where the materials are lying or from which they are being
obtained. The Contractor shall give every necessary facility to the OWNER /
CIPL / PURCHASER / CONSULTNAT for inspection and examination and test
of the materials and workmanship even to the extent of discontinuing portions
of the Work temporarily, or of uncovering or taking down portions of finished
Work.
46.0
CONTRACTORS SUPERVISION
The Contractor shall, during the whole time the work is in progress, employ a
qualified engineer to be in-charge of the works with adequate experience in
handing of jobs of this nature and with the prior approval of the PURCHASER.
Such Engineer shall be constantly in attendance at the site during working
hours. During Contractors/ RESIDENT Engineers absence during working
hours, when it may be necessary to give directions, orders may be given by the
PURCHASER and shall be received and obeyed by the Contractors
Superintendent or Foreman who may have charge of the particular part of the
work in reference to which orders are given. If requested to do so, the
PURCHASER shall confirm such orders in writing. Any directions, instructions
or notices given by the PURCHASER to him, shall be deemed to have been
given to the Contractor. The representative of the Contractor shall have all
necessary powers to receive materials from the PURCHASER, issue valid
receipts for the same, engage labour or purchase materials and proceed with
the work as required for speedy execution.
None of the Contractor's Superintendents, engineers, supervisors or labour
should be withdrawn from the work without due notice being given to the
PURCHASER; further no such withdrawals shall be made if in the opinion of
the PURCHASER such withdrawals will jeopardise the required pace of
progress/ successful completion of the work.

SECTION: E
SHEET 30 OF 38
The Contractor shall employ in or about execution of the work only such
persons as are careful, skilled and experienced in their respective trades, and
the PURCHASER shall be at liberty to object to and require the Contractor to
remove any person employed by the Contractor in or about execution of works
who in the opinion of the Engineer misconducts himself or is incompetent or
negligent in the proper performance of his duties and all such persons shall not
again be employed upon the works without the prior permission of the
PURCHASER.
Neither the Contractor/ PURCHASER shall hire or employ any employee of the
other party except by mutual consent.
COMPLIANCE
PRECAUTIONS
WITH
LABOUR
REGULATIONS
AND
SAFETY
Without prejudice to the generality of Clause 50.2, the Contractor shall observe
and comply with all laws/ rules/ regulations etc applicable to the workmen
employed by the Contractor or any Sub-contractor for the Works. In the event
of any default by way of non-observance or non-compliance of the said laws/
rules/ regulations on the part of the Contractor or the Sub-contractor, the
Contractor shall indemnify the PURCHASER against all liabilities, costs and
expenses arising out of or in connection therewith.
The Contractor shall pay particular attention to ensure safety of his staff and
workmen and others in the vicinity and shall be solely responsible for any loss
of life or injury to person due to negligence or any other causes whatsoever.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage to his
material, tools or other articles used or held for use in connection with the
Works. The Works shall be carried on to completion without damage to any
work or property of the PURCHASER or of others and without interference with
the operation of existing machinery or equipment.
47.0
TAKE-OVER
The works shall not be considered as completed until the Engineer has certified
in writing that they have been virtually completed and the Defects Liability
Period shall commence from the date of such certificates.
48.0
NOTICES
48.1
Any notice under the contract shall be sent by registered mail or by hand or by
facsimile or by e-mail together with a copy by registered post at following
Addresses:

SECTION: E
SHEET 31 OF 38
Contractor:
Facsimile:
E-mail:
PURCHASER:
Director and Sr. VP

Facsimile:
E-mail:
48.2
Any party may change the address for notice, by giving the other parties,
written communication of change of address and the same shall be effective,
when the other parties confirm receipt of such intimation.
48.3
All notices and correspondence addressed to PURCHASER shall also be

addressed to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall conform to the provisions of any Acts of the Legislature
relating to the works and to the Regulations and Bye-Laws of any authority and
of any water, lighting and other companies and/ or authorities with whose
systems the structure is proposed to be connected and shall, before making,
any variations from the drawings or specifications that may be necessitated by
so conforming, give to the Engineer written notice, specifying the variation
proposed to be made and the reason for making it and apply for instructions
thereon.
48.4
The Contractor shall arrange to give all notices required by the said Acts,
Regulations or Bye-Laws to be given to any authority and to pay to such
authority or to any Public Officer all fees that may be properly chargeable in
respect of the works and lodge the receipts with the Engineer.
49.0
USE OF SOFTWARE
The following software shall be used in the preparation of the documents:
All Drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD (latest version).

SECTION: E
SHEET 32 OF 38
All project net work schedules shall be prepared using MS Project/ Primavera
Version 3.
All documents/ reports shall be prepared by using MS Word, MS Power Point,
and MS Access.
All work sheets shall be prepared using MS Excel.
50.0
RESPONSIBILITIES OF PARTIES
50.1
If so required pursuant to the terms of agreement between the PURCHASER

and the Lenders, the Contractor shall extend all such assistance and
cooperation as may be required by the PURCHASER for the financing of the
Project, including, without limitation, entering into direct agreements with
Lenders, making provision for cure periods and step-in rights for lenders,
postponement of suspension/ termination rights and notation in favour of
Lenders nominees.
50.2
The Contractor shall perform all its obligations under the Contract with due care
and diligence in accordance with good industry standards and practices, and in
compliance with applicable law, including, without limitation, all environmental
laws, rules, regulations (Local/ State/ Central Government ) , notifications,
circulars orders and direction, and any condition specified in any clearance,
consent, approval, permit or licence obtained in connection with the Contract or
the Project, which compliance shall, in no circumstances constitute a Variation,
unless it amounts to change in Specification/ works. The Contractor shall
indemnify the PURCHASER for any loss, liability, suit, claim, fine, penalty or
proceeding for the non-performance or breach of its obligations under this
Clause.
50.3
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care of the works and materials
until the Take-Over and issue of certificate of virtual completion by
PURCHASER.
50.4
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all clearances, consents,

approvals and permissions from Statutory, Government or other authorities
required for the performance of the Contract, as described in Specification.
51.0
PERFORMANCE SECURITY
51.1
The Contractor shall furnish a bank guarantee to the PURCHASER equivalent

to the value of the advance payment of 5% of the Contract Price made to the
Contractor by the PURCHASER prior to the receipt of such advance payment.
Such bank guarantee shall be in the format set out and shall be valid until the
issue of virtual completion certificate.

SECTION: E
SHEET 33 OF 38
51.2
The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bank Guarantee equivalent to 10%

of the Contract Price valid till the end of Defects liability period in the format set
out, to the PURCHASER.
51.3
Each of the bank guarantees furnished under this Clause 51 shall constitute
security for the performance of all the obligations of the Contractor under the
Contract and shall be from a first class commercial bank acceptable to the
PURCHASER. The bank guarantees shall be assignable to the lenders of the
PURCHASER. The Contractor shall procure that the bank acknowledges any
notice of assignment provided by the lenders/ PURCHASER.
51.4
The bank guarantees issued in terms of this Clause 51 shall be returned to the
Contractor or his banker, in original, immediately on expiry of their validity. In
case the said bank guarantees are not returned on expiry of their validity, the
same shall be treated as non est. factum with respect to the Contractor and
his banker who has issued the bank guarantees.
52.0
OTHER INDEMNITIES
52.1
The Contractor shall indemnify the PURCHASER for all losses, liabilities,
damages, cost and expenses in respect of any notices, claims, suits and
proceedings by any third party in connection with the scope of works of the
Contractor under the Contract or by any or by all of his sub-contractors,
including, without limitation:
(i) In respect of death, sickness, disease or personal injury of any third party;
and
(ii) Loss, damage or destruction of property by any third party.

52.2
The Contractor shall indemnify the PURCHASER for all losses, liabilities,
damages, costs, expenses, claims, suits and proceedings for acts of gross
neglect or wilful default by the Contractor.
53.0
MISCELLANEOUS
53.1
Severability
If any provision of this Contract or part thereof is rendered void, illegal or
unenforceable in any respect, the validity, legality and enforceability of the
remaining provisions hereof shall not in any way be affected or impaired
thereby and the parties shall negotiate an equitable adjustment of the
provisions of this Contract with a view towards effecting the provisions of this
Contract.
53.2
No Partnership

SECTION: E
SHEET 34 OF 38
Nothing in this Contract or in any document referred to in it or any arrangement

contemplated by it shall constitute either party as a partner of the other nor
shall the execution, completion and implementation of this Contract confer on
any party any power to bind or impose any obligations on any third parties on
the other party or to pledge the credit of the other party.
53.3
Amendments
No amendment to this contract shall be effective unless made in writing and
signed by both parties.
53.4
Entire Contract
The Contract constitutes the entire agreement between the PURCHASER and
the Contractor concerning the subject matter hereof. All previous documents,
undertakings and agreements, whether verbal, written or otherwise, between
the parties concerning the subject matter hereof (including the bid documents
and the letter of intent) are hereby cancelled or super seeded and shall not
affect or modify any of the terms of obligations set forth in this Contract, except
as the same may be made part of this Contract in accordance with its terms.
53.5
Contractor to Remove All Offensive Matter Immediately and Clean-Up
53.5.1
All soil, filth or other matter of an offensive nature taken out of any excavation,
trench, sewer, drain, cesspool or other place shall not be deposited on the
surface, but shall at once be carted away by the Contractor to some tip or place
provided by him away from the site of work and approved by local authorities.
53.5.2
As a part of the work included in this Contract, the Contractor shall completely
remove and satisfactorily dispose of all temporary works to the extent directed.
He shall tear down and dispose off all temporary buildings, shall remove or
grade, to the extent directed, satisfactorily dispose of all rubbish resulting from
the operations under this Contract and shall do all work necessary to restore
the territory embraced within the site of his operations to at least as good order
and conditions as at the beginning of the work under this Contract.
54.0
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
54.1
The Contractor shall pay particular attention to ensure safety of his staff and
workmen and others in the vicinity and shall be responsible for any loss of life
or injury to person due to negligence or any other causes whatsoever except
natural causes. He shall provide all necessary fencing and lights required to
prevent accidents and shall be bound to bear the expenses of defence of every
suit, action or other proceedings at law that may be brought by any person for
injury sustained owing to neglect of the above precautions and to pay any

SECTION: E
SHEET 35 OF 38
damages and costs which may be awarded in any such suit, action or
proceedings to any such person or which may with consent of the Contractor
be paid to compromise any claim of any such person.
54.2
The Contractor shall reinstate all damage of every sort mentioned in this clause
so as to deliver the whole of the Contract work complete and perfect in every
respect and so as to make good or otherwise satisfy all claims for damage to
the property of third parties.
54.3
The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary and shall be responsible
for the safety of the work and shall maintain all lights, guards, sign boards,
temporary passages, or other protection necessary for the purpose. All work
shall be done at the Contractors risk, and if any loss or damage shall result
from fire or from other cause, the Contractor shall promptly repair or replace
such loss or damage free from all expenses to the PURCHASER. The
Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage to material, tools or
other articles used or held for use in connection with the work. The work shall
be carried on to completion without damage to any work or property of the
PURCHASER or of others and without interference with the operation of
existing machinery or equipment.
54.4
The use of explosives in a manner which might disturb or endanger the

stability, safety, or quality of the works will not be allowed. Explosives shall be
stored, handled and used as prescribed by the law and regulation of the Indian
Union, the State in which the work is performed and sub-divisions thereof.
Special attention must be given to immediate disposal of paper wrappings from
explosives, which are poisonous to livestock.
55.0
UNFIXED MATERIALS
Wherein any certificate, of which the Contractor has received payment, the
Engineer has included the value of any unfixed materials intended for and/ or
placed on or adjacent to the works, such materials shall become the property of
the PURCHASER (for any loss or damage to which the Contractor shall be
responsible) and they shall not be removed from the site, except for the works,
without the written authority of the Engineer.
56.0
FAIR WAGES
56.1
The Contractor shall comply with all industrial and labour rules and regulations
which are in force from time to time. The Contractor has to follow strictly the
government labour acts, which are in force at present and at all future times,
and all necessary arrangements for labour will have to be made by the
Contractor. In the event of any default by way of non-observance or noncompliance of the said laws/ rules/ regulations on the part of the Contractor or

SECTION: E
SHEET 36 OF 38
the Sub-contractor, the Contractor shall indemnify the PURCHASER against all
liabilities, costs and expenses arising out of or in connection therewith.
56.2
No labourer below the age of eighteen years shall be employed in the work.
56.3
The Contractor shall pay not less than fair wage to labourers engaged by him
on the work. "Fair Wage" means wage whether for time or piece work notified
at the time of inviting tenders for the work and where such wages have not
been so notified the wages prescribed by the Central Public Works Department
for the district in which the work is done and it shall not be less than the
minimum rates of wages fixed by the Government (Central or State) for that
class of employees engaged on the same type of work in the same area.
56.4
The Contractor shall notwithstanding the provisions of any Contract to the

contrary cause to be paid a fair wage to labourers indirectly engaged on the
work including any labour engaged by his Sub-Contractors in connection with
the said work, as if the labourers had been immediately employed by him.
56.5
In respect of all labourers directly or indirectly employed in the works for the
performance of the Contractors part of this agreement, the Contractor shall
comply with or cause to be complied with Government of Uttar Pradesh Labour
Regulations made from time to time in regard to payment of wages, wage
period, deductions from wages, recovery of wages not paid, any deduction unauthorisedly made, maintenance of wage register, wage cards, publication of
scale of wages, leave, maternity benefits and other terms of employment,
inspection and submission of periodical returns and all other matters of alike
nature to the PURCHASER and/ or to the Labour Welfare Officer or any other
person authorised by the Government.
56.6
The PURCHASER shall have the right to deduct from the money due to the
Contractor, any sum required or estimated to be required for making good the
loss suffered by a worker or workers by reason of non-payment of wages or of
deductions made from his or their wages which are not justified by their terms
of the Contract or non-observance of regulations.
56.7
The Contractor shall at his own expense provide or arrange for protective
clothes and equipment like helmets, gumboots, welding goggles etc for his
labourers/ employees engaged in trades which may be injurious to their health
unless proper precautions are taken.
57.0
CAMPS AND SANITARY CONVENIENCE
57.1
It shall be very clearly understood that the Contractor shall not put up any
structure for housing his labour or his supervisory staff on the PURCHASER's
land without the specific prior consent of the PURCHASER.

SECTION: E
SHEET 37 OF 38
57.2
The Contractor shall provide adequate supply of water for the use of labourers.
The provision shall not be less than 10 litres of pure and wholesome water per
head per day for drinking purposes and 20 litres of clean water per head per
day for bath and washing purposes.
57.3
The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements for providing temporary

sanitary blocks for labour and treatment of sewage by providing septic tanks.
He shall also provide efficient arrangement for draining away effluent from
septic tanks after consultation with PURCHASER. All charges on these
accounts including necessary permissions from concerned authorities shall be
borne by the Contractor.
57.4
The Contractor shall make arrangement for conservancy and sanitation in the
labour camps according to the rules of the local public health and medical
authorities.
58.0
INTOXICANTS
The Contractor shall not permit or suffer the introduction or use of intoxicating
liquor upon the works embraced in this Contract, or upon any of the ground
occupied or controlled by him.
59.0
IDENTIFICATION BADGES
59.1
The Contractor shall provide each of his employees including labour, with
identification badges, at his cost. The colour and design of these badges shall
be subject to the approval of the PURCHASER. The employees shall display
the badges on their person so that the badges are clearly visible for easy
checking by the gate man as they enter the premises of the PURCHASER. The
badges shall be serially numbered. The Contractors initials shall be printed
with the number on the badge.
59.2
The Contractor should immediately notify to the PURCHASER if any of the

badges is lost and a new one issued in its place, or when badges are carried
away by discharged labour. No employee of the Contractor, without a badge
will be permitted to enter the premises of work, except in such cases, where
special permission of the PURCHASER is obtained.
60.0
WORK IN MONSOON AND DEWATERING
60.1
The construction and erection work may entail working in monsoon period. The
Contractor must maintain a minimum labour force as may be required for
executing the construction and erection according to the agreed schedule. No
extra rate will be considered for such work in monsoon.

SECTION: E
SHEET 38 OF 38
60.2
During monsoon and other period it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
to keep the construction site free from accumulating of water, at his own cost.

SECTION: F1
SHEET 1 OF 1

All deviations from the Technical Specifications shall be filled in by the BIDDER clause by clause
in this schedule.
SECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
CLAUSE NO.
DEVIATION
The BIDDER hereby certifies that the above mentioned are the only deviations from the
PURCHASERs Technical Specifications for this enquiry. The BIDDER further confirms
that in the event any other data and information presented in the BIDDERs proposal and
accompanying documents including drawings, catalogues, etc are at variance with the
specific requirements laid out in the PURCHASERs Technical Specifications, then the
latter shall govern and shall be binding on the BIDDER for the quoted price.
COMPANY SEAL
SIGNATURE
NAME
DESIGNATION
COMPANY
DATE

SECTION: F2
SHEET 1 OF 1

GENERAL CONDITIONS
All deviations from the General Conditions shall be filled in by the BIDDER clause by
clause in this schedule.
SECTION
SPECIFICATION NO.
CLAUSE NO.
DEVIATION
The BIDDER hereby certifies that the above mentioned are the only deviations from the
PURCHASERs General Conditions of Contract. The BIDDER further confirms that in the
event any other data and information presented in the BIDDERs proposal and
accompanying documents are at variance with the specific requirements laid out in the
PURCHASERs General Conditions of Contract, then the latter shall govern and shall be
binding on the BIDDER for the quoted price.
COMPANY SEAL
SIGNATURE
NAME
DESIGNATION
COMPANY
DATE

SECTION: F3
SHEET 1 OF 1
SCHEDULE OF PRICE IMPLICATIONS

ON ACCOUNT OF DEVIATIONS
The price implication on account of all deviations as listed out in the Schedule of
Deviations shall be indicated here below:
Sl.
No.
Section
Clause
Page
No. of
No. of
No. of
Tender
Tender
Tender
Document Document Document
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Clause as
given in
Tender
Document
(5)
Deviation as Variation in Quoted

proposed by Price, if deviation not
the Tenderer
acceptable to the
in Forms
Owner ( mention Plus
or Minus)
(6)
(7)
Note:
1.
The Bidder hereby certifies that the above mentioned are the only price
implications on account of deviations to the tender conditions.
2.
All price implications on account of deviations shall be given only in this

Schedule.
3.
Price implications on account of deviations furnished elsewhere shall be

summarily rejected and shall also be ignored.
4.
The Bidder also certifies that the price implications mentioned herein are for
deviations furnished in the Schedules of Deviations.
COMPANY SEAL
(SIGNATURE OF BIDDER)

SECTION: F4
SHEET 1 OF 1
SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENTS
The BIDDER shall indicate here under the equipment he has in possession and the
equipment he proposes to bring to the site, in case the work is awarded to him.
Sl.
No.
1
Type and description of

the Equipment
2
Numbers the BIDDER

has in possession
3
Numbers he proposes to
bring on to site
4
BIDDER hereby confirms that the quantity and type of tools he will employ for
construction will not be less than those listed above, and agrees to bring more
equipment, if so warranted, in the opinion of the Engineer.
COMPANY SEAL
SIGNATURE
NAME
DESIGNATION
COMPANY
DATE

SECTION: F5
SHEET 1 OF 1
SCHEDULE OF CONTRACTOR'S
TECHNICAL STAFF TO BE DEPLOYED
NO.
DESIGNATION
SEAL OF COMPANY
QUALIFICATION
PREVIOUS EXPERIENCE
SIGNATURE
_______________
DESIGNATION
_______________
DATE
_______________

SECTION: F6
SHEET 1 OF 1
SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR LABOUR
BIDDER shall quote here under the all-inclusive price of labour assumed for the
purposes of this Contract.
Supplying Labour
i.
--------------------Unskilled Labour male
Per day of
8 hrs
--------------
Over time rate

each per hour
-----------------
ii. Unskilled Labour female

iii. Skilled Labour male
iv. Mason
v. Carpenter
vi. Painter
vii. Fitter (Reinforcement)
viii. Fitter (Structural steel)
ix. Welder
x. Rigger
xi. Welders with welding equipment
Per hour
xii. Gas cutter with all equipment

PURCHASER shall have the right to ask Contractor to supply labour for any work at the
rates quoted above.
COMPANY SEAL
SIGNATURE
NAME
DESIGNATION
COMPANY
DATE

SECTION: F7
SHEET 1 OF 9
1.0
INFORMATION FURNISHED
1.1
This specification is intended as a general description of quality envisaged for

material, workmanship and of the finished work. It is not intended to cover minute
details. The work shall be executed in accordance with the best modern practice
and to the complete satisfaction of PURCHASER. Special techniques approved
by PURCHASER shall be used if and where found necessary.
1.2
The information given in this specification is in good faith and meant to serve as
a guide to the Bidder. It is therefore, imperative that Bidder shall obtain and
examine for himself all the data, information and particulars required for the
satisfactory execution of the work under this enquiry. The submission of a bid by
Bidder implies that he has fully read the specifications, bid drawings, and general
conditions of contract. Bidder shall make him-self aware of the scope and the
specifications for the work to be performed and local conditions and other
features which have a bearing on the cost and execution of the work. Extra
charges for any reason whatsoever will not be entertained by PURCHASER.
1.3
General Notes (given in Section - C) shall be noted before quoting.
1.4
In case of any conflict among clauses of different technical specifications, the

decision of the PURCHASER shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
2.0
INSPECTION OF SITE BY BIDDER
2.1
Bidder shall inspect the site, examine and obtain all information required and
satisfy himself regarding matters such as access to site, communication,
transport, right of way, the type and number of equipment and facilities required
for the satisfactory completion of work, the quantity of various items of the work,
the availability of local labour, availability and rates of material, local working
conditions, uncertainties of weather, obstructions and hindrances that may arise,
etc., which may affect the work or cost thereof, before submission of his Bid.
Ignorance of site conditions shall not be accepted by the PURCHASER as basis
for any claim for compensation. The submission of a bid by the Bidder will be
construed as evidence that such an examination was made and any later claims/
disputes in regard to rates quoted shall not be entertained or considered by the
PURCHASER.
2.2
The rates quoted by Bidder shall be based on his own knowledge and judgment
of the conditions and hazards involved and shall not be based on any
representations of the PURCHASER.
2.3
The BIDDER shall furnish a list of equipment he proposes to deploy at site to

meet the tight schedule. This shall include a centralised batching plant to
manufacture concrete, transit mixers, concrete pumps, lorries and tippers with
adequate standbys.

SECTION: F7
SHEET 2 OF 9
3.0
VALIDITY OF BID
The Bid shall remain valid for acceptance for three (3) months from the due date
of receipt of the Bids and during this period no bidder shall be allowed to
withdraw the bid.
4.0
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
On receipt of bidding document, bidder shall acknowledge the receipt and
confirm his intention to bid for the work. Any addendum issued by PURCHASER/
Consultant shall become part of bidding document and bidder shall submit
Original addendum duly signed and stamped as a token of his acceptance.
5.0
MATERIAL SUPPLY AND FACILITIES BY THE PURCHASER
5.1
The PURCHASER will provide the following facilities to the Contractor free of
cost.
(a)
Provision of one permanent benchmark and base line for laying.
(b)
Construction water at one point.
5.2
The PURCHASER will provide Construction power at one point on chargeable

basis.
6.0
PRICES AND RATES
6.1
Prices and rates quoted shall include cost of all materials, labour, supervision,
setting out, machinery and equipment, transport charges, wastage of material, all
consumables such as, but not limited to petrol, oil, diesel, lubricants, drill bits,
pipes, ropes etc., construction facilities such as scaffolding, cribbing, tarpaulins,
wind breaks etc., taxes, duties, royalties, octroi and any other levies payable on
all transactions, all leads and lifts etc., overheads/ profits of Contractor for due
performance of the work under this contract. The rates shall also include cost for
mobilization/ demobilization of equipment.
6.2
Prices and rates quoted shall be deemed to include everything necessary to

satisfactorily complete the work as determined by the PURCHASER though they
may not have been specifically referred to in these documents.
6.3
Prices and rates quoted shall be firm for the entire duration of the contract and
any agreed extensions thereafter.
6.4
No price escalation on any account shall be allowed during the entire period of
Contract.

SECTION: F7
SHEET 3 OF 9
7.0
LIST OF WORKS
Bidder shall submit along with their bids, complete particulars of similar jobs
executed by him.
8.0
SECURITY DEPOSIT
Successful Bidder shall be required to provide a security deposit of -----------------and shall furnish immediately after placement of LOI, either in the form of
unconditional Bank Guarantee (in the format given by PURCHASER) from a
Nationalized bank or Demand Draft drawn in favour of M/s Bajaj Infrastructure
Development Co. Ltd or as advised by PURCHASER. This Bank Guarantee
shall be valid till completion of the defect liability period.
9.0
MOBILIZATION ADVANCE
Interest free mobilization advance of 5% (Five percent) of the contract value
will be paid to the successful bidder on submission of an unconditional
Bank Guarantee for equivalent amount in the standard format given by the
PURCHASER from a Nationalized bank. Mobilization advance will be paid only
on completion of mobilization at site and after the submission of Security deposit.
Mobilization advance shall be recovered from the running account bills of the
Contractor on pro-rata basis till the mobilization advance is fully recovered.
10.0
RETENTION MONEY
10% of the gross value of each RA bill shall be retained as retention money. The
retention money will be released only after satisfactory completion of all the
works and against a bank guarantee (from a Nationalized bank) of equivalent
amount. This bank guarantee towards retention money shall be valid till
completion of defects liability period.
11.0
TIME OF COMPLETION AND WORK SCHEDULE
11.1
The Contractor shall, within two weeks of receipt of the Letter of Intent submit to
the PURCHASER for his approval, a detailed work schedule showing how he
proposes to carry out the work. It shall specifically mention time period as well as
dates of commencement and completion of each activity. Contractor must strictly
adhere to the approved schedule. The PURCHASER reserves the right to revise
the schedule at his discretion in order to keep up to the completion date and to
suit the project requirement and such alterations shall not entitle the Contractor
to any extra payment.

SECTION: F7
SHEET 4 OF 9
11.2
The whole works must be proceeded with, within such sections and at such times
and in such order and manner as described in these specifications and as
directed by the PURCHASER. No extra payment or relaxation in the rates will be
permitted on account of this.
11.3
Contractor shall make all necessary arrangement at site to mobilize and maintain
machinery, equipment, labour, material and operators to guarantee such
minimum/ peak rate of progress of the work as is required by the agreed
schedule for the timely completion of the work.
11.4
The contractor shall furnish along with the bid a list of machinery and other
equipments he proposes to employ in the work.
11.5
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for providing accommodation
for all their staff and storage space for equipment and consumables such as but
not limited to petrol, diesel, lubricants, oxygen, acetylene, welding rods, etc.,
together with sufficient quantity of spare parts for efficient and uninterrupted
execution of the work.
11.6
The Contractor shall furnish the PURCHASER monthly report describing the
summary of the progress/ milestones achieved on each of the major fronts during
the month accompanied with Photographs. Apart from it weekly work charts shall
be submitted.
11.7
Extension of contract period will not be granted by the PURCHASER except only
under force majeure conditions equal to the time, force majeure conditions were
in existence. Monsoon or inclement weather shall not be considered as a reason
for extension of time.
11.8
Idle time charges for any reason whatsoever shall not be entertained by the
PURCHASER
11.9
If the Contractor fails to maintain the stipulated time of completion specified

herein above, he shall be liable to pay penalty as set out in General Conditions
of Contract' under Section E. It shall be clearly understood that failure to meet
interim completion dates shall also attract penalty.
12.0
NIGHT WORK
The time of completion as defined in clause herein above, shall be deemed to
exclude working during night shifts. However, Engineer may consider granting
permission for working during night shifts, if he considers it is essential in order to
complete the work in the stipulated time, on specific request by the Contractor.
Where night work is in progress, the Contractor, at his cost, to safeguard the
workmen and the public shall provide sufficient lights, shall take suitable
precautions to prevent accidents. Accident-prone areas shall be barricaded and

SECTION: F7
SHEET 5 OF 9
provided with red lights as caution to prevent accidental falls. Contractor shall
take all necessary precaution to ensure the quality of work.
13.0
EQUIPMENT
13.1
Contractor shall provide and maintain at the site necessary number and type of
machinery and equipment including survey instruments in good working condition
for proper setting out and timely completion of the various works covered under
this specification. All arrangements for transporting the equipment, men and
machinery, to and from the site shall be done by the Contractor at his own
expense. No claim shall be entertained for mobilizing additional equipment and/
or personnel to complete the work within the stipulated time.
13.2
The Contractor shall ensure a continuous supply of coarse and fine aggregates
and other materials conforming to the specification for the duration of the contract
period.
13.3
Contractor shall provide all fuels and lubricants required for the operation and
maintenance of construction machinery and equipment as well as his transport
vehicles.
13.4
Contractor shall ensure that work shall proceed uninterrupted even in the event
of power failures. As such, adequate number of diesel operated machinery (such
as concrete mixers, vibrators, welding sets etc) shall be provided by the
Contractor as an alternative arrangement in case electrically operated
machineries are proposed to be brought to site.
14.0
WORK EXECUTION AND SUPERVISION
14.1
Contractor shall have at the site adequate number of qualified engineers and
supervisors with experience in execution of similar type of works and also
sufficient number of foremen and operators for machineries and equipments, for
satisfactory progress and timely completion of the works.
14.2
In the event of occurrence of any accident at/ near the site of work or in
connection with execution of the work, a report shall be made immediately to the
Engineer, giving full details of the accident. He shall also report such accidents to
all the competent authorities.
14.3
The Engineer reserves the right to order in writing from time to time during
progress of the work, removal and re-execution of any work which is not, in the
opinion of the Engineer, in accordance with the specification.
14.4
During inclement weather, rains, Contractor shall suspend grouting/ concreting

for such time as the Engineer may direct and shall protect from damage all works
already in progress or completed just then. All such temporary protective

SECTION: F7
SHEET 6 OF 9
measures shall be at Contractor's cost and any damage to works shall be made
good by the Contractor at his own expense.
14.5
Should the works be suspended by reason of strike/ riots by Contractor's own

employees or any other cause whatsoever, save and except the force majeure
condition, Contractor shall take all precautions necessary for the protection of
work and make good, at his expense, any damage arising from any of these
causes.
14.6
PURCHASER reserves the right to split up the work mentioned in the scope of
enquiry among more than one Contractor at the stage of initial award of contract
or during progress of work due to unsatisfactory progress of work at site by the
Contractor. Bidders quoted rates shall remain unaltered even if the work is split
up. PURCHASER will not entertain any claim from the Contractor as a result of
such splitting up.
15.0
SURVEYING AND LAYOUT

Only a base line and one permanent benchmark would be furnished to the
Contractor on site. Surveying and laying out of all works shall be done by the
Contractor at his cost. Contractor shall maintain without disturbance during the
course of execution of the work the reference line and the benchmark. The
Contractor shall also check the accuracy of positioning of the footings and anchor
bolts for the structures to be erected by him. Any discrepancy shall immediately
be reported to the PURCHASER.
16.0
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
16.1
The Contractor will be required to provide at his own cost all facilities for his
office, warehouse, tool room, change room or any other building/ structure
required to execute his work.
16.2
Each Contractor shall establish his own office/ shed at specified place inside the
plant. The office/ shed shall have proper ventilation, lighting and sanitary
facilities. The Contractor shall obtain clearance from the PURCHASER before
construction of the office/shed.
16.3
All royalties shall be paid by the Contractor as also all tolls, local and other taxes,
etc., at no extra cost to PURCHASER.
16.4
All materials supplied by the Contractor shall be of the best quality and shall
conform to this specification. Approval in writing shall be obtained from
PURCHASER before any alternative or equivalent material is proposed to be
used by the Contractor.

SECTION: F7
SHEET 7 OF 9
16.5
Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's test certificates for the materials supplied
by him. Where such certificates are not available, the specimen of the material
shall be got tested at a recognized testing laboratory (approved by
PURCHASER) at Contractor's cost.
16.6
Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and

commencement of work at no extra cost to PURCHASER.
16.7
Contractor shall take all necessary insurance coverage as per the statutory
requirement at no extra cost to PURCHASER.
17.0
DEMOBILISATION
licenses
before
On completion of work, the Contractor shall promptly demobilize from the site
and leave the place in a manner as directed by the PURCHASER, including
cleaning of the area. Contractor shall start demobilization only after the
successful completion of the contract with the permission of PURCHASER.
18.0
OTHER WORKS
During the course of contractors works, other works either by the PURCHASER
or by other Contractors or by both simultaneously will be in progress within the
project area. Contractor shall make his best effort to work in harmony with others
in the best overall interest of the project and towards its speedy completion.
Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure no hindrance to any or
part of other works or operations going on around the plant. Contractor shall
ensure and plan the works in such a way to cause less noise pollution and least
disturbance to existing units.
19.0
SECURITY & SAFETY RULES OF PURCHASER
19.1
All persons employed or allowed at the site shall at all times conform to all
regulations laid down by the PURCHASER.
19.2
Contractor shall strictly abide by the rules and regulations of security and safety
enforced by the PURCHASER. Contractor shall provide proper identity cards,
badges, etc., to his employees whenever directed by the PURCHASER.
19.3
Contractor shall be solely responsible for the security of his personnel and
equipment.
19.4
Contractor, his employees and agents shall not disclose any information or
drawing furnished to them by the PURCHASER. All drawings, reports or any
other information prepared by the PURCHASER, either individually or jointly for
the execution of the contract shall not be disclosed without prior written approval

SECTION: F7
SHEET 8 OF 9
of the PURCHASER. No photographs of the work or plant within the project site
shall be taken without prior written approval of the PURCHASER.
19.5
Contractor shall adopt all safety measures and shall provide necessary
protection to already constructed foundations/ structures irrespective of the
sequence of construction.
20.0
PAYMENT
The mode of submission of bills and payment shall be as indicated in the General
Conditions of Contract under Section-E.
21.0
SUBMISSION OF BID
21.1
Procedure for Submission

The completed bids shall be submitted on or before the last date and in the
manner described in the notice inviting tender.
21.2
Bid shall be sealed and cover shall be superscribed.

Project : LALITPUR POWER GENERATION COMPANY
PROPOSED 3X660 MW SUPER THERMAL POWER PROJECT
Package : General Civil Work
21.3
LIMITED
Each page of the bid document including the bid drawings shall be signed and
dated in ink by the Bidder as a token of having examined the same. English
language and metric units shall only be used.
Any corrections in the rates entered in the Schedule of Quantities shall also be
signed and dated by the Bidder in ink, before submitting the bid. Non-compliance
with these conditions will make the bid liable for rejection.
21.4
The bid prices and rates must be filled only in the Schedule of Quantities. Bidder
shall also fill in the schedule of deviations from technical specifications and
general conditions of contract. If these schedules of deviations are not filled up, it
shall be deemed that the bidder abides by the stipulations as in the bid
documents.
21.5
Bid shall be accompanied by a covering letter, in which Bidder may furnish any
information, which he wishes to be considered along with the bid.
21.6
All accompaniments of the bid shall be in duplicate.

SECTION: F7
SHEET 9 OF 9
21.7
Bidder shall submit along with his bid an attested copy of Income Tax and Sales
Tax Clearance Certificates, audited balance sheet for the last three financial
years and latest solvency certificate from the competent authorities.
21.8
Details of concurrent commitments of bidder along with list of similar works

executed in last five years and list of Manpower and equipment to be deployed
on this project and schedule of execution to be furnished along with the bid.
22.0
PURCHASER RESERVES RIGHT

The PURCHASER reserves the right to accept any bid irrespective of whether it
is the lowest or otherwise or reject any or all bids without assigning any reasons
whatsoever. PURCHASER reserves the right to split the work and/ or delete or
add some works from the scope of this contract.

Civil Work Power Block Area

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Civil Work Power Block Area

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

DOC.

LALITPUR SUPER THERMAL POWER PROJECT 3X660 MW

BAJAJ INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT

3X660 MW LALITPUR SUPER THERMAL POWER PROJECT

BAJAJ INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT CO.LTD

CARBERY INFRATSTRUCTURE PTE LTD

RAIN WATER DRAINAGE

SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS FROM

CARBERY INFRATSTRUCTURE PTE LTD

CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

GENERAL CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

Bidder shall be a Civil Engineering Construction Agency who has executed

CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

GENERAL CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

Documentary evidence to satisfy the qualifying requirements mentioned in

The Bidder shall furnish the following details:

In case certificate(s) submitted by the Bidder is found to be forged or/ bogus

CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

GENERAL CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

EOI DOCUMENT SUBMISSION AND OPENING

Satisfactory evidences of authority of the person signing on behalf of the Bidder

EOI submitted without the proper documentary evidence to substantiate

CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

GENERAL CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

fulfillment of the Pre-qualifying Requirements as specified are liable for

BIDCO takes no responsibility for delay loss or non-receipt of documents or

The envelope containing participation fees as well as other documents shall be

Clarification request, if any should reach

CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

GENERAL CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

Name and Complete address (The Bidder)

For ASSOCIATE Structural and/or Piling

Seal of the Company

For Contractor - Civil

Seal of the Company

CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

GENERAL CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

GENERAL CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

For ASSOCIATE Structural and/or piling

Seal of the Company

For Contractor - Civil

Seal of the Company

CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

GENERAL CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

It should be on the letter head of the issuing firm/ user Plant.

CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

GENERAL CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

It should be on the letter head of the issuing firm/ user Plant.

CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

Scope of work in general, comprises of:

Station Building including TG/ BFP Foundations

Mill & Bunker area (Civil & Architectural works only)

Boiler Area Structures/ Equipments foundations

Other fan foundations

ESP Control Building

CARBERY INFRASTRUCTURE PTE LTD

Site Improvement works such as:

Briefly, the nature of work involves the following:

Excavation, back filling with compaction, de-watering and related works.

Brick/ AC Sheet/ Metal Cladding.

Encasement of base of columns, columns and beams.

Doors, windows, ventilators, and partitions of all types rolling shutters,

Cavity floors and false flooring.